XF Owners Handbook 10MY Tcm144 47656

User Manual: 2010 Jaguar XF Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 391

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

OWNER’S HANDBOOK

Publication Part No. JJM 10 02 40 101

This handbook forms part of the Owner literature supplied with your new vehicle. Left-hand drive
and right-hand drive conditions may be shown in the graphics and where information is specific to
a particular country, it is indicated as such.
Please take the time to study the operating instructions with your vehicle as soon as you can.

IMPORTANT
The information contained in this handbook covers all vehicle derivatives and optional equipment.
Some of the options may not be fitted to your vehicle, unless they formed part of the original vehicle
specification. Therefore, some parts of this handbook may not apply to your vehicle. Furthermore,
due to printing cycles, it may include descriptions of options before they become generally
available.
The options, hardware and software in your vehicle are from the available specifications for the
market in which the vehicle was intended for sale. If your vehicle is to be used in another
geographical area, you may have to modify the vehicle specification to suit local conditions.
Jaguar Cars Limited is not responsible for the cost of any modifications.

The information contained in this publication was correct when it went to print. Vehicle design
changes may have been made after this handbook was printed. When this occurs a handbook
supplement is added to the literature pack. Subsequent updates can be viewed on the Jaguar
Internet site at: www.ownerinfo.jaguar.com.
In the interest of development, the right is reserved to change specifications, design or equipment
at any time without notice and without incurring any obligations. This publication, or part thereof,
may not be reproduced nor translated without our approval. Errors and omissions excepted.

Contents
Introduction

SEAT BELT REMINDER ..................................
USING SEAT BELTS DURING PREGNANCY....
FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS ........................
SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ................

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY...................................... 9
LABEL LOCATIONS ........................................... 9
HEALTH AND SAFETY..................................... 10
DATA RECORDING.......................................... 11
DISABILITY MODIFICATIONS ......................... 11
FASCIA AND CONTROLS ................................ 12
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES ............................ 14

Supplementary restraints system
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................
AIRBAG WARNING LAMP ..............................
WHIPLASH PROTECTION...............................
AIRBAG LABELS.............................................
AIRBAG SERVICE INFORMATION...................

Keys and remote controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION ............................ 16
GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO
FREQUENCIES ................................................ 16
USING THE REMOTE CONTROL ..................... 17
UNLOCKING AND DISARMING THE VEHICLE. 18
LOCKING AND ARMING THE VEHICLE ........... 19
DOCKING/UNDOCKING THE JAGUAR SMART
KEY ................................................................. 20
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL...... 21
CHANGING THE REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY ...
24
EMERGENCY KEY BLADE ............................... 25

53
57
57
58
58

Child safety
CHILD SEATS .................................................
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING ............................
BOOSTER CUSHIONS.....................................
CHILD SEAT ANCHOR POINTS.......................
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS ...................................

59
60
61
62
65

Pedestrian protection
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................ 66
AFTER DEPLOYMENT OF THE PEDESTRIAN
PROTECTION SYSTEM ................................... 66

Locks

Steering wheel

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING............................ 26
USING THE EMERGENCY KEY BLADE ............ 28
VALET MODE .................................................. 30
JAGUAR SMART KEY SYSTEM TRANSMITTERS
32
KEYLESS ENTRY ............................................ 33
GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING .................. 35

ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL ..............
HORN .............................................................
HEATED STEERING WHEEL............................
AUDIO CONTROL ...........................................
VOICE CONTROL ............................................
CRUISE CONTROL..........................................

Alarm

Lighting

ARMING THE ALARM ..................................... 37
DISARMING THE ALARM ............................... 38
SECURITY SENSORS...................................... 39

LIGHTING CONTROL ......................................
AUTOLAMPS ..................................................
REAR FOG LAMPS..........................................
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS......................
DIRECTION INDICATORS ...............................
HEADLAMPS - DRIVING ABROAD..................
HEADLAMP LEVELLING .................................
CORNERING OR STATIC BENDING LAMPS....
INTERIOR LAMPS ..........................................
APPROACH LAMPS........................................
REMOVING A HEADLAMP ..............................
REMOVING A REAR LAMP .............................
CHANGING A BULB ........................................
HEADLAMP UNIT BULBS ...............................

Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION ............
ELECTRIC SEATS............................................
HEAD RESTRAINTS ........................................
REAR SEATS...................................................
HEATED SEATS...............................................
CLIMATE SEATS .............................................

50
51
51
52

41
42
44
45
47
48

Seat belts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION ............................ 49

67
68
68
69
69
74

75
76
77
77
78
78
79
79
80
81
81
82
83
83

Contents
Starting the engine

SIDE REPEATER LAMP .................................. 85
REAR LAMP BULBS ....................................... 85
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART........................ 87

GENERAL INFORMATION.............................. 132
KEYLESS STARTING ..................................... 133
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE....................... 134
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)............ 135

Wipers and washers
WINDSCREEN WIPERS ..................................
RAIN SENSOR ................................................
WINDSCREEN WASHERS...............................
HEADLAMP WASHERS...................................
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES ....................
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES....................

88
89
89
90
90
91

Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ....................... 137

Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 144
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ABS..................... 144
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) ............... 146

Windows and mirrors
ELECTRIC WINDOWS.....................................
INTERIOR MIRROR ........................................
EXTERIOR MIRRORS .....................................
BLIND SPOT MONITOR ..................................

93
94
95
97

Parking aid
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 148
USING THE PARKING AID............................. 148

Instruments

Rear view camera

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW .................. 99
WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS .......... 100
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS ..... 104

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 152

Driving hints
RUNNING-IN ................................................. 154
ECONOMICAL DRIVING ................................ 155

Information displays
GENERAL INFORMATION .............................
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES.
TRIP COMPUTER .........................................
TOUCH-SCREEN ...........................................
PERSONALISED SETTINGS ..........................

105
106
107
109
111

Cruise control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 156
USING CRUISE CONTROL............................. 156

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Climate control
AIR VENTS ................................................... 115
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL................. 116
ELECTRIC SUNROOF .................................... 121

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 159
USING ACC ................................................... 159
FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION ....................... 164
ADVANCED EMERGENCY BRAKE ASSIST..... 165

Convenience features

Automatic speed limiter (ASL)

SUN VISORS ................................................
SUN BLINDS.................................................
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER...............
CLOCK ..........................................................
AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS .....................
GLOVE BOX ..................................................
CUP HOLDERS .............................................
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS ........................
GARAGE DOOR TRANSCEIVER ....................
PORTABLE AUDIO INTERFACE.....................

123
123
123
124
125
125
126
127
128
131

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 167
USING THE ASL ............................................ 167

Driving dynamics
GENERAL INFORMATION.............................. 169
WINTER MODE ............................................. 169
DYNAMIC MODE ........................................... 170
STABILITY CONTROL.................................... 170

Fuel and refuelling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS................................. 174

Contents
FUEL QUALITY.............................................. 174
ALTERNATIVE FUELS FOR PETROL ENGINES .....
175
DIESEL ENGINED VEHICLES......................... 176
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL ............................... 177
FUEL CUT-OFF .............................................. 177
FUEL FILLER FLAP........................................ 178
REFUELLING................................................. 179
DIESEL MISFUELLING PROTECTION DEVICE......
180
FUEL CONSUMPTION ................................... 181

BATTERY CARE ............................................
USING BOOSTER CABLES............................
CHARGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY.............
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY.............

Wheels and tyres
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 216
TYRE CARE................................................... 217
USING WINTER TYRES ................................ 223
USING SNOW CHAINS ................................. 223
RUN FLAT TYRES......................................... 224
TOOL KIT...................................................... 224
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL......................... 225
TYRE REPAIR KIT......................................... 229
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM.... 234
TYRE GLOSSARY ......................................... 238
TYRE SPECIFICATIONS - ARDUOUS TERRAIN ...
239

Load carrying
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 182
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS......................... 182
REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE................... 182

Towing
TOWING A TRAILER (V6 petrol and diesel
vehicles only)................................................
LEVELLING ...................................................
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS ...........
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS ......................
TOW BAR......................................................

Fuses

183
184
185
185
186

CHANGING A FUSE....................................... 241
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS................................. 242
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART ...................... 245

Emergency equipment

Vehicle care
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS ..................
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR ...........................
CLEANING THE INTERIOR ............................
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE ............

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS....................
WARNING TRIANGLE ...................................
FIRST AID KIT ..............................................
FIRE EXTINGUISHER....................................

187
187
189
191

250
250
250
250

Status after a collision

Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION .............................
OPENING AND CLOSING THE BONNET ........
ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW ...........
ENGINE OIL CHECK - V6 Petrol engines .......
ENGINE OIL CHECK - V8 Petrol engines .......
ENGINE OIL CHECK - V6 Diesel engines .......
ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION ........................
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK ............................
BRAKE FLUID CHECK ...................................
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK ................
WASHER FLUID CHECK ................................
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................

212
214
215
215

DRIVING AFTER A COLLISION ..................... 251
INSPECTING SAFETY SYSTEM COMPONENTS ...
252

192
195
196
197
199
201
203
204
206
208
209
210

Vehicle recovery
TOWING POINTS.......................................... 253
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE .................... 254
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS.. 256

Vehicle identification
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE ................
ENGINE NUMBER .........................................
TRANSMISSION NUMBER ...........................
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)...
VEHICLE BUILD DATE PLATE.......................

Vehicle battery
BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLS ................... 212

257
257
257
257
257

Contents
Technical specifications

Portable audio

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS ............................ 258
WEIGHTS...................................................... 259
DIMENSIONS................................................ 260

PORTABLE AUDIO......................................... 299
AUXILIARY INPUT DEVICES ......................... 302

Type approvals

GENERAL INFORMATION.............................. 307
TELEPHONE PAIRING AND DOCKING........... 309
VOICE MAIL .................................................. 313
ANSWER OPTIONS ....................................... 314
PHONE OPTIONS .......................................... 314
PHONEBOOK................................................. 315
MAKING A CALL............................................ 317
NAMES.......................................................... 318
LAST 10 OPTION........................................... 320
HANDS-FREE CONTROLS ............................. 321
OTHER FEATURES ........................................ 322
TELEPHONE VOICE CONTROL ...................... 323

Telephone

DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY ............... 262

Audio introduction
RADIO RECEPTION....................................... 268

Audio unit overview
AUDIO UNIT OVERVIEW............................... 269

Audio unit operation
ON/OFF CONTROL ........................................
VOLUME CONTROL ......................................
AUDIO CONTROL .........................................
WAVEBAND BUTTON ...................................
AUTOSTORE CONTROL ................................
STATION PRESET BUTTONS ........................
TRAFFIC INFORMATION CONTROL ..............

271
271
272
274
274
275
276

Television

Audio unit menus

GENERAL INFORMATION.............................. 328
TELEVISION CONTROLS ............................... 329
USING THE TELEVISION ............................... 330
FINDING TV CHANNELS................................ 331
TELEVISION SETUP ...................................... 332

RADIO DATA SYSTEM (RDS) ....................... 277
PRIORITY PROGRAMME TYPE (PTY) .......... 278

Navigation system
THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM........................... 334
SATELLITE SIGNALS..................................... 334
GETTING STARTED ....................................... 336
MENU STRUCTURE....................................... 337
MAIN MENU.................................................. 338
USER SETTINGS ........................................... 338
TURN-BY-TURN NAVIGATION ...................... 339
LANGUAGE SELECTION ................................ 339
MEASUREMENT UNITS................................. 340
KEYBOARD LAYOUT ..................................... 340
MAP SPLIT SCREEN ..................................... 341
MAP DISPLAY ICONS ................................... 342
SETTING A DESTINATION............................. 344
ROUTE PREFERENCES.................................. 347
START GUIDANCE......................................... 347
VOICE GUIDANCE ......................................... 349
CANCEL GUIDANCE ...................................... 350
QUICK POI SELECTION ................................. 350
CALIBRATION ............................................... 351
RESTORE SYSTEM DEFAULTS ..................... 352
LANGUAGE SELECTION ................................ 353

Digital audio broadcasting
GENERAL INFORMATION .............................
AUDIO CONTROLS .......................................
DISPLAY OPTIONS.......................................
CHANNEL AUTOMATIC TUNING...................
CHANNEL OPTIONS .....................................
PRESET BUTTONS .......................................
SETTINGS.....................................................

280
282
283
284
284
287
288

Compact disc player
COMPACT DISC COMPATABILITY................
LOADING COMPACT DISCS .........................
EJECTING COMPACT DISCS ........................
COMPACT DISC SELECTION ........................
TRACK SELECTION.......................................
COMPACT DISC PAUSE................................
SHUFFLE/RANDOM ......................................
REPEAT COMPACT DISC TRACKS ...............
COMPACT DISC DISPLAY OPTIONS ............
MP3 FILE PLAYBACK ...................................

292
292
294
294
295
295
295
296
296
297

Contents
MEMORY ...................................................... 353
AVOID POINTS.............................................. 355
HOME ........................................................... 355
DESTINATION ENTRY ................................... 356
POSTCODE ................................................... 357
MAP .............................................................. 357
COORDINATES ............................................. 357
MEMORY ...................................................... 358
PREVIOUS .................................................... 358
MOTORWAY ................................................. 359
COMPASS..................................................... 360
POINTS OF INTEREST................................... 362
POI ICON DISPLAY ....................................... 363
CANCELLING POI ICON DISPLAY ................. 365
JAGUAR DEALERSHIP LOCATIONS.............. 365
ENTRY BY TOWN.......................................... 365
ENTRY BY CATEGORY .................................. 365
OTHER SELECTION METHODS ..................... 366
CATEGORIES AND SUB-CATEGORIES .......... 366
POI ENTRY MESSAGES ................................ 366
QUICK POI SELECTION................................. 366
SELECTING A QUICK POI CATEGORY........... 367
MEMORY POINTS......................................... 367
RDS-TMC OVERVIEW ................................... 368
USING TMC .................................................. 370
SURVEILLANCE SETTING ............................. 372
USING VOICE CONTROL............................... 373
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS.. 374
ORDNANCE SURVEY DATA .......................... 378
NAVTEQ CORPORATION............................... 379
EUROPEAN DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY .....
380

Introduction
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY

LABEL LOCATIONS
Warning labels attached to your
vehicle bearing this symbol mean:
Do not touch or adjust components
until you have read the relevant
instructions in the handbook.

Warnings
WARNING
Safety warnings are included in this
handbook. These indicate either a
procedure which must be followed
precisely, or information that should be
considered with great care in order to avoid
the possibility of personal injury.

Labels showing this symbol
indicate that the ignition system
utilises very high voltages. Do not
touch any ignition components
while the starter switch is turned
on.

Cautions
CAUTION
Cautions are included in this handbook.
These indicate either a procedure which
must be followed precisely, or information that
should be considered with great care in order
to avoid the possibility of damage to your
vehicle.

Symbols
This recycling symbol identifies
those items that must be disposed
of safely in order to prevent
unnecessary damage to the
environment.
This symbol identifies those
features that can be adjusted,
disabled or enabled by your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Introduction
Warning labels

It is important that you are familiar with these
subjects to ensure that your vehicle and its
features are used safely. Using the index at the
back of this handbook, refer to the relevant
topic for more information.

Labels are attached to your vehicle at several
positions. These are applied to draw your
attention to important subjects, e.g. tyre
pressures, tow bar use, airbags, roll-over risk,
engine compartment hazards, etc.

HEALTH AND SAFETY

Additional information labels may also be
found at these locations.

WARNINGS
The vehicle should not be parked over
long dry grass or other combustible
material, particularly during dry
weather. As the heat generated by the exhaust
and emission control systems may be
sufficient to start a fire.
Before exiting the vehicle, ensure that
P park is selected and the park brake
applied. When exiting the vehicle,
ensure that the Jaguar Smart Key is removed
from the vehicle.

1
3

4
5

4
6

7
2
E95340

1. Left-hand front suspension tower - Air
conditioning label
2. Top face of battery - Battery warning
symbols
3. End of fascia (passenger side) Passenger airbag label
4. Sun visor - Airbag label
5. Base of left-hand C pillar - Tyre pressure
label, Airbag warning label, Vehicle
Identification Number label
6. Right-hand B pillar - Vehicle
Identification Number label (China)
7. Inner face of fuel filler flap - Fuel
specification label

Introduction
DATA RECORDING

Note: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data are recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.
name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.

Service data recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or
status of various systems and modules in the
vehicle such as engine, throttle, steering or
brakes.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

In order to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Jaguar service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through
a direct connection to your vehicle.

Event data recording
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened.
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or the brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was travelling.
• The rotational position of the steering
wheel.

DISABILITY MODIFICATIONS
Occupants with disabilities which may require
modification of the vehicle, must contact a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer before any
modifications are made.

These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.

Introduction
FASCIA AND CONTROLS
1

3 4

A t
n t F e

7 8

17
18

21
23

24
25

27
11 12 14

1 0 m

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

26
1 2

4 5

Au
n t Fu

7 8

9 10

m
10 km

17
18
19
20
21
JAG1634

Introduction
1. Steering wheel audio controls.
See AUDIO CONTROL (page 69).

16. Glove box proximity sensor. See GLOVE
BOX (page 125).

2. External lamp controls. See LIGHTING
CONTROL (page 75).

17. Engine START/STOP switch.
See Starting the engine (page 132).

3. Sequential gear change down paddle.
See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(page 137).

18. JaguarDrive gear selector.
See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(page 137).

4. Speedometer. See INSTRUMENT PANEL
OVERVIEW (page 99).

19. JaguarDrive mode selectors. See Driving
dynamics (page 169).

5. Driver’s horn and airbag. See HORN
(page 68). See Supplementary
restraints system (page 53).

20. Electric Parking Brake (EPB).
See ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)
(page 146).

6. Message centre. See WARNING AND
INFORMATION MESSAGES (page 106).

21. Steering wheel adjustment control.
See ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
(page 67).

7. Tachometer. See INSTRUMENT PANEL
OVERVIEW (page 99).
8. Sequential gear change up paddle.
See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(page 137).

22. Starter control docking unit for the
Jaguar Smart Key.
See DOCKING/UNDOCKING THE
JAGUAR SMART KEY (page 20).

9. Wiper and washer control. See Wipers
and washers (page 88).

23. Bonnet release lever. See OPENING AND
CLOSING THE BONNET (page 195).

10. Cruise control and Adaptive cruise
control steering wheel controls.
See Cruise control (page 156).
See Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
(page 159).

24. Luggage compartment release switch.
See LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
(page 26).

11. Audio control panel. See Audio unit
overview (page 269).

26. Instrument lighting dimmer control.
See INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
(page 123).

25. Headlamp levelling control.
See HEADLAMP LEVELLING (page 79).

12. Fascia lock/unlock buttons.
See LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
(page 26).

27. Rear fog lamps switch. See REAR FOG
LAMPS (page 77).

13. Touch-screen. See TOUCH-SCREEN
(page 109).

28. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Forward
Alert switch. See FORWARD ALERT
FUNCTION (page 164).

14. Hazard warning lamp switch.
See HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
(page 77).
15. Climate control panel. See Climate
control (page 115).

Introduction
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES

Jaguar parts are the only parts built to original
equipment specifications and approved by
Jaguar designers; this means that every single
part and accessory has been rigorously tested
by the same engineering team that designed
and built the vehicle.

WARNINGS
Do not fit non-approved parts and
accessories or carry out
non-approved alterations or
conversions. It may be dangerous and could
affect the safety of the vehicle and occupants.
Also, the terms and conditions of the vehicle
warranty may be invalidated.
Jaguar will not accept any liability for
death, personal injury or damage to
property which may occur as a direct
result of fitment of non-approved accessories
or the carrying out of non-approved
conversions to Jaguar vehicles.
Jaguar strongly advise against
making any modifications to the
suspension or steering system. This
could seriously affect the handling and
stability of the vehicle leading to loss of control
or roll-over.

A full list and description of all accessories is
available from your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.

Electrical equipment
WARNING
It is extremely hazardous to fit or
replace parts or accessories, the
installation of which requires the
dismantling of, or addition to, either the
electrical or fuel systems.
Always consult your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer before fitting any accessory.
Fitting inferior quality parts or accessories,
may be dangerous and could invalidate the
vehicle warranty.

The vehicle has been designed, built and
tested, to cope with a variety of driving
conditions, some of which can place the
severest possible demands on control systems
and components. As such, fitting replacement
parts and accessories that have been
developed and tested to the same stringent
standards as the original components, will
safeguard the continued reliability, safety and
performance of your vehicle.

It is recommended that you always consult
your Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice
regarding the approval, suitability, installation
and use of any parts or accessories before
fitting.

To augment the vehicle's already impressive
performance, a comprehensive range of Jaguar
approved spare parts and accessories is
available.

Introduction
Airbag system

After-sales service

WARNING
The components that make up the
airbag system are sensitive to
electrical or physical interference,
either of which could easily damage the
system and cause inadvertent operation or a
malfunction of the airbag module.
E95341

To prevent malfunction of the airbag system
always consult your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer before fitting any of the following:
• Electronic equipment such as a mobile
phone, two-way radio or in-car
entertainment system.
• Accessories attached to the front of the
vehicle.
• Any modification to the front of the vehicle.
• Any modification involving the removal or
repair of any wiring or component in the
vicinity of any of the airbag system
components, including the steering wheel,
steering column, instrument or fascia
panels.
• Any modification to the fascia panels or
steering wheel.

The After Sales Parts service is of paramount
importance, with franchised representation in
over 100 countries worldwide, Jaguar are able
to support your vehicle wherever you go.

Travelling abroad
In certain countries, it is a legal requirement to
fit parts made to the vehicle manufacturers'
specification.
Owners should ensure that any parts or
accessories fitted to the vehicle while travelling
abroad, will also conform to the legal
requirements of their own country when they
return home.

Keys and remote controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The emergency key blade number is recorded
on an attached label. Peel off the label and
attach it to the designated area on the Security
Card, supplied in the literature pack. Keep the
Security Card safe, but not in the vehicle.

CAUTION
Remove all Jaguar Smart Keys from the
vehicle when it is left unattended. This
will ensure the vehicle is left in a secure
condition.
If a Jaguar Smart Key is lost, a
replacement can be obtained and
programmed to the vehicle by your Dealer.
Notify your Dealer as soon as a Jaguar Smart
Key is lost or stolen and have the remaining
Jaguar Smart Key(s) reprogrammed.

GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO
FREQUENCIES
Note: The radio frequency used by your remote
control may be used by other devices. For
example: amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, or other remote control
devices. This may cause the frequency to be
jammed, and prevent your remote control from
operating correctly.
Environmental conditions can affect the
operation of remote controls and the operating
range may vary considerably depending on the
vehicle's location.

E93136

The security system and entry to the vehicle are
controlled by the Jaguar Smart Key remote
control. All doors and the luggage
compartment can be locked and unlocked
using the remote control buttons.
Keyless Entry is an enhancement of the Jaguar
Smart Key and allows entry to the vehicle,
without the need to press a button. Full security
integrity of the vehicle is still maintained.
See KEYLESS ENTRY (page 33).
The Jaguar Smart Key also allows the vehicle to
be started without the use of a starter key.
See KEYLESS STARTING (page 133).
Two handsets, incorporating a detachable
emergency key blade, are supplied. Separate
emergency key blades are available from
Dealers.

Keys and remote controls
USING THE REMOTE CONTROL

Unlocking
Press to unlock. See UNLOCKING
AND DISARMING THE VEHICLE
(page 18).

Jaguar Smart Key
WARNING
Never leave the Jaguar Smart Key in
the vehicle if children or animals are
also left in the vehicle. The vehicle's
systems and remote control functions could
be operated, which may result in injury.

Locking
Press to lock. See LOCKING AND
ARMING THE VEHICLE (page 19).

Luggage compartment

Note: The operational range of the Jaguar
Smart Key will vary considerably depending on
atmospheric conditions and interference from
other transmitting devices.

Press to unlock, disarm and open
the luggage compartment. The
vehicle security system will remain
active, but for the period the luggage
compartment is open, the intrusion and
inclination sensing systems will be inhibited.
Door and bonnet security will remain active.

Note: Some features of the security system are
market dependent or are options, so may not
be present on your vehicle.

When the luggage compartment is
subsequently closed, the hazard warning
lamps will flash after a few seconds, to confirm
that the vehicle has rearmed the full alarm
system (if previously armed).

2
1

5
6

E90683

Approach lamps
When approaching the vehicle in
the dark, press to switch on the
approach illumination. The
headlamps will illuminate for up to 25 seconds.
Pressing the button again or operating the
starter button, will turn the approach lamps off.

Panic button

1. Unlock.

Press and hold for three seconds,
or press three times within three
seconds, to activate the emergency
alarm. The horn, siren and the hazard lamps
will operate.

2. Lock.
3. Luggage compartment release.
4. Convenience headlamp feature.
5. Panic alarm.

Once active for more than five seconds, the
alarm can be cancelled by pressing the button
and holding for three seconds, or pressing
three times within three seconds.

6. Emergency key blade.
7. Emergency key blade release button.

Keys and remote controls
The emergency alarm will also be cancelled if
the Jaguar Smart Key is inserted into the
starter control unit and the START/STOP
button is pressed or if the vehicle detects a
valid Jaguar Smart Key when the START/STOP
button is pressed.

Single-point entry
First press: Unlocks the driver's door and
enables the other doors to be opened from the
inside (unless the child safety locks have been
activated on the rear doors). The hazard
warning lamps will flash twice, to indicate that
the vehicle is unlocked and the alarm has been
disarmed. The interior lamps will illuminate to
assist entry to the vehicle.

Care of the Jaguar Smart Key
Do not expose to extremes of heat, dust,
humidity or allow contact with fluids. Do not
leave the transmitter exposed to direct
sunlight.

Note: In some markets, an audible warning will
sound.
Second press: Unlocks the passenger doors
and the luggage compartment.

Irregular operation
If difficulty is experienced with remote keyless
entry, keyless entry, keyless starting or Jaguar
Smart Key operation, it may be caused by:
• Internal battery low voltage. Replace the
battery. See CHANGING THE REMOTE
CONTROL BATTERY (page 24).
• High levels of localised external electrical
interference, e.g. a radio transmitter.
• Until the battery can be replaced, or until
the vehicle is outside the area of electrical
interference, the Jaguar Smart Key must
be inserted into the starter control unit.

Multi-point entry
Press briefly to unlock all the doors and
luggage compartment and to disarm the alarm.
The hazard warning lamps will flash twice to
indicate that the vehicle is unlocked and the
alarm has been disarmed. The interior lamps
will illuminate to assist entry to the vehicle.
Note: In some markets, an audible warning will
sound.

Power-fold mirrors
If automatic power-fold is enabled, the door
mirrors will unfold when the vehicle is
unlocked. The power-fold feature can be
enabled/disabled using the touch-screen.
See EXTERIOR MIRRORS (page 95).

UNLOCKING AND DISARMING THE
VEHICLE
Your vehicle can be unlocked using
either Single or Multi-point entry.
Single-point entry is a security
feature that only unlocks the driver's door
when the unlock button is pressed.

Global opening
Press and hold the unlock button for three
seconds. The vehicle will unlock (either single
or multi-point) and the alarm will be disarmed
immediately. After the three seconds, all of the
windows and sunroof will open. This feature
can be enabled/disabled using the vehicle
touch-screen. See PROGRAMMING THE
REMOTE CONTROL (page 21).

To change from Single to Multi-point entry (or
vice versa), press both the lock and unlock
buttons simultaneously for three seconds. The
hazard warning lamps will flash twice to
confirm the change.
The change can also be achieved using the
vehicle touch-screen. See PROGRAMMING
THE REMOTE CONTROL (page 21).

Keys and remote controls
LOCKING AND ARMING THE VEHICLE

Double locking provides additional security if
the vehicle is left unattended. The vehicle
cannot be opened by breaking a window and
operating the door locks from inside the
vehicle.

WARNING
The vehicle will only lock, if all door,
luggage compartment and bonnet
apertures are closed. If a lock attempt
is made when an aperture is open, the vehicle
will not lock and two audible error warnings
will sound.

Power-fold mirrors
If automatic power-fold is enabled, the door
mirrors will fold in towards the vehicle body
when the vehicle is locked. The power-fold
feature can be enabled/disabled using the
touch-screen. See PROGRAMMING THE
REMOTE CONTROL (page 21).

Press the lock button to secure the
vehicle. The vehicle can be Single
or Double locked, as follows:

Single locking

Lock confirmation

Press the lock button briefly. Single locking
secures the vehicle and prevents the doors
being opened from outside of the vehicle. The
doors can be unlocked and opened from inside
the vehicle. The hazard warning lamps will
flash once as confirmation.

If you are uncertain whether the vehicle is
locked and armed (either by single or double
locking), press the lock button again. The
hazard warning lights will flash to indicate and
confirm the current lock status.
Note: If the vehicle is not already locked and
armed, pressing the lock button will single lock
the vehicle. Press again to double lock, if
required.

Note: In some markets, an audible warning will
sound.

Double locking

Global closing

WARNING
Never double lock the vehicle with
people, children, or pets inside. In the
event of an emergency they would be
unable to escape, and the emergency services
would be unable to release them quickly.

WARNING
Ensure that no children, pets, or
obstructions are in any open aperture
before operating global closing.
Safety mechanisms are in place to prevent
serious injury, however, injuries can still
occur.

Press the lock button twice within three
seconds. Double locking secures the vehicle
and prevents the doors being unlocked or
opened from inside or outside of the vehicle,
except with the correct Jaguar Smart Key. The
hazard warning lamps will flash twice (with a
long second flash) and an audible warning will
sound, as confirmation.

Press and hold the lock button for three
seconds. The vehicle will single lock and the
alarm will be fully armed immediately. After the
three seconds, all the windows and the sunroof
will close.

Keys and remote controls
Automatic relocking
If a door, or the tailgate, are not opened within
one minute of unlocking the vehicle using the
Jaguar Smart Key, doors will lock again
automatically. This feature can be
enabled/disabled using the touch-screen.
See PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL
(page 21).

DOCKING/UNDOCKING THE JAGUAR
SMART KEY
Docking the Jaguar Smart Key
During normal operation, it is not necessary to
dock the Jaguar Smart Key. However, if the
unlock button on the Smart Key fails to operate
and the vehicle has been unlocked using the
emergency key blade, it will be necessary to
dock the Jaguar Smart Key to deactivate and
disarm the alarm system.
The Smart Key should also be docked when the
vehicle is being towed, in order to prevent the
steering column from locking.

E92455

Insert the Jaguar Smart Key into the starter
control unit, located on the driver's side of the
vehicle, as shown.
Note: When docking the Jaguar Smart Key, it is
recommended that the emergency key blade is
left in place. The end of the key blade can then
be used as a handle, to pull the Smart Key from
the control unit when undocking.

Keys and remote controls
Undocking the Jaguar Smart Key

Message centre information displays
Message

Meaning

SMART KEY NOT The Jaguar Smart Key
FOUND, PLEASE has not been detected,
INSERT IN SLOT insert into the starter
control unit.

CHECK SMART
KEY

The Jaguar Smart Key
detected by the in-vehicle
systems is not the one
belonging to the vehicle.

REMOVE SMART Remove the Jaguar
KEY
Smart Key from the
starter control unit.

PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE
CONTROL

E92456

The Jaguar Smart Key and various features of
the vehicle security system, can be
programmed to your individual requirements
by use of the touch-screen.

CAUTION
Ensure the engine is switched off before
attempting to undock the Jaguar Smart
Key, otherwise damage to the Smart Key may
occur.

The programmable features are as follows:
• Drive-away locking (including variable
speed)
• Single or multi-point entry (2 stage
unlocking)
• Alarm trigger information (market
dependent)
• Window global open or close (passive
entry vehicles only)
• Valet key mode
• Passive arming
• Automatic relock and arm.

To remove the Jaguar Smart Key from the
starter control unit:
1. Ensure that the vehicle is at rest with the
gear selector in the P position and the
ignition switched off.
2. Press the Jaguar Smart Key and release.
The key will eject into its rest position.
3. Remove the Jaguar Smart Key from the
starter control unit.

Keys and remote controls
Selecting single (2 stage unlock) or
multi-point entry

Selecting alarm sensor override
From the main Home touch-screen menu,
select Vehicle:

From the main Home touch-screen menu,
select Vehicle:

Vehicle

Home

External

Security

Audio/TV

Parking

Climate

20 .5 C 17 .5 C

Phone

Left

DAB radio

DAB1

Valet mode

BBC 5Live Xtra

Right

BBC National DAB

Navigation

Off

Alarm sensors

Off

12 : 26 pm

•
•

Vehicle

Drive away
locking

Off

•

Parking
Valet mode
2 stage unlocking

Off

Select Veh. settings.
The Security menu is selected
automatically as the default.
Touch the arrow button to scroll down to
Alarm sensors and select either On or Off.

Selecting Off will override the interior and tilt
sensors until the vehicle is locked and
unlocked again. This facility is normally used
for recovery of the vehicle or travelling on a
ferry.

12:26 pm
LAN1510

•

E93148

Valet

12:26 pm

•
•

Off

TA FM DAB i Subch.

Vehicle

Security

Passive arming
Auto-relock and
arm

Select Veh. settings.
The Security menu is selected
automatically as the default.
Select: 2-stage unlocking On (for singlepoint entry) or Off (for multi-point entry).

Note: This selection changes the setting for
both keyless entry and for when unlocking
using the Jaguar Smart Key.

Keys and remote controls
Selecting drive-away locking

Selecting window global opening or
closing

From the main Home touch-screen menu,
select Vehicle:

Vehicle
Security

Drive away
locking

Off

Vehicle
Security

Parking
Valet mode
2 stage unlocking

Off

Parking

Windows
global open

Off

Valet mode

Windows
global close

Off

Mirror fold back

Off

12 : 26 pm
E93149

•
•
•

12 : 26 pm
E93150

Select Veh. settings.
The Security button is selected
automatically as the default.
Select the arrow button to scroll down to
Drive away locking and select either On or
Off.

•
•
•

Setting the drive-away locking speed

Selecting passive arming
From the main Home touch-screen menu,
select Vehicle:

Vehicle
Security
Parking

Drive away
locking
Speed (MPH)

Valet mode

Off
5

On
10

Vehicle

Units

2 stage unlocking

Select Veh. settings.
The Security button is selected
automatically as the default.
Scroll down to Global open or Global
close and select either On or Off.

Off

Security
On

Parking
Valet mode

12 : 26 pm

Passive arming

Off

Auto-relock a
ar

Alarm sensors

On
On

Off

JAG1306

•

Once Drive away locking On is selected,
select the speed from the list at which you
want the locks to activate (8, 16 or 32 km/h
or 5, 10 or 20 mph). To change between
Imperial and Metric measurement units,
select Units.

12 : 26 pm
E93151

•
•
•

Select Veh. settings.
The Security button is selected
automatically as the default.
Scroll down to Passive arming and select
either On or Off.

Keys and remote controls
CHANGING THE REMOTE CONTROL
BATTERY

Selecting automatic relock and arm
From the main Home touch-screen menu,
select Vehicle:
Vehicle

Security
Parking
Valet mode

Passive arming

Off

Auto-relock and
arm

Off

Alarm sen

2
12 : 26 pm
E93152

•
•
•

Select Veh. settings.
The Security button is selected
automatically as the default.
Scroll down to Auto-relock and arm and
select either On or Off.

E90710

When the battery needs renewing, there will be
a significant decrease in the effective range of
the Jaguar Smart Key transmitter and the
message SMART KEY BATTERY LOW is
displayed in the message centre.

Keys and remote controls
EMERGENCY KEY BLADE

To renew the battery, follow the procedure
below:
1. Remove the key blade from the Jaguar
Smart Key. See USING THE REMOTE
CONTROL (page 17).

2. Remove the two side covers, one at a time,
by inserting a small, flat bladed
screwdriver between the cover and body
and lightly twist the screwdriver.
3. Insert the screwdriver between the two
body halves of the Jaguar Smart Key.
Apply light pressure to the screwdriver and
separate the two halves.

E92438

To extract: Press and hold the release button
(7), while pulling the key blade (6) from the
Jaguar Smart Key body.

4. Remove the printed circuit board, taking
care not to touch the battery terminals.
Remove the old battery and dispose of it
safely.

To insert: Press and hold the release button
while pushing the key blade into appropriate
slot in the Jaguar Smart Key.

5. Fit a new battery, type CR2032 (available
from your Dealer/Authorised Repairer),
with the positive (+) downwards, in the
battery receptacle. Avoid touching the new
battery, as moisture/oil from the fingers
can reduce battery life and corrode the
contacts.

The key blade operates the left-hand front door
lock and the luggage compartment lock.
See USING THE EMERGENCY KEY BLADE
(page 28).

Refit the parts in the reverse order, ensuring
that they click securely into place.

Battery disposal
Used batteries must be disposed of
correctly, as they contain a number
of harmful substances. Seek advise
on disposal from your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer and/or your local
authority.

Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

Luggage compartment

WARNING
Never double lock the vehicle with
people, children or pets inside. In the
event of an emergency they would be
unable to escape, and the emergency services
would be unable to release them quickly.

CAUTION
If the luggage compartment is opened
after the driver and passenger doors are
locked, ensure that the Jaguar Smart Key
remains outside the vehicle when it is closed
again. If the Jaguar Smart Key is inadvertently
left inside the luggage compartment, an
audible warning will sound and the luggage
compartment will re-open after three seconds.

When the vehicle is double-locked the doors
cannot be opened, either from inside or
outside the vehicle.

Note: If the Jaguar Smart Key is placed within
a metal box, it will not be detected by the
vehicle security system.

Breaking a window will not allow a door to be
opened.

Locking and unlocking from outside the
vehicle

The luggage compartment can be opened at
any time, using the appropriate button on the
Jaguar Smart Key or via keyless entry. It can
also be opened using the exterior release,
provided the doors are unlocked.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the
Jaguar Smart Key, is explained earlier in this
handbook. See USING THE REMOTE
CONTROL (page 17). Locking and unlocking
the vehicle using the Keyless Entry system is
explained later in this handbook. See KEYLESS
ENTRY (page 33).

Provided the vehicle is not locked or alarmed,
the luggage compartment can also be opened
using the interior release button.
The luggage compartment can also be
unlocked and opened using the emergency key
blade, as described later in this section.

Note: To help prevent locking the Jaguar Smart
Key inside the vehicle, it has been made
difficult to slam lock a door using the interior
door locking lever. The door will not lock.

Drive-away locking
This feature locks all unsecured locks when the
vehicle reaches a designated forward speed.
This designated speed and whether or not
drive-away locking is enabled, can be set using
the vehicle touch-screen. See PROGRAMMING
THE REMOTE CONTROL (page 21).

Locks
Locking and unlocking from inside the
vehicle

Fascia buttons

Door lock and release levers

E93160

E93161

Locking: With all the doors closed, press the
button to lock all doors and the luggage
compartment. Press and hold to lock all doors
and the luggage compartment and close all
windows and the sunroof. The windows and
sunroof will stop closing if the button is
released.

1. Press the locking lever to lock the door,
pull the lever to unlock the door. Operating
the locking lever on either front door will
lock all closed doors. If the doors are
locked, operating the locking lever on
either front door will unlock all four doors
(provided the doors were locked from
inside the vehicle and the alarm is
disarmed).

Note: The fascia locking button will not
function unless all the doors are closed.

2. Pull the release lever to open a door. If the
doors are locked, operating the lever will
have no effect.
Note: If the car was locked using the Jaguar
Smart Key, then operating the locking lever will
only unlock that door and the alarm will sound.

E93162

Unlocking: Press to unlock all doors and the
luggage compartment. Press and hold to
unlock all doors and the luggage compartment
and open all windows and the sunroof. The
windows and sunroof will stop opening if the
button is released.

Note: If the vehicle has been double-locked,
then the interior door lock and release levers
will not operate. The vehicle must be unlocked
using the Jaguar Smart Key.

Locks
USING THE EMERGENCY KEY BLADE
The emergency key blade will be needed to
unlock the vehicle, if the Jaguar Smart Key has
a discharged battery or is damaged. The
emergency key blade is also used for accessing
the luggage compartment if the vehicle has
been left in Valet mode. Withdraw the key from
the Jaguar Smart Key for use. See USING THE
REMOTE CONTROL (page 17).

Locking and unlocking the doors
JAG1333

Press to open the luggage compartment.

Mislock
If one of the doors, the bonnet, or the luggage
compartment are not shut fully when the
vehicle is locked using the Jaguar Smart Key or
by Keyless locking, the vehicle will not lock and
two warning tones will sound. Check that all
doors, the bonnet and the luggage
compartment are closed properly and lock the
vehicle again.

If one or more of the doors fails to lock
properly when a lock attempt is made using the
Jaguar Smart Key, two warning tones will
sound and one or more of the doors may not be
locked.

JAG1310

Remove the front left-hand door lock cover as
follows:
1. Insert the emergency key blade into the
slot on the underside of the cover.
2. Gently lever the key blade upwards.
3. Carefully twist the key blade, to lever the
cover off the retaining clips.
Insert the key blade into the exposed lock to
operate.
Note: To refit the door lock cover, push it firmly
back into place until all three securing tabs
click into position.

Locks
To lock: Ensure all the doors are closed, then
turn the key blade towards the front of the
vehicle and release. This will lock all doors but
will not arm the alarm.
To unlock: Turn the key blade towards the rear
of the vehicle and release. If the security
system is disarmed, all doors and the luggage
compartment will be unlocked. If the security
system is armed, only the front left-hand door
will unlock. The interior lighting will be turned
on at reduced level for two minutes.
If the vehicle is unlocked using the emergency
key blade with the security system armed, the
alarm will sound when a door is opened. To
deactivate the alarm, press the unlock button
on the Jaguar Smart Key or press the engine
START/STOP button with the Smart Key inside
the vehicle. If the Jaguar Smart Key is
inoperable, the alarm can be deactivated by
docking the Smart Key into the starter control
unit. See DOCKING/UNDOCKING THE JAGUAR
SMART KEY (page 20).

Unlocking the luggage compartment
If Valet mode is selected, or if the vehicle
battery is discharged, it will be necessary to
use the emergency key blade to unlock and
open the luggage compartment.
E93157

Note: If the security system is in Valet mode,
the touch-screen can be used to cancel Valet
mode, in which case the luggage compartment
can then be opened in the normal manner.

•
•

Note: If the alarm is armed when the
emergency key blade is used to unlock the
luggage compartment, the alarm will sound
when the luggage compartment is opened.
Press the unlock button on the Jaguar Smart
Key to disarm/deactivate the alarm.

Use the emergency key blade to prise away
the black lock cover.
Insert the emergency key blade, then turn
the key clockwise to unlock and open the
luggage compartment.

Note: Unlocking the luggage compartment
using the emergency key blade will cancel Valet
mode.

Locks
VALET MODE
Vehicle

Valet mode allows the vehicle to be locked by a
parking attendant, without giving access to the
luggage compartment and glove compartment.
Valet mode also prevents operation of the
touch-screen, to prevent access to telephone
numbers or navigation addresses.

Security

Valet mode

Parking
Valet mode

Please ensure Jaguar mechanical keyblade
is removed from Smart key stowage and
kept safe, before handing smart key to
Valet personnel

Selecting valet mode

12:26 pm
JAG0948

External

Home

Once the PIN has been entered, a pop-up
screen is displayed, advising you to remove the
emergency key blade from the Jaguar Smart
Key and to keep it safe. Select OK.

Audio/TV
Climate
Phone

20 .5 C 17 .5 C

DAB radio

DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

Left

Right

Navigation

BBC National DAB

The screen will indicate that the PIN has been
accepted by displaying Valet on.

TA FM DAB i Subch.

Vehicle

The luggage compartment and glove
compartment are now securely locked in Valet
mode.

Valet

12:26 pm

Vehicle

Valet off - enter pin

Security
Parking
Valet mode

4
7

On exiting and securing the vehicle, hand the
Jaguar Smart Key, with the emergency key
blade removed, to the attendant.

3
6

8
0

Note: Ensure that the emergency key blade is
kept safely at all times.

9
OK

12:26 pm
JAG1511

From the main Home touch-screen menu,
select Valet:
Enter a four digit Personal identification
Number (PIN) (personally chosen) by touching
the digit screen pad. On completion, touch the
OK button.
If you wish to cancel the PIN, touch the C
button at any time during entering the number.

Locks
Deselecting valet mode
When you enter the vehicle, the Valet mode
screen will be displayed automatically.
Vehicle

Parking
Valet mode

Valet on - enter pin

Security
1

4
7

3
6

12 : 26 pm
JAG0946

Enter your four digit PIN and touch the OK
button.
Vehicle
Security

Valet mode

Parking
Valet mode

Please ensure Jaguar mechanical keyblade
is returned to Smart key stowage for safe
keeping

12:26 pm
JAG0949

A pop-up screen is displayed, advising you to
return the emergency key blade to the Jaguar
Smart Key. Select OK.
The screen will indicate that your PIN has been
accepted by displaying Valet off.
• The luggage compartment will return to
the previously set security requirement.
• The glove compartment will now open as
normal.
Note: If the PIN number has been forgotten,
the luggage compartment can be unlocked by
using the emergency key blade. This will cancel
the Valet mode.

Locks
JAGUAR SMART KEY SYSTEM
TRANSMITTERS
1

5
6
7
3
1

5
7
6

2
JAG1305

1. Cabin front transmitter.
2. Cabin rear transmitter.
3. Front exterior door handle transmitters.
4. Rear exterior door handle transmitters.
5. Luggage compartment interior
transmitter.
6. Luggage compartment exterior
transmitter.
7. Keyless vehicle module.
WARNING
Any person fitted with an implanted
medical device should ensure that the
device is kept at a distance of at least
22 cm (8.7 inches) away from any transmitter
mounted in the vehicle. This is to avoid any
possibility of interference between the system
and device.

Locks
KEYLESS ENTRY

Note: If Single-point entry is the current
security setting and a door other than the
driver's door is opened first, then all doors will
be unlocked. If the driver's door is opened,
only the driver's door will be unlocked. All
other doors and the luggage compartment will
remain locked.

Jaguar Smart Key check
When the last open door is closed, the vehicle
will perform a search of the vehicle interior for
the Jaguar Smart Key. If one is not found,
SMART KEY NOT FOUND, PLEASE INSERT IN
SLOT will be displayed for four seconds in the
message centre. This is to alert the driver that
the Jaguar Smart Key may have been
inadvertently removed from the vehicle.

E93153

Keyless entry allows the driver to unlock and
disarm the vehicle by simply operating the
door handle. The Keyless Entry function
operates in the following manner:
• As a door handle is operated, the vehicle
emits a search signal.
• If the Jaguar Smart Key is within
approximately 1.0 m (3 feet) of the
operated door handle, the signal will be
acknowledged.
• The vehicle recognises the Jaguar Smart
Key and disarms the alarm and unlocks the
vehicle according to the current security
setting (either Single-point or Multi-point
entry). See USING THE REMOTE
CONTROL (page 17). The hazard warning
lamps flash twice as confirmation (in some
markets an audible warning will sound
twice).
Note: The Jaguar Smart Key needs only to be
on the driver's person or in a non-metallic bag
or briefcase. It does not need to be exposed or
handled.

Locks
Keyless locking

Window global closing
Press and hold the button on the door handle
for three seconds, to lock the vehicle, arm the
alarm and also close all open windows and the
sunroof. The windows and sunroof will stop
closing when the button is released.

WARNING
Never double-lock the vehicle with
people, children or pets inside. In the
event of an emergency they would be
unable to escape and the emergency services
would be unable to release them quickly.

Convenience mode
When the door is opened using either the
Jaguar Smart Key or keyless entry, the
vehicle's electrical system initiates the
convenience mode. The following systems
become functional:
• Memory.
• Seat and steering column adjustment.
• Interior and exterior lighting.
• Message centre.
• Auxiliary power socket.

E93154

The vehicle will not lock automatically.
The vehicle will only lock if all doors, luggage
compartment and bonnet are closed. If a lock
attempt is made with an open aperture, the
vehicle will not lock and two audible error
warnings will sound.
• To single-lock the vehicle, press the button
on the door handle once. The hazard
warning lamps will flash once as
confirmation (in some markets, an audible
warning will sound).
• To double-lock the vehicle, press the
button twice within three seconds. The
hazard warning lamps will flash twice (with
a long second flash). In some markets, a
double audible warning will sound.
Note: Keyless locking will only activate if the
Jaguar Smart Key is outside the vehicle. If no
Smart Key is present, two audible error
warnings will sound.

Locks
Steering column lock

GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING

CAUTION
During vehicle recovery, the Jaguar
Smart Key must remain inside the
vehicle (or be stowed in the starter control unit
in the centre console), so that the steering
column remains unlocked.

WARNING
Accidental closing of an electrically
operated window or sunroof on
fingers, hands or any vulnerable part
of the body, can result in serious injury.
Always observe the following precautions:
Ensure that you have a clear view of all open
apertures on the vehicle and that all apertures
are unobstructed before activating global
closing.

Your vehicle is fitted with an electronic steering
column lock. The column unlocks when it
detects a Jaguar Smart Key inside the vehicle.
The steering column automatically locks when
the starter switch is turned off and the driver's
door is opened.

Global opening and closing is enabled/disabled
via the touch-screen.See PROGRAMMING THE
REMOTE CONTROL (page 21).

Any malfunction of the steering column lock
will be indicated by the message STEERING
COLUMN LOCKED displaying in the message
centre. If this occurs:

Window global opening
Press and hold the unlock button
on the Jaguar Smart Key for at least
three seconds. The alarm will
disarm, all doors and the luggage
compartment will unlock and all the windows
and sunroof will open.

1. Press the starter button to return to the
convenience mode.
2. Try again to unlock the steering column
lock, by turning the steering wheel gently
to the left and right.

Note: The windows and sunroof will continue
to open when the unlock button is released.

3. If the malfunction still persists, seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible.

Press and hold the interior unlock button on
the fascia. After three seconds, all the windows
and the sunroof will open.
Note: The windows and sunroof will stop
opening when the unlock button is released.

Locks
Window global closing (not Japan)

Cancelling global opening/closing

Press and hold the lock button on
the Jaguar Smart Key. The alarm
will arm, all doors and the luggage
compartment will lock and, after three
seconds, all open windows and sunroof will
close.

To stop the windows and sunroof from
opening/closing, during global opening/
closing operation, press any of the buttons on
the Jaguar Smart Key or operate the driver's
window switch. To stop a particular window
from opening, operate the relevant window
switch.

Note: The windows and sunroof will continue
to close when the lock button is released.

E93154

Press and hold the exterior locking button on
the driver's door handle for at least three
seconds, with a valid Jaguar Smart Key in the
vicinity of the door.
Note: The windows and sunroof will stop
closing when the lock button is released.
Press and hold the interior lock button on the
fascia. After three seconds, all open windows
and the sunroof will close.
Note: The windows and sunroof will stop
closing when the lock button is released.

Alarm
•

ARMING THE ALARM
The engine is automatically
immobilised when the Jaguar
Smart Key is removed from the
vehicle. The alarm system is armed when the
lock button on the Jaguar Smart Key is pressed
or the button on the exterior door handle is
pressed with a valid Jaguar Smart Key in close
proximity. The hazard lamps will flash to
indicate that the alarm is armed (in certain
markets, an audible tone will sound). The alarm
can also arm automatically (known as passive
arming), 30 seconds after all doors, luggage
compartment and bonnet apertures are closed,
and the Jaguar Smart Key is removed from the
vehicle. Passive arming does not lock the
vehicle.

•

An attempt is made to disconnect the
alarm siren.
An attempt is made to start the vehicle,
without a valid Jaguar Smart Key present.

Note: If the alarm is armed and a window or the
sunroof are left open, the alarm may sound due
to movement of air currents.
Note: Some of the above conditions are market
or option dependent and therefore may not
apply to your vehicle.

Perimeter alarm
To set perimeter alarm protection, briefly press
the lock button once. The hazard warning lights
will flash once to confirm the alarm state.
Once armed the perimeter alarm will sound if:• The bonnet, luggage compartment, or a
door are opened.
• If a front door is unlocked using the
emergency key blade or the interior door
lock release levers and then opened.
• The vehicle battery is disconnected.
• An attempt is made to disconnect the
alarm siren.
• An attempt is made to start the vehicle,
without a valid Jaguar Smart Key present.

This feature can be enabled/disabled using the
vehicle touch-screen. See PROGRAMMING
THE REMOTE CONTROL (page 21).

Full alarm
To set full alarm protection, ensure that all the
windows and the sunroof are closed. Then, on
vehicles fitted with double-locking, press the
lock button twice within three seconds. The
hazard warning lights will flash twice to
confirm the alarm state and, in some markets,
an audible tone will sound.

Note: This setting should be used in
circumstances such as travelling on a ferry,
when pets are to be left in the vehicle, when a
window must be left open etc.

Once fully armed the alarm will sound if:• The bonnet, luggage compartment, or a
door are opened.
• If a front door is unlocked using the
emergency key blade or the interior door
lock release levers and then opened.
• Movement is detected within the vehicle
interior.
• A window, front or rear windscreen, or
sunroof glass are broken.
• The vehicle is raised or tilted.
• The vehicle battery is disconnected.

Note: Some of the above conditions are market
or option dependent and therefore may not
apply to your vehicle.

Alarm
DISARMING THE ALARM

Alarm indicator

When the vehicle is unlocked using
the Jaguar Smart Key or by valid
keyless entry, the alarm is
automatically disabled. The hazard lamps will
flash twice to indicate that the alarm is
disabled. In certain markets, a double audible
tone will sound.

Disarming when the unlock button fails
to work
If, when pressed, the unlock button fails to
operate the vehicle can still be unlocked and
the alarm disabled. To unlock the vehicle:-

km
/ 0 km

E93168

1. Unlock the left-hand front door using the
emergency key blade. See USING THE
EMERGENCY KEY BLADE (page 28).

The alarm status is displayed by the indicator.
• Indicator off - alarm disarmed.
• Indicator flashes once per second - alarm
is armed and engine immobilised.

2. Dock the Jaguar Smart Key into the starter
control unit. See DOCKING/UNDOCKING
THE JAGUAR SMART KEY (page 20).

Battery-backed sounder

Note: When the left-hand front door is
unlocked using the key, the alarm will sound
until the Jaguar Smart Key is docked.

In certain markets, a separate battery backed
sounder is fitted. This device will sound the
alarm if the vehicle battery or the alarm
sounder is disconnected when the security
system is armed.

Deactivating the alarm when triggered
If the alarm has been triggered, it can be
deactivated by any one of the following
methods:• Pressing the unlock button on the Jaguar
Smart Key.
• Docking the Smart Key into the starter
control unit.
• Opening a door using keyless entry.
• Pressing the START/STOP button with a
valid Jaguar Smart Key present.

Alarm
Alarm trigger information

SECURITY SENSORS

If you have reason to believe that the alarm was
triggered when you were away from the
vehicle, it is possible to check on your return
using the touch-screen.

Note: If the vehicle is to be transported by
road, rail or sea, the vehicle should not be
double-locked or the tilt and intrusion sensors
should be deactivated using the touch-screen.
See PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL
(page 21). This prevents the alarm from
sounding as the vehicle pitches and rolls.

From the touch-screen Home menu, select
Vehicle and then Veh. settings. The Security
menu is displayed automatically as the default.
Use the arrow icons to scroll to the second
screen.

Tilt sensor
The tilt sensor detects any change in the
vehicle's inclination to the ground. When the
alarm is armed and the vehicle double-locked,
any change in the vehicle's inclination will
activate the tilt alarm. This feature protects
against unauthorised towing away or
jacking-up of the vehicle.

Vehicle

Alarm triggered by:
Passenger door

Security
Parking
Valet mode

Passive arm

Auto-relock and
arm

Off

Alarm sensors

Off

The tilt alarm is disarmed when the vehicle
security system is disarmed using the Jaguar
Smart Key.

12:26 pm
JAG1309

Intrusion sensor

A text display (arrowed) will indicate if the
alarm has been triggered, and also indicate
what the cause of the trigger was (e.g. Driver
door, Passenger door, Inclination sensor,
Trunk, etc.).

The intrusion sensor is mounted in the roof
console and detects any movement within the
vehicle cabin via the use of ultrasonic sound
waves. When the alarm is armed and the
vehicle double-locked, any movement detected
inside the cabin will activate the alarm.
Note: It takes approximately 30 seconds for
the sensor to create an ultrasonic profile of the
cabin and be fully armed.
The intrusion alarm is disarmed when the
vehicle security system is disarmed using the
Jaguar Smart Key.
Note: Ensure all windows and sunroof are
closed prior to arming the alarm and
double-locking the vehicle. Failure to do so
may result in false alarms being sounded due
to movements detected outside the vehicle.

Alarm
Passive arming

Automatic relocking and re-arming of the
alarm

This vehicle is fitted with a passive arming
feature which can, if enabled, automatically
arm the anti-theft system. Passive arming will
automatically arm the perimeter alarm system
30 seconds after the driver's door is closed,
provided all doors, bonnet and luggage
compartment are closed, the ignition is
switched off and there are no valid Jaguar
Smart Keys inside the vehicle.

Automatic relock and re-arm is a feature which,
if enabled, automatically relocks the vehicle
and arms the anti-theft system.
If the vehicle is in a locked and armed state and
the remote unlock button is pressed, but none
of the doors or the luggage compartment are
opened within 45 seconds, the vehicle will
automatically relock all the doors and the
luggage compartment and will re-arm the
alarm system.

It will also automatically arm the perimeter
alarm system 30 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, if none of the doors or the luggage
compartment are opened.

Note: Automatic relocking and arming will only
relock to a centrally locked state and will only
arm to a perimeter alarm condition.

Passive arming will not lock the vehicle,
although access to the luggage compartment
via the interior or exterior release buttons will
be inhibited and the fuel filler flap will be
locked.

Automatic relocking and re-arming can be
disabled/enabled using the touch-screen.
See PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL
(page 21).

Passive arming can be disabled/enabled using
the touch-screen. See PROGRAMMING THE
REMOTE CONTROL (page 21).

Sensor faults
If the security systems detect a fault with one
of the security sensors, two error tones will
sound from the alarm siren after the vehicle is
unlocked and disarmed. If this condition
occurs, please visit your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer for rectification.

Seats
•

SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION
1

•

E93242

WARNING
Do not adjust the seat while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so could
cause loss of vehicle control and
personal injury.
The seat, head restraint, seat belt and airbags,
all contribute to the protection of the user.
Correct use of these components will give you
greater protection, therefore you should
observe the following points:
1. Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible and the
seatback reclined no more than 30
degrees.
2. Do not move the driver's seat too close to
the steering wheel. Ideally, a minimum
distance of 254 mm (10 inches) is
recommended between the breastbone
and the steering wheel airbag cover. Hold
the steering wheel in the correct position
with your arms slightly bent.
• Adjust the head restraint so that its highest
point is level with the top of your head.

Position the seat belt so that it is mid-way
between your neck and your shoulder. Fit
the strap tightly across your hips, not
across your stomach.
Ensure that your driving position is
comfortable and enables you to maintain
full control of the vehicle.

Seats
ELECTRIC SEATS

3
2

B
4

5
8

7
6

JAG1650

Seats
1. Cushion length adjustment.

Driving position memory

2. Bolster adjustment:
A. Bolster inflate.
B. Bolster deflate.

3. Lumbar support adjustment.

4. Seat back angle adjustment.
5. Head restraint height adjustment.
6. Height adjustment.

7. Fore and aft adjustment.

8. Cushion front tilt adjustment.
WARNINGS
Do not adjust a seat while the vehicle
is moving. Failure to follow this
instruction could potentially cause
personal injury or loss of vehicle control.
Before making rearward, height or
reclining seat adjustments, check that
the rear passenger has adequate leg
room.
The driver and front passenger must
not ride with the seat fully reclined.

E93239

1. Memory preset 1.
2. Memory preset 2.
3. Memory Set button.
4. Indicator light.
Once you have adjusted the driver's seat,
steering column and exterior mirrors for your
ideal driving position, the vehicle can
memorise these settings for future use.
1. Press the memory set button to activate
the memory function.

To adjust the seats, the Jaguar Smart Key must
be in the vehicle and the ignition turned on.

2. Press one of the preset buttons within five
seconds to memorise the current settings.
An audible chime will sound and MEMORY
1 (or 2) SETTINGS SAVED is displayed in
the message centre, to confirm the
settings have been memorised.
A seat position can only be memorised during
the five second active period.
Any existing settings for a memory preset will
be over-written when programming a memory
position.

Recalling a memorised position
Press the appropriate memory preset button (1
or 2), MEMORY 1 (or 2) SETTINGS RECALLED
will be displayed in the message centre.

Seats
HEAD RESTRAINTS

Whiplash protection
Both front seats are equipped with Active Head
Restraints (AHR), which reduce the risk of neck
and spinal injury (whiplash) in the event of a
rear impact. See WHIPLASH PROTECTION
(page 57).

WARNINGS
Head restraints are designed to
support the head, not the back of the
neck. The restraint must be
positioned correctly to restrain rearward
movement of the head in a collision. An
incorrectly adjusted head restraint increases
the risk of death or serious injury in the event
of a collision.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the head restraint is above the
centre line of the head. An incorrectly
adjusted head restraint increases the risk of
death or serious injury in the event of a
collision. See SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION (page 41).
On front head restraints, it is possible
to adjust the tilt of the head restraint
forwards or backwards. For greater
protection in the event of a collision, the head
restraint should be adjusted so that it is as
close to the back of the head as is practical.
Do not drive, or carry passengers,
with the head restraints removed
from occupied seats. The absence of
a correctly adjusted head restraint increases
the risk of death or serious injury in the event
of a collision.
Never adjust the head restraints while
the vehicle is in motion. An
incorrectly adjusted head restraint
increases the risk of death or serious injury in
the event of a collision.

Head restraint tilt adjustment

JAG1655

To adjust the angle of the head restraint, press
the locking button on the side of the restraint
(solid arrow) and move the restraint to the
desired position. Release the button to lock in
place.
The head restraint should be tilted so that it is
in close proximity to the back of the head, when
seated in the normal driving position.

For information on adjusting power-operated
head restraints, refer to the Electric seats
section. See ELECTRIC SEATS (page 42).

Seats
Manual head restraints

Note: Refer to the Child Safety section for
details on correct child restraint fitment.
See CHILD SEATS (page 59).

REAR SEATS
WARNINGS
Always ensure that objects carried
within the vehicle are secured
properly. Unsecured items can cause
death or serious injury in the event of an
impact or sudden manoeuvre.
Never allow passengers to travel in
the luggage compartment under any
circumstances. All vehicle occupants
should be seated correctly, and wear a seat
belt at all times when the vehicle is in motion.
Failure to do so will greatly increase the risk of
death and serious injury in the event of an
accident or heavy braking.
Always take note of safety warnings
and labels attached to the rear seats.
The labels give advice on safely
folding and erecting the seats.

E93185

1. Press the locking collar to release the head
restraint.
2. Whilst pressing the locking collar, move
the head restraint up or down to the
required position.

The split fold rear seat can be folded
completely to accommodate large loads, or
partially to accommodate long loads, and still
retain seating for passengers.

Note: It is not necessary to press the locking
collar to adjust the head restraint upwards.

Head restraint removal
CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove a front head
restraint fitted with a display screen.
This may damage electrical connections.
Manual head restraints may be removed, if
required, to fit larger child seats. Press the
locking collar and lift the restraint out of the
seat back. Ensure the restraint is refitted once
the child seat is removed.
Note: It is not possible to remove poweroperated head restraints.

Seats
Folding the rear seats

JAG0927
JAG0925

Fold the seat back part-way forward and
remove the head restraint(s) from the folded
seat back. See HEAD RESTRAINTS (page 44).

Stow the rear seat armrest.

JAG0926
JAG0928

With the luggage compartment open, pull the
relevant seat release handle, located as shown
(illustration shows view from the rear of the
vehicle, with the luggage compartment open).

Fully fold the seat back forward and, if required,
repeat the process for the second seat section.
WARNING
Ensure that the removed rear head
restraints are stored securely. Never
leave them loose in the vehicle, as
they can cause serious injury or death in the
event of an accident, heavy braking, or sudden
manoeuvres.

Seats
HEATED SEATS

Raising the rear seats
The process for raising the rear seat is the
reverse of folding.

Home

External 15

Audio/TV

WARNINGS
Ensure that when the seat back is
raised, the seat belts are routed
correctly and are not trapped by the
seat back.
Ensure that when the seat back is
raised, the locking mechanism is fully
engaged. Failure to do so can
increase the risk of death or serious injury in
the event of an accident or sudden manoeuvre
or heavy braking.
Before driving, ensure that the head
restraints are correctly fitted to the
rear seats.

Climate
Phone
Navigatio

20 .5 C 17 .5 C
Left

Right

DAB radio

DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra
BBC National DAB
B i Subch.

Vehicle
12:26 pm

Valet

JAG1512

Note: To prevent the battery from becoming
discharged the seat heaters will only operate
when the engine is running.
Seat heating is adjusted through the vehicle
touch-screen (from either the Climate or the
Home menu). The seat heaters have three
temperature levels, indicated by the three bars
adjacent to each seat icon.
• Touch the left or right-hand seat icon (as
appropriate) to activate the seat heater,
which initially selects the maximum
temperature level (three bars).
• Touch the icon a second time to select the
medium temperature setting (two bars).
• Touch the icon a third time to select the
lowest temperature setting (one bar).
• Touch the icon again to switch off the seat
heaters.

Seats
CLIMATE SEATS
Home

Cooled ventilation

External

Touch the down arrow to activate cooled
ventilation for the chosen seating position. The
system automatically selects the maximum
cooled ventilation setting (3 blue bars
illuminated).

Audio/TV
Climate
Phone

20 .5 C 17 .5 C
Left

Navigation

Right

DAB radio

DAB1

BC 5Live Xtra
National DAB

To adjust the level of cooled ventilation, touch
the up arrow the appropriate number of times:
• 1 touch = intermediate cooled ventilation
(2 blue bars).
• 2 touches = minimum cooled ventilation (1
blue bar).
• 3 touches = cooled ventilation off (no bars
illuminated).

TA FM DAB i Subch.

Vehicle
12:26 pm

Valet

JAG1513

Note: To prevent the battery from becoming
discharged the climate seats will only operate
when the engine is running.

Backrest ventilation only
It is possible to set the seat ventilation so that
only the seat backrest is ventilated. Backrest
only ventilation is selected using the
touch-screen.

Seat ventilation is adjusted through the vehicle
touch-screen (from either the Climate or the
Home menu). The climate seats have three
heated and three cooled settings, indicated by
the three bars adjacent to each seat icon. These
bars will appear red when heated ventilation is
selected, or blue when cooled ventilation is
selected.

Climate
Auto

External

Auto

Sensitivity

Left

Climate seat
settings
Ventilation

Heated ventilation

Auto

Always
open

Change units

Touch the up arrow to activate heated
ventilation for the chosen seating position. The
system automatically selects the maximum
heated ventilation setting (3 red bars
illuminated).

12 : 26 pm
JAG0914

•
•

To adjust the level of heated ventilation, touch
the down arrow the appropriate number of
times:
• 1 touch = intermediate heated ventilation
(2 red bars).
• 2 touches = minimum heated ventilation (1
red bar).
• 3 touches = heated ventilation off (no bars
illuminated).

From the Climate menu, select Settings.
For the left or right front seat select the
appropriate icon; either full seat ventilation
(1) or seat backrest ventilation only (2).

Seat belts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS
Do not carry hard, fragile or sharp
items between your person and the
seat belt. In an impact, the pressure
from the seat belt on such items can cause
them to break, which in turn may cause death
or serious injuries.
Each belt assembly must only be used
by one occupant; it is dangerous to
put a belt around a child being carried
on the occupant's lap.
The occupants of the front seats
should not travel with the seat back at
more than 30 degrees from upright.
Doing so will reduce the protection afforded by
the seat belt.

Seat belts

E82942

WARNINGS
Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the front
of the pelvis or the pelvis chest and shoulders,
as applicable; wearing the lap section of the
belt across the abdominal area must be
avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed. A slack belt
will greatly reduce the protection afforded to
the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid
contamination of the webbing with
polishes, oils and chemicals, and
particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely
be carried out using mild soap and water.
The belt should be replaced if
webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.
It is essential to replace the entire
assembly after it has been worn in a
severe impact even if damage to the
assembly is not obvious.
Belts should not be worn with the
straps twisted.

Seat belt safety
WARNINGS
Seat belts should be worn by all
vehicle occupants, for every journey,
no matter how short. Failure to do so,
will greatly increase the risk of death or
serious injury in the event of an accident.
Never wear just the lap belt or just the
shoulder belt of a lap/shoulder
diagonal seat belt. Both of these
actions are extremely dangerous and may
increase your risk of injury.
No modifications or additions should
be made by the user which will either
prevent the seat belt adjusting
devices from operating to remove slack, or
prevent the seat belt assembly from being
adjusted to remove slack.
A slack seat belt offers a greatly reduced level
of occupant protection in an impact.

Seat belts
•

WARNINGS
If any damage, wear, cuts, defects or
impaired operation are noted with the
seat belts, the vehicle should be taken
to a Dealer/Authorised Repairer for immediate
attention. Do not use the vehicle if the seat
belts cannot be operated correctly.
When using seat belts to restrain
items other than occupants, take care
to ensure that the belts are not
damaged, or exposed to sharp edges.
Care must be taken to avoid
contaminating the seat belt webbing
and seat belt mechanisms with any
chemicals, liquids, grit, dirt or cleaning
products. If the seat belts do become
contaminated, they should be replaced
immediately. Contaminated seat belts my not
operate correctly in an impact and cannot be
relied upon.
The use of comfort clips, or devices
that would create slackness in the
seat belt system, is not advised.

•

With the seat belt unfastened, unreel the
seat belt to the limit of its travel. Check that
it unreels smoothly with no snatches or
snags. Allow the belt to fully retract, again
checking for smooth operation.
Partially unreel the seat belt, then hold the
tongue plate and give a quick forward pull.
The mechanism must lock and prevent any
further unreeling.

If any of the seat belts fail to meet those
criteria, immediately contact your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.

SEAT BELT REMINDER
If the driver's seat belt is not
fastened when the vehicle is in
motion, a chime will be heard and
the seat belt warning indicator will illuminate.
The warning chime and indicator will also be
activated if the front passenger seat is
occupied without the seat belt being fastened.
Note: Objects placed on the front passenger
seat may activate the seat belt reminder
warning chime and indicator. It is
recommended that any objects placed on the
front passenger seat are secured using the seat
belt.

Seat belt checks
Note: If the vehicle is parked on an incline, the
seat belt mechanism may lock. This is not a
fault and the belt should be gently eased out
from the upper anchorage.
The seat belts should be inspected regularly to
check for fraying, cuts or wear to the webbing,
and the condition and security of the
mechanism, buckles, adjusters, and mounting
points.
• With the seat belt fastened, give the
webbing near the buckle a quick upward
pull. The buckle must remain securely
locked.

Seat belts
USING SEAT BELTS DURING
PREGNANCY

FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS

E82643
E93298

WARNINGS
Position the seat belt correctly for the
safety of the mother and unborn
child. Never wear just the lap strap,
and never sit on the lap strap whilst using just
the shoulder strap. Both of these actions are
extremely dangerous and may increase your
risk of serious injury in the event of an accident
or during emergency braking.
Never place anything between you
and the seat belt in an attempt to
cushion the impact in the event of an
accident. It can be dangerous and will reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt in preventing
injury.

1. Draw the belt out smoothly, ensure that the
belt height, the seat, and your position on
the seat are correct. The belt should lay flat
across the pelvis, chest, and mid-point of
the collar bone between the neck and
shoulder.
2. With the seat belt correctly positioned,
place the metal tongue into the buckle
nearest to you. Press it in until a click is
heard.

Releasing the seat belts
Note: When releasing the seat belt it is
advisable to hold the belt before pressing the
release button. This will prevent the belt from
retracting too quickly.

Position the lap strap comfortably across the
hips beneath the abdomen. Place the diagonal
part of the seat belt between the breasts and to
the side of the abdomen. Ensure that the seat
belt is not slack or twisted.

To release the seat belt, press the red button.

Seat belts
SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
1

E82904

WARNING
Correct seat belt adjustment is
essential for safety and comfort.
Ensure that the height is correctly
adjusted and the mechanism is locked in place
before driving the vehicle. Do not attempt to
adjust the seat belt height once the vehicle is
in motion. Doing so may cause you to loose
control of the vehicle, or incorrectly adjust the
seat belt.
1. Press to release the catch.
2. With the catch depressed move the
mechanism slide up or down to the
required height. Ensure that the locking
mechanism has engaged.
When correctly positioned the seat belt should
cross the collar bone at the mid-point between
the neck and end of your shoulder.
Where possible, rear seat passengers should
adjust their seating position to achieve the
same seat belt position.

Supplementary restraints system
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The SRS is not designed to operate as a result
of:
• Rear impacts.
• Minor front impacts.
• Minor side impacts.
• Heavy braking.
• Driving over bumps and pot holes.

Introduction
In the event of a collision, the airbag control
unit monitors the rate of deceleration caused
by the collision. This information is then used
to determine whether airbags should be
deployed.

Therefore, it follows that considerable
superficial damage to the vehicle can occur,
without causing the airbags to deploy.

Airbag deployment is dependent on the rate at
which the passenger compartment changes
velocity following the collision. The
circumstances affecting different collisions
(vehicle speed, angle of impact, type and size
of object hit, etc.), vary considerably and will
affect the rate of deceleration accordingly.
The Supplementary Restraint System (SRS)
components include:• SRS warning indicator.
• Rotary coupler.
• Airbag modules.
• Seat belt pre-tensioners (front seat belts).
• Restraints control module.
• Crash sensors.
• Airbag wiring harnesses.

Supplementary restraints system
Airbags

E94099

1. Driver's airbag.

WARNINGS
Airbags inflate at high speeds, and
can cause injuries. To minimise the
risk of injury, ensure that all vehicle
occupants wear correctly positioned seat
belts, sit correctly in the seats, and position
the seats as far back as practical.
Sitting centrally and correctly in each
seating position helps ensure that a
gap is maintained between the side of
the vehicle and the head and torso. This will
aid inflation of the curtain and seat-mounted
airbags.
Airbag inflation takes place
instantaneously. Not all airbags are
designed to protect against the
effects of secondary impacts. During
secondary impact, a level of protection may be
provided by a correctly worn seat belt.

2. Front passenger airbag.
3. Seat mounted side airbags.
4. Curtain airbags.
WARNINGS
High speed impacts may cause
serious injury or death irrespective of
safety features fitted to a vehicle.
Always drive with caution and consideration
for the vehicle's characteristics, road and
weather conditions.
The airbag cannot provide protection
in some types of impact, therefore
seat belts should be worn at all times
by the driver and passengers in all seating
positions.

Supplementary restraints system
Airbags cannot deploy correctly if they are
obstructed. Examples of obstructions are:• Any part of an occupants body in contact
with, or close to, an airbag covering.
• Objects placed on, or close to, an airbag
cover.
• Clothing, sun screens, or other material
hanging from grab handles.
• Clothing, cushions, or other material,
covering seat mounted airbags.
• Seat covers which are not approved by
Jaguar, or specifically designed for use
with seat mounted airbags.
• Luggage that intrudes into the area that
will be occupied by a deploying airbag
system.

WARNINGS
Phone systems should only be
installed by qualified persons familiar
with the operation of, and
requirements for, vehicles fitted with SRS. If
you are in any doubt, seek advice from your
Jaguar Dealer/Authorised repairer.
Note: The general location of airbags fitted to
the vehicle are marked by the word AIRBAG.
Always contact your Dealer/Authorised
repairer if:• An airbag inflates.
• The front or sides of the vehicle are
damaged.
• Any part of the SRS shows signs of
cracking or damage, including trim
covering airbags.

This list is not exhaustive and it remains the
responsibility of the driver and passengers to
ensure that the airbags are not obstructed in
any way.

Airbag operation
WARNINGS
For the airbags to operate correctly
the roof lining and door post trims
must be in good condition, correctly
fitted, and free from obstruction. Any damage,
wear, or incorrect fitment should be referred to
your Dealer/Authorised repairer as soon as
possible for examination and repair.
Do not allow passengers to obstruct
the operation of the airbags by
placing any part of their person, or
any objects, in contact with, or close to, an
airbag module. Airbags deploy at very high
speeds and can cause serious injury or death
if objects or occupants are within the area of
deployment.

Deployment and deflation
In the event of a collision, the restraints control
system monitors the rate and direction of
deceleration. If required to supplement the seat
belts, airbags will be deployed as appropriate.
After operation, frontal airbags do not retain
pressure.

Front airbags
The front passenger’s and driver’s airbags are
able to deploy in two stages, depending on the
severity of the frontal impact. In a severe
impact, the airbags inflate fully to offer
maximum protection. In a lower severity
impact, less inflation may be required, so the
airbags inflate in a different manner.

Supplementary restraints system
Side and curtain airbags

Airbag deployment effects

To ensure that the side and curtain airbags are
fully effective:

WARNINGS
When an airbag inflates, a by-product
of the gas generation may be released
as small particles. It is possible that
this may cause irritation and should be
thoroughly flushed from the eyes and any cuts
or abrasions.
After inflation, some airbag
components are at high
temperatures. To prevent injury, do
no touch the airbag components until they
have cooled.
In order to react with sufficient speed,
airbags are deployed by a pyrotechnic
device. Consequently, airbag
deployment is accompanied by a very loud
noise which may cause discomfort and
temporary loss of hearing.

WARNINGS
Do not allow passengers to obstruct
the operation of the airbags by
placing any part of their person, or
any objects, in contact with, or close to, an
airbag module. Airbags deploy at very high
speeds and can cause serious injury or death
if objects or occupants are within the area of
deployment.
Do not sit too close to, lean or
sleep against the door trim. The
side and curtain airbags could
injure you as they deploy.
Do not lean out of the window.
Only use approved accessories (e.g.
seat covers).
Due to the function of the curtain
airbag deployment, consult your
Jaguar Dealer/Authorised Repairer,
prior to installing any accessories in the upper
environment/pillar trim area (e.g. hands-free
telephone kits).
Side and curtain airbags are designed to offer
increased protection for the torso and head in
a side impact. The curtain airbags may deflate
at a slower rate than the front or side airbags,
to afford prolonged protection.

Supplementary restraints system
AIRBAG WARNING LAMP

WHIPLASH PROTECTION

The airbag warning indicator is
mounted in the instrument pack,
and will illuminate as a bulb check
when the starter switch is turned on.
WARNING
If the warning indicator signals that a
fault is present in the system, do not
use a child restraint on the front
passenger seat. Doing so will increase the risk
of death or serious injury to the child.
If any of the following warning indicator
conditions occur, the vehicle should be
checked by your Dealer/Authorised repairer
immediately.
• The warning indicator fails to illuminate
when the starter switch is initially turned
on.
• The warning indicator fails to extinguish
within six seconds of the starter switch
being turned on.
• The warning indicator illuminates at any
time other than the bulb check, when the
starter switch is on.

E93243

Both front seats are equipped with Active Head
Restraints (AHR), which reduce the risk of neck
and spinal injury (whiplash) in the event of a
rear impact.
When activated, the head restraint moves
upwards and forwards, supporting the
occupant's head.
After activation, the whiplash protection
mechanism automatically resets and does not
need to be replaced.

Supplementary restraints system
AIRBAG LABELS

AIRBAG SERVICE INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair,
replace, modify, or tamper with, any
part of the SRS. This includes wiring
or components in the vicinity of SRS
components. Doing so may cause the system
to trigger, or render the system inoperative,
either of which may result in death or serious
injuries.
Do not use any electrical test
equipment or devices in the vicinity of
SRS components or wiring. Doing so
may cause the system to trigger, or render the
system inoperative, either of which may result
in death or serious injuries.

E94101

All of the following operations should only be
carried out by a Dealer/Authorised Repairer, or
suitably qualified person:• Removal or repair of any wiring or
component in the vicinity of any SRS
components.
• Installation of electrical, or electronic,
equipment and accessories.
• Modification to the front or sides of the
vehicle exterior.
• Attachment of accessories to the front or
sides of the vehicle.

Airbag warning information is printed on the
driver and passenger sun visors.

In the event of the vehicle being dismantled,
airbag module removal and disposal must be
carried out by a qualified person.

Child safety
CHILD SEATS

WARNINGS
Do not use a child seat that hooks
over the seat back. This type of seat
cannot be satisfactorily secured and
is unlikely to be safe for your child.

WARNINGS
Do not use a child restraint on a seat
protected by an airbag in front of it.
There is a risk of death or serious
injury when the airbag deploys.
Crash statistics show that children
are safest when properly restrained in
a child or infant restraint system that
is secured in a rear seating position.
For optimum safety, children should
travel in the rear of the vehicle at all
times; front passenger seat travel is
not recommended. However, if it is
essential that a child travels in the front, set the
vehicle seat fully rearward and seat the child in
an approved forward-facing child seat. Do not
use a rear-facing child seat - an inflating airbag
could impact with the seat and cause serious
injury.
Do not use a forward facing child seat
until the child using it is above the
minimum weight of 9 kg (20 lb.) and
able to sit up unaided. Up to the age of two, a
child's spine and neck are not sufficiently
developed to avoid injury in a frontal impact.
Do not allow a baby or infant to be
held or carried on the lap. The force of
a crash can increase effective body
weight by as much as thirty times, making it
impossible to hold onto the child.
Children typically require the use of a
booster seat appropriate to their age
and size, thereby enabling the seat
belts to be properly fitted, reducing the risk of
injury in a crash. Children could be
endangered in a crash if their child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle.

The seat belts fitted to your vehicle are
designed for adults and larger children. For
their safety, it is very important for all infants
and children under 12 years of age to be
restrained in a suitable child safety seat
appropriate to their age and size.
Children are always safest when seated in a
rear seating position.
If it is essential that a child travels in the front
passenger seat, Jaguar recommends that the
following preparations are made before fitting
the child restraint.
• Adjust the front passenger seat fully
rearwards.
• Adjust the lumbar support to its minimum
support position.
• Adjust the seat cushion to its highest
position. If cushion front tilt adjustment is
possible, adjust it to its lowest position.
• Adjust the seat back to the fully upright
position.
• Adjust the seat belt adjustable upper
anchorage to its lowest position.
In some countries, legislation prohibits
children travelling in the front of a vehicle.
Ensure that you are familiar with the legislation
in force where the vehicle is being used and are
in full compliance.

Child safety
•

WARNING
Original text according to ECE R94.
01. Extreme hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an airbag in front of it!

•

Regularly check the fit and condition of
child restraints. If the fit is poor, or
wear/damage is visible replace the
restraint immediately.
Set a good example - always wear your
seat belt.

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
CAUTION
Information given within the table is
correct at the time of going to press.
However, availability of child restraints may
change. Please consult your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer for the latest
recommendation.

E79258

This symbol is affixed to the end of the fascia
on the passenger side. Its purpose is to warn
against the use of a rear facing child seat in the
front passenger seat, when the front passenger
airbag is fitted.

For optimum safety, children should travel in
the rear of the vehicle at all times; front
passenger seat travel is not recommended.
However, if it is essential that a child travels in
the front, set the vehicle seat fully rearward and
seat the child in an approved forward-facing
child seat. Do not use a rear-facing child seat an inflating airbag could impact with the seat
and cause serious injury.

Child restraint check list
Every time a child travels in the vehicle observe
the following:• Use appropriate child restraints.
• Carefully follow the restraint system
manufacturers instructions.
• Adjust the harnesses for every child on
every trip.
• Ensure that all slack is removed from the
adult seat belt.
• Always attach the top tether when
installing an ISOFIX seat. See CHILD SEAT
ANCHOR POINTS (page 62).
• Always check the security of the child
restraint.
• Do not dress a child in bulky clothing, or
place any objects/padding between the
child and the restraint.

Note: The information contained in the
following table may not be applicable to all
countries. If you are in any doubt regarding the
type and fitment of child seats seek advice from
your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Note: The legislation which governs how and
where children should be carried when
travelling in a vehicle, is subject to change. It is
the responsibility of the driver to comply with
all regulations in force.

Child safety
Child safety seating and positions
Seating positions

Front passenger*

Rear outboard

Rear centre

Up to 10 kg (22 lb.)
0 to 9 months

0+ = Up to 13 kg (29 lb.)
0 to 18 months

9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lb.)
9 months to 4 years

II =

15 to 25 kg (33 to 55 lb.)
4 to 9 years

III = 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb.)
8 to 12 years

Mass group
0=

•
•

•

BOOSTER CUSHIONS

U = Suitable for universal category
restraints approved for this mass group.
UF = Suitable for forward facing Universal
category restraints approved for this mass
group.
X = Not suitable for child restraint fitment
in this mass group.

In a situation where a child is too large to fit
into a child safety seat, but is still too small to
safely fit the three point belt properly, a booster
seat is recommended for maximum safety.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for
fitting and use, then adjust the seat belt to suit.

* Jaguar recommend that the front passenger
seat be positioned fully rearward, with the
cushion adjusted to the highest position when
installing child restraints.
Note: Ages given are approximate. In case of
doubt, the child’s weight, not age, should be
used when considering an appropriate child
seat.

Child safety
CHILD SEAT ANCHOR POINTS
ISOFIX anchor points (not Australia)
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to fit ISOFIX restraints
to the centre rear seating position.
The anchor bars are not designed to
hold an ISOFIX restraint in this position.
If the restraint is not correctly
anchored, there is a significant risk of
injury to the child in the event of a
collision or emergency braking.
Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only loads
imposed by correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for
attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
If removing a head restraint in order
to fit a child restraint, always secure
the head restraint when storing it. If
left loose in the vehicle, it may cause death or
serious injury during sudden braking or an
impact.

E94103

Both of the outer rear seat positions are
equipped to accept ISOFIX restraints.
This symbol is shown on a label
sewn into the seats to indicate the
position of the ISOFIX lower
anchorages.
Note: The information contained in the
following table may not be applicable to all
countries. If you are in any doubt regarding the
type and fitment of child seats seek advice from
your Jaguar Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Child safety
ISOFIX child seats
Mass group

Size classes

Carrycot
0=

Up to 10 kg (22 lb.)
0 to 9 months

0+ = Up to 13 kg (29 lb.)
0 to 18 months

Fixtures

Rear outboard seats

F/G

ISO L1/L2

ISO R1

IL*

C/D/E

ISO R1/R2/R3

IL*

C/D

ISO R2/R3

9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lb.)
9 months to 4 years

A/B1/B

ISO F2/F2X/F3

IUF

II =

15 to 25 kg (33 to 55 lb.)
4 to 9 years

N/A

III = 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb.)
8 to 12 years

N/A

•

IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child
restraint systems of universal category
approved for use in the mass group.
IL = These ISOFIX child restraint systems
are of the specific vehicle, restricted or
semi-universal categories.
* = Child seats suitable for use in these
locations are Britax Cosy-Tot Premium
Infant carrier and Britax Duo Plus child
seat.

Note: Ages given are approximate. In case of
doubt, the child’s weight, not age, should be
used when considering an appropriate child
seat.

E94104

4. Test the security of the child restraint. To
do this attempt to pull the restraint away
from the vehicle seat and twist the restraint
from side to side. Even if the restraint
appears secure you should still check the
anchor points visually to ensure correct
attachment.

Installing an ISOFIX child seat
To install an ISOFIX child seat:1. Raise or remove the head restraint from
the relevant seat.
2. Lift the velcro flap to expose the ISOFIX
locking mechanism.

Note: Always ensure that if an upper tether is
provided, it is fitted and tightened correctly.

3. Slide the child seat into the locking
mechanism.

Child safety
Tether anchorage points (Australia only)

Attaching tether straps
1. Install the child restraint securely in one of
the rear seating positions.
2. Pass the tether strap over the seat back
and beneath the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook to the tether
anchor point on the back of the seat.
Ensure that the tether strap hook is facing
the correct way. See illustration.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer's instructions.

E94105

WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses
or for attaching other items or equipment to
the vehicle.
If a child seat or restraint system is to
be fitted to the centre seating
position, the centre armrest must be
in the stowed position (folded into the seat).
Note: A tether anchorage is provided for the
centre seat position. Do not use this anchor
position with an ISOFIX child seat.

Child safety
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
Child safety locks are fitted to the rear doors to
allow you to prevent accidental opening of the
doors when the vehicle is in motion.
If children are to be carried in the rear seat
positions, it is recommended that the rear door
interior handles are disabled.
Note: For convenience, the rear door interior
handles should be re-enabled when carrying
adult passengers in the rear seat positions.

E94106

To change the child lock settings:1. Open the door to access the child safety
lock.
2. Insert the emergency key into the slot and
rotate a quarter of a turn, to enable or
disable the interior door handle, as
required.

Pedestrian protection
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

AFTER DEPLOYMENT OF THE
PEDESTRIAN PROTECTION SYSTEM

The pedestrian protection system has been
designed to reduce lower leg and head injuries
in the event of a frontal collision with a
pedestrian.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to open the bonnet if the
pedestrian protection system has been
deployed.

The bumper includes energy absorbing foam
and plastics in its construction to reduce leg
injuries and sensors that detect the collision
with a pedestrian.

The vehicle must be stopped as soon as it is
safe to do so.
The hazard warning lamps will be activated and
can only be switched off by pressing the engine
START/STOP button to turn the engine off and
on again.
A warning message CHECK PEDESTRIAN
SYSTEM will appear on the message centre
and the vehicle should be transported to the
nearest Dealer/Authorised Repairer. The
vehicle must not be driven when the bonnet
has been deployed. See Vehicle recovery
(page 253).
Note: If the warning message CHECK
PEDESTRIAN SYSTEM appears in the message
centre when the bonnet has not been deployed,
the vehicle should be taken to the nearest
Dealer/Authorised Repairer immediately. It can
be driven.

E94698

Deployment
During a pedestrian collision, the sensors
initiate a bonnet deployment system that
releases the bonnet hinge system and raises
the rear edge of the bonnet by approximately
130 mm (5.1 inches).

If any significant damage occurs to the front
bumper it should be inspected by a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as
possible.

This increases the gap between the bonnet and
the components within the engine
compartment e.g. engine, suspension etc. This
increased gap creates a cushion to mitigate
injury caused to the pedestrian.
The bonnet deployment system is active only
when the ignition is on and the vehicle is driven
between the speeds of approximately 20 km/h
(12 mph) and 45 km/h (28 mph).

Steering wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL

Two steering wheel positions can be stored
and recalled by the driver position memory
system.
The message centre will indicate which switch
position has been selected by displaying the
message COLUMN ADJUST or COLUMN
ADJUST AUTO.

Entry and exit mode
Entry and exit mode provides automatic
movement of the steering column, to allow
easier entry to, or exit from, the vehicle.
Entry and exit mode is selected by setting the
steering column adjustment switch to the
AUTO position.
Exit: If the driver's door is opened, the steering
column will move to the uppermost tilt
position, unless already in that position.
Entry: When the door is closed and the ignition
is switched on, the steering column will return
to its previous position.

E91122

WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel
position whilst the vehicle is in
motion. Doing so will reduce control
of the vehicle and may cause unpredictable
steering movements.

Note: If the steering column switch is moved
away from AUTO when the steering column is
in the Exit position, the steering column will
move back to its previous (driving) position,
when the driver's door is closed and the
ignition is switched on.
If the steering column position is manually
adjusted during Entry or Exit operation,
steering column movement will stop.

CAUTION
Do not use steering wheel mounted
security devices, as movement of the
steering wheel in entry and exit mode, could
result in damage to the vehicle or possible
injury to the occupant.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for tilt and
reach, as follows:
1. Turn the switch to the COLUMN or AUTO
position.
2. Move the switch forwards or rearwards to
adjust reach.
3. Move the switch up or down to adjust tilt.

Steering wheel
HORN
Climate

External

Auto

12 C
Auto

21.5 C

Temp. sync.

Settings

Auto

A/C

OFF

12:26pm

E91123

E94700

The dual tone horn is operated by pressing the
centre pad on the steering wheel.

The heated steering wheel can also be activated
via the Climate menu on the touch-screen. With
the engine running, touch the steering wheel
icon to turn the heating on or off.

The horn also operates as the alarm sounder, if
the vehicle alarm system is activated.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL
The heated steering wheel is activated via the
touch-screen main Home menu.
Home

External

Audio/TV
Climate
Phone
Navigation

20 .5 C 17 .5 C
Left

DAB radio

DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra
BBC National DAB
TA FM DAB i Subch.

Vehicle
12:26 pm

Valet

JAG1514

With the engine running, touch the steering
wheel icon to turn the heating on. The icon will
glow red when the steering wheel heater is on.

Steering wheel
AUDIO CONTROL
1

VOICE CONTROL
JaguarVoice control provides a safe and
convenient way of operating certain vehicle
systems, without the need to operate the
controls manually.

Voice commands are available for the phone,
navigation and touch-screen display systems,
and a notepad facility is provided, to allow
voice notes to be recorded. Help and tutorial
functions provide advice on operating the
system. Information on JaguarVoice operation
of the telephone and navigation systems is
detailed later in this handbook.
See TELEPHONE VOICE CONTROL (page 323).
See USING VOICE CONTROL (page 373).

E91129

1. Rotate (up or down) to increase or
decrease volume.
2. Rotate (up or down) and release, to scroll
up or down through preset radio stations
or CD tracks.
Rotate and hold (for two seconds) to select
the next or previous radio station on the
waveband, or to select the next or previous
loaded CD (on multi-disc CD players).
3. Press repeatedly to scroll through the
audio source options, comprising: FM1,
FM2, AM, CD, DAB radio, Auxiliary input,
Portable Audio Interface and TV options.
Press and hold (for two seconds) to select
Phonebook view (when a phone is
connected to the system).
4. Press to mute the audio unit.
Press to dial, answer or end a phone call.

E95902

The system is controlled using the voice button
on the steering wheel (arrowed). Voice
commands are picked up by a dedicated
microphone and audible feedback will be heard
through the audio system speakers.

Steering wheel
Activating the system

Note: Changing the Voice recognition language
will not affect the language settings for the
touch-screen.

To activate voice control, press the voice
button on the steering wheel. A tone will be
heard and LISTENING will be displayed in the
message centre, to indicate that the system is
now waiting for a voice command.

Giving a command
Note: If background noise is excessive (e.g.
driving with windows open), the voice system
may not recognise a given voice command.

Note: It is only necessary to press the voice
button at the beginning of each voice session.

Press and release the Voice button on the
steering wheel and, after the tone, say one of
the commands listed later in this section, or
one of the commands given in either the
Telephone voice section or the Navigation
voice section, as appropriate. See TELEPHONE
VOICE CONTROL (page 323). See USING
VOICE CONTROL (page 373).

Language and accent
Voice feedback is given in the same language
as is set for Voice recognition. For example, if
the Voice recognition language is set to UK
English, the system will not recognise other
languages (e.g. US English). The language for
the system can be changed using the
touch-screen as follows:

Note: Always wait until the tone finishes
sounding before giving a voice command.

Voice

Give commands while facing forwards, in a
natural speaking voice as if talking to a
passenger or on the phone. Most accents are
understood without difficulty, but if the system
does not recognise the command, the system
will respond with SORRY and allow two more
attempts to say the command.

Settings
Operating guide
Command list
Add phone nametags

12 : 26 pm

The system will repeat the command (as
understood by the system) back to you as
confirmation. The command will then be acted
on or the system will ask for further
information - always wait until after the tone
has sounded before speaking.

Voice

Voice language
English UK

Change

Feedback Volume

Once you are familiar with system requests, it
is possible to skip to the end of the request (to
when the tone sounds) to give your response.
To achieve this, briefly press and release the
voice button on the steering wheel during the
system request.

12 : 26 pm
E96024

1. From the Home menu, select Comms.
2. From the Comms menu, select Voice and
then select Settings.

Note: If the Voice button on the steering wheel
is pressed before the system is ready to receive
a command, VOICE NOT READY will be
displayed in the message centre.

3. Select Change, then select the desired
language from the options available.

Steering wheel
To cancel the tutorial, press and release the
Voice button and say CANCEL. To skip to the
previous or next lesson of the tutorial, press
and release the Voice button and say
PREVIOUS or NEXT.

Cancelling voice control
To cancel a voice command, press and hold the
Voice button on the steering wheel until a
double tone is heard.
Note: If a phone call is received during a voice
session, voice control is cancelled.

Command help
For a list of the most commonly used voice
commands, press and release the Voice button
and, after the tone, say the appropriate
command from the following list:
• VOICE HELP
• NAVIGATION HELP
• PHONE HELP
• DISPLAY HELP
• NOTEPAD HELP

Voice system tutorial
To listen to a tutorial on how to use
JaguarVoice, press and release the voice
button and, after the tone, say VOICE
TUTORIAL.
The tutorial is divided into four lessons and has
a total duration of approximately four minutes.
The tutorial can only be undertaken with the
vehicle stationary and parked.
Voice
Settings
Operating guide
Comm
Add phone nametags

12 : 26 pm

Voice
To give a voice command briefly press
the voice button and speak normally
after the tone
Tutorial will help you start to use your
voice control system

Tutorial
12 : 26 pm
E96025

The tutorial can also be accessed via the
touch-screen.
1. Select Comms from the Home menu.
2. From the Comms menu, select Voice.
3. From the Voice menu, select Operating
guide and then select Tutorial.

Steering wheel
Full command list
Voice

A full list of voice commands available can be
accessed on the touch-screen.

Voice
Notepad

Voice

Select a system for the list of
voice commands

Phone

Settings
Operating guide
Command list
Add ph

12 : 26 pm
tags

Voice
Phone help

12 : 26 pm
Phone reject calls

Voice

Phone accept calls

Comms

Phone dial number

Navigation
Display

Phone redial

Select a system for the list of
voice commands
JAG0899

1. Select the appropriate system (Phone in
this example).

12 : 26 pm
E96026

1. Select Comms from the Home menu.

2. Scroll down to view the entire command
list for the chosen system.

2. From the Comms menu, select Voice.

Nametags

3. From the Voice menu select Command
list.

Nametags allow the voice system to be
personalised with the addition of names for
phone numbers and navigation locations,
destinations and waypoints. A nametag can be
any unique name chosen by the user.

4. Select Navigation or Display to view the
relevant command list or select Comms to
view the options available.
If Comms was selected, you can now choose
which system’s command list you wish to view
(Voice, Notepad or Phone)

Details for storing and using nametags in
conjunction with the telephone and Navigation
systems, are given later in this handbook.
See TELEPHONE VOICE CONTROL (page 323).
See USING VOICE CONTROL (page 373).
A spoken list of currently stored nametags can
be heard by pressing and releasing the Voice
button and saying PHONE PLAY DIRECTORY
or NAVIGATION PLAY DIRECTORY, as
appropriate.

Steering wheel
Notepad

Voice volume adjustment

The notepad facility enables the user to record
a note, up to a maximum of 30 seconds
duration, which can be subsequently recalled.

The volume level for voice recognition can be
adjusted independently, either by using the
steering wheel controls or using the
touch-screen:
• Press the voice button on the steering
wheel, to initiate a voice session. Use the
volume control thumbwheel on the
steering wheel to adjust the volume, as
required.
• Select Vehicle from the touch-screen
Home menu, then select Veh. settings.
Find the correct entry from the menu of
infotainment volume settings and adjust as
required.

Note: To hear information on notepad
commands, press the Voice button, wait for the
tone to sound and then say NOTEPAD HELP.

Recording a note
1. Press and release the Voice button, wait
for the tone to sound, then say RECORD
NOTE.
2. Say the words of the note to be recorded,
then press and hold the Voice button to
end and save the note.
Note: The maximum length of a note is 30
seconds, after which time the recording of the
note will be ended automatically.

Voice commands
This is a list and a description of the basic
Voice commands used to operate the system.
A list and description of telephone and
Navigation system commands, is detailed later
in this handbook. See TELEPHONE VOICE
CONTROL (page 323). See NAVIGATION
SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS (page 374).

Playing a note
Press and release the Voice button, wait for the
tone to sound, then say PLAY NOTEPAD. If
multiple notes are stored on the system, press
and release the Voice button during playback
and say NEXT, to skip to the next note.

Deleting notes
To delete an individual note, press and release
the Voice button during playback of the note to
be deleted and say DELETE.

Command

Description

VOICE HELP

Plays information on
operating the Voice
system.

VOICE TUTORIAL Initiates a four-part
tutorial on use of the
Voice system.

To delete all notes stored on the system, press
and release the Voice button and say CLEAR
NOTEPAD.

DISPLAY HELP

Plays information on
touch-screen display
voice commands.

DISPLAY SHOW
PHONE

The Phone menu is
displayed on the
touch-screen.

Steering wheel
Command

Description

DISPLAY SHOW
NAVIGATION

The Navigation main
menu is displayed on the
touch-screen (the
navigation caution must
be accepted before the
menu is displayed).

DISPLAY ON

Turns the touch-screen
on.

DISPLAY OFF

Turns the touch-screen
off.

NOTEPAD HELP

Plays information on
notepad commands.

RECORD NOTE

Allows recording of a
note, up to 30 seconds
long.

PLAY NOTEPAD

Plays all currently stored
notes.

CRUISE CONTROL

E97079

1. SET - Rotate and release to engage cruise
control (at the vehicle's current speed).
With cruise control operating, rotate up or
down to increase or decrease the speed in
2 km/h (1 mph) steps.
2. CANCEL - Press to cancel cruise control.
The previously programmed set speed will
be retained and can be reselected by
pressing RESUME.

CLEAR NOTEPAD Deletes all notes currently
stored in notepad.

3. RESUME - Press to resume the previously
programmed set speed (e.g. after cruise
control has been cancelled).
4. GAP (ACC only) - Rotate up or down to
increase or decrease the time gap to the
vehicle ahead. The gap can be set to one of
four pre-defined intervals. The current
setting will be displayed in the message
centre.
For more information about cruise control:
See USING CRUISE CONTROL (page 156).
For more information about adaptive cruise
control (ACC): See USING ACC (page 159).

Lighting
LIGHTING CONTROL
Note: If the ignition system is switched off and
the lamps are left on, the message centre will
display LIGHTS ON.
The exterior lamps are controlled by the
left-hand column stalk switch.
The rotary collar on the stalk has three
positions for turning the exterior lamps on or
off and positions for autolamps and exit delay.

E91140

Headlamp flash: Pull the switch towards the
steering wheel and release to flash the high
beam on and off. The high beam will remain on
for as long as the switch is held.

Off

E91137

All exterior lamps off (except vehicles provided
with daylight running lamps).

Side lamps

E91141

High beam: With the headlamps on, push the
switch away from the steering wheel to switch
to high beam.
The blue warning indicator on the instrument
panel will illuminate.

E91138

To turn high beam off and return to low beam,
pull the column switch towards the steering
wheel.

Switches on the side lamps, tail, number plate
and any other marker lamps required by local
legislation. The instrument panel will also be lit.

Note: If the rotary control switch is moved to
the OFF position, with high beam still activated,
both low and high beam will be extinguished.
Both low and high beam will illuminate when
the headlamps are turned on again.

Headlamps

E91139

Select this position to switch on the
headlamps.

Lighting
AUTOLAMPS

Daylight running lamps
In certain countries it is a legal requirement for
the lamps to be on during the hours of daylight.
With the rotary collar in the OFF position, low
beam headlamps, side lamps, tail, number
plate lamps and, where fitted, side marker
lamps will switch on automatically with the
following conditions:
• The ignition is on (market dependent).
• The vehicle gear selector out of park.
• The park brake is not applied (is released).

E91142

A light sensor, mounted on the front of the
fascia, monitors exterior light levels and
automatically switches the side lamps and low
beam headlamps on or off.
The ignition system must be on for full
automatic light operation.

Condensation
In certain circumstances, misting may occur
on the inside of a lamp lens. This is caused by
natural changes in environmental conditions.
This misting is not detrimental to lamp
performance and will clear during normal
usage.

When light fades towards dusk, the side lamps
and headlamps will switch on automatically.
At dawn, as light increases, the side lamps and
headlamps switch off automatically.
Do not cover the sensor and keep the
windscreen clean. Obstructing the light in this
area of the sensor may lead to unwanted
operation of the side lamps and headlamps.
Note: Low exterior light levels, caused by
adverse weather conditions, may also cause
the autolamp system to switch on the side and
headlamps.

Windscreen wiper detection
This function only operates when autolamps is
selected. The side lamps and headlamps will
switch on automatically if the windscreen
wipers are switched on for 20 seconds or
more. Once the windscreen wipers are
switched off, the side lamps and headlamps
will automatically switch off two minutes later.

Lighting
REAR FOG LAMPS

Exit delay

3
JAG0924

Three settings on the rotary collar set the time
that the headlamps will remain on after the
driver’s door has closed:

JAG1332

Rear fog lamps will only operate when
headlamp dipped beam or Auto lamps are
selected. Press the rear fog lamp button to
switch on, press again to switch off.

1. 30 seconds.
2. 60 seconds.
3. 120 seconds.
The message centre displays the selected delay
time (e.g. AUTOLAMP DELAY 0:60) or displays
AUTOLAMP DELAY OFF when the autolamp
delay function has been turned off.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

Note: If the lamp switch rotary collar is in the
AUTO position there will be no exit delay and
the headlamps will extinguish when the ignition
system is turned off.
E94710

Press the switch to turn the hazard warning
lamps on. When the hazard warning lamps are
operating, the indicator warning lamps will
flash in time with the hazard warning lamps.
Press again to turn the lamps off.
Use only in an emergency, to warn traffic of a
vehicle breakdown or approaching danger.
Note: Hazard warning lamps can be used when
the ignition is on or off.

Lighting
DIRECTION INDICATORS

HEADLAMPS - DRIVING ABROAD

E91163

The direction indicators are operated using the
indicator stalk. Move the stalk up or down, to
indicate a right or left turn. A green warning
indicator will flash in the instrument panel.
The indicators will operate three times (e.g. to
indicate a lane change) if the stalk is briefly
pushed up or down. Lane change flash can be
disabled or enabled by a Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.

E94707

Note: Should a direction indicator bulb fail, the
corresponding green warning indicator will
flash at twice the normal rate and the audible
ticking will sound at twice the normal rate.

Note: The headlamps must be removed in
order to change the beam pattern.
See REMOVING A HEADLAMP (page 81).
The tourist lever allows you to adjust the
headlamps to the correct beam pattern for
driving in countries where vehicles drive on the
left, or the right.
When new, the lever will be set to the correct
position for the country in which the vehicle is
sold. To change the pattern for driving on the
other side of the road, move the lever to the
opposite position.
Note: When changing the beam pattern using
the lever, ensure that you change the lever
position on both headlamps.

Lighting
HEADLAMP LEVELLING

CORNERING OR STATIC BENDING
LAMPS

Halogen headlamps

Cornering or static bending lamps are angled
outwards from the centre line of the vehicle.
These lamps broaden the beam of the
headlamps when cornering during normal
night driving.

1
JAG1334

Use the headlamp levelling control to account
for vehicle loading changes.
Vehicle load

Switch position

Driver only

Driver and front seat
passenger

Driver and passengers in
all seats

Maximum gross vehicle
weight

Maximum rear axle load

2 or 3

Xenon headlamps
Headlamp levelling is adjusted automatically if
Xenon headlamps are fitted, to account for
vehicle load conditions, to avoid dazzling
oncoming drivers.

JAG0923

1. Light spread of a vehicle not fitted with
static bending lamps.
2. Light spread of a vehicle fitted with static
bending lamps
The system switches on the lamp if it has
received an input from the vehicle's direction
indicator. Only the lamp on the same side as
the operating direction indicator illuminates.
The system only operates with the ignition
switched on.

Lighting
INTERIOR LAMPS

5
4

1
1
2

6
6

E94712

1. Sun visor lamps. Switch on automatically
when the vanity mirror is opened.

4. Glove box lamp. Automatically illuminates
when the glove box is opened.

2. Front map reading lamps. Move your
finger close to (or touch) the relevant
proximity switch to switch on/off.

5. Footwell lamps. Automatically illuminate
when the front doors are opened.
6. Rear map reading/interior lamps. Switch
on automatically when the doors are
opened. Press the appropriate switch to
activate an interior lamp manually (e.g. as
a map reading lamp). Press the
appropriate switch again to extinguish the
lamp. Touch the front courtesy lamp lens
for approximately 2 seconds to
deactivate/activate automatic illumination
of the rear interior lamps.

3. Front interior courtesy lamp. Illuminates
when the doors are unlocked and
extinguish 20 seconds after all doors are
closed or when the vehicle is locked. The
lamps are operated by proximity sensors.
Move your finger close to (or touch) the
appropriate lens to switch on or off
manually. Touch the lens for 2 seconds to
deactivate/activate automatic illumination.

Lighting
Note: For lamps controlled by proximity
sensors, the wearing of gloves may interfere
with operation. If you are wearing gloves, it
may be necessary to touch the proximity
switch to operate the lamps.

Ambience lighting
Ambience lighting. Automatically illuminates
when the headlamps are on. Ambience lighting
creates a blue glow around the centre console
and front door armrests.

Luggage compartment lamp

Automatically illuminates when the luggage
compartment is opened.

APPROACH LAMPS
This feature is activated by pressing
the headlamp icon button on the
Jaguar Smart Key. See USING THE
REMOTE CONTROL (page 17). The headlamps
will remain on for 25 seconds or until the
button is pressed again, or until the engine
START/STOP button is pressed.

REMOVING A HEADLAMP
E94719

CAUTION
It is recommended that the following
procedure should only be attempted by
a qualified technician. If in doubt, consult your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Do not place the removed lamp unit face
down on hard or abrasive surfaces.
Doing so may scratch the surface of the lens.

1. Open the bonnet. See OPENING AND
CLOSING THE BONNET (page 195).
2. Remove the two bolts from the top of the
headlamp unit.
3. Remove the retaining bolt located in the
wheel arch.
Note: To improve access to the wheel arch,
turn the steering wheel to full lock, in the
direction of the affected headlamp.
4. Pull the headlamp away slightly from the
body of the vehicle.

Lighting

6
E94721

5. Press the tab and pull to disconnect the
electrical connector.

Only the rear direction indicator and reverse
lamp bulbs can be replaced. Failure of any
other rear lamp unit should be investigated by
a qualified technician. Consult your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.

6. Press the clip and pull to disconnect the
headlamp washer hose (if headlamp
washers are fitted).

Note: Access to the rear lamp units is achieved
through access hatches, located behind the
rear boot trim.

7. Remove the headlamp unit.

1. Remove the two retaining nuts.

REMOVING A REAR LAMP

2. Pull and slide the lamp unit rearwards to
remove.

E94720

Lighting
CHANGING A BULB

HEADLAMP UNIT BULBS

General information

Halogen dipped beam

CAUTION
Always replace bulbs with the correct
type and specification. If you are in any
doubt contact your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer for advice.
Note: In certain markets its a legal requirement
to carry spare bulbs. A replacement bulb kit is
available as an approved accessory from your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Halogen bulbs

Halogen bulbs are used for main beam and
dipped beam headlamps. Take care not to
touch the glass part of the bulb with your
fingers; always use a cloth to handle the bulb.
If necessary use methylated spirits to remove
finger prints.

Xenon lamps
WARNINGS
Replacement or maintenance of
Xenon lamps should only be carried
out by suitably qualified personnel.
High voltage is required to ignite the
gas and metal vapour which are used
to power Xenon lamps. Contact with
this voltage can cause serious injuries.
Xenon lamp units operate at a very
high temperature. Ensure that the
lamp units have cooled before
attempting to touch them.
Xenon lamp units contain Mercury
which is highly toxic and can be
extremely harmful.

E94732

With the headlamp unit removed:1. Rotate the cover counter-clockwise to
remove.
2. Twist the bulb holder counter-clockwise
and withdraw it from the headlamp unit.
3. Pull the bulb from the holder to remove.
Note: When fitting the replacement bulb,
ensure the orientation of the tab (arrowed) is as
shown.

Seek advice about the correct
disposal of Xenon lamp units from
your Dealer/Authorised Repairer, or
your local authority.

Lighting
Halogen dipped and main beam

Direction indicator bulbs

2
2
E94734

With the headlamp unit removed:1. Twist the indicator bulb holder
counter-clockwise, and remove it from the
lamp unit.

2. Press the bulb into the holder, then twist it
to remove.
E94733

With the headlamp unit removed:1. Rotate the relevant cover
counter-clockwise to remove.
2. Twist the bulb holder counter-clockwise
and withdraw it from the headlamp unit.
3. Pull the bulb from the holder to remove.
Note: When fitting the replacement bulb,
ensure the orientation of the tab (arrowed) is as
shown.

Lighting
SIDE REPEATER LAMP

Side lamp bulbs

CAUTION
These lamps are LED units and should
only be replaced by a Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.

REAR LAMP BULBS
1

Rear direction indicator and reverse
lamp bulbs

1
2
2

E94735

1. Rotate the cover counter-clockwise and
remove.
2. Pull the bulb holder tab to remove from the
lamp unit.

E94736

3. Pull the bulb to remove.

With the rear lamp unit removed:-

When replacing, push the bulb holder into its
socket in the lamp unit until it clicks in place.

1. Squeeze the two tabs together, then pull to
remove the relevant bulb holder.
2. Press and release the tab on the electrical
connector and pull to remove the bulb unit.

Lighting
Number plate lamp bulb

Other rear lamp bulbs
CAUTION
LED lamp units should only be replaced
by a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
The following rear lamps are LED units and
should not be replaced by the owner:
• Tail lamps.
• Brake lamps.
• Rear fog lamps.
• High level brake lamp.
• Rear side marker lamps.

2
3
E94737

1. Using a small flat-bladed screwdriver as
shown, lever out the side of the lamp unit
and remove.
2. Twist the bulb holder 90° counterclockwise to access the bulb.
3. Pull to remove the bulb from the holder.

Lighting
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
CAUTION
Before attempting to replace a bulb,
ensure that both the affected lamp and
the vehicle's ignition are turned off. If the
circuit is live a short circuit can occur which
may damage the vehicle's electrical system.
Lamp

Specification

Power (Watts)

Halogen headlamp (Low and High beam)

H7/H7

55/55

Xenon headlamp (Low and High beam)

D1S/H7

35/55

Front side lamps
Front direction indicators

W5W HCB

PY21W

Rear direction indicators

PY19W

Reverse lamps

PS19W

Number plate lamps

W5W

Interior overhead lamps

W6WX

Footwell lamps

W5W

Luggage lamp

S10W

Tailgate lamps

W5W

Glove box lamp

W5W

2 x TS1.3W

1.3

Vanity mirror lamp
Note: The tail lamp, stop lamp, rear fog lamps,
rear side lamps, side repeater lamps and high
mounted stop lamp, are LED units and are
non-serviceable. If any of these lamps should
fail, they should be investigated by qualified
personnel. Consult your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.

Wipers and washers
WINDSCREEN WIPERS

Rain sensor variable delay

CAUTIONS
Do not operate the windscreen wipers
on a dry screen. The drag on the wiper
mechanism may cause damage.
In freezing or very hot conditions,
ensure that the wipers have not stuck to
the windscreen before operating. The drag on
the wiper mechanism may cause damage.
Remove any snow, ice or frost from the
windscreen, around the wiper arms and
blades, and the screen scuttle, before
operating the wipers. Snow and ice can cause
damage to the wiper mechanism, if left
uncleared.

3
JAG1622

1. Maximum sensitivity.

Note: If the wiper blades become stuck or
jammed, an electronic cut-out may temporarily
halt wiper operation. If this happens, switch off
the wipers and the ignition. Clear any
obstructions and free the wiper blades, before
attempting to switch on the ignition.

2. Rotate control to adjust sensitivity.

Wiper operation

Single wipe

3. Minimum sensitivity.
With the rain sensor activated, the sensitivity of
the rain sensor can be adjusted. Rotate the
control upwards to reduce the sensitivity of the
rain sensor.

4
5

3
2
1
JAG1621

Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel for a
single wipe. Holding the switch in this position,
operates the wipers at normal speed until the
switch is released.

JAG1620

1. Windscreen wipers off and parked.
2. Rain sensor activated wipe.
3. Low speed wipe.
4. High speed wipe.
5. Rain sensor sensitivity control.

Wipers and washers
WINDSCREEN WASHERS

Speed-dependent mode
If vehicle speed drops below 2 km/h (1.2 mph)
with the wipers operating, the wiper frequency
automatically reduces. The wipers will switch
to the next lowest speed. When the vehicle’s
speed increases to over 8 km/h (5 mph), the
original wiper speed settings are restored
automatically.

WARNING
Some screenwash products are
flammable, do not allow screenwash
to come into contact with sources of
ignition.
CAUTION
Only screenwash products which are
approved for automotive use should be
used, and then only in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.

RAIN SENSOR
CAUTION
Ensure that the wipers are switched off
before entering a car wash. If the rain
sensitive wipers operate during the car
washing process damage may occur to the
wiper mechanism.

JAG1624
MAX

To operate the windscreen washers press and
release the button on the end of the wiper stalk.
The wipers will perform 5 normal speed wipes,
followed by a drip wipe (if configured). The
washers will operate during the first two wipes.
If the washers are operated with the wipers
operating at normal or fast speed, the washer
jets will operate for two wipes and operation of
the wipers will not be affected.

JAG1623

The rain sensor is able to detect the presence
and amount of rain, dirt or snow on the
windscreen and automatically activates the
windscreen wipers accordingly.

Note: If the button is pressed and held, the
wipers and washers will operate at normal
speed until the button is released (or for a
maximum of 10 seconds). After the button is
released, the wipers will operate for a further
three wipes, followed by a drip wipe (if
configured). If the wipers are already operating
at normal or fast speed, operating the washers
will not affect wiper operation.

To activate the rain sensitive wipers, move the
wiper stalk to the rain sensor/intermittent delay
position and adjust the rain sensor sensitivity
control as required. See WINDSCREEN
WIPERS (page 88).

Wipers and washers
Low screen wash

HEADLAMP WASHERS

If the low washer fluid warning is on, the
windscreen wipers will not operate when the
wash/wipe is activated, even though there may
be washer fluid remaining in the reservoir
which is sprayed onto the screen. This is to
prevent damage to the wiper blades, scratching
of the glass or smearing dirt across the screen.
Normal, fast or single wipe can be selected
manually, to clear any spray from the
windscreen.

Headlamp power wash operates automatically
with the windscreen wash, and will only
operate if the headlamps are switched on and
there is sufficient washer fluid in the reservoir.

Timed jet function

Note: Headlamp power wash is inhibited when
the low washer fluid warning is on.

Headlamp wash operates with every fourth
operation of the screen washers, provided that
ten minutes have elapsed since the last
operation of the headlamp washers.
Note: The power wash sequence is reset when
the headlamps or the ignition are turned off.

If the timed jet function is configured,
the washer jets will only operate on the
up stroke of the wipers.

CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES

This function can be enabled/disabled by your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

WARNING
Only use cleaning products which
have been approved for use on
automotive glass and rubber.
Inappropriate products can cause smearing,
and increase glare.

Drip wipe
If the drip wipe function is configured,
the wipers will operate four seconds
after a wash wipe cycle has finished, to
clear any remaining drips from the windscreen.
This function can be enabled/disabled by your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Blocked jets
WARNING
Do not operate the washer jets during
adjustment. Windscreen washer fluid
may cause irritation to the eyes and
skin. Always read and observe the washer fluid
manufacturers instructions.

E80573

The wiping edge of the blades should be
checked and cleaned periodically. Check the
blade rubber and replace the blade immediately
if cracks, splits or roughness are detected, to
prevent damage to the glass.

If a washer jet becomes blocked, use a thin
strand of wire to unblock the jet by inserting
the wire into the jet. Ensure that the wire is
completely removed after unblocking.

Clean the blade edge by wiping with a soft cloth
or sponge, using warm soapy water.
If the wipers fail to clear the windscreen when
operated, check the condition of the blade and
replace if necessary.

Wipers and washers
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES

Setting the service position

CAUTIONS
When checking or changing the wiper
blades, they can be set to the service
position or parked normally.

Service position

1
2

JAG1625

1. With the ignition switched off, pull the
wiper stalk towards the steering wheel to
the single wipe position. Hold the stalk in
this position.

E94746

The windscreen wiper service position allows
the wipers to be parked in a more accessible
position. This makes it easier to change wiper
blades.

2. Make sure the brake pedal is not applied
and, while still holding the wiper stalk in
the single wipe position, press the ignition
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
The wipers will move to the vertical (service)
position. Release the wiper stalk.
To return the wiper blades to the operating
position, turn the ignition off.

Wipers and washers
Changing the wiper blades
CAUTION
Only fit the correct length and type of
wiper blade. Failure to do so may cause
damage to the wiper system, it may also affect
the operation of the rain sensor.

E94748

Having set the wipers to the service position,
lift the wiper blade clear of the windscreen. The
removal procedure for the wiper blade is as
follows:1. Push the clips together on the underside of
the wiper mounting.
2. Rotate the clips and blade away from the
wiper mounting.
3. Slide the wiper blade off the wiper arm.
To fit the new blade, follow the removal
procedure in reverse.

Windows and mirrors
ELECTRIC WINDOWS

Overriding anti-trap protection
Anti-trap protection will stop window
movement if an obstruction or resistance is
detected. Check the window and its aperture
and remove any obstructions, ice, etc. If it is
still necessary to raise the window, the override
procedure is as follows:-

WARNING
All of the windows have an anti-trap
protection system. However, before
closing a window care must be taken
to ensure that none of the occupants have any
part of their body in a position where it could
be trapped. Even with an anti-trap system
serious injury or death can occur.

1. Attempt to close the window. Anti-trap will
prevent closure and lower the window.
2. Within ten seconds, attempt to raise the
window again. Anti-trap will prevent
closure and lower the window.
3. Attempt to close the window for a third
time, this time holding the switch in the
close position. The window will raise
whilst the switch is held. Hold until closed.
Note: If this procedure fails to remove the
blockage, the window operation may need to
be reset.

Window reset
The windows will need to be reset if the battery
is disconnected, becomes discharged or power
supply is interrupted.

E94755

With the ignition on or engine running, press a
switch down to lower the window, pull it up to
raise the window. Release the switch at any
point to stop window movement.

Reset as follows:1. Close the window fully.
2. Release the switch, then lift it to the close
position and hold for two seconds.

The windows will operate for five minutes after
the engine is switched off, as long as none of
the doors are opened.

3. Open the window fully.
4. Release the switch, then push it to the
open position and hold for two seconds.

One-shot operation
All four windows have one-shot operation.
Briefly pull the switch up and release, the
window will continue to raise until fully closed.
Briefly press the switch down and release, the
window will continue to lower until fully open.
Pressing or pulling the switch again will stop
the window.

5. Lift and release the switch to operate the
one-shot function.
6. Repeat the procedure on each window.

Windows and mirrors
Window isolator

Note: If the mirror becomes detached from the
windscreen it should be re-attached by a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
Note: If the rear screen is obscured, or the light
falling on the mirror is reduced by an
obstruction, the automatic dimming feature
may not operate correctly.

Manual dimming
E94756

WARNING
If children are carried in the rear
seats, the isolator switch should be
used to prevent operation of the
windows. If the windows are operated by
young children there is a risk of serious injury
or death.
To prevent operation of the rear windows,
press the inhibitor switch. To allow passengers
control of the windows, press the switch again.

E94837

To dim the light levels reflected by the mirror,
push the lever forward. To return it to normal
light levels, pull the lever back.

INTERIOR MIRROR
Auto dimming

E94836

The interior mirror dimming is adjusted
automatically according to the amount of
ambient light when the ignition is on. If reverse
gear is selected, the automatic dimming
feature is turned off to allow maximum
visibility for reversing.

Windows and mirrors
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Adjusting and folding

E94820

Folding

1. Left mirror adjustment.
2. Right mirror adjustment.
3. Powerfold.

To fold the mirrors back, press both left and
right buttons at the same time. To unfold the
mirrors, press both of the buttons again.

Note: Depending on the type of lens used,
distances may be difficult to judge accurately
when only using the mirrors.

The mirrors can be folded when the ignition is
on, and for up to five minutes after the ignition
is switched off, provided the driver’s door is
not opened. If the door is opened, it will be
necessary to turn the ignition on again, before
folding the mirrors.

Adjusting
Mirror adjustment is available with the ignition
switched on:
1. Press the left or right mirror button as
required. The tell-tale light in the switch
will illuminate to indicate that it has been
selected.
2. Move the joystick control to adjust the
mirror as required.

Note: If the mirrors are folded manually, or
knocked into the folded position accidentally,
the mirror head will be loose. To re-engage the
mechanism, fold, then unfold the mirrors using
the switches.

Windows and mirrors
Automatic folding

Mirror dip when reversing

The mirrors can be configured to automatically
fold when the vehicle is locked and unfold
when unlocked.

The mirrors can be configured so that when
reverse gear is selected, the passenger door
mirror is automatically adjusted to provide an
improved viewing angle for reversing.

Note: If the mirrors were folded using the
switches, they will not unfold when the vehicle
is unlocked.

The exact dipped position can be adjusted
using the joystick control, when the mirror is
dipped. The next time reverse is selected, the
newly adjusted position will be selected.

To select or deselect automatic folding:
1. From the touch-screen Home menu, select
Vehicle.

When the gear selector is moved out of
reverse, or if vehicle speed exceeds 12 km/h
(7.5 mph) while reversing, the mirror will
return to its previous position.

Vehicle
Security

To select or deselect mirror dip:

Parking

Windows
global open

Off

Valet mode

Windows
global close

Off

Mirror fold back

Off

1. From the touch-screen Home menu, select
Vehicle.
Vehicle
Security

12:26 pm
E94821

Reverse
mirror dip

Off

Parking

2. Security is displayed as the default menu.
Select Parking. Touch the arrow icon at the
bottom of the menu to scroll down the list,
until the screen above is displayed.

Valet mode
Vol. presets

12:26 pm

3. Select Mirror fold back - On or Off.

E94822

2. Security is displayed as the default menu.
Select Parking.
3. Select Reverse mirror dip - On or Off.

Heating elements
The external mirrors are equipped with heating
elements which disperse ice or mist from the
glass. The heating elements will operate
automatically, depending on the external
ambient temperature and conditions.

Windows and mirrors
BLIND SPOT MONITOR
WARNINGS
The Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is a supplement to, not a
replacement for, a safe driving style
and use of the exterior and rear-view mirrors.
It remains the driver's responsibility to detect
other vehicles, and their relative distance and
speed, when deciding whether or not it is safe
to change lanes.
Please note that BSM may not be able
to give adequate warning of vehicles
approaching very quickly from behind
or vehicles that are being overtaken rapidly.
The radar sensors may be impaired
by rain, snow or road spray. This may
affect the system's ability to reliably
detect a vehicle/object within the blind spot. In
such conditions, take extra care when
changing lanes.
BSM may not be able to detect all
vehicles and may also detect objects,
such as roadside barriers, etc.

E96410

The Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system
monitors a zone that covers the area adjacent
to the vehicle, that is not easily visible by the
driver and is designed to identify any object
overtaking the vehicle. The system uses a radar
on each side of the vehicle to identify any
overtaking vehicle/object within the blind spot
area of the vehicle, while disregarding other
objects which may be stationary or travelling in
the opposite direction, etc.
The radar monitors the area extending from the
exterior mirror rearwards, to approximately 7
metres (23 feet) behind the rear wheels, and up
to 2.5 metres (8.2 feet) from the side of the
vehicle (the width of a typical carriageway
lane).

CAUTIONS
Ensure that the warning indicators in the
exterior mirrors are not obscured by
stickers or other objects.
Do not attach stickers or objects to the
rear bumpers, that may interfere with
the radar sensors.

Note: This radar sensor is approved in all RTTE
countries.
Note: The system covers an area of a fixed lane
width. If the lanes are narrower than a typical
carriageway lane, objects travelling in
non-adjacent lanes may be detected.
BSM automatically switches on and becomes
active when the vehicle is travelling at greater
than 16 km/h (10 mph) in a forward drive gear.
When the system initiates, it performs a
self-check, during which the warning icons in
the mirrors illuminate alternately for a short
period of time.

Windows and mirrors
BSM is designed to work most effectively when
driving on multi-lane highways.

Sensor blockage
The BSM system will automatically disable if
either of the sensors become completely
obscured, an amber warning indicator dot (2)
is displayed in the exterior mirror and the
message BSM sensor blocked appears in the
message centre.

Note: Blockage testing is only initiated when
vehicle speed is above 32 km/h (20 mph) and
will take at least two minutes of accumulated
time travelling above this speed, to determine
that the sensor is blocked.
If the sensors become blocked, then please
check that there is nothing obscuring the rear
bumper and that it is clear from ice, frost and
dirt.

System fault
If a fault with one of the radar sensors is
detected, an amber warning indicator dot is
displayed in the exterior mirror and the
message BSM not available is displayed in the
message centre.

E96411

If an object is identified by the system as being
an overtaking vehicle/object, an amber
warning icon (1) illuminates in the relevant
exterior mirror, to alert the driver that there is a
potential hazard in the vehicle's blind spot and
therefore, that a lane change might be
dangerous.

Note: Even if the detected fault only affects the
radar sensor on one side of the vehicle, the
whole system is disabled. If the fault is
temporary, the system will operate correctly
once the engine has been switched off and then
on again.

Note: If an overtaking vehicle is detected on
both sides of the vehicle simultaneously, the
warning icons in both mirrors will illuminate.

If a fault in the system occurs, consult your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Note: BSM is automatically turned off when
reverse (R) gear is selected, when the vehicle is
in park (P), the vehicle is travelling below
16 km/h (10 mph) and also when the electrical
connector for the trailer socket is plugged in on
vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket.
When in these conditions, an amber warning
indicator within the exterior mirror is
displayed.

Instruments
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
Instrument panel

km
l/100km

4
JAG1630

Fuel gauge

1. Speedometer.
2. Message centre.

CAUTION
Never allow the vehicle to run out of fuel.
The resulting misfire may cause serious
damage to the catalytic convertor.

3. Tachometer.
4. Fuel gauge.
The instruments will not show correct
information until the ignition system is on.

The message centre will display FUEL LEVEL
LOW, when the fuel level is approximately 1/16
of tank capacity. This gives an approximate
range of 50 to 65 km (30 to 40 miles).

Speedometer
Indicates road speed.

Message centre

As a reminder for the location of the fuel filler,
there is an arrow above the fuel pump symbol,
which points to the relevant side of the vehicle.

Displays warning and information messages
and gear selector mode and position
information. See WARNING AND
INFORMATION MESSAGES (page 106).
See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (page 137).

Tachometer
Indicates engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM) x 1000.

Instruments
WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS
1

km
l/100km

JAG1631

17 16 15

13 12 11 10 9

1. Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)/
Electronic Parking Brake (EPB).
2. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).
3. Glow plugs (diesel only).
4. Adaptive front lighting system (AFL).
5. Engine malfunction.
6. Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
7. Airbag.
8. Right-hand direction indicator.
9. Rear fog lamp.
10. Dynamic Stability Control (DSC).
11. High beam.
12. Side lamps.
13. Seat belt.
14. Message centre.
15. Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL).
16. Forward alert.
17. Brakes - Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
On/Brake fluid low/Electronic Brakeforce
Distribution (EBD)
18. Left-hand direction indicator.

RED warning indicators are for primary
warnings. A primary warning must be
investigated immediately by the driver or seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible.
AMBER warning indicators are for secondary
warnings, to indicate that a vehicle system is in
operation or that the driver must take action
and then seek qualified assistance.
Other indicators within the instrument panel
indicate system status (e.g. blue for main beam
or green for direction indicators, when in use).

Indicator check
An indicator bulb check is initiated when the
ignition system is switched on and lasts for
three seconds (excepting the airbag warning
indicator which will remain on for six seconds).
If any warning indicator remains on after this
period, investigate the cause before driving.
Some warning indicators have associated
messages displayed on the message centre.
Note: Not all warning indicators are included in
the check (e.g. main beam headlamps and
direction indicators).

100

Instruments
Brake - Red

Seat belt - Red

WARNING
If the message LOW BRAKE FLUID is
displayed, check the brake fluid level
and top-up as necessary. Do not drive
the vehicle until the brake fault is rectified.
Seek qualified assistance before continuing.

•
•

The warning indicator stays
illuminated when the ignition is on
and:
The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
Or a passenger is sitting in the front seat
and their seat belt is not fastened.

The indicator should extinguish when the
relevant seat belt is fastened.

Illuminates when the ignition
system is on and the parking brake
is applied and/or the brake fluid is
low. The indicator will also illuminate when
there is a fault with the Electronic Brakeforce
Distribution (EBD) system.

Beltminder - Red
The beltminder feature, which uses
the same indicator as the seat belt
warning, provides reminders to the
driver that the driver’s and/or front passenger’s
seat belt is unbuckled.

If the indicator is illuminated and there are no
associated messages, it means that the parking
brake is applied.

If the vehicle is moving at or above 16 km/h (10
mph) and the seat belt of an occupied seat is
not fastened, the warning indicator will flash.

If the indicator is illuminated and the message
PARK BRAKE ON is displayed, it means that the
parking brake is applied but the vehicle is
moving. Release the parking brake or stop the
vehicle when it is safe to do so.

The flashing will last for ten seconds and then
repeat every 30 seconds for approximately five
minutes or until the belt(s) is fastened or the
vehicle stops.

If the indicator is illuminated and the message
LOW BRAKE FLUID with a red priority lamp is
displayed on the message centre, low brake
fluid is indicated. In this case, loss of braking in
one or both brake circuits may be imminent.
Stop the vehicle gently and check and top-up
the brake fluid reservoir, using the
recommended fluid. If the warning message
remains, do not drive the vehicle until the brake
fault is rectified. Seek qualified assistance
before continuing. See BRAKE FLUID CHECK
(page 206).

If the warning indicator stays illuminated with
the seat belt(s) fastened, seek qualified
assistance as soon as possible. It is safe to
drive the vehicle with the indicator illuminated,
provided that the seat belt(s) is properly
fastened.
Ensure that all occupants fasten their seat belt
before driving.
Note: If a heavy object is placed on the front
passenger seat, it may activate the Beltminder
feature. It is recommended that the object be
placed in the luggage compartment.

If the indicator is illuminated and the message
EBD FAULT (with red backlight) is displayed in
the message centre, a fault with the EBD
system is indicated. Stop the vehicle gently, as
soon as safety permits and seek qualified
assistance.

101

Instruments
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)/
Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) - Amber

The vehicle may activate limp-home mode,
with the possibility of reduced engine
performance. Drive with caution.

WARNING
If the ABS and brake warning
indicators are illuminated at the same
time, do not drive the vehicle until the
fault is rectified. Seek qualified assistance
immediately.

Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) - Amber
The indicator will flash twice every
second when DSC is operating.
The message DSC NOT AVAILABLE
will be displayed and the indicator will
illuminate continuously, if a fault is detected.

Illuminates if a fault has been
detected in the ABS (accompanied
by a warning message in the
message centre).

When Trac DSC is selected, the message TRAC
DSC is displayed for four seconds and the
warning indicator remains illuminated.
When DSC is switched off, a chime will sound,
the message DSC OFF is displayed in the
message centre and the warning indicator
remains illuminated.

The brake system will continue to function
normally, but without ABS braking.
The warning indicator will also illuminate if a
fault has been detected in the EPB system
(accompanied by a warning message in the
message centre).

Rear fog lamps - Amber
Illuminates when the rear fog lamps
are switched on.

If the warning indicator illuminates or stays
illuminated after the bulb check cycle, seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible.

Adaptive Cruise Control - Amber

Adaptive Front Lighting - Amber

Illuminates when adaptive cruise
control is active, to indicate that the
vehicle is in follow mode.

Illuminates when there is a system
fault. Seek qualified assistance as
soon as possible.

Forward alert - Amber

Engine malfunction - Amber

Illuminates when the forward alert
function is active.

Illuminates when the ignition
system is on and remains
illuminated until the engine is
started.

Airbag - Amber
Flashes if the airbag system
develops a fault, then illuminates
permanently until the fault has been
diagnosed and cleared.

If the indicator illuminates when the engine is
running, there is an engine malfunction.
Specialised diagnostic equipment is required
to repair such faults. Seek qualified assistance
as soon as possible.

Seek qualified assistance as soon as possible.

102

Instruments
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System Yellow
Illuminates when one or more tyres
are significantly under-inflated. The
vehicle should be stopped as soon
as possible and the tyres checked and inflated
to the recommended pressure.

High beam - Blue
Illuminates when the high beam
headlamps are switched on or
flashed.

Automatic Speed Limiter - Green
Illuminates when Automatic Speed
Limiter is active.

Side lamps - Green
Illuminates when the side (parking)
lamps are switched on.

Direction indicators - Green
The appropriate indicator will flash
when the column stalk is moved up
or down to signal a turn. If a
direction indicator bulb fails, the audible ticking
and warning indicator will sound and flash at
twice the normal rate, when that direction
indicator is selected.

Hazard warning indicators
When the hazard warning lamps are switched
on, both direction indicator warning indicators
flash simultaneously.

103

Instruments
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
Various sounds are produced for warning and notification purposes as follows:
Hazard or Condition

Chime or tone/remedy

External lamps remain on when A chime will sound until the lamps are switched off or driver’s
the driver’s door is opened.
door is closed (unless the lighting control is in AUTO position).
Hazard warning indicators on.

A ticking will sound until the hazard indicators are switched off.

Direction indicators on.

A ticking will sound until the indicators are switched off.

Memory 1 (or 2) settings saved. A short tone as the memory selection is saved.
Airbag system failure.

A tone sequence is repeated five times. Seek qualified assistance
as soon as possible.

Seat belt reminder.

A chime will sound until an unfastened seat belt is fastened. The
warning will cease if occupied front seat belts are buckled, the
ignition is turned off or more than approximately three minutes
has elapsed since the start of the chime.

Electric parking brake (EPB).

If the EPB is applied while the vehicle is moving a continuous
chime will sound; release the EPB. If there is a fault with the
system which would prevent the application of the EPB, a brief
sequence of chimes is initiated.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
driver intervene.

Multiple chime. Apply the brakes.

ACC low speed automatic
switch off.

A chime will sound to indicate that the ACC system is no longer
operating.

Forward Alert

Multiple chime. Apply the brakes.

Speed is over 15 km/h (9 mph) A short warning chime. Reduce speed.
above the set limit speed.
Gear selector is not in Park with A chime will sound. Select Park.
ignition off.
Entry delay warning (European Intermittent slow, low pitched chime. Disarm vehicle.
markets only).
The Jaguar Smart Key cannot be A chime will sound. The remote handset should be inserted into
detected.
the starter control unit.
The Jaguar Smart Key is to be
removed from the starter
control unit.

A chime will sound for 60 seconds if the Jaguar Smart Key is in
the starter control unit and the driver’s door is opened. The
remote handset should be removed from the starter control unit.

DSC OFF

A chime will sound.

104

Information displays
GENERAL INFORMATION

When there are no current warning
messages, turn-by-turn navigation
information is displayed, giving
instructions for the next junction. This
facility can be turned off via the
touch-screen. See TURN-BY-TURN
NAVIGATION (page 339).

The driver message centre display is situated
within the instrument panel between the
tachometer and speedometer gauges. The
message centre is active as soon as a door is
opened for access.
The primary function of the message centre is
to inform the driver of the following:
• Warning messages.
• Temporary alert messages.
• Information messages.
• Turn-by-turn navigation.

The clock can be shown when no other
information is required to be displayed.
See CLOCK (page 124).
3. Trip computer information, including total
distance covered by the vehicle. See TRIP
COMPUTER (page 107).
4. Set trip computer information display
relating A, B or Auto trip computer.
See PERSONALISED SETTINGS
(page 111).

BOOT OPEN
Auto
miles
Inst Fuel
mpg

On diesel and V8 petrol models, the
electronic engine oil dipstick reading can
also be displayed, when selected using the
trip computer button. See ENGINE OIL
CHECK - V8 Petrol engines (page 199).

2
3
4
5

5. The fuel level gauge. The small arrow on
the top of the fuel pump symbol denotes
which side of the vehicle the fuel filler cap
is located.

E95066

The message centre screen is divided into
various zones displaying the following:
1. Gear selection, automatic or manual.
2. Warning messages, accompanied by a red
or amber backlight, if system faults are
detected. Status messages are displayed
to indicate changes in state of certain
vehicle functions (e.g. navigation).

105

Information displays
WARNING AND INFORMATION
MESSAGES

Clearing messages from the display
It is possible to temporarily clear certain
warning or information messages from the
message centre.

WARNING
If a warning indicator is displayed,
stop the vehicle as soon as possible
when it is safe to do so. Do not ignore
critical warning messages. Failure to do so
may result in serious damage to the vehicle.

Home

External

Audio/TV
Climate

20 .5 C 17 .5 C

DAB radio

DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

Phone

Most displayed warning messages have an
associated warning indicator, which will
illuminate on to indicate the message priority.
Also from time to time information messages
will be displayed.

Navigation

Left

Right

BBC National DAB
TA FM DAB i Subch.

Vehicle
12:26 pm

Valet

JAG1515

If more than one message is active, each is
displayed in turn for two seconds in order of
priority.

When a message is displayed in the message
centre (e.g. WASHER FLUID LOW), a red
warning triangle icon appears on the
touch-screen, where shown.

Messages take priority over the trip computer
data and will be displayed when the ignition is
on.

Touch the icon to temporarily stop the
currently displayed message from appearing.
Once the message is removed, the colour of
the warning icon in the message centre
changes to white, as a reminder that an
outstanding message exists.

Note: The message centre information
messages and their meanings, are detailed
where necessary within the appropriate subject
sections.

Note: Certain warnings, that are critical for the
safe operation of the vehicle, cannot be cleared
from the display.
Note: If multiple messages are displayed, this
process can be repeated to remove all
messages from the display.
Removed messages will display again,
whenever the ignition is switched on, until the
fault is rectified (i.e. in this example, when the
washer fluid is topped up).

106

Information displays
TRIP COMPUTER

Odometer

The computer memory stores data for a
journey or series of journeys until it is reset to
zero.

The odometer shows the total vehicle distance
travelled since the vehicle was new.
The odometer and trip distance reading is
displayed in either miles or kilometres,
depending on the settings selected via the
touch-screen.

The displayed information is for guidance only,
as it can be affected by traffic, road and
weather conditions.
Three independent memories are available, A,
B and Auto. A and B memories can be set
independently, while the Auto trip will reset
after every ignition cycle as the vehicle moves.

Changing the display

Full trip computer information for the trip
memories can be displayed on the vehicle
touch-screen located in the centre console,
while current selected trip computer
information is displayed on the instrument
panel message centre.

E91244

Press the TRIP button on the end of the left
column stalk switch repeatedly to display the
message centre data in the following order:
• Trip distance
• Average speed
• Average fuel consumption
• Range.

To access the trip computer touch-screen
settings:
• From the touch-screen Home menu, select
Vehicle.
• Select Trip computer.
• Select requirements from the menu.

Trip computer information centre display

Trip distance (A, B and Auto)
10849
A:

238.7

1
2

Distance travelled since the last memory reset.
The maximum trip reading is 16 090 kilometres
(9 999.9 miles). The computer will
automatically reset to zero if this distance is
exceeded.

E91243

Vehicle total distance travelled (1) and trip
distance (2) are displayed, as well as average
fuel economy and average speed if selected via
the touch-screen. Also A, B or Auto will be
displayed, depending on the current memory
selected.

Average speed (A, B and Auto)
The average speed since the last press of the
reset button.

107

Information displays
Average fuel consumption (A, B and
Auto)

Service interval indicator
The service interval message will only be
displayed when the vehicle has less than
3400 km (2000 miles) before the service is
due.

The average fuel consumption, stated as litres
per 100 kilometres (except Japan, kilometres
per litre), miles per litre or miles per gallon (UK
only), based on the accumulated distance
travelled and the accumulated fuel used.

When the ignition is switched on, and the
vehicle has started its service countdown,
SERVICE REQ'D XXXX km (XXXX MLS) is
displayed in the message centre. At the same
time the display will glow Amber.

Range
This shows the predicted distance, miles or
kilometres, that the vehicle should travel on the
remaining fuel, assuming average fuel
economy and fuel consumption stay constant.

After approximately five seconds, the display
reverts to show the preset requirements.

Electronic dipstick (diesel and V8 petrol
engines only)

When the service distance has been reached,
SERVICE REQUIRED is displayed in the
message centre and the display will glow Red.

This shows the current engine oil level and any
associated warnings. See ENGINE OIL CHECK V8 Petrol engines (page 199).

After approximately five seconds, the display
reverts to show the preset requirements.
The distance countdown reduces in increments
of 50 km or 50 miles, depending on which
display units have been selected.

ML-km (also Miles-litre)
The display of metric or imperial units is
selected via the touch-screen.

The distance countdown is controlled by the
engine management system and is
automatically adjusted to allow for driving style
and conditions. This gauges when the service
becomes necessary.

Display language
The display language is selected via the
touch-screen.

Reset

CAUTION
If no service interval indicator is
displayed during the vehicle service
cycle, make sure that your vehicle is serviced
in accordance with the intervals, as stated in
the Service Portfolio.

Resetting of the trip memories is carried out via
the touch-screen.

Note: After the completion of each service, the
Dealer/Authorised Repairer will reset the
distance display to commence the countdown
to the next service.

108

Information displays
TOUCH-SCREEN

Home

External

Audio/TV
Climate
Phone

20 .5 C 17 .5 C
Left

Right

Navigation

DAB radio

DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra
BBC National DAB
TA FM DAB i Subch

Vehicle
Valet

12:26 pm

JAG1516

1. Touch-screen.

System facilities

2. Home menu button.

There are six major systems controlled via the
touch-screen, with their individual levels of
operation and settings. They are as follows:
• Audio: Radio display AM/FM or DAB,
auxiliary and portable audio, TV or CD.
• Climate: Air conditioning, Distribution,
Seats, Heated steering wheel, Automatic
air recirculation.
• Phone: Digit dial view, Phonebook, Last
ten calls (made, received, missed).
• Navigation: Destination, Stored locations,
Navigation setup, Route options.
• Vehicle: Security, Parking, Valet mode,
Trip computer, Clock, Brightness,
Contrast, System settings, Vehicle
settings, Display settings.
• Voice: Operating guide, Command list,
Add phone nametag, Settings.

3. Touch-screen on/off.
Note: When the engine is stopped, for the
touch-screen to remain active, press the
engine START/STOP button again without
pressing the brake pedal.
1. Touch-screen: When initially activated, the
touch-screen will display the main Home
menu. From this menu, all touch-screen
facilities and operations are initiated by
touching the relevant touch-screen
buttons and icons.
2. Home menu button: Press to return to the
main Home menu from all facilities.
3. Touch-screen on/off: Press once to turn
the screen on, press again to revert to
screen-saver mode. A further press will
turn the touch-screen off.

109

Information displays
Touch-screen use

Touch-screen display icons
Touch-screen display icons are as follows
(they may not all be displayed at the same
time):

WARNING
In the interest of road safety, only
operate, adjust or view the system
when it is safe to do so.

Return to the previous screen
displayed.

CAUTION
Always run the engine during prolonged
use of the touch-screen. Failure to do so
may discharge the vehicle battery, preventing
the engine from starting.

Warning triangle button indicating
an information or warning
message in the message centre.
Touch the button to temporarily remove the
warning message from the message centre
display. See WARNING AND INFORMATION
MESSAGES (page 106).

When the engine START/STOP button is
pressed, the touch-screen is activated by the
on/off switch on the centre console.

Telephone: send button.

The buttons on the centre console, below the
touch-screen display, are referred to as hard
buttons and should be pressed firmly. The
touch-screen buttons are soft buttons and only
require short, light pressure to function. Do not
use excessive pressure.

Telephone: end call.
Page up or increase setting to
required value.

When operating touch-screen buttons, always
extend the tip of one finger, and withhold the
thumb and remaining fingers from the screen.
Touching the screen with more than one finger
at a time may cause false inputs.

Page down or decrease setting to
required value.

Throughout the handbook, the expression
Select an item (or similar wording) means
touch the on-screen button to select or alter
the required item.

Valet

Direct access to the valet mode
setting screen.
Telephone signal strength
indicator (if supported by
Bluetooth phone).

The handbook shows the on-screen menus,
explains how to operate the controls and
illustrates how to select or alter settings and
requirements. After becoming familiar with the
controls, follow the on-screen menus and
prompts, to operate the system as required.

Telephone battery level indicator
(if supported by Bluetooth phone).
No phone connected.

110

Information displays
Touch-screen care

Home menu display

CAUTION
Care must be taken to avoid spilling or
splashing fluids onto the touch-screen.

Home

External

Audio/TV
Climate

Do not use any abrasive cleaners to clean your
touch-screen. For approved screen cleaners,
you should contact your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.

Phone

20 .5 C 17 .5 C
Left

Right

Navigation

DAB radio

DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra
BBC National DAB
TA FM DAB i Subch.

Vehicle

The touch-screen inner bezel must be kept
clean to maintain optimum performance.
Finger marks and attracted dust should be
regularly removed using a soft cloth and a
Jaguar approved cleaning agent.

Valet

12:26 pm
JAG1517

When initially activated, the touch-screen will
display the main Home menu. The Home menu
may also be displayed at any time by pressing
the Home button on the screen surround.

Where possible, avoid exposing the
touch-screen to direct sunlight for long
periods.

Screen settings: The touch-screen brightness
and contrast can be set to individual
requirements, including dimming for night
driving. This is accessed via the Vehicle menu.
Select Cont./Bright.

PERSONALISED SETTINGS
General Information
The touch-screen provides touch-control of the
vehicle Audio, Climate, Phone, Navigation and
Vehicle systems, as fitted.

Vehicle
Trip computer
Clock adjust

Note: When the engine is stopped, the
touch-screen reverts to the stand-by mode. To
activate the touch-screen press the engine
Start/Stop button again.

Cont./Bright.

Auto
Off
dimming

Syst. settings

Brightness

Veh. settings

Contrast

12:26 pm
JAG1416

Auto dimming: Select Auto dimming On.
Brightness and contrast are automatically
adjusted by the ambient light level. As the light
level decreases, the touch-screen brightness
will decrease, until the full night screen level of
brightness is initiated.

111

Information displays
Further adjustment of the touch-screen
brightness can be achieved by using the + or buttons in the Cont./Bright. screen or by
adjustment of the instrument panel dimmer
switch. See INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
(page 123).

Audio system
The vehicle Audio system interacts with
Navigation, In-car Telephone and Climate
Control systems.
The Audio system can be controlled from the
switches on the console, the touch-screen
buttons and from the multi-function controls
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
See AUDIO CONTROL (page 69).

Pop-up messages
The operation of certain functions will cause a
small message (pop-up) to appear, overlaying
the touch-screen display.
TP

Audio/TV

PTY

Detailed instructions on the use of the audio
system are provided later in this handbook.
See Audio unit operation (page 271).

DPLII

Tr 04

00:36

Settings

AM/FM

Automatic climate control

Audio

DAB radio
CD

The automatic climate control system can be
controlled from the switches on the console
and the touch-screen buttons.
See AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
(page 116).

Please wait...

Portable audio

Cancel

89.9

BBC R2

12 : 26 pm

Phone/Comms/Voice

E95072

The pop-up is mainly for information and will
disappear automatically after a few seconds, or
can be dismissed by touching the pop-up
screen area. If any action or adjustment is
required, the message will clearly indicate what
is required and which button to touch.

The communications system is composed of
the following facilities:
• Digit dial
• Phonebook
• Last ten calls made, received, missed.
• Voice

Touch-screen systems

The telephone system can be controlled from
the touch-screen, by voice recognition or by
using the multi-function controls on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
See ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
(page 67). Detailed instructions on the use of
the phone are provided later in this handbook.
See Telephone (page 307).

There are five major systems controlled via the
touch-screen with their individual levels of
operation and settings. They are as follows:
• Audio
• Climate
• Phone/Comms/Voice
• Navigation
• Vehicle.

Navigation system
Detailed instructions on the use of the
navigation system are provided later in this
handbook. See Navigation system (page 334).

Note: The Phone entry is renamed Comms if
the JaguarVoice system is fitted and renamed
Voice if the JaguarVoice system is fitted but
without telephone.

112

Information displays
Vehicle system
Vehicle

The following system functions are set using
the touch-screen:
• Trip computer
• Clock adjust
• Brightness and contrast
• System settings
• Vehicle settings

Display set.
Preferences

Vol. presets

Display language
English UK

Change

Dutch

Finnish
French
Norwegian

12 : 26 pm
E95074

To change the language: The language
choices are displayed as a list. Scroll up or
down through the list using the up or down
arrows. Touch to select the chosen language.

0
0

Note: The navigation system is not affected by
the language change. To change the navigation
system language display, refer to the
navigation system instructions later in this
handbook. See Navigation system (page 334).

Button audio

Vol. presets

Display language
English UK

Danish

Vehicle

Miles, MPH, MPG

Vehicle

The required languages and units are accessed
by selecting Vehicle from the Home menu,
then selecting:
• Trip computer
• Unit change
• Preferences and then selecting from the
menu.

Preferences

12 : 26 pm

The screen text and distance units are available
in various languages and either Imperial or
Metric units.

km, km/h, 1/100km

0
0

Button audio

Languages and distance units

Display set.

km, km/h, 1/100km
Miles, MPH, MPG

Change

12 : 26 pm
E95073

To change the units: Touch the button
corresponding to the desired unit display
(metric or imperial).
Note: The choice of units displayed is market
dependent. The illustration above represents a
typical screen.
Temperature display is selected by touching
either °C or °F.
Note: Celsius or Fahrenheit may be selected
independently of metric or Imperial units.

113

Information displays
Timeout to home menu
The time period before the touch-screen
display reverts to the Home menu, after the last
user input, can be adjusted to suit personal
preference.
From the Home menu, select Vehicle.
Vehicle
Trip computer

Trip A

Clock adjust

Trip B
Trip

Cont./Bright.
Syst. settings
Veh. settings

auto

Distance

532 Km

Av. speed 42 Km/h
Av. fuel

eset

12.3 L/100km

Range 353 Km

Units

12 : 26 pm
E95075

1. Select Syst. settings.
Vehicle
Display set.
Pr
But

2
io

Vol. presets

Screensaver
setting
Timeout to home
Off
screen

50 seconds

12 : 26 PM
E95076

2. Select Display set, then touch the + or buttons to increase or decrease the
timeout delay. The timeout can be adjusted
from ten seconds to five minutes.
Note: An initial default setting of one minute is
set if no time adjustment is made.
3. To prevent the display from reverting to
the Home menu, select Timeout to home
screen Off.

114

Climate control
AIR VENTS
1

A
I t F

2 3 2

k
1

E95077

1. Air volume adjust.
Climate

2. Air direction adjust.
3. Solar sensor.

Auto

External 15˚c

Sensitivity
Left

CAUTIONS
Do not obstruct the solar sensor (3) or
the temperature and humidity sensor,
located adjacent to the glove box.
Do not obstruct the extract vents for the
climate system, located in the trim panel
behind the rear seats.

Auto

Right

Climate seat
settings
Vent rotation

Auto

Always
open

Change units

12 : 26 pm
E95447

From the touch-screen Climate menu, select
Settings. Select Vent rotation Always open.

The rotating air vents activate and rotate out of
the fascia when the engine START/STOP
button is pressed, provided the climate system
has not been manually switched off. Adjust the
volume of air using the thumbwheels (1) and
the direction of the air using the direction
controls (2), to suit your requirements.

Rear vents
The temperature of the air supplied by the rear
air vents is dependent on the combined
temperature settings for the driver and front
passenger. For example, if the driver
temperature is set to 21°C (70°F) and 20°C
(68°F) for the front passenger, the temperature
of the air supplied to the rear of the vehicle will
be approximately 20.5°C (69°F).

It is possible to set the air vents so that they
remain permanently on view, even when the
ignition is switched off.

115

Climate control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

It is recommended that automatic control
(AUTO) is selected as the normal operating
mode.

Automatic climate control provides efficient
regulation of the vehicle environment, without
constant adjustments from the occupant.

Automatic control can be overridden at any
time.

Sensors inside the vehicle monitor
temperature, humidity and direct sunlight. The
electronic control system automatically adjusts
the heat input, blower speed, air intake and
airflow distribution, to maintain the selected
temperature(s) and reduce misting. The air
conditioning system also incorporates a
pollen/odour filter, to further increase the
comfort of the vehicle environment.
Automatic operation provides optimum
comfort under most driving conditions.

Controls
Climate

External

12 C

Auto

19 5 C

21 5 C

Settings
A/C

1
Temp sync

Auto

OFF

12 26 pm

4
2

E95086

1. Touch-screen display.

6. Recirculation, press to switch on/off.

2. Left-hand temperature control.

7. Heated rear screen, press to switch on/off.

3. Right-hand temperature control.

8. Heated front screen, press to switch
on/off.

4. Blower speed, rotate to change blower
speed. Press to turn the climate control
system on/off.

9. Defrost program, press to switch on/off.

5. AUTO mode, press to select fully
automatic operation.

116

Climate control
Temperature controls

Heated screens

Separate controls allow the driver
and front passenger zone
temperatures to be independently
adjusted. Press the upper (red)
button to increase temperature and the lower
(blue) button to decrease temperature.

The front (F) and rear (R)
screen heaters, may be
switched on and off in
any mode, including with
the climate control system off. However, they
will only operate when the engine is running.

Both driver and passenger temperatures are
displayed on the touch-screen.

The front screen heater switches off
automatically after 5 minutes. The rear screen
heater switches off automatically after 21
minutes.

Selecting the maximum or minimum
temperature settings for the driver temperature
zone, causes the display to change to HI or LO
respectively. This cancels AUTO mode.

The screen heaters can be manually deselected
using the push buttons.

To quickly change from HI or LO to a
convenient mid-range temperature of 22°C
(72°F), press and hold AUTO for a few
seconds.

In cold ambient conditions, the front and rear
screen heaters will switch on automatically for
the timed period when the engine is started.
The front and rear screen heaters will
automatically come on at temperatures below
5°C (41°F).

Note: The maximum possible temperature
differential between the driver and passenger
settings is 3°C (5.4°F)

Auto mode

Windscreen defrost and demist

•

•
•

Automatic operation utilises
the air conditioning and other
climate controls, to provide a
controlled environment over a
temperature range of 16°C to 28°C (59°F to
83°F) and should be regarded as the normal
operating mode.

To remove frost or heavy misting
from the windscreen, press the DEF
button. The following functions will
activate:
The blower switches on at a high speed
(blower speed can be adjusted manually to
suit).
The air conditioning activates (to
dehumidify the air) and cannot be switched
off.
Recirculation is cancelled and cannot be
selected.
The front and rear screen heaters switch
on automatically (if the engine is running).

To select automatic climate control press the
AUTO button.
Select the required temperature.
Front and rear screen heating and timed air
recirculation may be selected in AUTO mode,
but selecting any other manual control will
cancel AUTO operation.
To resume fully automatic operation at any
time, press the AUTO button.

To deselect, press the DEF button again or
press AUTO.

117

Climate control
Blower speed

Air conditioning

Set the blower speed as required by
adjusting the rotary control.

Press the AUTO button to turn
the air conditioning on.

Press to turn the climate control
system on or off.

The air conditioning system is
controlled automatically in AUTO mode to
maintain the desired temperature and humidity
(even if higher temperature settings are
selected).

When operating in AUTO mode, blower speed
is controlled automatically and AUTO is
displayed on the touch-screen. Any adjustment
of the knob will cancel AUTO mode.

The air conditioning system is also switched on
automatically in defrost mode (DEF) in order to
dehumidify the air.

Note: In AUTO mode, if heating is required, the
blower only operates at low speed, until the
engine reaches normal operating temperature.

Note: Water may collect underneath the vehicle
when parked. This is moisture expelled from
the interior of the vehicle by the air
conditioning system and is not cause for
concern.

Recirculation
Press to turn recirculation on
or off. The button indicator
illuminates when recirculation
is turned on.

Heated/climate seats and heated
steering wheel

When selected, the air is recirculated inside the
vehicle. This helps to maintain a high or low
temperature, and is useful for preventing
fumes from entering the vehicle.

The heated seats, climate seats and heated
steering wheel can be controlled from both the
Home and Climate menus on the touch-screen.
See HEATED SEATS (page 47). See CLIMATE
SEATS (page 48). See HEATED STEERING
WHEEL (page 68).

Recirculation may also be selected in AUTO
mode, if the climate control system detects
high levels of pollution in the atmosphere
outside the vehicle (if a smog sensor is fitted).
Manual operation of the recirculation control
will override the automatic setting. This facility
can be switched off through the Settings menu
on the touch-screen.
Note: Prolonged use at low temperatures may
cause the windows to mist.

118

Climate control
Touch-screen operation

Climate control display icons

Certain functions of the climate control system
are adjusted using the Climate menu on the
touch-screen.

The climate control display buttons and icons
are as follows:

Select Climate from the Home menu.
Home

External

Auto

Air distribution to
windscreen.

Audio/TV
Climate
Phone

20 .5 C 17 .5 C
t

Right

Navigation

Auto climate control
on.

DAB radio

DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

Air distribution to
face.

BBC National DAB
TA FM DAB i Subch.

Vehicle

Air distribution to feet.
Valet

12:26 pm
JAG1518

The climate main menu is displayed, from
which the climate control settings can be
adjusted.
Climate

External

Auto

Temp. sync.

Synchronizes the
passenger's climate
control zone to the
driver's settings.

12 C
Auto

21.5 C

Temp. sync.

21.5 C

Auto

Settings
A/C

Blower speed control decrease and increase.

Settings

OFF

12:26pm
E95094

Access to the Settings
control menu to set
the vent rotation
mode, to adjust

personal climate zone settings and also to
access the automatic air recirculation sensor
control setting.

119

Climate control
Smog/pollution filter

Air conditioning
on/off. When the air
conditioning is
switched off, Economy

The smog filter operates in conjunction with
the air recirculation feature, to reduce
pollutants entering the vehicle.
When pollution is detected by the smog
sensor, air recirculation is selected
automatically, to help prevent pollution
entering the vehicle.

mode is selected automatically. Economy
mode turns off the air conditioning
compressor and reduces power consumed
by the climate control system. This will
reduce air conditioning performance.
Prolonged use of Economy mode, may cause
the windows to mist.

The sensitivity of the smog sensor can be
adjusted for personal preference or the sensor
can be switched off entirely, as follows:

Climate control on/off
button.

1. Select Settings from the Climate menu.
Climate

Note: If the air vents are programmed to rotate,
they will rotate into the fascia when climate
control is turned off.

Auto

External temperature

External

Vent Rotation Auto

The external temperature is displayed at the top
of the Climate menu.

Auto

Sensitivity

Always
open

Change units
12:26 pm
JAG1519

2. Touch the + or - buttons to increase or
decrease the sensitivity of the smog
sensor.
There are five sensitivity settings, indicated by
the five bars between the + and - buttons. To
switch the smog filter off, touch the - button
until none of the five bars are illuminated.
This icon appears at the top of the
touch-screen when the smog filter
Auto
is on. When the smog sensor is
switched off, this icon will not be displayed.

120

Climate control
ELECTRIC SUNROOF

Fully open
With the sunroof closed, press and release the
rear of the switch (2). The sunroof will move to
the fully open position automatically. It can be
stopped at any point by pressing the button
again.

WARNINGS
Extreme care must be taken to ensure
that none of the occupants have any
part of their body in a position where
it could be trapped by the sunroof when
closing. Although an anti-trap mechanism is
fitted, serious injuries can occur.
Never leave children alone in the
vehicle, as this could result in serious
injury or death.
It is recommended that the Jaguar
Smart Key be removed when leaving
the vehicle.

Close
•

•

From the fully open position, press and
release the front of the switch (1). The roof
will return to the closed position
automatically.
From the tilted position, press and release
the rear of the switch (2). The roof will
return to the closed position automatically.

Anti-trap mechanism

Operation

WARNING
The sunroof can cause serious injury
should a body part become trapped.
Always ensure that the sunroof is free
from obstructions before closing.
If the sunroof encounters resistance when
closing it will stop, and then open fully. This is
to prevent serious injury or damage to the
mechanism.

Override

CAUTION
Wherever possible remove any dirt,
leaves etc. from the sunroof mechanism
before closing. Failure to do so may damage
the sunroof mechanism.

E95097

The sunroof can only be operated with the
ignition on.

The anti-trap mechanism can be overridden to
allow the roof to be closed when movement is
restricted by dirt. To override the anti-trap
mechanism, press and hold the front of the
switch until the roof reaches the closed
position.

Tilt
With the roof closed, press and release the
front of the switch (1). The sunroof will move
to the tilted position automatically. It can be
stopped at any point by pressing the button
again.

121

Climate control
Calibration

Sunroof blind

If the battery is disconnected, or the power
supply is interrupted, whilst the sunroof is
partially open it will need to be recalibrated.
Once the battery is reconnected, or the power
supply is restored, recalibrate the sunroof as
follows:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the front of the switch, so that the
sunroof is in the tilt position, then release
the switch.

E95098

3. Press the front of the sunroof switch, and
hold for thirty seconds.

The blind can be manually opened and closed,
using the handle, with the sunroof closed or
tilted open.

4. After thirty seconds the sunroof will begin
to move. Keep the front of the switch
pressed until the sunroof has fully opened,
then closed.

The blind opens automatically when the
sunroof is fully opened and cannot be closed
with the sunroof in this position. The sunroof
needs to be fully closed before the blind can be
closed.

5. Once the open/close cycle has completed
and the sunroof has stopped moving,
release the switch.
The sunroof can now be operated as normal.

122

Convenience features
SUN VISORS

SUN BLINDS

E95106

Pivot the sun visor downward to reduce sun
glare through the front windscreen. If required,
the visor can unclipped and then be pivoted
towards the side window to reduce sun glare
from that side of the vehicle.

Press the switch to raise or lower the sun blind.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER

Vanity mirror
Pivot the sun visor downward and raise the
cover on the vanity mirror to illuminate the
mirror. Close the cover to extinguish the
lamps. If the cover is left open, the lamps will
extinguish automatically after 16 minutes to
prevent battery drain.

JAG1331

Rotate the thumbwheel up to increase, and
down to decrease, the level of instrument
illumination.

123

Convenience features
CLOCK

Setting the clock as the screensaver

The clock is set using the touch-screen. Select
Vehicle from the Home menu.

From the Home menu on the touch-screen,
select Vehicle.

External

Home

Vehicle

Trip computer

Audio/TV

20 .5 C 17 .5 C

Climate

DAB radio

Clock adjust

DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

Phone

Left

Navigation

Right

Trip A
Trip B
auto

BBC National DAB
TA FM DAB i Subch.

Veh. settings

Vehicle

eset

Av. fuel

12.3 L/100km

Range 353 Km

Units

12 : 26 pm

Valet

12:26 pm

532 Km

Av. speed 42 Km/h

Trip

Cont./Bright.
Syst. settings

Distance

E95075

From the Vehicle menu, select Syst. settings
(1).

Vehicle
Tr

uter

Clock adjust

Vehicle
Cont./Bright.

Display set.
Syst. settings

Set

Pr
Veh. settings

But

12:26 pm

Vol. presets

Screensaver
setting
Timeout to
home screen O

3
On

50 seconds

JAG1521

1. From the Vehicle menu, select Clock
adjust.

12:26 PM
JAG1522

2. Touch the up or down arrow icons to
adjust the hours.

Select Display set. (2), then touch the clock
symbol (3). The clock will now appear as the
screensaver.

3. Touch the up or down arrow icons to
adjust the minutes.

Note: To select an alternative screensaver from
the four available, click on the appropriate icon.

4. Touch to switch between 12 and 24 hour
clock display.
5. Touch to set the new time. The time
display in the bottom left corner of the
screen will now change to reflect any
adjustments made.
Note: Any adjustments made will be lost,
unless Set is selected before exiting the Clock
adjust menu.

124

Convenience features
AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS

GLOVE BOX

E95111

The auxiliary power socket is located in the
cubby box.
CAUTIONS
Only Jaguar approved accessories
should be plugged into the power
sockets. Using any other equipment may
damage the vehicle's electrical system. If you
are in any doubt contact your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.
The engine should be running when
using accessories for long periods.
Failure to do so can discharge the battery.

JAG1653

The glove box is opened using the
JaguarSense proximity sensor on the fascia
(arrowed). To open the glove box, place the tip
of your finger close to and directly over the
sensor, as shown in the left-hand inset of the
illustration.
The sensor is able to distinguish between a
finger approach and an accidental finger rub
approach from a knee or other large items,
including being wiped for cleaning purposes.
Under these conditions, the sensor will not
react to the input and the glove box will remain
closed.
Note: When the vehicle alarm is armed or Valet
mode is selected, the proximity sensor is
disabled, preventing the glove box from being
opened.
Note: The wearing of gloves may interfere with
the operation of the proximity sensor. If gloves
are worn, it may be necessary to touch the
sensor to open the glove box.

125

Convenience features
CUP HOLDERS
1

E95112

1. Front single cup holder.

WARNINGS
The cup holders should only be used
for soft containers. Containers which
are hard (cans, metal, ceramic, hard
plastic etc.) can cause serious injury if the
vehicle is involved in an accident, sudden
manoeuvre or braking.
Do not carry open drinks containers.
Hot liquids can cause serious injury
when spilled and may damage the
vehicle.
Do not drink, or use the drinks
holders when driving. Doing so
would break concentration, which
may result in loss of control.

2. Front twin cup holder.
3. Rear cup holders.
To access a front cup holder, press and release
the lid. To access the rear cup holders, fold
down the rear seat armrest.

126

Convenience features
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

Twin cup holder

1
2

3
4

E95121

1. Glove box.
E95113

2. Front door stowage.
3. Cubby box.

The twin cup holder can be converted into a
storage compartment by removing the insert.
Use one hand to squeeze the two sides of the
insert together and, lifting the edge nearest the
driver first, use the other hand to rotate the
insert up and out of its compartment, towards
the passenger seat.

4. Seat map pockets.
5. Rear door stowage.
WARNING
Ensure that any items stored in the
vehicle are secure and cannot move.
If the vehicle is involved in an
accident, or subject to sudden braking or
direction change, loose items can cause
serious injury.

Note: An ashtray and cigar lighter pack, which
replaces the front twin cup holder, is available
from your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

127

Convenience features
GARAGE DOOR TRANSCEIVER

The door transceiver is located in the rear-view
mirror. It can be programmed to transmit the
radio frequencies of up to three different
transmitters, which can be used to activate
garage doors, entry gates, home lighting,
security systems or other radio frequency
operated devices.
Although this section mainly describes the
procedures for a garage door opener, it also
equally applies to the previously mentioned
applications.
In some countries, this feature is also known
as the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.
For further information, see Information and
Assistance later in this section.

E95122

WARNINGS
Do not use the transceiver with any
garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature as
required by safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these features increases
risk of serious injury or death.
When programming the transceiver
to a garage door opener or entry gate,
ensure the area is clear. This will
prevent potential harm or damage as the gate
or garage door will activate during the
programme.

Before programming
CAUTION
When programming a device that may
require you to press and re-press the
hand-held transmitter (cycle), unplug the
device during the cycling process to prevent
possible motor failure.
For best results, fit a new battery to the
hand-held transmitter of the garage door
opener (or other device) before programming.
If your garage door opener receiver (located in
the garage) is equipped with an antenna,
ensure that the antenna is hanging straight
down.

CAUTION
This device may suffer from interference
if operated in the vicinity of a mobile or
fixed station transmitter. This interference is
likely to affect the hand-held transmitter as
well as the in-car transceiver.

128

Convenience features
To erase all programming

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press
and hold both the chosen transceiver
button on the rear-view mirror, as shown
above, and the hand-held transmitter
button. Keep both buttons pressed. The
indicator lamp will flash slowly at first and
then change to a fast flash. When the
indicator lamp flashes rapidly, release both
buttons. The rapid flashing lamp indicates
successful programming.

For first time programming, ensure that the
engine is switched off:
1. Ensure that the ignition system is in
convenience mode.
2. Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the transceiver in the rear-view mirror.
Keep the buttons pressed until the
indicator lamp begins to flash (this will
take approximately 20 seconds), then
release the buttons.

4. If, after 60 seconds, the indicator lamp
does not flash rapidly, release both the
transceiver and the hand-held transmitter
buttons and repeat the procedure starting
with Step 2. Position the hand-held
transmitter at a different angle and/or
distance.

All memories in the garage door opener have
now been cleared.
Note: Do not perform this procedure when
programming the additional garage door
opener buttons.

5. Press and hold the programmed garage
door opener button and observe the
indicator lamp.
• If the indicator is continuous,
programming is complete and your
device should activate when the garage
door opener button is pressed and held
for approximately 1 to 2 seconds and
then released.
• If the indicator lamp blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns a
continuous light, proceed with the
following programming instructions for
rolling code device equipment.

Programming

E95123

Ensuring that the engine is switched off:
1. Ensure that the ignition system is on.
2. Hold the end of the original garage door
opener hand-held transmitter
approximately 50 to 150 mm (2 to 6
inches) away from the transceiver in the
rear-view mirror, keeping the indicator
lamp in view.

129

Convenience features
Rolling code device equipment
programming

Entry gate programming
The technology of some entry gates requires
you to press and re-press (cycle) the hand-held
transmitter button every two seconds during
programming.

Note: The assistance of a second person, may
make the following steps quicker and easier.
Once the button has been pressed there are
only 30 seconds in which to complete Step 3.

Continue to press and hold the desired
rear-view mirror button while you cycle your
hand-held transmitter until the indicator lamp
flashes rapidly.

1. At the garage door opener receiver (motor
head unit) in the garage, locate the learn or
smart button/switch.
• The name of the button or switch may
vary between manufacturers.

Information and assistance
CAUTION
It is recommended that when you sell or
dispose of the vehicle, the programmed
transceiver buttons be erased for security
purposes.

2. Press and release the learn or smart
button.
3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and
hold the programmed garage door opener
button for two seconds and release.

For information on the range of available
compatible products or accessories, or for
assistance, you should contact your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.

4. Repeat the press, hold, release sequence
three times to complete the programming
process.
The garage door opener in the rear-view mirror
should now activate the rolling code device.

You can also contact the supplier’s helpline on
0 0800 0466 354 65. This toll-free number can
be called from anywhere within Europe. No
separate country code is required (the first zero
is not required when calling from within
Germany).

Reprogramming a single garage door
opener button
To programme a device to a previously trained
button:

Contact can also be made via the internet. The
website address is www.eurohomelink.com.
The e-mail address is:
info@eurohomelink.com.

1. Press and hold the desired
pre-programmed garage door opener
button for at least 20 seconds, but no
longer than 30 seconds, until the indicator
lamp begins to flash.

Note: Keep the original transmitter for future
use or programming procedures if, for
example, you purchase a new vehicle.

2. Without releasing the rear-view mirror
button, position the hand-held transmitter
approximately 50 to 150 mm (2 to 6
inches) away from the transceiver in the
rear-view mirror, keeping the indicator
lamp in view.

Note: The manufacturer is not responsible for
any radio or TV interference caused by
unauthorised modifications to this equipment.
Such modifications could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

3. Carry out Step 3 of Programming.

130

Convenience features
PORTABLE AUDIO INTERFACE

1
2
3

E95124

1. USB connector port.
2. iPod input port.
3. Auxiliary input port.
The interface sockets are located in the cubby
box and can be used to integrate personal
media devices with the vehicle's audio system.
See Portable audio (page 299).

131

Starting the engine
GENERAL INFORMATION

Steering column lock

START/STOP button

CAUTION
During vehicle recovery, the Jaguar
Smart Key must remain inside the
vehicle (or be stowed in the starter control unit
in the centre console), so that the steering
column remains unlocked.

The START/STOP button is used to start or
stop the engine, or to turn on the ignition
without starting the engine.
Note: The START/STOP button will only be
operational if a valid Jaguar Smart key is
detected within the vehicle.

Your vehicle is fitted with an electronic steering
column lock. The column unlocks when it
detects a Jaguar Smart Key inside the vehicle.

Switching on the ignition

The steering column automatically locks when
the starter switch is turned off and the driver's
door is opened.
If the steering column remains locked, even
with a valid Jaguar Smart Key in the vehicle,
STEERING COLUMN LOCKED is displayed in
the message centre. If this occurs:
1. Press the starter button to return to the
convenience mode.
2. Try again to unlock the steering column
lock, by turning the steering wheel gently
to the left and right.

E94135

3. If the malfunction still persists, seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible.

To turn on the ignition without starting the
engine, make sure the brake pedal is not
applied and that there is a valid Jaguar Smart
Key in the vehicle, then press and release the
START/STOP button. The warning indicators
illuminate and most electrical systems will be
operational.
Note: If the brake pedal is pressed when the
START/STOP button is pressed, the engine will
start.

132

Starting the engine
KEYLESS STARTING

Starting a petrol engine
With the brake pedal applied and with a valid
Jaguar Smart Key in the vehicle, press and
release the START/STOP button. The engine
will start, the JaguarDrive selector will elevate
out of the centre console and the air vents in
the front fascia will rotate to the open position.

WARNING
Never start the engine or leave it
running, when the vehicle is in an
enclosed space. Exhaust gases are
poisonous and can cause unconsciousness
and death if inhaled.

Starting a diesel engine
With the brake pedal applied and with a valid
Jaguar Smart Key in the vehicle, press and
release the START/STOP button. In ambient
conditions, after 3 seconds, the engine will
start to crank. The JaguarDrive selector will
elevate out of the centre console and the air
vents in the front fascia will rotate to the open
position.
Note: Smart Start in progress is displayed in
the message centre prior to the engine
cranking. If, during the start procedure, the
brake pedal is released, a gear change is made
or if a fault occurs, Smart Start cancelled is
displayed in the message centre and the start
procedure is cancelled.

E94136

With the Jaguar Smart Key inside the vehicle
and the brake pedal depressed, press and
release the START/STOP button to start the
engine.

Cold climates
In very cold conditions, the delay between
pressing the START/STOP button and the
engine cranking, can be up to 12 seconds.
During this delay, keep the brake pedal applied
and do not press the START/STOP button
again, as this will switch off the ignition. Also in
very cold conditions, expect engine cranking
times to increase.

Note: On diesel models, Smart Start in
progress is displayed in the message centre. If
the brake pedal is released, a gear change is
made or if a fault occurs, Smart Start
cancelled is displayed in the message centre
and the start procedure is cancelled.

133

Starting the engine
Engine block heaters

Petrol engines
If the engine persistently fails to start, press the
START/STOP button (without applying the
brake pedal) to return the ignition to
convenience mode. Slowly depress the
accelerator pedal fully, hold it in this position
and press the START/STOP button with the
brake pedal applied, the engine will start to
crank. Release the accelerator pedal when the
engine starts.

CAUTION
The fitting of an engine block heater
does not eliminate the need for
antifreeze.
Engines are more difficult to start when the
ambient temperature is very low. In
geographical areas where temperatures below
-10°C (14°F) are experienced frequently, it is
advisable to fit an engine block heater. The
block heater will have an insulated connector at
the front of the vehicle, which is connected to a
mains supply using a suitable extension cable.
The heater can remain in use overnight if
required. Typically, an engine block heater will
use between 400W and 1000W per hour.

If the engine still fails to start, consult your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Diesel engines

For further information consult your Jaguar
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

If the engine persistently fails to start, press
and hold the START/STOP button (with the
brake pedal applied). Keep the START/STOP
button and the brake pedal pressed until the
engine starts, then release.

If the engine fails to start

If the engine still fails to start, consult your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

When pressing the engine START/STOP button
to start the engine, if the security status
indicator lamp on the top surface of the
instrument panel remains flashing, a fault
condition is indicated. Seek qualified
assistance as soon as possible.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE
WARNING
Never switch off the engine when the
vehicle is in motion.

Note: If the Jaguar Smart Key is placed in the
door pocket, it may be outside the range of the
sensors when the door is opened.

With the gear selector in position P, press the
engine START/STOP button. The engine will
stop and the ignition system will return to
convenience mode. The audio, telephone and
touch-screen systems will revert to stand-by
mode and the JaguarDrive selector will retract
into the centre console. Pressing the
START/STOP button again (without pressing
the brake pedal) will activate the systems.

Note: If the fuel system inertia switch has
tripped, the ignition circuit will be isolated.
See FUEL CUT-OFF (page 177).

134

Starting the engine
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)

Warning indicators and messages

The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) forms part of
the emissions reduction system fitted to your
vehicle. The DPF will remove a high proportion
of the harmful carbon microspheres (soot)
before they leave the exhaust. It achieves this
by filtering out the particles, which are then
stored until they are burnt away and the filter is
emptied.

CAUTION
Failure to take the appropriate action
when a warning message appears, may
result in damage to the engine and DPF
system, increased vehicle emissions and
costly repairs.
If regeneration cannot be achieved
automatically by the system, due to short
journeys for example, the driver will be notified
via a warning indicator or message.

Regeneration
CAUTION
The regeneration procedure produces
high temperatures in the DPF. Heat can
be felt radiating from beneath the vehicle,
which is normal and not a cause for concern.
However, the vehicle should not be parked
over combustible material, particularly during
dry weather. The heat generated could be
sufficient to start a fire when in close proximity
to combustible material such as long dry
grass, paper etc.

DPF FULL
If this message appears in the message centre
(with a red backlight), the vehicle should be
taken to your Dealer/Authorised Repairer as
soon as possible.

DPF FULL SEE HANDBOOK
If this message appears in the message centre
(with an amber backlight), the driver should
carry out the DPF regeneration procedure that
follows, as soon as possible.

Unlike a normal filter which requires periodic
replacement, the DPF has been designed to
regenerate, or clean itself, to maintain
operating efficiency. This regeneration process
takes place automatically in most cases.
However, some unfavourable driving
conditions may mean that the regeneration
process must be initiated deliberately by the
driver.

135

Starting the engine
Regeneration procedure
If the warning DPF FULL SEE HANDBOOK
appears in the message centre, carry out the
following procedure as soon as possible.
Note: At all times during this procedure you
should observe all relevant speed limits, laws
and regulations. Always take account of traffic
and weather conditions and drive with
consideration for other road users.
1. Drive the vehicle until the engine reaches
normal operating temperature. The engine
should not be left idling to achieve working
temperature.
2. Drive the vehicle for a further twenty
minutes, keeping the vehicle at a steady
speed between 75 km/h (45 mph) and
120 km/h (75 mph).
Keeping a constant speed enables the DPF
to regenerate more efficiently. It is
therefore recommended that Cruise
control is used to achieve this, if possible.
3. If regeneration is successful, the warning
message will extinguish. If the message
remains, repeat the process.
If the warning message fails to extinguish after
60 minutes of driving, contact your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer for assistance.

136

Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

JaguarDrive selector

CAUTIONS
Never select the Park (P) position whilst
the vehicle is in motion. Doing so may
cause serious damage to the transmission.
Never select the Reverse (R) position
whilst the vehicle is in forward motion.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
transmission.
Never select a forward gear whilst the
vehicle is in rearward motion. Doing so
may cause serious damage to the
transmission.
Do not rev the engine or allow it to run
above normal idle speed while selecting
D or R, or while the vehicle is stationary with
any gear selected.
Do not allow the vehicle to remain
stationary for any length of time, with a
gear selected and the engine running. Always
select P or N if the engine is to idle for a
prolonged period.
The transmission system is designed to
operate in two distinct modes, conventional
automatic and Jaguar Sequential Shift.
The automatic modes are accessed by the gear
selector:
• D - Drive - automatic shifting.
• S - Sport - sport automatic shifting.
E94119

The Jaguar Sequential Shift mode enables
sequential manual gear selection in D
(temporary) and S (permanent) modes, via the
steering wheel mounted paddles.

The JaguarDrive selector elevates out of the
centre console when the engine is started, in
readiness for gear selection. Press the brake
pedal, then rotate the control to select the
chosen gear (P, R, N or D) or, from D, press
down on the control and rotate to select S
(Sport).

Note: In addition to the standard shift patterns
available in D and S, the transmission will
adapt to differing conditions by modifying shift
points, based upon vehicle sensor information
for road gradient, cornering, braking pressure
and driving style.

137

Transmission
P should be selected before switching off the
engine. However, it is possible to switch the
engine off with R, D or S selected - the selector
will automatically select P, while retracting into
the centre console.

Note: Both D and S positions also offer
additional features, which are listed under
Automatic mode and Sport mode, later in this
section.

Stationary vehicle

Note: If the engine is switched off with N
selected, the system will wait for 10 minutes
before selecting P. This procedure is to allow
the vehicle to be conveyed through a car wash
only and should not be used for vehicle
recovery purposes.

When the vehicle is stationary, the selector
may be left in D or S, unless the vehicle is to be
parked. When stopping for extended periods,
either select P or apply the parking brake and
select N.

Selector interlock

To prevent the transmission from
automatically selecting P (e.g. for vehicle
recovery purposes), it is necessary to activate
the Emergency Park Release.
See TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
(page 254).

The transmission is equipped with an interlock,
to prevent inadvertent selection of a drive gear
(D, S or R) from the P or N positions. To
release the interlock to select a drive gear,
press the brake pedal while making the
selection.

Selector positions

Ensure the required driving range has selected
prior to releasing the brake pedal. The range
indicator (R, D or S) on the selector and
message centre displays, will illuminate
continuously to confirm selection.

P - Park: Use when parked. In this position the
transmission is locked, do not attempt to select
P if the vehicle is moving.
Note: P will be selected automatically when the
engine is switched off.

Note: If the brake pedal is released too early
during selector rotation from P or N to a driving
range (R, D or S), then the selected range will
not be engaged. The selected range will flash
on the selector and message centre displays.

R - Reverse: Do not select if the vehicle is
moving forward.
N - Neutral: Disconnects drive to the wheels.
Use the parking brake when stopping
temporarily with N selected.

To obtain the selected range, press the brake
pedal, select P or N and reselect the required
range, ensuring the brake pedal is depressed.

D - Drive: Gear changing is automatic for all six
forward gears. The shift points are determined
by accelerator pedal position and road speed,
to provide the best balance of performance,
refinement and fuel economy, for the large
majority of driving conditions.

If N is selected for less than 2 seconds (e.g.
when moving the selector between R and D),
the interlock will not activate and the brake
pedal will not need to be pressed.

S - Sport: Gear changing is automatic for all six
forward gears, with modified gear shift points
to maximise the vehicle response in
demanding driving conditions. This mode is
not suitable for town or highway cruising.

Note: The interlock is deactivated when the
vehicle is travelling at more than 5 km/h
(3 mph).

138

Transmission
If the selector fails to elevate

Automatic mode

If the JaguarDrive selector is obstructed when
the engine is started, it may be prevented from
elevating out of the centre console. If this
occurs, turn off the ignition, ensure that the
selector is not obstructed and then start the
engine. The selector should elevate as normal.
If the selector still fails to elevate, even if there
is no obstruction, a fault in the system is
indicated. The selector can still be used in the
lowered position, but be aware that it will not
automatically select P when the engine is
switched off, so P should be selected manually.
The fault should be rectified by a Dealer/
Authorised Repairer at the earliest opportunity.

Starting
In the unlikely event that the selector did not
rotate back to P when the vehicle was
previously switched off, and the selector has
remained in R, D or S, it will not be possible to
start the engine. The vehicle will go to ignition
on. The selected range will flash and the
selector will now be unlocked, to allow the
driver to select P and start the engine.

E94120

To select Drive (D) when the vehicle is
stationary:1. Apply the foot brake.
2. Rotate the gear selector to D.
When in D the transmission will automatically
select the most appropriate gear for the current
driving conditions.
Note: When a gear is selected the vehicle may
begin to move as soon as the foot brake is
released.

Kick-down
When D is selected and the accelerator pedal is
depressed fully, the transmission will
downshift to the lowest appropriate gear. Once
the accelerator pedal is returned to a normal
driving position, the transmission will up-shift
to the highest appropriate gear.
Note: Kick-down operation will vary according
to road speed, current gear in use and
accelerator movement.

139

Transmission
Fast off

Sport mode

Activated when rapidly lifting off the
accelerator pedal and takes account of road
gradient. This feature inhibits up-shifts,
enhancing performance.

Note: If Sport mode is selected, driver type
recognition will vary the activation of this
feature according to driving style.

Shift adapt under braking
Under braking, the transmission will vary the
down-shift point in proportion to braking effort
and road gradient. This feature works in
conjunction with the positive torque function,
resulting in a smoother down-shift.

Note: If Sport mode is selected, driver type
recognition will vary the activation of this
feature according to driving style.
E94121

Corner recognition

To select Sport mode:

Inhibits up-shifts during cornering, to provide
improved vehicle balance.

1. With the selector in D, push down on the
selector.

Note: If Sport mode is selected, driver type
recognition will vary the activation of this
feature according to driving style.

2. Rotate from D to S.
Note: When Sport mode is selected SPORT will
be displayed in the message centre, and the
selector indicator will illuminate.

Road gradient recognition
When the vehicle is being driven on an uphill
gradient, the transmission adapts the shift
pattern to make better use of engine power.

Sport mode enhances the responsiveness of
the transmission, to provide a sporting feel to
driving the vehicle. Sport mode is
recommended for overtaking manoeuvres and
for when rapid progress is desired.

When driving on a long downhill gradient, the
transmission may automatically select a lower
gear, to increase engine braking. Selecting
Sport mode (S) will increase the tendency of
the transmission to select a lower gear in these
conditions, further increasing engine braking.

To return to automatic mode move the selector
lever back to the D position. The D on the
selector display will illuminate to confirm that
automatic mode has been selected.

Note: It is also possible to manually select a
lower gear to increase engine braking via use of
the shift paddles.

140

Transmission
Driver type recognition

Up-shift requests (+) are optimised for
performance via the short shift function,
resulting in firmer feeling shifts than in
automatic mode. Down-shift requests (-)
utilise a throttle blip during the shift, resulting
in improved shift feel.

In Sport mode, the transmission monitors
driving style and in combination with sensors
in the vehicle, varies the shift schedule,
fast-off, corner recognition and shift adapt
under braking functions, according to the
driving style.

The Jaguar Sequential Shift manual mode can
be accessed either temporarily, or
permanently.

Manual mode - Jaguar Sequential Shift

Temporary manual gear selection: When the
gear selector is in the D position, manual mode
may be directly accessed by the single action of
operating the steering wheel mounted shift
paddles.
This convenience feature allows immediate but
temporary use of the shift paddles when the
gear selector is in D.
If continued use of manual mode is required,
the gear selector may be subsequently moved
to the S position to enter permanent manual
mode in the currently selected gear.
If the gear selector remains in the D position,
temporary manual mode will be held whilst the
driver is accelerating, decelerating, cornering
or continuing to request shifts via the paddles.
The transmission will revert to automatic
operation after a short period of driving at
steady speed; alternatively the shift-up (+)
paddle may be held for a short period
(approximately one second) to return directly
to automatic operation in D.
Permanent manual gear selection: Select the
S position, permanent manual mode is then
accessed by the operation of the steering wheel
mounted shift paddles.
The message centre will highlight the currently
selected gear.

E94122

Shifts in the Jaguar Sequential Shift manual
mode are made using the steering wheel
mounted shift paddles and are optimised to
provide a rapid response to gear shift requests.

141

Transmission
Note: When the transmission is set to
permanent manual mode (i.e. using the
paddles to change gear while in Sport mode)
and Dynamic mode is selected, transmission
up-shifts are fully controlled by the driver. This
means that the transmission will not change up
a gear automatically, even when the vehicle's
rev limit is reached. When the rev limit is
reached, the gear position indicator in the
message centre will glow amber, to indicate
that the next gear should be selected.

Kick-down: Operation of kick-down in Jaguar
Sequential Shift mode will override the
currently selected gear. The lowest available
gear will be selected for maximum acceleration
and will be highlighted in the message centre
display. Subsequent manual shifts may then be
selected as usual.
Positive torque: Provides throttle blips on
down-shifts, improving shift feel and response.
Shift assist: The transmission will
automatically up-shift at the engine speed
redline in Jaguar Sequential Shift mode, as if
commanded manually.

To exit from the Jaguar Sequential Shift
permanent manual mode, either pull and hold
the shift-up paddle for approximately one
second (to return directly to automatic
operation in S), or rotate the gear selector to
the D position. The transmission will revert to
the D automatic shift mode.

The transmission will automatically
down-shift, when the engine speed drops too
low for the currently selected gear.
When the vehicle approaches, or comes to
rest, second gear is automatically selected.

Manual operation
To shift-up, briefly pull the shift-up (+) paddle
on the right-hand side of the steering wheel
towards you.

Subsequent pull-aways will occur in second
gear, unless the accelerator pedal demand is
high or a down-shift is manually selected, in
which case, first gear will be selected.

To shift-down, briefly pull the shift-down
paddle (-) on the left-hand side of the steering
wheel towards you.

In all cases the message centre will display the
current gear.
Note: During sustained braking, if a down-shift
is selected at a speed which would result in the
engine speed exceeding its normal operating
range, the gear change will be indicated in the
message centre, but the down-shift will be
delayed until the vehicle speed has reduced
sufficiently for the gear selection to be made,
without causing the engine speed to exceed its
normal operating range.

The message centre display will change to
highlight the requested gear.
Note: The transmission will inhibit up-shifts
and down-shifts if the requested shift would
result in an engine speed outside the normal
operating range of the engine. If this occurs,
the message centre will briefly display the
requested gear selection, but will return to
displaying the current gear.
The Jaguar Sequential Shift mode also has the
following features:

142

Transmission
Limp-home mode

Selector position is shown highlighted at the
top of the message centre and confirmed by
the dot on the circular representation of the
selector.

Note: The driver should be aware that the
vehicle’s performance will be reduced and
must take this into account when driving. Also
the use of the Jaguar Sequential Shift paddles
will be disabled. In this event, seek qualified
assistance as soon as possible.

If manual mode is selected, the numbers 1 to 6
appear at the top of the display, with the
currently selected gear highlighted.
Note: With the transmission set to permanent
manual mode and Dynamic mode selected,
when the rev limit is reached, the gear position
indicator in the message centre will glow
amber, to indicate that the next gear should be
selected.

In the unlikely event of an electrical or
mechanical failure, transmission operation will
be limited. The vehicle gear selector ranges P,
R, N, D and S may still be used to enable the
vehicle to be driven to a safe area.
Some faults will cause the selector to be locked
in position until the ignition is switched off. If
the selected range flashes, it signifies that the
driver request cannot be engaged. Re-select N
and repeat the attempt.

The message centre may also display the
following messages with associated warning
indicators:
ENGINE SYSTEMS FAULT (Red)

If the transmission is still unable to select the
requested gear, contact your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.

RESTRICTED PERFORMANCE (Red or Amber)
GEARBOX FAULT (Amber)
If any of these messages are displayed it is
likely that loss of power or driveability will be
experienced. Seek qualified assistance as soon
as possible.

Message centre display

l/100km

JAG1629

The message centre will confirm the
JaguarDrive selector position (selected gear).

143

Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

ABS warning indicator
If this amber warning indicator
illuminates while driving and/or
ABS FAULT is displayed in the
message centre, drive with extra caution, avoid
heavy braking where possible, and seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible.

WARNINGS
Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal whilst the vehicle is in motion.
This may cause a light application of
the brakes, which can result in overheating,
reduced brake performance, and excessive
brake wear.
Never allow the vehicle to coast
(freewheel) with the engine turned
off. The engine must be running to
provide full braking assistance. The brakes will
still function with the engine off, but far more
pressure will be required to operate them.
If the red brake warning indicator
illuminates, safely bring the vehicle to
a stop, as quickly as possible. Seek
qualified assistance before proceeding.
Never place non-approved floor
matting or any other obstructions
under the brake pedal. This restricts
pedal travel and braking efficiency.

If this red warning indicator
illuminates while driving and/or the
message LOW BRAKE FLUID is
displayed in the message centre, check the
brake fluid level at the earliest opportunity and
top-up as required. See BRAKE FLUID CHECK
(page 206).

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ABS
WARNINGS
ABS cannot overcome the physical
limitations of braking distance. Nor
can it overcome the lack of grip on a
road surface (e.g. aquaplaning on water).
Braking distance is increased on a
slippery surface. This applies to all
vehicles, even those fitted with ABS.
The driver should not be tempted to
take risks when driving, in the hope
that ABS will correct errors of
judgement. In all cases it remains the driver's
responsibility to drive with due care and
attention, paying particular attention to the
effects of speed, weather, road conditions etc.

Brake pads
Brake pads require a period of bedding in when
new. Drive with extra caution for the first
500 km (300 miles) to avoid the need for heavy
braking.

Brake pad wear warning
When the brake pads are wearing low, the
warning message BRAKE PADS LOW is
displayed in the message centre. Arrange for
your vehicle to be seen by your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer at the earliest opportunity.

ABS (Anti-Lock Braking System) allows
maximum brake pressure, and thus maximum
braking efficiency, to be applied, and prevents
the road wheels locking. This allows the driver
to retain steering control during heavy braking
under most road conditions.

Wet conditions
Driving through heavy rain or water can have
an adverse effect on braking efficiency. Under
such circumstances, it is recommended that
you lightly apply the brakes intermittently to
dry the brakes.

ABS optimises tyre to road adhesion under
maximum braking conditions, though it cannot
provide increased cornering ability.

144

Brakes
During emergency braking conditions ABS
constantly monitors the speed of each wheel.
ABS varies the brake pressure to individual
wheels, according to the grip available. The
constant alteration of brake pressure can be
felt as a pulsing sensation through the brake
pedal. This is not a cause for concern, as it is
designed to demonstrate to the driver that ABS
is operating.

Electronic Brakeforce Distribution (EBD)
EBD balances the distribution of braking forces
between the wheels on the front and rear axles,
to maintain maximum braking under all vehicle
loading conditions.
For example; Under light loads, EBD applies
less braking effort to the rear wheels, to
maintain stability. Conversely, it allows full
braking effort to the rear wheels when the
vehicle is towing or is heavily laden.

ABS braking techniques
For optimum ABS performance, these
instructions on braking techniques during ABS
operation should be followed:
• Do not release the brake pressure when
the pulsating effect is felt. Maintain a
constant pressure until the manoeuvre is
completed.
• To familiarise yourself with the feel of the
brake pedal during ABS braking, practise
an emergency stop procedure, always
making sure it is safe to do so. With the
seat belts fitted to all occupants, drive the
vehicle at 32 km/h (20 mph) and brake
sharply.
• ABS enables the driver to steer around
obstacles during emergency braking.
However, the consequences of turning
sharply at high speed cannot be overcome
by the ABS.
• Do not attempt to pump the brakes to
avoid skidding, as this can interfere with
ABS operation. The ABS will not allow the
wheels to skid under normal road
conditions.
• The ABS will tend to keep the vehicle
straight during braking. Because braking
distances may increase under certain road
conditions, it is necessary to plan and
make turning manoeuvres as early as
possible.

A fault with the EBD system is
indicated by illumination of the red
brake warning indicator and the
message EBD FAULT is displayed in the
message centre. Gently stop the vehicle, as
soon as safety permits, and seek qualified
assistance.

145

Brakes
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)

Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)
WARNING
The EBA system is an additional
safety system; it is not intended to
relieve the driver of his or her
responsibility for exercising due care and
attention when driving.

The EBA system measures the rate at which the
brake pressure increases. If the system detects
an emergency braking situation, EBA
automatically initiates full braking effect. This
can reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.
EBA stops operating as soon as the brake pedal
is released.
E95148

EBA is part of the Dynamic Stability
Control (DSC) system and a fault
with the EBA system is indicated by
the amber DSC warning indicator illuminating
and DSC NOT AVAILABLE (with amber
backlight) displaying in the message centre.
Seek qualified assistance as soon as possible.

The switch which operates the parking brake is
mounted on the centre console to the rear of
the gear selector.
To engage the parking brake (1): Pull the
parking brake switch upwards and release. The
switch will return to the neutral position. The
Parking brake warning and Brake fluid low
warning indicator on the instrument panel will
illuminate.

Brake vacuum assist
(V6 petrol models only)
When the engine is cold and/or engine vacuum
is low, Brake vacuum assist provides additional
brake pedal assistance. When the function is
operating, a pulsation may be felt through the
brake pedal - this is not a cause for concern.

The Drive Away Release feature allows the
parking brake to release automatically as the
vehicle is driven away.
To disengage the parking brake (2): With the
ignition system on or with the engine running,
apply the foot brake and press the parking
brake switch down.

A fault is indicated by the message BRAKE
ASSIST FAULT (with amber backlight)
appearing in the message centre. Increased
brake pedal effort may be required to slow the
vehicle when the engine is cold and/or engine
vacuum is low. Seek qualified assistance.

If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle
is stationary and D or R is selected, applying
the throttle will automatically release the
parking brake.
The parking brake is also automatically
released when the gear selector is moved from
the P position.

146

Brakes
If the parking brake is inadvertently applied
when the vehicle is moving at above 3 km/h
(1.8 mph), PARK BRAKE APPLIED is displayed
in the message centre, the warning indicator in
the instrument panel will illuminate and a
warning chime will sound.
If the parking brake is applied whilst the vehicle
is moving, releasing the switch will disengage
the parking brake. The parking brake cannot be
applied when the vehicle is moving, if the
accelerator pedal is pressed.
Note: If the vehicle is in motion, the parking
brake should only be used as an emergency
brake.
CAUTION
Always apply the parking brake when
the vehicle is parked.
The warning indicator in the instrument panel
will remain on for a short time, if the parking
brake is applied when the ignition system is
reverted to the convenience mode.
If a fault in the system is detected,
the amber brake warning indicator
will illuminate and PARK BRAKE
FAULT or CANNOT APPLY PARK BRAKE will
be displayed in the message centre. Seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, APPLY FOOT AND PARK BRAKE
will be displayed in the message centre when
the ignition is next switched on. Depress the
foot brake and pull the parking brake switch up
to apply the parking brake. This is required to
reset the parking brake system. The parking
brake will now function correctly.

147

Parking aid
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

USING THE PARKING AID

WARNINGS
It remains the driver’s responsibility
to be vigilant when reversing. Small
children or animals may not be
detected by the system.
It remains the driver’s responsibility
to detect obstacles and estimate the
vehicle’s distance from them. Some
overhanging objects, barriers, thin
obstructions or painted surfaces which could
possibly cause damage to the vehicle may not
be detected by the system. Always be vigilant
when reversing.

Touch-screen
To set the volume of the parking aid warning
tones:
• Select Vehicle from the touch-screen
Home menu, then select Veh. settings.
• Select Parking, then select Vol. presets.
Vehicle
Security

Reverse
mirror dip

Off

Parking
Valet mode
Vol. presets

CAUTIONS
Objects moving away from the vehicle
will be reported. However, whilst driving
away, object warning may be temporarily
reported due to ground reflection.
Systems using the same frequency
band as the front parking sensors, may
cause irregular tones to be emitted.

12 : 26 pm

Ve h i c l e

Display set.

Parking aid
Navigat

Preferences

Phone

Button audio

Vol. presets

Note: Once the system has been activated by
selecting reverse or using the switch, the front
and rear sensors are active when the gear
selector is in neutral. Therefore, if an obstacle
is detected an audible warning tone will sound.

AVC

Low

Medium

High

12 : 26 pm
E94137

Touch the Parking aid + or - button to increase
or decrease the warning tone volume.

The parking aid is automatically in standby
when the ignition is on and provides the driver
with information on most obstructions, and
their distance from the vehicle, when
manoeuvring. This is achieved by using four
ultrasonic sensors on each bumper.

Note: This adjusts both front and rear speaker
volume.

When objects are detected the Park aid will
emit a warning tone which increases in
frequency and then becomes constant, as the
vehicle gets closer to the object.

148

Parking aid
1

Hom
Parking aid alert

Audi
Clim
Phon
Navi
Vehi
12:26 pm

Valet

E94138
E94140

When the parking aid is active, a pop-up screen
is initiated displaying a plan view of the vehicle
and the immediate surrounding area. This can
be cancelled by touching the screen within the
pop-up area.

1. Approximately 600 mm (24 inches).
2. Approximately 1800mm (71 inches).
Note: The outer rear sensors (1) will show
visual detection on the touch-screen, before
the audible warning is given.

Note: If a rear-view camera is fitted, when
reverse gear (R) is selected, the camera display
is selected automatically. To view the parking
aid display, touch the screen. The rear view
camera will indicate when a rear parking aid
sensor has been activated, by showing a red
panel over the relevant area of the camera
display. See Rear view camera (page 152).

Rear parking aid

E94139

The rear parking aid operates only with the
ignition is on and reverse gear selected. If
obstacles are detected within operating range
(shown in next illustration), the parking aid
automatically provides an audible proximity
warning.

149

Parking aid
Front and rear parking aid

CAUTION
The parking aid system automatically
switches off when the vehicle is moving
above 15 km/h (9 mph) in D, and will need to
be reselected when moving below 15 km/h
(9 mph).

1
E94141

When both front and rear parking aids are
fitted, a switch is located in the overhead
console.

E94142

Objects are detected within the approximate
operating range from the front of the vehicle,
as shown in the illustration above:

Pressing the switch turns both the front and
rear parking aids on or off. The switch warning
indicator will come on when the system is
turned on. A switch is not provided when only
a rear parking aid is fitted.

1. 600 mm (24 inches).
2. 1800 mm (71 inches).
3. 800 mm (31 inches).

Note: The front parking aid will also operate
when reverse gear is selected.

If an obstacle is detected at the front or rear of
the vehicle, a warning tone will be heard from
the front or rear speaker respectively.

The front parking aid provides an audible
proximity warning when driving forwards or
reversing.

Note: The outer rear sensors (1) will show
visual detection on the touch-screen, before
the audible warning is given.

The front and rear sensors only operate within
a fixed speed range in forward gears and are
not effective when moving forwards above
15 km/h (9 mph).

The warning tone increases in rate as the
vehicle approaches the obstacle.

150

Parking aid
The front or rear warning tone will become
continuous when the obstacle is detected at or
within 300 mm (12 inches) from the vehicle.

System fault
If the system has a fault when engaging reverse
gear or turning on the ignition, then a single,
three second tone will be heard (only once per
ignition cycle) and a pop-up warning will
appear on the touch-screen. If both front and
rear parking aids are fitted, the warning
indicator in the parking aid switch will flash for
three seconds and then switch off, if a fault is
detected.

Note: The outer front and rear sensors will
switch off if the distance to an object increases
or remains constant for 3 seconds. The
sensors will reactivate automatically if a new
object is detected within the operating range,
or if the distance to the original object reduces.

Rear fitted accessories

If a fault is detected, the system is
automatically disabled.

Particular care must be taken when reversing
with rear fitted accessories e.g. bicycle carrier,
as the rear park assist will only indicate the
distance from the bumper to the obstacle.

The parking aid may sound spurious tones if it
detects a frequency tone using the same band
as the sensors (e.g. air brakes).

Cleaning the sensors
Do not clean the sensors with abrasive or sharp
objects or materials.
For reliable operation, the sensors in the front
and rear bumpers should be kept free from ice,
frost and grime.
When using a high pressure spray the sensors
should only be sprayed briefly and not from a
distance of less than 200 mm (8 inches).

151

Rear view camera
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The camera display also incorporates graphic
overlays to aid the driver in assessing vehicle
direction, width and proximity to surrounding
objects. These are detailed under Camera
overlays later in this section.

WARNINGS
It remains the driver's responsibility
to detect obstacles and estimate the
vehicle's distance from them when
reversing. Some overhanging objects or
barriers, which could possibly cause damage
to the vehicle, may not be detected by the
camera.
Always be vigilant when reversing.

The camera display on the touch-screen has
priority over the parking aid display. To view
the parking aid display instead, touch the
touch-screen.
If a parking aid sensor is activated with the
camera in use, a corresponding red shaded
area will appear on the camera display to
identify which sensor has been activated.
To cancel the rear view camera display at any
time, touch the touch-screen.
The camera image will not be displayed when
any of the following apply:
• D is selected and the vehicle speed is
greater than 16 km/h (10 mph).
• D is selected for longer than 2 seconds and
the vehicle speed is less than 16 km/h
(10 mph).

E96469

The system provides a rear view image to
assist in reversing the vehicle.
The camera is positioned centrally and
unobtrusively, just above the rear license plate.
When reverse gear (R) is selected, the rear
view camera displays a wide-angle, colour view
from the rear of the vehicle, displayed on the
touch-screen.

152

Rear view camera
Camera overlays

CAUTIONS
If, after the ignition has been switched
off, the steering wheel is turned, the
projected wheel trajectory graphics (A) will
display as being straight (as in the second
illustration), until the vehicle is driven for
approximately 10 seconds.

A
C

D
JAG1651

A
B
C
E
D
JAG1652

A. Solid line: This is the projected wheel
trajectory.
B. Dotted line: This is the safe working width
of the vehicle (including standard exterior
mirrors).
C. Boot access guideline: Do not reverse the
vehicle beyond this point if access to the
boot is required.
D. Rear bumper.
E. Parking sensor activation: A red area will
appear on the camera image, to indicate
which rear parking sensor(s) has been
activated.

153

Driving hints
RUNNING-IN

Brakes

Apart from a few precautionary
recommendations, there are no strict
running-in procedures for this vehicle.

To ensure that brake pads reach their optimum
wear and performance condition, usually
within 500 kilometres (300 miles), it is
recommended that the following points are
observed.
• Where possible, avoid heavy or harsh
braking, as this can result in damage to the
brake pads and discs.
• Avoid prolonged use of the brakes
(e.g. when descending severe gradients).
• Frequent light application of the brakes is
desirable. This helps to fully bed-in the
brake pads.

By observing the following advisory
precautions you will ensure maximum engine,
transmission and brake life for your vehicle:

Engine
•

•
•

Allow the engine to reach operating
temperature before operating at engine
speeds over 3 500 rev/min.
Vary the speed frequently.
From 1 500 kilometres (940 miles)
onwards, gradually increase performance
of the vehicle up to the permitted
maximum speed.

These running-in guidelines also apply when
new brake discs or pads have been fitted.

Final drive unit

Engine oil consumption

During the first 1 500 kilometers (940 miles):
• Avoid full throttle applications and do not
exceed 190 km/h (120 mph). Observe the
national speed limits in the country in
which you are travelling.
• Do not participate in motor racing events,
test track days, sports driving schools or
similar for the first 8 000 kilometers
(4 975 miles).

A certain amount of oil consumption is normal.
The rate of consumption will depend on the
following:
• The quality and viscosity of the oil.
• Climatic conditions.
• The speed at which the engine is being
operated.
• Road conditions.
Drivers should expect above normal
consumption when the engine is new, and after
running-in if high speeds are sustained.

154

Driving hints
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
There are two main factors which influence fuel
economy, the way the vehicle is driven and
maintenance.

Driving tips for economy
•
•
•
•

•
•

Avoid unnecessary journeys, especially
short stop-start trips.
Accelerate smoothly and gently from a
stand still.
Allow time to brake gently and smoothly.
Be aware of traffic and road conditions
ahead, and take action in time to avoid
hard braking or acceleration.
When stationary apply the park brake, and
select neutral.
Turn off the air conditioning when not
needed.

Maintenance and fuel economy
Regular servicing by a Dealer/Authorised
Repairer, along with regular checks by the
driver are essential for vehicle longevity and
fuel economy.
The condition of the engine (oils, filters, spark
plugs, settings etc.) tyre pressures, and wheel
alignment, will all have a bearing on fuel
economy. For this reason it is essential that the
vehicle is checked regularly by the driver and
serviced by an approved Dealer/Authorised
Repairer at the correct intervals.
Note: If you are in any doubt about the
maintenance requirements, intervals, or
checks required, contact your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer for advice.

155

Cruise control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

USING CRUISE CONTROL

Cruise control enables the driver to maintain a
constant road speed without using the
accelerator pedal. This is particularly useful for
motorway cruising, or for any journey where a
constant speed can be maintained for a lengthy
period.

Setting vehicle speed
WARNING
Only use cruise control when
conditions are favourable, for
example, straight, dry, open roads
with light traffic.

E97088

In certain conditions, such as a steep
downhill gradient, the vehicle speed
may exceed the set cruising speed.
This is because engine braking is unable to
maintain or reduce the vehicle speed. Driver
intervention may be required.
When you are travelling at the speed you
require, roll the speed adjustment control (1)
upwards or downwards to increase or decrease
speed.

The cruise (speed) control system can be used
by the driver to maintain a selected vehicle
speed above 30 km/h (18 mph).

Cruise control will engage and maintain the set
speed and you can remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal.

Adjustment controls on the steering wheel
allow the driver manual control of the system.
Brake operations also influence the cruise
control system.

Note: Cruise control will automatically
disengage when the brake pedal is pressed or
when the vehicle speed falls below 30 km/h
(18 mph).

1. SET - The speed adjustment control thumb
wheel is used to engage cruise control
initially by rolling it upwards. It is also used
to increase (+) or decrease (-) the set
speed until the desired speed is obtained.
2. CANCEL - Cancels cruise control but
retains the set speed in memory.
3. RESUME - Resumes the cruise control set
speed after it has been cancelled.

156

Cruise control
Changing the speed

CAUTIONS
RESUME should only be used if the
driver is aware of the set speed and
intends to return to it.
It is not recommended to resume set
speed when a low gear is selected as
excessive engine speeds will occur.
Cruise control will switch off and clear the
memory when:
• The ignition system is switched off.
• A fault occurs. The cruise control system
will switch off and cannot be used until the
fault is cleared.

E97089

There are two ways to change the set speed:
• Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed then roll the speed adjustment
control upwards (+).
• Increase or decrease the speed by rolling
the speed adjustment control upwards (+)
or downwards (-) until the desired speed is
obtained.

Automatic switch off
Cruise control will switch off but the set speed
will remain in the memory when:
• The CANCEL button is pressed.
• The brake pedal is pressed.
• Speed falls below 30 km/h (18 mph).
• Neutral, Park or Reverse gear positions are
selected.
• Dynamic Stability Control is operating.
• The difference between the actual and set
speed is too great.
• When the vehicle reaches a maximum
speed of 192 km/h (120 mph).
• The accelerator pedal is used to accelerate
beyond the set speed for too long a period.

Note: The set speed can be increased or
decreased in steps of 2 km/h (1 mph), by
rolling the speed adjustment control upwards
(+) or downwards (-) briefly until the desired
speed is obtained.

Resuming the speed
If the vehicle is accelerated above the set
speed, then the set speed will be resumed
when the accelerator pedal is released.
If CANCEL is pressed, or the brake pedal is
pressed, the cruise control will disengage but
the set speed memory will be retained. Press
RESUME and the vehicle will return to the set
speed.
Note: Cruise control will not resume at speeds
below 30 km/h (18 mph).
RESUME will not operate if the ignition has
been turned off.

157

Cruise control
Message centre information displays
Message

Warning
Indicator

Priority
Indicator

Meaning

CRUISE OVERRIDE

None

Driver is pressing the accelerator pedal,
overriding Cruise Control function.
Message will disappear when accelerator
pedal is released and Cruise Control
speed is resumed.

CRUISE CANCELLED

None

Driver has cancelled cruise control or is
braking.

CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE

None

Cruise Control or Adaptive Cruise Control
malfunction.

158

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

CAUTION
Do not use on icy or slippery roads.

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is
designed to aid the driver to maintain a gap
from the vehicle ahead or a set road speed if
there is no slower vehicle ahead. The system is
intended to provide enhanced operation of the
vehicle when following other vehicles which
are in the same lane and travelling in the same
direction.

•
•
•

It is the drivers responsibility to stay
alert, drive safely and be in control of the
vehicle at all times.
Keep the front of the vehicle free from
dirt, metal badges or objects, including
vehicle front protectors, which may
prevent the sensor from operating.
Do not use ACC when entering or
leaving a motorway.

WARNING
ACC is not a collision warning or
avoidance system. Additionally, ACC
will not react to:
Stationary or slow moving vehicles below
10 km/h (6 mph).
Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.

USING ACC
1

The ACC system uses a radar sensor, which
projects a beam directly forward of the vehicle
to detect objects ahead.

E97090

The system is operated by adjustment controls
mounted on the steering wheel. The driver can
also intervene at any time by use of the brake
or accelerator pedals. The steering wheel
adjustment controls operate as follows:

E94163

The radar sensor is mounted centrally behind
the bumper cover above the cooling aperture,
to provide a clear view forward for the radar
beam.

1. SET - Rotate the thumbwheel upwards (+)
or downwards (-), to increase or decrease
speed, until the desired speed is achieved.
2. Gap increase or decrease. Four settings
available by adjusting the thumb wheel.

CAUTION
Only use ACC when conditions are
favourable (i.e. main roads with free
flowing traffic).
Do not use in poor visibility, specifically
fog, heavy rain, spray or snow.

3. CANCEL - Cancels but retains the set
speed in memory.
4. RESUME - Resumes the set speed after it
has been cancelled.

159

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Setting the speed

The ACC may apply the brakes to slow down
the vehicle to the new set speed. The new set
speed will be displayed on the message centre
until ACC is cancelled.

Accelerate as normal until the required speed is
reached.

Follow mode gap settings
WARNING
When in follow mode, the vehicle will
not decelerate automatically to a stop,
nor will the vehicle always decelerate
quickly enough to avoid a collision, without
driver intervention.

E97091

Rotate the speed adjustment control upwards
(+) to store the vehicle speed in the memory
and engage the system.

Once a set speed has been selected, the driver
can release the accelerator and the set road
speed will be maintained.

The set speed will be displayed on the message
centre (e.g. SETSPEED 80 KM/H (50 MPH)).

When a vehicle ahead enters the same lane or
a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane, the
vehicle speed will be adjusted automatically
until the gap to the vehicle ahead corresponds
to the default gap setting (gap level 3). The
vehicle is now in follow mode.

Changing the speed
There are three ways to change the set speed:
• Accelerate or brake to the desired speed
then rotate the speed adjustment control
upwards (+).
• Increase or decrease the speed by rotating
the speed adjustment control upwards (+)
or downwards (-), until the required set
speed is shown on the message centre.
The vehicle speed will gradually adjust to
the selected speed.
• Increase or decrease the speed in steps of
2 km/h (1 mph) by rotating the speed
adjustment control upwards (+) or
downwards (-) briefly until the desired
speed is obtained.

The amber warning indicator in the
instrument panel will be
illuminated.

ACC operates between approximately 30 km/h
and 180 km/h (18 mph and 112 mph)
dependent on the country specification.
E91497

Set speeds outside this range will not be
captured.

The message centre will display the gap set.

160

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
The vehicle will then maintain the constant time
gap to the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of lane or out
of view.
• A new gap distance is set.

Each gap level is indicated by an additional
chevron in front of the vehicle icon in the
message centre (one chevron (gap level 1)
being the shortest, four chevrons (gap level 4)
being the longest). After the ignition is
switched on, the default gap (gap level 3) will
be automatically selected ready for ACC
operation.

If necessary, the vehicle brakes will be
automatically applied to slow the vehicle to
maintain the gap to the vehicle in front.

Note: When the ignition is switched off, the
gap setting will revert to the default setting
(gap level 3) when switched on again.

The maximum braking which is applied by the
ACC system is limited and can be overridden by
the driver applying the brakes, if required.

Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to select a
gap appropriate to the driving conditions.

Note: Driver braking will cancel ACC.

Overriding the speed and follow mode

If the ACC system predicts that its maximum
braking level will not be sufficient, then an
audible warning will sound while the ACC
continues to brake. DRIVER INTERVENE will be
displayed on the message centre. The driver
should take immediate action.

WARNING
Whenever the driver is overriding the
ACC by depressing the accelerator
pedal, the ACC will not automatically
apply the brakes to maintain separation from
any vehicle ahead.

When in follow mode, the vehicle will
automatically return to the set speed when the
road ahead is clear, for instance when:
• The vehicle in front accelerates or changes
lane.
• The driver changes lane to either side or
enters an exit lane.

The set speed and gap can be overridden by
pressing the accelerator pedal when cruising at
constant speed or in follow mode. If the vehicle
is in follow mode, the instrument warning
indicator will go out when the ACC is
overridden by the driver using the accelerator
and CRUISE OVERRIDE will be displayed on
the message centre. When the accelerator is
released the ACC function will operate again
and vehicle speed will decrease to the set
speed, or a lower speed if follow mode is
active.

The driver should intervene if appropriate.

Changing the follow mode set gap
The gap from the vehicle ahead can be
decreased or increased by rolling the
thumbwheel on the steering wheel. Four gap
settings are available and the selected gap
setting will be displayed on the message centre
when either ACC button is pressed.

161

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Automatic low speed switch off

Hints on driving with ACC

If the speed of the vehicle decreases below
30 km/h (18 mph), the ACC system will be
automatically switched off and the instrument
warning indicator will go out.

The system acts by regulating the speed of the
vehicle using engine control and the brakes.
Gear changes may occur in response to
deceleration or acceleration whilst in ACC.

If the brakes were being applied by the ACC
system, they will be slowly released.

ACC is not a collision avoidance system.
However, during some situations the system
may provide the driver with an indication that
intervention is required.

This will be accompanied by an audible
warning, and DRIVER INTERVENE will be
displayed on the message centre. The driver
must take control.

An audible alarm will sound, accompanied by
the message DRIVER INTERVENE if the ACC
detects:
• A failure has occurred whilst the system is
active
• That using maximum ACC braking only is
not sufficient.

Automatic switch off
ACC will disengage, but not clear the memory
when;
• the CANCEL button (3) is pressed
• the brake pedal is pressed
• Neutral (N), Park (P) or Reverse (R) gear
positions are selected
• Dynamic Stability Control activates.

Note: ACC operates when the gear selector
lever is in position S or D.
Note: When engaged, the accelerator pedal
rests in the raised position. Fully release the
pedal to allow normal ACC operation.

ACC will disengage, and clear the memory
when;
• the ignition system is switched off
• maximum vehicle speed is reached
• a fault occurs in the ACC system.

Note: When braking is applied by the ACC, the
vehicle brake lamps will be switched on
although the brake pedal will not move.

Resuming the speed and follow mode
CAUTION
RESUME should only be used if the
driver is aware of the set speed and
intends to return to it.
By pressing the RESUME button (4) after ACC
has been cancelled, for example, after braking,
the ACC will become active again provided that
the set speed memory has not been erased.
The original set speed will be resumed (unless
a vehicle ahead causes the follow mode to
become active) and the set speed will be
displayed in the message centre for four
seconds.

162

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Detection beam issues

ACC malfunction
If a malfunction occurs during operation of the
system in cruise or follow modes, the ACC
system will switch off and cannot be used until
the fault is cleared. The message DRIVER
INTERVENE appears briefly and is then
replaced by the message CRUISE NOT
AVAILABLE. If malfunction of the ACC or any
related system occurs at any other time, the
message CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE will be
displayed. It will not be possible to activate the
ACC system in any mode.

Accumulations of dirt, snow or ice on the
sensor or cover may inhibit ACC operation.
Fitting of a vehicle front protector or metallised
badges may also affect ACC operation.

The ACC system relies on its radar to detect
objects and constantly scans ahead. If the
radar detects no objects ahead in ACC or follow
mode, then the ACC will be deactivated, the
audible alarm sounds and the message
DRIVER INTERVENE displays briefly. The
message ACC SENSOR BLOCKED will then be
displayed.

E91498

Detection issues can occur:
1. When driving on a different line to the
vehicle in front.
2. When a vehicle edges into your lane. The
vehicle will only be detected once it has
moved fully into your lane.

The same messages may also be displayed
while driving on open roads with few objects
for the radar to detect.

3. There may be issues with the detection of
vehicles in front when going into and
coming out of a bend.

Clearing the obstruction allows the system to
return to normal operation. If the obstruction is
present when ACC is inactive, e.g. on initial
starting or with the ACC system switched off,
the message ACC SENSOR BLOCKED will be
displayed.

In these cases ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver should stay alert and
intervene if necessary.

Tyres other than those recommended may
have different sizes. This can affect the correct
operation of the ACC.

163

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Adverse weather conditions

The forward alert system does not initiate any
action. The driver must take appropriate action
when the FORWARD ALERT message is
displayed. However, the system monitors
driver actions (e.g. braking, steering or
indicating) and may not initiate the warning
display if the appropriate action has been taken
early enough.

WARNING
Do not use in poor visibility,
specifically fog, heavy rain, spray or
snow.
Do not use on icy or slippery roads.

The Forward alert function may be switched on
or off using the forward alert switch, located
where shown.

During adverse weather conditions such as
heavy rain or snowfall, the sensitivity of radar
blockage detection is increased, so that it can
correctly detect any reduced performance
caused by a blocked sensor.

When the indicator in the
instrument panel is on, Forward
alert is active.

During these conditions, the warning message
ACC SENSOR BLOCKED may be displayed
more frequently, especially in areas where
there are few roadside objects for the radar to
detect.

The sensitivity of the warning may be changed:
• Press the gap decrease button when ACC
is disengaged to display and then decrease
the sensitivity of the alert.
• Press the gap increase button to display
and then increase the sensitivity of the
alert.

FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION

FORWARD ALERT is
displayed in the
message centre.

JAG1303

Limited detection and warning of objects
ahead, is provided during ACC operation by the
ACC FORWARD ALERT warning. The enhanced
forward alert feature additionally provides
warnings when ACC is not engaged; if an object
is detected close ahead, then the warning tone
and message will be issued. The brakes will not
be applied.

164

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
ADVANCED EMERGENCY BRAKE
ASSIST

CAUTION
The system may not react to slow
moving vehicles and will not react to
stationary vehicles or vehicles not
travelling in the same direction as your vehicle.

WARNING
Advanced Emergency Brake Assist, is
an additional safety system and is not
intended to relieve the driver of the
responsibility for exercising due care and
attention when driving.

Advanced Emergency Brake Assist can
only improve braking performance if the
driver applies the brakes.
Warnings may not appear if the distance
to the vehicle ahead is very small or if
steering wheel and pedal movements
are large (e.g. to avoid a collision).
Advanced Emergency Brake Assist
utilises the same radar sensor as
Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward
Alert - the same limitations of performance
apply.
See PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION (page 159).
See USING ACC (page 159).
See FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION
(page 164).

On vehicles fitted with Advanced Emergency
Brake Assist, brake response is improved
during emergency braking when a moving
vehicle is detected close ahead.
Advanced Emergency Brake Assist activates If
the risk of collision increases after the
FORWARD ALERT warning is displayed.
See FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION (page 164).
The brakes are automatically applied gently in
preparation for rapid braking (which may be
noticeable). If the brake pedal is then pressed
quickly, then braking is implemented fully,
even if the pressure on the pedal is light.
See HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ABS
(page 144).
Advanced Emergency Brake Assist is available
at speeds above approximately 7 km/h (5 mph)
and will function even if Forward Alert and
Adaptive Cruise Control are switched off. A
fault with the system will be indicated by the
warning FORWARD ALERT UNAVAILABLE
appearing in the message centre. Advanced
Emergency Brake Assist will not be available
until the fault is rectified.

165

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
MESSAGE CENTRE INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message
CRUISE OVERRIDE

CRUISE CANCELLED
CRUISE NOT
AVAILABLE

Meaning
Driver is pressing the accelerator pedal overriding cruise control
function. Message will disappear when accelerator pedal is released
and cruise control speed is resumed.
Driver has cancelled cruise control or is braking.
Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise Control malfunction.

DRIVER INTERVENE

Action by the driver to apply the brakes is required.

SETSPEED XXX KM/H

Speed set for Adaptive Cruise Control.

GAP
RADAR SENSOR
BLOCKED

Set the distance (time gap).
Clean the front of the vehicle in the area of the sensor unit (the sensor
is mounted centrally behind the bumper cover above the cooling
aperture).
This message may also appear under the following conditions:
If stone chip protection has been applied.
On rural roads with few roadside objects.
In heavy rain.

FORWARD ALERT
OFF

Forward alert feature has been switched off.

FORWARD ALERT

Forward Alert feature has been switched on or the setting changed. A
warning will be given for objects detected in the vehicle path of travel.
A longer gap indicates that the system will warn when detected objects
are further away than the previous setting.

WARNING: A warning will not be given for objects detected in
the vehicle’s path of travel.

Action by the driver to apply the brakes is required.
FORWARD ALERT
UNAVAILABLE

Advanced emergency brake assist and Forward Alert functions are
unavailable.

166

Automatic speed limiter (ASL)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) set
speeds must be within local speed
restriction limits. The driver must
always ensure that a safe speed is set, taking
into account the prevailing traffic and road
conditions.
In certain conditions, such as a steep
downhill gradient, the vehicle speed
may exceed the set speed limit. This
is because engine braking is unable to
maintain or reduce the vehicle speed. Driver
intervention may be required.
E94156

ASL can be used in a situation where varying
vehicle speed is likely but a maximum speed
must not be exceeded. For example, where a
local speed limit is 80 km/h (50 mph), the set
speed could be at that limit or just under.

USING THE ASL
Setting a speed limit

If ASL is not selected, cruise control is always
available by simply rotating the thumb wheel
on the right-hand side of the steering wheel to
set a cruising speed. The ASL button allows the
driver to select between cruise control and the
automatic speed limiter. The ASL can be set to
any speed between 30 km/h (18 mph) and 240
km/h (150 mph).
Note: Although ASL only operates at speeds
between 30 km/h (18 mph) and 240 km/h (150
mph), the maximum speed can be set when the
vehicle is stationary.

E97092

•
•

When ASL is selected, the warning indicator in
the instrument panel will illuminate. When the
ASL button is pressed again, the light will
extinguish, ASL will be cancelled and cruise
control will be available again.

•

167

Press the ASL button.
Use the thumb wheel (1) to set the
required speed. The message centre
display in the instrument panel will show
the selected speed.
The set speed can be adjusted at any time
by rotating the thumb wheel (1).

Automatic speed limiter (ASL)
There are three categories of over limit
displays:
• If the set speed is exceeded by up to 3
km/h (1.8 mph), the message centre will
display the message along with an amber
warning indicator.
• If the set speed is exceeded by more than
7 km/h (4 mph), the message centre will
display the message along with a flashing
red warning indicator.
• If the set speed is exceeded by more than
7 km/h (4 mph) for a duration of four
seconds, the message centre will display
the message along with a flashing red
warning indicator and an audible warning
tone.

LIMITER SET
XXX km/h (MPH)
Note: The message is also displayed at other
times as an information display.
When ASL is selected and a set speed inserted,
the engine will respond normally up to the set
speed. Further accelerator pedal pressure will
not increase the vehicle speed beyond your set
speed, unless kickdown is initiated, in which
case ASL will be suspended.

Suspending ASL
ASL can be suspended by pressing the
CANCEL button (3). Applying sudden, rapid
acceleration (kickdown) will also suspend ASL.

Use your brakes to rectify the situation.

ASL unavailable

LIMITER CANCELLED

If ASL is not available due to a fault, the
message centre will display an appropriate
message along with an amber warning
indicator.

Resuming ASL
If ASL has been suspended, it can be reinstated
with a single press of the RESUME button (2),
however, ASL will only reinstate if the vehicle
speed is less than the current speed set in
memory and greater than 30 km/h (18 mph).
The message centre will display an appropriate
message if the vehicle speed is too fast to
resume ASL.

LIMITER NOT AVAILABLE
The message and warning indicator will display
when the driver attempts to use ASL.
When the ignition is switched off, ASL is
deactivated and any set speed is deleted from
memory.

TOO FAST TO RESUME

Exceeding the set speed
If the set speed is exceeded, e.g. on a steep
downhill section, the message centre will
display an appropriate message along with an
amber warning indicator.
OVER LIMIT XXX km/h (MPH)

168

Driving dynamics
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
It remains the driver's responsibility
to drive safely, according to the
prevailing conditions and within the
law.

JaguarDrive Control
JaguarDrive Control is a selectable vehicle
optimisation system, designed to fine-tune the
driving characteristics of the vehicle by
accommodating different driving conditions or
driving styles.

2
1

The system allows the performance envelope
of the vehicle to be stretched and prevents the
necessity for a single, compromised
configuration for all conditions, thereby
increasing the vehicle's abilities.

JAG1654

1. Dynamic mode switch.
2. Winter mode switch.
3. DSC mode switch.

The vehicle systems optimised by JaguarDrive
Control are:
• Engine management.
• Transmission management.
• Dynamic Stability Control and traction
control.
• Adaptive dynamics.
• Active Differential Control (E-diff) Supercharged vehicles only.

Press to operate. Designed for use
in slippery conditions, when active,
Winter mode selects 2nd gear for
driving away on level ground (no incline),
softens the responsiveness of the engine and
modifies the gear change strategy. This
ensures that optimum traction is maintained.

Note: Changing from one special mode to
another, will introduce noticeably different
vehicle responses. For example, the engine
revs produced by the accelerator position when
a special mode is not selected, may increase or
decrease when a mode is selected.

Winter mode optimises stability of the vehicle
to suit slippery conditions, when grip is
reduced. The vehicle performs in a more gentle
and controlled manner, to avoid skidding,
allowing more confident progress under
adverse conditions.

To familiarise yourself with, and get the best
from, the JaguarDrive Control modes, you
should try out the modes in circumstances
which are safe for you and other road users.

Note: Winter mode cannot be active at the
same time as Dynamic mode. Winter mode will
remain selected indefinitely after the ignition is
switched off, until deselected by the driver.

WINTER MODE

169

Driving dynamics
DYNAMIC MODE

STABILITY CONTROL

(V8 petrol and diesel vehicles only)

Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)

Press to operate. Dynamic mode
co-ordinates the vehicle's control
systems to deliver a high
performance driving experience. This setting
enhances key vehicle systems so that the
vehicle's full potential can be exploited. The
vehicle's responses are aimed at involving the
driver more in focused and purposeful driving,
helping swift progress.

WARNING
The fact that the vehicle is fitted with
DSC, must never allow the driver to
be tempted into taking risks which
could affect his or her safety or that of other
road users. In all cases, it remains the driver’s
responsibility to drive safely according to the
prevailing conditions.

Note: When the transmission is set to
permanent manual mode (i.e. using the
paddles to change gear while in Sport mode)
and Dynamic mode is selected, transmission
upshifts are fully controlled by the driver. This
means that the transmission will not change up
a gear automatically, even when the vehicle's
rev limit is reached. When the rev limit is
reached, the gear position indicator in the
message centre will glow amber, to indicate
that the next gear should be selected.

Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is operational
whenever the engine is running, unless it has
been manually switched off. When the system
is operating, the warning indicator in the
instrument panel will flash.
The DSC system controls the Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS), traction control and yaw control
of the vehicle.
The DSC system assists the driver in retaining
directional control of the vehicle in situations
where the vehicle is sliding (understeer or
oversteer). It must not encourage the driver to
drive beyond the limit of adhesion or at speeds
higher than those suitable for the prevailing
road and traffic conditions.

Note: Dynamic mode cannot be active at the
same time as Winter mode. Dynamic mode will
remain selected for approximately six hours
after the ignition is switched off, after which
point it will need to be reselected if required.

DSC applies braking pressure to individual
wheels if excessive variation is detected. This
ensures that the vehicle follows the driver’s
intended direction of travel as closely as
possible.
Traction control will intervene to control wheel
spin by automatically reducing the power
output from the engine and applying braking to
individual wheels. This improves acceleration,
particularly on surfaces with uneven friction
(e.g. one wheel on ice with another on tarmac).
Note: For recommended DSC mode selection,
refer to the JaguarDrive Control scenarios
section in this handbook.

170

Driving dynamics
TracDSC

Switching between DSC and Trac DSC
•

WARNING
Vehicle safety may be reduced by
inappropriate use of TracDSC.
TracDSC should only be used in
suitable conditions.

•
•

TracDSC is an alternative setting of DSC with
reduced system interventions. With TracDSC
engaged, traction may be somewhat increased,
although stability may be reduced compared to
normal DSC. TracDSC is intended for use only
on dry tarmac, by suitably experienced drivers
and should not be selected for other surfaces
or by drivers with insufficient skill and training
to operate the vehicle safely with the TracDSC
function engaged.

•

Press and hold the DSC switch for less
than 10 seconds.
The message centre will temporarily
display either Trac DSC or DSC ON.
The warning indicator in the instrument
panel will illuminate while Trac DSC is
selected.
The warning indicator will flash when DSC
or Trac DSC is active.

Note: If cruise control is engaged, it will
automatically disengage if stability control
activates.

Switching between DSC OFF and ON
Switching DSC OFF
•

The less restrictive TracDSC setting may be
preferred, for example, by expert drivers
engaged in high performance driving on dry
Tarmac surfaces such as tracks and circuits.

•
•

Press and hold the DSC switch for more
than 10 seconds.
The message centre will display DSC OFF
and a short warning chime will sound.
The warning indicator in the instrument
panel will illuminate.

Switching DSC ON
If DSC is OFF:
• Press and release the DSC switch.
• The DSC system will switch on, the
message centre will temporarily display
DSC ON.
• The warning indicator in the instrument
panel will be extinguished.
Note: Switching the engine off and then on
again, will always revert DSC status to DSC ON,
regardless of which JaguarDrive Control mode
is selected.

E95149

171

Driving dynamics
Note: In rare circumstances, when TracDSC is
selected or DSC is off, high acceleration on
rough roads may cause DSC to switch back on.
This prevents high loads on the vehicle
driveline. DSC will subsequently remain on,
unless TracDSC is selected or DSC is switched
off manually.

Settings for the E-diff are made automatically,
without the need for driver selection.
If there is a fault with the E-diff system, the
message centre will display EDIFF SYSTEM
FAULT. If DSC is off, then TracDSC will be
selected automatically. The driver can still
switch between DSC modes, as normal and the
vehicle is safe to drive, but seek qualified
assistance as soon as possible.

Stability control indicator
If there is a fault, the warning
indicator will illuminate in the
instrument panel and the message
centre will display DSC NOT AVAILABLE with
an amber backlight.

Note: If the E-diff is active continuously for an
extended period (e.g. on a patchy surface with
DSC off) then the E-diff may be temporarily
deactivated to prevent overheating. If DSC is
off, then TracDSC will be selected
automatically. The message centre will display
EDIFF NOT AVAILABLE. The driver can still
switch between DSC modes as normal and the
E-diff will become available again automatically
when it has cooled sufficiently.

It is safe to drive the vehicle, but the DSC
system will not activate under wheel spin or
slide conditions. You should seek qualified
assistance as soon as possible.

Adaptive dynamics
(Supercharged vehicles only)
Jaguar Adaptive dynamics continuously
monitors the road and driver inputs and
optimises the vehicle suspension settings for
ride comfort and control.
The adaptive dynamics system is linked to
Dynamic mode, modifying the suspension
settings for a more sporting character.
If the message centre displays the message
ADAPTIVE DYNAMICS FAULT, a fault has been
detected in the adaptive dynamics system.
Seek qualified assistance as soon as possible.

Active Differential Control (E-diff)
(Supercharged vehicles only)
The E-diff improves traction when one driven
wheel has more grip than the other. This
improves progress out of corners and on
patchy or uneven surfaces. The E-diff can also
increase stability in oversteer situations,
depending on road conditions and driver
inputs.

172

Driving dynamics
JaguarDrive Control scenarios
The table below gives examples of the drive control settings suggested for different driving
scenarios.
Scenario

Wet grass

Suggested driver selection
Tyre fitment

JaguarDrive
Control

Dynamic
Stability Control
(DSC)

Transmission

Standard

Winter mode

DSC On
(default)

Drive (D)

Very wet tarmac
Slippery boat launch
ramp

Sport (S) +
Manual

Hill descents while
towing on slippery
surfaces
Ice/light snow

Standard or All
Season tyres

Snow ploughed
hard-topped roads
(including black ice)

All Season tyres

Packed snow roads

Winter tyres

Deep fresh snow

Snow chains

Normal driving
conditions (e.g. dry
tarmac, town driving,
motorway cruising
etc.)

Standard

Drive (D)

Sport (S)
No driver
selection
required.
Special modes
off.

Drive (D)

Overtaking on a dry
road

Drive (D) or
Sport (S)

Pulling out onto a
busy road in dry
conditions
Favourite country
lane (public road)

Dynamic mode

Private track/race
day

TracDSC
(where conditions
permit)

173

Sport (S)
or
Sport (S) +
Manual

Fuel and refuelling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGS
The presence of any unusual fumes
(e.g. petrol or exhaust fumes) in the
passenger compartment and/or
luggage compartment, should be corrected
immediately by a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
If you must drive under these conditions, do
so only with all windows fully open.

WARNINGS
Petroleum gasses are highly
flammable, have a low flash point,
and are explosive, especially in
confined spaces. Avoid exposing the gasses to
any potential sources of ignition as the
resulting fire and explosion may cause serious
injuries and/or death.
Only use containers specifically
designed for carrying fuel and always
remove them from the vehicle to fill
them. Failure to do so may result in spillage,
and cause a fire.
Switch off the engine when refuelling,
as it is both a source of extreme
temperatures, and electrical sparks.
The resulting fire and explosion may cause
serious injury and death.
Switch off any personal electronic
devices such as mobile phones, or
music players. They have the
potential to cause electrical sparks. The
resulting fire and explosion may cause serious
injury and death.
Do not smoke, use a naked flame, or
cause sparks. The resulting fire and
explosion may cause serious injury
and death.
Do not overfill the fuel tank.
Overfilling may cause spillage when
the vehicle is driven. Spillage may
also occur if the fuel expands in high ambient
temperatures.
Any modifications to the fuel system
not specifically designed for this
Jaguar are prohibited. Such
modifications in some circumstances, could
result in a fire. All service actions should be
entrusted to a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

FUEL QUALITY
Water in fuel
CAUTIONS
If the warning WATER IN FUEL is
displayed in the message centre, an
excessive amount of water has collected in the
fuel filter bowl. Seek assistance from a Jaguar
Dealer/Authorised Repairer to have the filter
drained, as soon as possible.

Petrol engined vehicles
CAUTIONS
Do not use leaded fuels, lead substitutes
or fuel additives. Doing so can cause
damage to the engine, fuel and emission
control systems.
Only use high quality petrol, as using
lower quality fuels can cause damage to
the engine, fuel and emission control systems.
Fuel system cleaning agents should not
be used, unless approved by Jaguar.
Unapproved products may be harmful to fuel
system components on your vehicle.
It is the driver’s responsibility to fill the
vehicle with the correct fuel. If the
vehicle is filled with the wrong type of fuel, do
not start the engine. Call for Roadside
Assistance.

174

Fuel and refuelling
Unleaded fuel

Note: Some difficulty in starting may be
encountered when using alcohol blended fuel.

Unleaded fuel must be used for the emission
control system to operate properly. Its use will
also reduce spark plug fouling, exhaust system
corrosion and engine oil deterioration.

Ethanol
CAUTIONS
This vehicle is not suitable for use with
fuels containing more than 10%
Ethanol.
Do not use E85 fuels (85% Ethanol
content). Equipment necessary for the
use of fuels containing more than 10% Ethanol
is not fitted to this vehicle. If E85 fuels are
used, serious engine and fuels system damage
will occur.

Octane rating
The recommended unleaded fuel should have
an octane rating of 95 RON (Research Octane
Number) or higher. However, you may also use
unleaded fuel with a lower RON, but
performance will be reduced. The minimum
octane rating for fuel to be used is 91 RON.
Note: Using unleaded fuel with a lower octane
rating than recommended, can cause
persistent heavy engine knock (a metallic
rapping noise). If severe, this can lead to
engine damage.

Fuels containing up to 10% Ethanol (grain
alcohol) may be used. Ensure that the fuel has
octane ratings no lower than those
recommended for unleaded fuel. Most drivers
will not notice any operating difference with
fuel containing Ethanol. If a difference is
detected, the use of conventional unleaded fuel
should be resumed.

If a heavy knock is detected, even when using
fuel to the recommended octane rating, or if
you hear knock while holding a steady speed
on level roads, consult your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer to have the problem corrected. Failure
to do so is misuse of the vehicle, for which
Jaguar Cars is not responsible. However,
occasional, light knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hill, may occur.

Methanol
CAUTION
Wherever possible avoid using fuel
containing Methanol.

ALTERNATIVE FUELS FOR PETROL
ENGINES

Some fuels contain Methanol (Methyl or wood
alcohol). If you use fuels containing Methanol
the fuels must also contain co-solvents and
corrosion inhibitors for Methanol. Also, do not
use fuels which contain more than 10%
Methanol even if they contain co-solvents and
corrosion inhibitors. Fuel system damage or
vehicle performance problems resulting from
the use of such fuels is not the responsibility of
Jaguar, and may not be covered under the
warranty.

Fuels containing alcohol
CAUTIONS
Fuel containing alcohol can cause paint
damage, which may not be covered
under the warranty.
Some fuel suppliers sell fuel containing alcohol
without advertising its presence. Where
uncertainty exists, check with the service
centre operator.

175

Fuel and refuelling
Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether (MTBE)

Prolonged use of additives is not
recommended. Do not add paraffin or petrol to
diesel fuels.

Unleaded fuel containing an oxygenate known
as MTBE can be used provided that the ratio of
MTBE to conventional fuel does not exceed
15%. MTBE is an Ether based compound
derived from Petroleum, which has been
specified by several refiners as the substance
to enhance the Octane rating of fuel.

Several petroleum companies have announced
the availability of reformulated fuels. These
fuels are specially formulated to further reduce
vehicle emissions. Jaguar fully supports all
efforts to protect and maintain ambient air
quality and encourages the use of reformulated
gasoline, where available.

CAUTIONS
If you inadvertently fill your vehicle with
petrol instead of diesel, do not attempt
to start the engine. Contact your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer immediately. Attempting
to start the engine with petrol in the fuel tank,
will cause extensive damage to the engine and
fuel system, which will not be covered by your
Jaguar warranty.
Jaguar cars can accept no responsibility
for any damage caused by running your
vehicle with petrol or vegetable oil in the fuel
tank.

DIESEL ENGINED VEHICLES

Winter grade diesel fuel

Reformulated gasoline

To make sure of reliable diesel engine
operation during cold seasonal periods, Winter
grade fuel must be used. This fuel is normally
available from fuel retailers during these
periods and the fuel companies adjust the fuel
quality to suit climatic conditions.

CAUTION
Do not use RME (bio-diesel) except in
the case of those proprietary diesel fuels
which contain a mix of up to 5%. Jaguar can
accept no responsibility for damage caused by
using RME in concentrations greater than 5%.

If the vehicle is not filled with Winter grade
diesel fuel, it is recommended that the engine
is idled for a period of over two minutes after
starting, to prevent fuel solidification during
operation.

Use only high quality diesel fuel according to
EN590 or equivalent.
The quality of diesel fuel is variable, depending
on geographic location. Always use premium
or the highest quality fuel available in your
locality. High quality fuel ensures a longer life
for your engine components. Lower grade fuel
contains higher levels of sulphur, which is
detrimental to engine components. If low
quality fuel is used, light coloured smoke may
be evident at the exhaust.
Note: Jaguar vehicles are capable of running
with up to a 5% blend of bio-diesel, in
accordance with European Standard EN590.

176

Fuel and refuelling
Sulphur content

This feature prevents the fuel system from
running dry, which could cause damage to the
vehicle. If the gauge indicates low fuel or the
warning indicator illuminates, the fuel tank
should be refuelled as soon as possible at the
next filling station, with at least 4 litres (0.9
gallons) of fuel.

CAUTION
Your vehicle is fitted with a Diesel
Particulate Filter (DPF), the maximum
Sulphur content must not exceed 0.005%.
Using an incorrect fuel will cause serious
damage to the DPF. See DIESEL
PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) (page 135).

If the system protection function has activated,
the vehicle must firstly be refuelled, then
restarted using the following procedure:

In some countries diesel may contain higher
levers of Sulphur, which could cause damage
to the vehicle, if in doubt contact a local
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice.

1. With the brake pedal pressed, press and
hold the engine START/STOP button and
crank the engine for five seconds.
2. Release the START/STOP button.

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

3. With the brake pedal pressed, press and
release the START/STOP button to crank
the engine. The engine should start within
approximately five seconds.

CAUTION
Avoid running out of fuel. Doing so can
cause damage to the vehicle's engine,
fuel and emission control systems.

Note: If the engine does not start, pause for ten
seconds with the ignition in convenience
mode, before repeating the procedure from the
beginning.

Note: If the vehicle does run out of fuel, a
minimum of 4 litres (0.9 gallons) will be
required to restart the engine. The vehicle will
need to be driven 1.6-5 km (1-3 miles) in order
to reset the engine management and
monitoring systems.

CAUTION
Do not crank the engine for longer than
30 seconds, or damage to the fuel pump
may occur.

Note: If the vehicle does run out of fuel,
seeking qualified assistance is advisable.

Diesel engines

FUEL CUT-OFF

Vehicles with diesel engines are equipped with
a system to prevent the fuel tank from
emptying completely. When the fuel reaches a
minimum level, the system will activate a
reduced power mode (i.e. the engine will not
run properly). This will be followed by the
engine stopping in approximately 1.6 km
(1 mile).

The fuel system cut-off forms part of the
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) fitted
to your vehicle. Following an impact, and
depending on the severity, the fuel pump may
be switched off.

177

Fuel and refuelling
Resetting the fuel cut-off
WARNING
The fuel cut-off should never be reset
if you can smell fuel, or a leak can be
seen. Doing so can lead to a fire
which may cause personal injury or death.

1. Switch the ignition off and wait for one
minute.
2. Turn the ignition on for 30 seconds.
3. Check the vehicle thoroughly for fuel leaks.
If a leak is detected switch the ignition off
immediately.
• Do not start the vehicle if a leak is
present. Seek qualified advice and have
the vehicle recovered.

4. If no leaks are detected, start the vehicle.

FUEL FILLER FLAP
3
WARNINGS
Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
allow the pressure to release before
fully removing the cap to avoid fuel
spillage due to rapid expansion.
Take note of all warnings and
instructions given on the label affixed
to the inside of the filler flap. Failure to
do so may result in injury or death.

E95150

Note: The fuel filler flap cannot be opened
when the alarm system is armed.

3. Twist the cap counter-clockwise to undo.

The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand
side of the vehicle, at the rear.

4. Stow the cap on the lip provided on the top
of the hinge arm, as shown.

1. Ensure that the vehicle is fully unlocked.
Push and release the rear of the flap (in the
area indicated in the illustration) to
unlatch.

When replacing the cap, turn it clockwise until
the ratchet clicks. Failure to do so could cause
the Engine malfunction warning indicator to
illuminate.

2. Pull the fuel filler flap open. The label on
the inside of the flap indicates the correct
fuel for the vehicle.

To close the filler flap, push the flap closed until
it latches.

178

Fuel and refuelling
REFUELLING
Fuel filler
WARNINGS
When refuelling ensure that all
windows, doors, and sunroof are fully
closed, particularly if young children
or animals are in the vehicle. Fuel vapour
contains harmful chemical compounds, some
of which may cause cancer.
Do not attempt to fill the tank to its
maximum capacity. If the vehicle is to
be parked on a slope, in direct
sunlight or high ambient temperature,
expansion of the fuel could cause spillage.
Filling station pumps are equipped with
automatic cut-off sensing, to avoid fuel
spillage. Fill the tank until the filler nozzle
automatically cuts off supply. Do not attempt
to fill the tank beyond this point.

E95151

If the fuel cuts off as soon as the trigger on the
pump is operated, check that the correct fuel
has been selected. Immediate cut-off may have
been caused by the fuel guard system.
See DIESEL MISFUELLING PROTECTION
DEVICE (page 180).

Fuel tank capacity
Avoid the risk of running out of fuel and never
intentionally drive the vehicle when the fuel
gauge indicates that the tank is empty. When
refuelling your vehicle after the fuel gauge
reads empty, you may not be able to add the
fuel quantity shown below, as there will be a
small reserve remaining in the tank.

CAUTIONS
Check the fuel pump information
carefully, to ensure that you are putting
the correct fuel into the vehicle. Filling a
vehicle with the incorrect fuel can cause
serious engine and fuel system damage.
It is the driver’s responsibility to fill the
vehicle with the correct fuel. If the
vehicle is filled with the wrong type of fuel, do
not start the engine. Call for Roadside
Assistance.

All engines
Fuel specification:
Petrol

95-98 RON

Diesel

EN 590

Total tank capacity:

Filling station pumps used for diesel
commercial vehicles deliver fuel at a higher
rate than normal. The higher fill rate can cause
premature cut-off and may cause fuel spillage.
Therefore, it is recommended that only
standard light vehicle pumps are used.

Petrol

69.5 litres
(15.3 gallons)

Diesel

68.1 litres
(15 gallons)

Fill capacity (when fuel gauge
64 litres
indicates empty)
(14.1 gallons)
Reserve capacity (when fuel
gauge indicates empty)

179

5.5 litres
(1.2 gallons)

Fuel and refuelling
DIESEL MISFUELLING PROTECTION
DEVICE

Resetting the protection device

WARNINGS
When the misfuelling protection
device is activated, it could cause fuel
to be discharged from the filler neck.
Diesel engine vehicles in some markets are
equipped with a misfuelling protection device,
incorporated into the fuel filler neck, designed
to alert that the wrong fuel type has been
selected. If the narrow filler nozzle fitted to
pumps delivering unleaded petrol is correctly
inserted (i.e. fully inserted) into the filler neck,
the misfuel protection device will activate.

The protection device continually interrupts the
fuel flow from the pump, until the protector
mechanism in the filler neck is reset.

2
JAG1618

When activated, the yellow protection device
will be visible in the filler neck. The device will
need to be reset before the tank can be
correctly filled with diesel fuel. This is achieved
using the reset tool, located in the luggage
compartment, clipped onto the battery
restraining bar.

To reset the misfuelling protection device:
1. Insert the reset tool (with the teeth
uppermost) into the filler neck opening, as
far as it will go. The triangular section on
the reset tool stops on the protection
device at the required insertion depth.

Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to fill the
vehicle with the correct fuel. The diesel
misfuelling protection device only reduces the
risk of filling the vehicle with the incorrect fuel.

2. Pivot the reset tool handle downwards to
engage the teeth into the protection device.
3. Keeping the reset tool handle held down,
slowly pull the reset tool out of the filler
neck to reset the misfuelling protection
device.

CAUTIONS
Using the incorrect fuel can result in
major damage to your vehicle’s engine
and fuel system.

Note: To ensure that the protection device is
correctly reset, check that the yellow protector
is no longer visible in the filler neck.

Note: When refuelling the vehicle using a
disposable fuel canister, use a canister
designed for diesel fuel where possible. The
spout on petrol canisters may activate the
protection device. The device may also be
activated by fuel pumps with a smaller nozzle
than those fitted to standard diesel pumps.

After resetting the misfuelling protection
device, remove the tool from the filler neck and
secure it to the battery restraining bar. If
subsequent driveability difficulties are
encountered, seek assistance from your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

180

Fuel and refuelling
FUEL CONSUMPTION
The fuel consumption figures shown below have been calculated using a standard testing
procedure (the new EC test procedure from Directive 99/100/EC), and produced in accordance with
The Passenger Car Fuel Consumption (Amendment) Order 1996.
Under normal use, a vehicle's actual fuel consumption figures may differ from those achieved
through the test procedure, depending on driving technique, road and traffic conditions,
environmental factors, vehicle load and condition.
Variant

Urban

Extra-urban

Combined

CO² emissions
g/km

3.0 V6 Diesel

9.5 l/100 km
(30.0 mpg)

5.5 l/100 km
(51.3 mpg)

6.8 l/100 km
(42.0 mpg)

179

3.0 V6 Petrol

15.8 l/100 km
(17.8 mpg)

7.5 l/100 km
(37.8 mpg)

10.5 l/100 km
(26.8 mpg)

249

5.0 V8 Petrol Normally aspirated

17.3 l/100 km
(46.3 mpg)

7.8 l/100 km
(36.4 mpg)

11.1 l/100 km
(25.4 mpg)

264

5.0 V8 Petrol Supercharged

18.7 l/100 km
(15.1 mpg)

8.7 l/100 km
(32.4 mpg)

12.5 l/100 km
(22.5 mpg)

292

Urban cycle
The urban test cycle is carried out from a cold start and consists of a series of accelerations,
decelerations and periods of steady speed driving and engine idling. The maximum speed attained
during the test is 50 km/h (30 mph) with an average speed of 19 km/h (12 mph).

Extra-urban cycle
The extra-urban test cycle is carried out immediately after the urban test. Approximately half of the
test comprises steady-speed driving, while the remainder consists of a series of accelerations,
decelerations and engine idling. The maximum test speed is 120 km/h (75 mph) and the average
speed 63 km/h (39 mph). The test is carried out over a distance of 7 km (4.3 miles).

Combined
The combined figure is an average of the urban and extra-urban test cycle results, which has been
weighted to take account of the different distances covered during the two tests.
For additional information on fuel consumption figures and exhaust emissions, visit the Vehicle
Certification Agency (VCA) website at http://www.vcacarfueldata.org.uk/.

181

Load carrying
GENERAL INFORMATION

Four load securing rings are provided in the
rear luggage area to assist in safely securing
items carried.

Weights and load capacities
Note: It is the driver's responsibility to ensure
that the maximum weights are not exceeded,
and that the load is distributed correctly within
the vehicle.

Note: A range of approved luggage retention
accessories are available from your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.

Information and values for the maximum
weights can be found in the Weights section.
See WEIGHTS (page 259).

REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE
On vehicles not fitted with a spare wheel, there
is a storage compartment beneath the luggage
compartment floor. Lift the hatch for access
and hook the strap over the upper boot seal to
keep the hatch open.

Roof racks
CAUTION
Your vehicle is not designed for use with
a roof rack. Do not fit a roof rack to the
vehicle, as damage may result.

LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS

E95152

WARNINGS
All items carried in the luggage area
should be properly secured. Loose
items can cause serious injury or
death in the event of an accident or sudden
manoeuvre.

182

Towing
TOWING A TRAILER (V6 petrol and
diesel vehicles only)

E95507

Your Dealer/Authorised Repairer and main
motoring and caravanning organisation can
advise you on towing, towing weight capacities
and about regulations that apply in other
countries.

WARNINGS
Never exceed the maximum weights
for either the vehicle, or the trailer.
Doing so can cause accelerated wear
and damage to the vehicle. It can also
adversely affect vehicle stability and braking,
which in turn can lead to loss of control and
increased braking distance resulting in a
rollover or crash.
To preserve handling and stability,
only fit Jaguar approved towing
accessories.
Never use towing eyes or lashing
points to tow a trailer. They have not
been designed for this purpose and
doing so may cause them to fail resulting in
injury or death.
When towing, do not exceed 100
km/h (60 mph) or 80 km/h (50 mph)
if a temporary spare wheel is in use.

The following are important points of safety,
stability and comfort, upon which further
advice should be sought:
• Maximum braked towing weight is
permissible, provided that long periods of
uphill driving on gradients over 8% are not
undertaken.
• In high altitude mountainous regions, the
thinner atmosphere can reduce engine
performance. Above 1000 metres (3250
feet), the stipulated maximum permitted
gross train weight must be reduced by
10% for every 1000 metres (3250 feet) in
altitude.

Note: It is the driver's responsibility to ensure
that the towing vehicle, and the trailer are being
used correctly, and in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations and any
applicable legislation.

183

Towing
Diesel engine vehicles

Trailer electrical connection

The diesel engine management system
incorporates sensors to determine optimum
performance. It is also designed to protect the
engine when arduous conditions are
encountered during towing. When ambient
temperature exceeds 40°C (104°F), the engine
coolant temperature may increase above
normal operating level. If this occurs, the
management system will initiate a series of
actions to restore normal operating conditions.
The actions may include:
• A message centre message.
• Engine performance reduction.
• Air conditioning system cycling. The
system temperature output will fluctuate
between hot and cold, in order to dissipate
engine heat. If engine overheat persists,
the air conditioning will move to
continuous heat output.

CAUTION
Only connect approved electrical
circuits, which are in good condition to
the trailer socket. Connecting incorrect, or
faulty circuits may seriously damage the
vehicle's electrical circuits.
Note: The rear parking sensors are
automatically disabled when the trailer
electrical connection is made using Jaguar
approved towing equipment.
The vehicle's electrical system has been
designed to support all towing requirements,
and comply with legal requirements for the
specific territory in which the vehicle is first
sold.

It is advisable to bring the vehicle and trailer to
a convenient stop and allow the engine to idle
until normal temperature is restored. Do not
turn off the engine.

LEVELLING

E95506

To maintain vehicle stability, it is essential that
the trailer is loaded so that it remains parallel to
the ground. This is particularly important when
towing twin axled trailers.

184

Towing
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS

Towing weights - Australia only
The weight of a trailer must not exceed 1.5
times the towing vehicle’s weight. The
nose/tongue weight must be a minimum of 7%
of gross caravan/trailer weight, up to a
maximum of 350 kg (722 lbs).

Maximum permissible
towing weights
Unbraked trailers

750 kg (1653 lb.)

Trailers with
overrun brakes

1850 kg (4080 lb.)

Nose/Tongue
weight

75 kg (165 lb.)

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
•
•

WARNING
Do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW), maximum rear axle
weight, maximum trailer weight, or
nose/tongue weight. Exceeding any of these
limits could cause instability and loss of
control. See WEIGHTS (page 259).

•

Nose/tongue weight must be the greater of
50 kg (110 lbs) or 7% of the actual trailer
weight, up to the maximum tow hitch load.
Nose/tongue weight can be measured using a
proprietary brand of nose weight indicator.

•

If it is necessary to increase the nose/tongue
weight up to the maximum allowed, the vehicle
load should be reduced accordingly. This
ensures that the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW),
and maximum rear axle load, are not exceeded.

•
•

Note: When towing the maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight can be increased by a
maximum of 100 kg (220 lb.) provided that the
road speed is limited to 100 km/h (60 mph).

•

Note: When calculating rear axle loading,
remember that the trailer nose/tongue weight,
the load in the vehicle's luggage area and the
weight of rear seat passengers must all be
added together.

•
•

The trailer should be parallel to the ground
when loaded and connected to the vehicle.
When calculating the laden weight of the
trailer remember to include the weight of
the trailer, plus the weight of the load.
If the load can be divided between the
vehicle and trailer, loading more weight
into the vehicle will generally improve
stability. Do not exceed the vehicle's
weight limits. See WEIGHTS (page 259).
Ensure that all applicable regulations and
legislation are complied with when loading
and towing a trailer.
Increase rear tyre pressures of the towing
vehicle to those for maximum vehicle
loading conditions.
Ensure trailer tyre pressures are set to
trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
If the vehicle is loaded to maximum Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) the nose weight is
limited (see Towing weights table).
Ensure that a suitable breakaway cable or
secondary coupling is used. Refer to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions for
guidance.
Ensure that the tow ball is secure.
Check the operation of all trailer lights.
WARNING
Do not loop the breakaway cable over
the tow ball as it may slide off.

185

Towing
TOW BAR
Tow bar dimensions and mounting points

506
507
79

479
677

509

1222
E95505

Note: Dimensions given are in millimetres.

186

509

Vehicle care
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
CAUTION
Do not use non-approved, or acid based
wheel cleaners. These can damage the
wheel coating which may lead to corrosion of
the wheel rims.
Wash the wheels with soap and water, this
should be done more frequently when the
wheels are exposed to heavy dirt deposits, salt,
clay etc. If you are unsure how often to clean
the wheels in particular conditions, seek advice
from your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

E94168

Washing the vehicle paintwork
CAUTION
Substances which are corrosive, such
as bird droppings, tree resin, dead
insects, tar spots, road salt and industrial fall
out, can damage the vehicle's paintwork. Any
such deposits should be removed as soon as
possible to prevent damage.

Jaguar approved wheel cleaner should be used
to remove heavy soiling.

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
CAUTIONS
Some high pressure cleaning systems
are sufficiently powerful to penetrate
door and window seals, and damage trim and
door locks. Never aim the water jet directly at
the engine air intake, heater air intakes, body
seals (doors, sunroof, windows etc.) or at any
components which may be damaged (lamps,
mirrors, exterior trim etc.).
Ensure that you read and comply with all
warnings and instructions supplied with
any cleaning products.
Never use cleaning products which are
not approved for use on vehicles.

Remove heavy deposits of mud and dirt with a
hose before washing the vehicle.
When salt is used on the roads, wash the
vehicle immediately after encountering such
conditions. Clean undersides and wheel arches
using a high pressure jet.
Wash the vehicle frequently using a sponge
and generous quantities of cold or luke warm
water containing a suitable car shampoo. Rinse
thoroughly and dry with a chamois leather or
synthetic substitute.
For best results, do not wash the vehicle under
strong sunlight. Always allow the vehicle to
cool down before washing.
Do not use a dry cloth to wipe dirty paintwork.
Dust and gritty substances are abrasive and
will scratch the paintwork. Remove dirt using a
cellulose sponge and plenty of warm (never
hot) water. Rinse off with clean water and dry
using a clean, damp chamois leather. Wash the
vehicle frequently.

187

Vehicle care
Do not use household soaps or detergents. The
use of Jaguar Vehicle Shampoo is
recommended.

4. The vehicle should remain in this condition
while it is conveyed through the car wash.
5. At the end of the wash cycle, when directed
to start the engine by the car wash
instructions, press the brake pedal and
press and release the engine START/STOP
button to start the engine.

Note: The vehicle's brightwork should be
cleaned using a sponge and generous
quantities of cold or lukewarm water only.
Rinse thoroughly and dry with a chamois
leather or synthetic substitute.

6. Select D (Drive) using the JaguarDrive
selector and drive away.

Using an automatic wash

Do not start the engine or change the
JaguarDrive selector position during the car
wash.

CAUTIONS
Commercially operated automatic car
washes, jet washes and power-operated
mops, are not recommended. The detergents
used can contain certain chemicals which
may, over time, be detrimental to some
exterior parts of the vehicle. Prolonged usage
of automatic car washes and power-operated
mops will also cause fine scratches in the paint
surface.
Ensure that Auto wipe is not selected
when entering a car wash, or damage to
the wiper blades and arms can occur if they
operate during the wash cycle.
Ensure that when using an automatic
drive through car wash, N (Neutral) is
selected and that the ignition is left in
convenience mode for the duration of the
wash.

After leaving the car wash, switch on the
windscreen wiper immediately to remove water
and prevent a build up of wax.

Underbonnet cleaning
CAUTIONS
Do not use a high pressure washer or
steam cleaner in the engine
compartment. Damage to components could
occur.
Ensure that the brake fluid reservoir is
kept dry at all times. Only use a clean,
dry cloth to clean the brake fluid cap and
reservoir.

Note: Regular use of automatic car washes
tends to dull the lustre of the paintwork.
1. Drive up to the entry of the car wash and
onto the conveyor.
2. Select N (Neutral) using the JaguarDrive
selector.
3. Press and release the engine START/STOP
button to stop the engine. The JaguarDrive
selector should remain raised and the
selector and message centre should
indicate that N is selected.

188

Vehicle care
Glass surfaces

Bird droppings

Clean the rear window with a soft cloth to avoid
damaging the heating element. Do not scrape
the glass or use any abrasive cleaning fluid.

Do not allow bird droppings or tree sap to
harden. Remove from paintwork immediately
with a lukewarm soap and water solution.

Mirror glass is particularly susceptible to
damage. Wash with soapy water. Do not use
abrasive cleaning compounds or metal
scrapers to remove ice.

Polishing
CAUTION
Chrome polish, or other abrasive
cleaners, must not be used on the
vehicle's brightwork. The vehicle's brightwork
should be cleaned using a sponge and
generous quantities of cold or lukewarm water
only. Rinse thoroughly and dry with a chamois
leather or synthetic substitute.

The following products will ensure glass
surfaces and windscreen wipers are kept in
good condition:
• Jaguar Screen Clean Paste - Apply only to
the windscreen exterior to ensure effective
operation of the windscreen wiper.
• Jaguar Glass Cleaner - Interior and exterior
of all other glass surfaces.
• Jaguar Screen Wash - Washer reservoir
additive.
• Jaguar Winter Care Kit comprising de-icer,
ice scraper, anti-mist wipe cloth and aerial
cleaner - for use in adverse weather
conditions.

For maximum protection against road dust,
salts, industrial fall-out etc., it is recommended
that the vehicle is polished regularly using
Jaguar polish and a polishing cloth.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING
Ensure that you read all of the
information and instructions for use
provided with cleaning products.
Some products contain substances that are
harmful and can cause health problems if used
incorrectly.

Cleaning the rear screen
To avoid damaging the heating elements when
cleaning the inside of the rear screen, use only
a soft damp cloth/chamois leather. Do not use
solvents or sharp objects to clean the glass.

Removing grease and tar

CAUTIONS
Some products, if used incorrectly can
cause damage to the interior surfaces of
the vehicle.
To prevent airbag damage, the steering
wheel centre pad and other areas
containing airbags should only be cleaned
sparingly with a damp cloth, warm water and a
non-detergent soap. Do not allow these areas
to be flooded with chemical solvents, liquids,
furniture cream or polishes.

CAUTION
Ensure that after using methylated or
white spirit, the area is washed
immediately with soapy water, to remove all
traces of spirit.
Remove grease or tar with Jaguar Tar Remover
or methylated spirit (alcohol). White spirit is
also effective, but must not be applied to
rubber, particularly the windscreen wiper
blades.

189

Vehicle care
Leather

•

Leather is an easy to maintain natural product.
However, dust and substances can penetrate
the pores and crease the leather, causing
surface wear and brittleness.

•

To prevent ingrained dirt and staining, inspect
the seat upholstery regularly and clean every
one to two months, as follows:
• Wipe off fine dust from the seat surfaces
using a clean, damp, non-coloured cloth.
Change frequently to a clean area of cloth,
to avoid abrasive action on the leather
surface. Avoid over-wetting.
• If this is not sufficient, use a cloth which
has been dampened with warm soapy
water and then wrung out. Use only mild
non-caustic soap.
• Use Jaguar Leather Cleaner for heavily
soiled areas. Dry off and rub with a clean
soft cloth, changing surfaces regularly.

Sharp objects such as belts, zip fasteners,
rivets, etc., can leave permanent scratches
and scratch marks on the leather surface.
Unless spillages such as tea, coffee or ink
are washed away immediately, permanent
staining may have to be accepted.

If a valet service is used, ensure that the
specialist concerned is aware of, and follows,
these instructions precisely.

Cloth and fabric
CAUTIONS
Never use soap, ammonia, bleach or
other cleaners intended for use on hard
surfaces.
Do not use upholstery cleaner on
electrical equipment such as fascia
switches.
When cleaning around electrical
equipment such as switches, ensure
that fluids do not leak into any gaps around the
components or between panels or trim.

When staining (e.g. from clothing) or spillage
occurs, clean the affected area immediately as
described above.

Use Jaguar Upholstery Cleaner, following the
instructions. Avoid over-wetting.

Use Jaguar Leather Cleaner several times a
year to maintain its appearance and
suppleness. The cleaner will nourish and
moisturise and help to improve the surface
protective film against dust and substances.
• Do not use solvents. Do not use
detergents, furniture polish or household
cleaners. While these products may
initially give impressive results, their use
will lead to rapid deterioration of the
leather and will invalidate the warranty.
Jaguar recommend a basic set of products
that have been specially selected for the
type of leather in your vehicle.
• Dark clothing may stain leather seats just
like other upholstery products.

Removing stains
Most stains on woollen fabric can be removed
if treatment is carried out immediately, before
the stain has a chance to dry-in.
Most stains can be treated with one of three
cleaning fluids: Jaguar Upholstery Cleaner, dry
cleaning fluid or clean water. Follow the
instructions on the package.

Instrument pack, clock, and audio
equipment
Only use a soft dry cloth to clean the
instrument pack, clock and audio equipment.
Do not use cleaning fluids or sprays.

190

Vehicle care
Carpet and mats

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE

Marks or stains can be removed by gentle
scrubbing with a weak solution of soap and
warm water.

Regularly inspect the paintwork for damage.
Any stone chips, fractures, or deep scratches,
in the paint/bodywork should be repaired
promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly, and
if left untreated can result in expensive repairs.

For more stubborn stains a commercially
available carpet cleaner should be used.

Minor chips and scratches can be touched up
using materials and advice available from a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. Larger areas of
damage will require professional repair, and
you should consult a Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.

Seat belts
WARNING
Do not allow any water, cleaning
products, or fabric from cloths to
enter the seat belt mechanism. Any
substance which enters the mechanism may
affect the performance of the seat belt in an
impact.
Extend the seat belts fully, then use warm
water and a non-detergent soap to clean. Allow
the seat belts to dry naturally whilst fully
extended and do not allow the belts to retract
until fully dry.
Note: Whilst cleaning the seat belt, take the
opportunity to examine the webbing for
damage and wear. Any wear or damage should
be reported to, and rectified by, a Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.

Airbag module covers
WARNINGS
Airbag covers should only be cleaned
using a slightly dampened cloth, and
a small amount of upholstery cleaner.
Do not allow the airbag covers, or
surrounding areas, to become
contaminated with liquids. Any
substance which enters the mechanism, can
prevent correct deployment of an airbag
during an impact.

191

Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION

Owner maintenance

CAUTION
Severe damage to the electrical system
and electronic components can occur, if
any attempt is made to diagnose faults in the
electrical system using conventional
diagnostic equipment (e.g. the use of test
lamps or low impedance voltmeters). The
fitting of any electrical accessory should only
be entrusted to a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

CAUTION
Any significant or sudden drop in fluid
levels, or uneven tyre wear, should be
reported to a qualified technician without
delay.
In addition to the routine services and
inspections, a number of simple checks must
be carried out more frequently. These checks
can be carried out by the owner and advice is
given on the pages that follow.

Regular systematic maintenance is the key to
ensuring the continued reliability and efficiency
of your vehicle.

Daily checks
•

Maintenance is the owner's responsibility and
you must ensure that owner maintenance
operations, oil services, inspections and brake
fluid and coolant changes are carried out when
required and according to the manufacturer's
recommendations.

•
•

The routine maintenance requirements for your
vehicle are shown in the Service Portfolio book.
Most of this necessary workshop maintenance
requires specialised knowledge and
equipment, and should preferably be entrusted
to a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Service Portfolio
The Service Portfolio book includes a Service
Record section, which enables a record to be
kept of all the servicing and inspections that are
carried out on the vehicle. This section of the
book also has an area for brake fluid changes
to be recorded.
Ensure your service provider signs and stamps
the book after each service and inspection.

192

Operation of lamps, horn, direction
indicators, wipers, washers and warning
indicators.
Operation of seat belts and brakes.
Look for fluid deposits underneath the
vehicle that might indicate a leak.
Condensation drips from the air
conditioning is normal.

Maintenance
Weekly checks

•

CAUTION
Ensure that you take notice of any
message centre information and
warnings relating to engine oil level (V8 petrol
and diesel engines only). Top-up the level
when advised to do so. See ENGINE OIL
CHECK - V8 Petrol engines (page 199).

•

Emission control

•
•
•
•
•
•

•

Driving in extremely hot or cold
conditions.
Driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials.
Towing a trailer or driving in mountainous
conditions.

Contact your Dealer/Authorised Repairer for
advice.

Engine oil level (non-electronic dipstick
vehicles). See ENGINE OIL CHECK - V6
Petrol engines (page 197).
Engine coolant check. See ENGINE
COOLANT CHECK (page 204).
Brake fluid level. See BRAKE FLUID
CHECK (page 206).
Power steering fluid level. See POWER
STEERING FLUID CHECK (page 208).
Screen washer fluid level. See WASHER
FLUID CHECK (page 209).
Tyre pressures and condition. See TYRE
CARE (page 217).
Operate air conditioning. See AUTOMATIC
CLIMATE CONTROL (page 116).

Your vehicle is fitted with various items of
emission and evaporative control equipment,
designed to meet specific territorial
requirements. You should be aware that
unauthorised replacement, modification or
tampering with this equipment by an owner or
repair shop, may be unlawful and subject to
legal penalties.
In addition, engine settings must not be
tampered with. These have been established to
ensure that your vehicle complies with
stringent exhaust emission regulations.
Incorrect engine settings may adversely affect
exhaust emissions, engine performance and
fuel consumption. They may also cause high
temperatures, which will result in damage to
the catalytic converter and the vehicle.

Note: The engine oil level on V6 petrol engines,
should be checked more frequently if the
vehicle is driven for prolonged periods at high
speeds. The engine oil level on diesel and V8
petrol engines is checked automatically at all
times by the electronic dipstick.

Road testing dynamometers (rolling
roads)
Because your vehicle is equipped with anti-lock
brakes, it is essential that any dynamometer
testing is carried out only by a qualified person,
familiar with the dynamometer testing and
safety procedures practised by
Dealers/Authorised Repairers.

Severe driving conditions
When a vehicle is operated in severe
conditions, more frequent attention must be
paid to servicing requirements.
Severe driving conditions include:
• Driving in dusty and/or sandy conditions.
• Driving on rough and/or muddy roads
and/or wading.

193

Maintenance
Safety in the garage

Fuel system

WARNINGS
If the vehicle has been driven
recently, do not touch exhaust and
cooling system components until the
engine has cooled.
Never leave the engine running in an
unventilated area - exhaust gases are
poisonous and extremely dangerous.
Do not work beneath the vehicle with
the wheel changing jack as the only
means of support.
Keep your hands and clothing away
from drive belts, pulleys and fans.
Some fans may continue to operate
after the engine has stopped.
Remove metal wrist bands and
jewellery, before working in the
engine compartment.
Do not touch electrical leads or
components while the engine is
running, or with the starter switch
turned on.
Do not allow tools or metal parts of
the vehicle to make contact with the
battery leads or terminals.

WARNINGS
Under no circumstances should any
part of the fuel system be dismantled
or replaced by anyone other than a
suitably qualified vehicle technician. Failure to
comply with this instruction, may result in fuel
spillage with a consequent serious risk of fire.
Ensure sparks and naked lights are
kept away from the engine
compartment.
Wear protective clothing, including,
where practicable, gloves made from
an impervious material.

Poisonous fluids
Fluids used in motor vehicles are poisonous
and should not be consumed or brought into
contact with open wounds. These include;
battery acid, antifreeze, brake, clutch and
power steering fluid, petrol, diesel, engine oil
and windscreen washer additives.
For your own safety, always read and obey all
instructions printed on labels and containers.

Used engine oil
Prolonged contact with engine oil may cause
serious skin disorders, including dermatitis
and cancer of the skin. Always wash
thoroughly after contact.
It is illegal to pollute drains, water
courses or soil. Use authorised
waste disposal sites to dispose of
used oil and toxic chemicals.

194

Maintenance
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
BONNET

Closing the bonnet
WARNING
Do not drive with the bonnet retained
by the safety catch alone.

Opening the bonnet
CAUTION
Do not attempt to open the bonnet if the
pedestrian protection system has
deployed. See PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
(page 66).

1. Lower the bonnet until the safety catch
engages. Using both hands, press the
bonnet down until the catches click.
2. Check that both catches are fully engaged
by attempting to lift both sides of the front
edge of the bonnet. This should be free
from all movement.

E95157

1. Pull the bonnet release handle located in
the left-hand front footwell.
2. Lift the bonnet safety catch lever located
below the centre point of the bonnet, and
raise the bonnet.

195

Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW

JAG1649

Washer fluid reservoir cap (Blue)

1. Washer fluid
2. Brake fluid (right-hand drive)
3. Brake fluid (left-hand drive)
4. Engine oil - V8 petrol engines
5. Engine oil - Diesel engines

E96100

6. Engine oil - V6 petrol engines

Brake fluid reservoir cap (Yellow)

7. Engine oil dipstick - V6 petrol engines
8. Power steering
9. Coolant - V8 petrol engines
10. Coolant - Diesel and V6 petrol engines
WARNINGS
While working in the engine
compartment, always observe the
safety precautions listed under Safety
in the garage. See GENERAL INFORMATION
(page 192).
Do not drive the vehicle if there is a
possibility that leaked fluid will come
into contact with a hot surface, such
as the exhaust. A resulting fire may cause
death or serious injury.

E96101

Engine oil filler caps (Black)

JAG1635

196

Maintenance
ENGINE OIL CHECK - V6 Petrol
engines

Engine oil dipsticks (Red/yellow) - V6
Petrol only

CAUTIONS
If the message ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
LOW is displayed, stop the engine as
soon as it is safe to do so and seek qualified
assistance. Do not start the engine until the
cause has been identified and rectified.
Your vehicle’s warranty may be
invalidated if damage is caused by the
use of improper engine oil. Low quality or
obsolete oils do not provide the protection
required by modern, high performance
engines. Failure to use an oil that meets the
required specification could cause excessive
engine wear, a build up of sludge and deposits
and increased pollution. It could also lead to
engine failure.
Do not use oil additives of any type as
engine damage could occur. Use only
specified lubricants.

E95160

Power steering fluid reservoir cap
(Black)

E95161

Coolant reservoir cap (Black)

The oil consumption of an engine is influenced
by many factors. Under high loads an engine
will consume more oil than usual. Diesel
engines consume slightly more oil than petrol
engines.

E96102

Above normal oil consumption should be
expected when the engine is new.
Check the oil level weekly, when the engine is
cold and with the vehicle resting on level
ground.

197

Maintenance
Checking the oil level

Topping up the oil

Note: If it is necessary to check the oil level
when the engine is hot, switch off the engine
and let stand for five minutes to allow the oil to
drain into the sump. Do not start the engine.

CAUTIONS
Your vehicle warranty may be
invalidated if damage is caused by using
oil that does not meet the required
specification.
Failure to use an oil that meets the
required specification could cause
excessive engine wear, a build up of sludge
and deposits, and increase pollution. It could
also lead to engine failure.
Overfilling with oil could result in severe
engine damage. Oil should be added in
small quantities and the level re-checked to
ensure that the engine is not overfilled.

1. Unscrew the oil filler cap (2).
2. Add oil to maintain the level between the
MIN and MAX marks or notches on the
dipstick. Clean up any oil spilled during
topping-up.

JAG1524

1. Withdraw the dipstick (1) and wipe the
blade clean with a lint free cloth.
2. Fully re-insert the dipstick and withdraw
again to check the oil level. Never allow the
oil level to fall below the lower mark or
notch on the dipstick.

3. Check the oil level again after 5 minutes.
It is essential to use the correct specification
oil, and to ensure it is suitable for the climatic
conditions in which the vehicle is to be
operated.

As a general guide, if the level on the dipstick:
• Is nearer to the upper mark or notch than
the lower, add no oil.
• Is nearer to the lower mark or notch than
the upper, add half a litre (one pint) of oil.
• Is below the lower mark or notch, add one
litre (two pints) of oil and re-check the level
after a further five minutes.

Note: The approximate quantity of oil required
to raise the level from MIN to MAX on the
dipstick is 1.0 litre (1.76 pints).

198

Maintenance
ENGINE OIL CHECK - V8 Petrol
engines

•

CAUTIONS
It is recommended that the oil level is
checked weekly. If any significant or
sudden drop in oil level is noted you should
seek qualified assistance immediately.
Your vehicle’s warranty may be
invalidated if damage is caused by the
use of improper engine oil. Low quality or
obsolete oils do not provide the protection
required by modern, high performance
engines. Failure to use an oil that meets the
required specification could cause excessive
engine wear, a build up of sludge and deposits
and increased pollution. It could also lead to
engine failure.
Do not use oil additives of any type as
engine damage could occur. Use only
specified lubricants.

•

The oil level should be checked when the
oil is hot. It is therefore recommended that
a reading is taken after a journey.
The vehicle needs to stand for
approximately 10 minutes after the engine
is switched off, to allow the oil to drain
back into the sump.

Note: The system will not give a reading until
the oil level has stabilised.
Once the above conditions are met, check the
oil level as follows:
1. Switch on the ignition - do not start the
engine.
2. Set the transmission to Park (P).
3. Press the TRIP button on the end of the
left-hand column stalk repeatedly, until the
oil can icon is displayed at the bottom of
the message centre.
4. The oil level and topping-up advice will be
shown in the message centre. Top-up as
instructed.

Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of oil consumption is normal.
The rate of consumption will depend on the
following:
• The quality and viscosity of the oil.
• Climatic conditions.
• The speed at which the engine is being
operated.
• Road conditions.
Drivers should expect above normal
consumption when the engine is new.

Checking the oil level
For an accurate oil level reading to be taken, the
following conditions must be met:
• The vehicle needs to be parked on level
ground.

199

Maintenance

LEVEL OK

A. Oil at recommended level. No top-up
required.

B. Add 0.5 litres (0.9 pint) of oil.
C. Add 1 litre (1.8 pints) of oil.

D. Oil level above maximum for safe
operation. Do not drive the vehicle. Seek
qualified assistance.

E. Oil level below minimum for safe
operation. Add 1.5 litre (2.6 pints) of oil,
then recheck level.

ADD 0.5L
ADD 1.0L
SEE HANDBOOK

F1. Oil level stabilising, oil level not available.
Wait ten minutes and then recheck the oil
level display.

F2. If this display is accompanied by the
warning message ENGINE OIL LEVEL
MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT, a fault with
the oil level monitor is indicated. Seek
qualified assistance.

SEE HANDBOOK
NOT AVAILABLE
SEE HANDBOOK

Topping up the oil

JAG1412

CAUTIONS
Your vehicle warranty may be
invalidated if damage is caused by using
oil that does not meet the required
specification.
Failure to use an oil that meets the
required specification, could cause
excessive engine wear, a build-up of sludge
and deposits and increase pollution. It could
also lead to engine failure.
Overfilling with oil could result in severe
engine damage.

200

Maintenance
ENGINE OIL CHECK - V6 Diesel
engines
CAUTIONS
If the warning ENGINE OIL CRITICALLY
LOW is displayed in the message centre,
stop the engine as soon as it is safe to do so
and seek qualified assistance. Do not start the
engine until the cause has been identified and
rectified.
Your vehicle’s warranty may be
invalidated if damage is caused by the
use of improper engine oil. Low quality or
obsolete oils do not provide the protection
required by modern, high performance
engines. Failure to use an oil that meets the
required specification could cause excessive
engine wear, a build up of sludge and deposits
and increased pollution. It could also lead to
engine failure.
Do not use oil additives of any type as
engine damage could occur. Use only
specified lubricants.

JAG1383

1. Unscrew the oil filler cap (arrowed).
2. Add the appropriate quantity of oil (as
indicated by the message centre oil level
display). Wait 5 minutes to let the oil level
stabilise and re-check the level.
Clean up any oil spilled during topping up.
3. Once the correct level is achieved, refit the
filler cap and hand tighten securely.
Note: The approximate quantity of oil required
to raise the level from the minimum level of
safe operation to the maximum, is 1.5 litres
(2.6 pints).

201

Maintenance
Oil level warnings
Warnings will be displayed in the message
centre if the oil level is not maintained within
the safe operating levels (minimum and
maximum). A warning will also be displayed if
there is a fault with the oil level monitoring
system.
• ENGINE OIL LOW (amber): The oil is at the
minimum level for safe operation. Top-up
with 1 litre (1.8 pints) of oil.
• ENGINE OIL HIGH (amber): This warning
is displayed when the engine is started, if
the oil is above the maximum level for safe
operation. Seek qualified assistance to
have the engine oil drained, before driving
the vehicle.
• ENGINE OIL CRITICALLY LOW (red): The
oil is below the minimum level for safe
operation. Stop the vehicle as soon as
safety permits and top-up with 1.5 litres
(2.6 pints) of oil. Wait for 5 minutes,
recheck the oil level reading and top-up
again if necessary.
• ENGINE OIL LEVEL MONITOR SYSTEM
FAULT (amber): A fault with the oil level
monitoring system is indicated. Seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible.

LEVEL OK

ADD 0.5L
ADD 1.0L
SEE HANDBOOK

SEE HANDBOOK
NOT AVAILABLE
SEE HANDBOOK

JAG1412

A. Oil at recommended level. No top-up
required.
B. Add 0.5 litres (0.9 pint) of oil.
C. Add 1 litre (1.8 pints) of oil.

Checking the oil level

D. Oil level above maximum for safe
operation. Do not drive the vehicle. Seek
qualified assistance.

The engine oil level is automatically monitored
and is displayed in the trip computer area of the
message centre.

E. Oil level below minimum for safe
operation. Add 1.5 litre (2.6 pints) of oil,
then recheck level.

The current oil level can be viewed with the
ignition on, with the engine stopped and the
transmission in Park (P).

F1. Oil level stabilising, oil level not available.
Wait ten minutes and then recheck the oil
level display.

To view the current oil level, allow 5 minutes
after stopping the engine (to allow the oil level
to stabilise), then press the TRIP button on the
end of the left column stalk repeatedly, until the
oil can icon is displayed at the bottom of the
message centre.

F2. If this display is accompanied by the
warning message ENGINE OIL LEVEL
MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT, a fault with
the oil level monitor is indicated. Seek
qualified assistance.

202

Maintenance
Topping up the oil

Note: The ignition must be left on during the
top-up, so that the electronic dipstick can
register and display the new oil level. This
enables an accurate level re-check.

CAUTIONS
Your vehicle warranty may be
invalidated if damage is caused by using
oil that does not meet the required
specification.
Failure to use an oil that meets the
required specification, could cause
excessive engine wear, a build-up of sludge
and deposits and increase pollution. It could
also lead to engine failure.
Overfilling with oil could result in severe
engine damage.

ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION
It is essential to use the correct specification of
engine oil, and to ensure it is suitable for the
climatic conditions in which the vehicle is to be
operated.
Jaguar recommends:

Model

Specification

V6 Petrol
engines

5W-30 engine oil, meeting
Jaguar specification WSS
M2C913-B is preferred.
Where this is not possible, oil
meeting ACEA A1/B1 or ACEA
A3/B3 specification may be
used.

1. With the ignition on, but the engine not
running, unscrew the oil filler cap
(arrowed).

V8 Petrol
engines

5W-20 engine oil, meeting
Jaguar specification WSS
M2C925-A only.

2. Add the appropriate quantity of oil (as
indicated by the message centre oil level
display). Wait 5 minutes to let the oil level
stabilise and re-check the level.

Diesel engines 5W-30 engine oil, meeting
Jaguar specification WSS
M2C934-B only.

JAG1383

Japan V6
5W-30 engine oil, meeting
Petrol engines specification ILSAC GF-4
with API SM is preferred.
Where this is not possible, oil
meeting ILSAC GF-3 API SL
specification may be used.

Clean up any oil spilled during topping up.
3. Once the correct level is achieved, refit the
filler cap and hand tighten securely until
one click is heard.
Note: The approximate quantity of oil required
to raise the level from the minimum level of
safe operation to the maximum, is 1.5 litres
(2.6 pints).

Japan V8
5W-20 engine oil, meeting
Petrol engines Jaguar specification WSS
M2C925-A only.

203

Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the coolant level
CAUTIONS
Running the engine without coolant will
cause serious engine damage.
If persistent coolant loss is noticed,
seek qualified assistance immediately.
The coolant level in the expansion tank should
be checked at least weekly (more frequently in
high mileage or severe operating conditions).
Always check the level when the system is
cold.
Ensure the coolant level is maintained between
the level indicator marks located on the inside
of the expansion tank filler neck.
If the level has fallen appreciably, suspect
leakage or overheating and arrange for the
vehicle to be examined by a qualified
technician.

E96105

V8 petrol engines
If the message LOW COOLANT LEVEL is
displayed in the message centre, stop the
vehicle as soon as safety permits and top-up
the coolant reservoir with the recommended
antifreeze/water mix.
If the message centre displays the message
ENGINE OVERHEATING, pull off the
carriageway and allow the engine to idle for five
minutes and then switch off the ignition for ten
minutes. Switch on the engine and, provided
that the warning does not occur, continue your
journey, avoiding harsh acceleration. Seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible.

E95163

Diesel and V6 petrol engines

204

Maintenance
Topping up the coolant

Antifreeze

WARNINGS
Never remove the filler cap when the
engine is hot - escaping steam or
scalding water could cause serious
personal injury.
Antifreeze is highly inflammable. Do
not allow antifreeze to come into
contact with naked flames or other
sources of ignition (e.g. a hot engine) - a fire
may result.
Unscrew the filler cap slowly,
allowing the pressure to escape
before removing completely.

WARNINGS
Antifreeze is poisonous and can be
fatal if swallowed - keep containers
sealed and out of the reach of
children. If accidental consumption is
suspected, seek medical attention
immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with
the skin or eyes, rinse immediately
with plenty of water.
CAUTIONS
The use of non-approved antifreeze will
have an adverse effect on the engine
cooling system and therefore engine
durability.
Antifreeze will damage painted surfaces;
soak up any spillage with an absorbent
cloth immediately and wash the area with a
mixture of car shampoo and water.

CAUTION
When travelling in territories where the
water supply contains salt, always
ensure you carry a supply of fresh (rain or
distilled) water. Topping up with salt water will
cause serious engine damage.
Top-up to the upper level indicator mark
located on the side of the expansion tank. Use
only a 50% mix of water and antifreeze to
specification WSS M97B44 (coloured orange)
Extended Life Coolant.

Antifreeze contains important corrosion
inhibitors. The antifreeze content of the coolant
must be maintained at 50% ± 5% all year round
(not just in cold conditions). To ensure that the
anti-corrosion properties of the coolant are
retained, the antifreeze content should be
checked once a year and completely renewed
every ten years, regardless of distance
travelled. Failure to do so may cause corrosion
of the radiator and engine components.

Note: In an emergency - and only if the
approved antifreeze is unavailable - top-up the
cooling system with clean water, but be aware
of the resultant reduction in frost protection.
Do not top-up or refill with conventional
antifreeze formulations. If in doubt consult a
qualified technician.

The specific gravity of a 50% antifreeze
solution at 20°C (68°F) is 1.068 and protects
against frost down to -40°C (-40°F).

Ensure the cap is tightened fully after top-up is
completed by turning the cap until the ratchet
cap clicks.

Use antifreeze to specification WSS M97B44
(coloured orange) Extended Life Coolant.

205

Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID CHECK

With the vehicle on level ground, check the
fluid level at least every week (more frequently
in high mileage or arduous operating
conditions).

WARNING
Seek qualified assistance immediately
if brake pedal travel is unusually long,
unusually short or if there is any
significant loss of brake fluid. Driving under
such conditions could result in extended
stopping distances or complete brake failure.

The brake fluid reservoir is located beneath a
cover on the raised platform to the rear of the
main underbonnet area. See ENGINE
COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW (page 196).

If the quantity of fluid in the brake
reservoir drops below the
recommended level, a red warning
indicator in the instrument pack will illuminate
and the message BRAKE FLUID LOW will be
displayed in the message centre.

Note: If the warning indicator illuminates or the
message is displayed, while the vehicle is being
driven, stop the vehicle as soon as safety
permits by gently applying the brakes. Check
and top-up the fluid level if necessary.

Checking the fluid level
WARNINGS
Brake fluid is highly toxic - keep
containers sealed and out of reach of
children. If accidental consumption is
suspected, seek medical attention
immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with
the skin or eyes, rinse immediately
with plenty of water.
Brake fluid is highly inflammable. Do
not allow brake fluid to come into
contact with naked flames or other
sources of ignition (e.g. a hot engine) - a fire
may result.
Do not drive the vehicle with the fluid
level below the MIN mark.

E95164

1. Release the catch.
2. Lift the cover forwards, then pull
rearwards, to release the hinges.
3. Clean the filler cap with a clean, dry cloth
before removing, to prevent dirt or
moisture from entering the reservoir.

206

Maintenance
Topping up the fluid

CAUTIONS
Brake fluid will damage painted
surfaces. Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately and wash the
area with a mixture of car shampoo and water.
Only use new fluid from an airtight
container (fluid from open containers or
fluid previously bled from the system, will
have absorbed moisture, which will adversely
affect performance, and must not be used).

1. Top up the reservoir to the MAX mark
using Shell DOT4 ESL brake fluid. If
unavailable, a low viscosity brake fluid that
meets ISO 4925 class 6 specification. Only
fluid of this type and standard may be
used.

E95165

4. Remove the filler cap.
5. The brake fluid level should be between the
MIN and the MAX marks on the side of the
reservoir.

2. Replace the cap.
3. Refit the reservoir cover.

The fluid level may drop slightly during normal
use, as a result of brake pad wear, but should
not be allowed to drop below the MIN mark.

207

Maintenance
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Power steering fluid is highly toxic.
Keep containers sealed and out of
reach of children. If accidental
consumption of fluid is suspected, seek
medical attention immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with
the skin or eyes, rinse immediately
with plenty of water.
Power steering fluid is highly
inflammable. Do not allow power
steering fluid to come into contact
with naked flames or other sources of ignition
(e.g. a hot engine) - a fire may result.

The fluid level should be between the MIN and
the MAX marks.

Checking the fluid level

Topping up the fluid

CAUTIONS
The engine must not be started if the
fluid level has dropped below the MIN
mark. Severe damage to the steering pump
could result.
Seek qualified assistance immediately if
there is a noticeable drop in the fluid
level. Severe damage to the steering pump
could result.
If fluid loss is slow, the reservoir may be
topped-up to the upper level mark to
enable the vehicle to be driven to a repair
facility for examination. However, it is
recommended that you seek qualified
assistance before driving the vehicle.

CAUTIONS
It is imperative that the power steering
system does not become contaminated
in any way. Always use new fluid and clean the
area around the filler neck both before
removing the filler cap and after topping up.
Never return drained fluid to the system.
Power steering fluid will damage
painted surfaces. Soak up any spillage
with an absorbent cloth immediately and wash
the area with a mixture of car shampoo and
water.
Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX
mark.

E95166

1. Clean the filler cap before removing to
prevent dirt from entering the reservoir.

Check and top-up the fluid with the vehicle on
level ground, with the engine switched off and
the system cold. Ensure that the steering wheel
is not turned after stopping the engine.

2. Remove filler cap.
3. Using Mobil ATF320, top-up the reservoir
until the fluid level is between the MIN and
MAX marks.

The level of fluid can be seen through the
translucent body of the reservoir.

4. Replace filler cap.

208

Maintenance
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Some screen washer products are
inflammable, particularly if high or
undiluted concentrations are exposed
to sparking. Do not allow screen washer fluid
to come into contact with naked flames or
sources of ignition.
If the vehicle is operated in
temperatures below 4°C (40°F), use a
washer fluid with frost protection. In
cold weather, failure to use a washer fluid with
frost protection, could result in impaired
vision and increase the risk of a vehicle crash.

E95174

The washer reservoir supplies the windscreen
and headlamp washer jets.

CAUTIONS
Do not use an antifreeze or
vinegar/water solution in the washer
reservoir - antifreeze will damage painted
surfaces, while vinegar can damage the
windscreen washer pump.
Body panels may suffer discolouration
as a result of screen washer fluid
spillage. Take care to avoid spillage,
particularly if an undiluted or high
concentration is being used. If spillage occurs,
wash the affected area immediately with water.

Check and top-up the reservoir level at least
every week.
Fill with Jaguar Windscreen Washer Fluid,
diluted with clean water, as specified in the
instructions on the bottle. Using a
non-approved fluid may adversely affect the
wiper blade rubber, resulting in ineffectual and
noisy wiping.
Operate the washer switches periodically to
check that the nozzles are clear and properly
directed.

Topping up the fluid
1. Clean the filler cap before removing to
prevent dirt from entering the reservoir.
2. Open filler cap.
3. Top-up the reservoir until the fluid is
visible in the filler neck.
4. Close filler cap.

209

Maintenance
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Lubricants and fluids
Part

Variant

Specification

Engine oil

V6 Petrol
engines

SAE 5W-30 meeting Jaguar specification WSS M2C913-B
is preferred. Oil meeting ACEA A1/B1 or ACEA A3/B3
specification may be used.

V8 Petrol
engines

Use only Castrol 5W-20 engine oil meeting specification
WSS M2C925-A.

Diesel engines SAE 5W-30 meeting Jaguar specification WSS M2C934-B
only.
V6 engines
Japan only

SAE 5W-30 meeting specification ILSAC GF-4 with API SM
is preferred. Oil meeting ILSAC GF-3 API SL specification
may be used.

Power steering fluid All vehicles

Mobil ATF320 power steering fluid.

Brake fluid

All vehicles

Shell DOT4 ESL is preferred. If unavailable, a low viscosity
brake fluid that meets ISO 4925 specification may be used.

Screen washer

All vehicles

Screen wash with frost protection.

Coolant

All vehicles

50% mixture antifreeze of water and specification WSS
M97B44 (coloured orange) Extended Life Coolant.

If in doubt about the required specification of a lubricant or fluid for your vehicle, seek advice from
your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

210

Maintenance
Capacities
Item

Variant

Capacity

Fuel tank

Diesel vehicles

68.1 litres (15 gallons)

Petrol vehicles

69.5 litres (15.3 gallons)

Fuel capacity (when the fuel gauge Diesel vehicles
indicates empty)
Petrol vehicles

64 litres (14.1 gallons)
64 litres (14.1 gallons)

Reserve capacity (when the fuel
gauge indicates empty)

Diesel vehicles

5.5 litres (1.2 gallons)

Petrol vehicles

5.5 litres (1.2 gallons)

Engine oil refill and filter change

Diesel vehicles

6.4 litres (11.3 pints)

V6 Petrol vehicles

6.5 litres (11.4 pints)

V8 Petrol vehicles

7.25 litres (12.8 pints)

Engine oil MIN to MAX on dipstick Diesel vehicles

1.0 litres (1.8 pints)

Petrol vehicles

1.0 litres (1.8 pints)

Washer reservoir

With headlamp wash

5.5 litres (9.7 pints)

Washer reservoir

Without headlamp wash

4.4 litres (7.7 pints)

Cooling system (fill from dry)

Diesel vehicles

12.5 litres (22 pints)

V6 Petrol vehicles

9.25 litres (16.3 pints)

V8 Normally Aspirated Petrol
vehicles

12.5 litres (22 pints)

V8 Supercharged Petrol vehicles 12.3 litres (21.6 pints)
Cooling system (service fill)

Diesel vehicles

9.7 litres (17.1 pints)

V6 Petrol vehicles

7.42 litres (13.1 pints)

V8 Normally Aspirated Petrol
vehicles

7.5 litres (13.2 pints)

V8 Supercharged Petrol vehicles 8.6 litres (15.1 pints)
- both drain points used
The quoted capacities are approximate and provided as a guide only. All levels must be checked
using the dipstick or level marks as applicable.

211

Vehicle battery
BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLS

WARNINGS
If battery electrolyte comes into
contact with your eyes, flush with
copious amounts of clean cold water.
Seek medical assistance immediately, and
continue to flush with water.
If swallowed, battery electrolyte can
be fatal. If electrolyte is swallowed,
seek medical assistance immediately.
Do not connect any 12 volt equipment
directly to the battery terminals.
Doing so may cause a spark, which
can result in an explosion.
The cell plugs and vent pipe must be
in place at all times when the battery
is connected to the vehicle. Ensure
that the vent pipe is clear of obstructions and
not kinked. Failure to do so may cause a
pressure build up in the battery, resulting in an
explosion.
Do not expose the battery to a naked
flame or spark as the battery
produces explosive, flammable gas.
Never jump start (boost) or charge, a
frozen battery. Doing so can result in
an explosion.
Remove all metal jewellery before
working on, or near, the battery, and
never allow metal tools or vehicle
components to come into contact with the
battery terminals. Metal objects can cause
sparks and/or short circuits, resulting in an
explosion.
Do not allow the battery posts or
terminals to come into contact with
your skin. They contain lead and lead
compounds, which are toxic. Always wash
your hands thoroughly after handling the
battery.

Do not allow any naked flames,
or other sources of ignition near
the battery as the battery may
emit explosive gasses.
Ensure that when working near,
or handling the battery, suitable
eye protection is worn. This will
reduce the risk of eye damage
caused by acid splashes.
To prevent risk of injury, do not
allow children near the battery.
Be aware that the battery may
emit explosive gasses.
The battery contains acid which
is extremely corrosive, and toxic.

BATTERY CARE
WARNINGS
Do not allow the battery electrolyte
(fluid) to come into contact with your
skin or eyes. It is both corrosive and
toxic, and the resulting injuries can be severe.
If any electrolyte does come into contact with
your skin or eyes, immediately rinse the
affected area with clean, cold water.
Immediate medical advice will be required.
If battery electrolyte comes into
contact with your skin and/or clothes
you should remove the affected
clothing and flush the skin with copious
amounts of water. Seek medical assistance
immediately.

212

Vehicle battery
Battery Monitoring System (BMS)

CAUTION
Do not allow battery electrolyte to come
into contact with fabrics or painted
surfaces. If battery electrolyte comes into
contact with any surface, the surface should
be washed down immediately with copious
amounts of clean water. Battery electrolyte is
both corrosive and toxic, and can damage a
wide range of materials if left.

Your vehicle is equipped with a Battery
Monitoring System (BMS) which manages the
battery charging system and, if excessive
battery discharge is occurring when the engine
isn't running, shuts down non-essential
electrical systems to protect battery power.
In the event that too many electrical systems
are operational when the engine is not running,
and the battery charge is insufficient, the audio
and entertainment systems (if active) and
climate control system will be switched off.
This will be confirmed by a low battery warning
message displayed on the touch-screen. If this
occurs, switch on and run the engine for at
least five minutes, preferably with all auxiliary
electrical systems switched off (e.g. lights,
wipers, climate control, seat heaters etc.).

Your vehicle is fitted with a low maintenance
battery, which is located under the floor of the
luggage compartment.
In hot climates more frequent checks of the
battery electrolyte level and condition are
required. If necessary, the battery cells can be
topped up using distilled water.
When the ignition is switched on, but without
the engine running, BATTERY NOT CHARGING
is displayed in the message centre. The battery
will only charge when the engine is running.

Note: The audio system can be operated
during this five minute period when the engine
is running.

Note: Do not connect any 12 volt equipment
(e.g. a 12 volt inspection lamp), directly to the
battery terminals. Use the accessory socket
located in the cubby box, for connecting Jaguar
approved accessories.

If the engine is switched off before the five
minute period ends and the audio system is
switched on, the warning message will
re-appear on the touch-screen and the audio,
entertainment and climate control systems will
switch off again. For this reason, it is important
that the engine is left running for the full five
minute period.

Charging faults
If there is a fault in the battery charging system,
CHARGING FAULT is displayed with red
backlighting in the message centre. If this
occurs, switch off all non-essential electrical
systems and seek qualified assistance at the
earliest opportunity.

213

Vehicle battery
USING BOOSTER CABLES

3. Connect one end of the negative booster
cable to the earth point of the donor vehicle
that is recommended for jump starting by
the manufacturer.

WARNINGS
Always wear appropriate eye
protection when working with
batteries.
During normal use, batteries emit
explosive hydrogen gas - ensure
sparks and naked lights are kept away
from the luggage compartment.
Do not attempt to start the vehicle if
the electrolyte in the battery is
suspected of being frozen.
Make sure both batteries are of the 12
volt type and that the booster cables
have insulated clamps and are
approved for use with 12 volt batteries.
Do not disconnect the discharged
battery.

4. Connect the other end of the negative
booster cable to a suitable earth point on
the disabled vehicle. The earth point
should be at least 0.5 metres (20 inches)
away from the battery and as far as
possible from any fuel or brake pipes.
• Check that all cables are clear of any
moving components and that all four
connections are secure.
5. Start the engine of the donor vehicle, and
allow it to idle for a few minutes.
6. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
7. Allow both vehicles to idle for two minutes.
8. Switch off the donor vehicle.

Disconnecting the cables

Do not connect positive (+) terminals
to negative (-) terminals and ensure
booster cables are kept away from
any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Do not connect a booster cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery.
Always connect to the recommended
earthing point.

WARNING
To avoid serious injury use extreme
caution when removing the booster
cables as the engine will be running
on the previously disabled vehicle. This means
that you may be working close to components
which are moving at high speed, carry high
voltage, or may be hot.

Note: Before connecting booster cables,
ensure that the battery connections on the
disabled vehicle are correct and that all
electrical equipment has been switched off.

Note: Do not switch on any electrical
equipment until after the cables have been
disconnected.

1. Connect one end of the positive booster
cable to the positive terminal on the donor
vehicle's battery.

The engine should be running on the
previously disabled vehicle and the engine
switched off on the donor vehicle. Disconnect
the booster cables in the exact reverse order of
that used for connection.

2. Connect the other end of the positive
booster cable to the positive terminal on
the disabled vehicle's battery.

214

Vehicle battery
CHARGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY

CAUTIONS
Battery disconnection, removal and
replacement, should only be carried out
by qualified personnel. Consult your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.

WARNING
Ensure that the correct type of battery
charger is used. Using an unsuitable
charger may damage the battery and
could cause the battery to explode.
Always charge the battery in a well
ventilated area, away from any naked
flames, sparks or other ignition
sources. During charging, the battery can
produce a highly explosive and flammable gas.

If the vehicle battery is replaced by a
new battery, the vehicle electrical
system must be reset to the new battery by
qualified personnel. Failure to reset the
electrical system, may result in Low Battery
warning messages. Consult your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.
Only a replacement battery of the same
type and specification as the original
should be fitted. Other batteries may vary in
size or have different terminal positions, which
could cause a fire hazard when connected to
the vehicle's electrical system.
Do not rest the battery on any part of the
vehicle, as it may cause damage due to
its weight.
Do not run the engine with the battery
disconnected. Doing so may damage
the charging system.

CAUTIONS
Battery disconnection, removal and
replacement, should only be carried out
by qualified personnel. Consult your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
If the battery has been removed from
the vehicle to be charged, the Battery
Monitoring System will automatically
recalibrate. During this time, Low Battery
warning messages may appear.
Always follow the instructions supplied
with the battery charger. Failure to do so
may result in damage to the battery.

Battery disposal
Used batteries must be disposed of
correctly as they contain a number of
harmful substances. Seek advice on
disposal from your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer, and/or your local
authority.

CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNING
Use caution when lifting the battery
our of, or into, the vehicle. It is heavy
and may cause injury when lifting or if
dropped.
Do not tilt the battery more than 45°,
as it may cause damage and may
cause the electrolyte to leak out.
Battery electrolyte is highly corrosive and
toxic.

215

Wheels and tyres
GENERAL INFORMATION
Tyre markings

7 8
9

15
10
14

JAG1525

1. P indicates that the tyre is for passenger
vehicle use.
2. The width of the tyre from sidewall edge to
sidewall edge in millimetres.
3. The aspect ratio, also known as the profile,
gives the sidewall height as a percentage
of the tread width. So, if the tread width is
205 mm, and the aspect ratio is 50, the
sidewall height will be 102 mm.
4. R indicates that the tyre is of Radial ply
construction.
5. The diameter of the wheel rim given in
inches.
6. The load index for the tyre. This index is
not always shown.
7. The speed rating denotes the maximum
speed at which the tyre should be used for
extended periods. †

8. Tyre manufacturing standard information,
which can be used for tyre recalls and
other checking processes. Most of this
information relates to the manufacturer,
place of manufacture etc. The last four
numbers are the date of manufacture. For
example, if the number was 3106, the tyre
was made in the 31st week of 2006.
9. M+S or M/S indicates that the tyre has
been designed with some capability for
mud and snow.
10. The number of plies in both the tread area,
and the sidewall area, indicates how many
layers of rubber coated material make up
the structure of the tyre. Information is
also provided on the type of materials
used.

216

Wheels and tyres
TYRE CARE

11. Wear rate indicator. A tyre rated at 400 for
example, will last twice as long as a tyre
rated at 200.

WARNINGS
Defective tyres are dangerous. Do not
drive the vehicle if a tyre is damaged,
excessively worn, or incorrectly
inflated. Doing so may lead to premature tyre
failure.
Avoid contaminating the tyres with
vehicle fluids as they may cause
damage to the tyre.
Avoid spinning the wheels. The forces
released can damage the structure of
the tyre and cause it to fail. Doing so
may lead to premature tyre failure.
If wheel spin is unavoidable due to a
loss of traction (in deep snow, for
example), do not exceed the 50 km/h
(30 mph) point on the speedometer. Doing so
may lead to premature tyre failure.
Do not exceed the maximum pressure
stated on the sidewall of the tyre.
Over-inflation could cause the tyre to
fail suddenly.

12. The traction rating grades a tyres
performance when stopping on a wet road
surface. The higher the grade the better the
braking performance. The grades from
highest to lowest are, AA, A, B, and C.
13. The maximum load which can be carried
by the tyre.
14. Heat resistance grading. The tyre's
resistance to heat is grade A, B, or C, with
A indicating the greatest resistance to heat.
This grading is provided for a correctly
inflated tyre, which is being used within its
speed and loading limits.
15. The maximum inflation pressure for the
tyre. This pressure should not be used for
normal driving.

† Speed ratings
Rating

Speed km/h (mph)

160 (99)

170 (106)

180 (112)

190 (118)

200 (124)

210 (130)

240 (149)

270 (168)

300 (186)

Tyre pressures
WARNINGS
Never drive your vehicle if the tyre
pressures are incorrect.
Under-inflation causes excessive
flexing and uneven tyre wear. This can lead to
sudden tyre failure. Over-inflation causes a
harsh ride, uneven tyre wear and poor
handling.
Pressure checks should only be
carried out when the tyres are cold,
and the vehicle has been stationary
for more than three hours. A hot tyre at or
below recommended cold inflation pressure is
dangerously under-inflated.

217

Wheels and tyres
The recommended tyre pressures are listed on
a placard label fixed to the end of the left-hand
side door. These pressures provide optimum
ride and handling characteristics for all normal
operating conditions.

WARNINGS
If the vehicle has been parked in
strong sunlight, or used in high
ambient temperatures do not reduce
the tyre pressures. move the vehicle into the
shade and allow the tyres to cool before
re-checking the pressures.

If winter tyres are fitted, please refer to the
winter tyre pressure information. See USING
WINTER TYRES (page 223).

All of the vehicle's tyres (including the spare)
should be checked regularly for damage, wear
and distortion. If you are in any doubt about the
condition of a tyre, have it checked immediately
by a tyre repair centre or your
Dealer/Authorised repairer.

In the interest of safety, reliability and fuel
efficiency, check the tyres, including the spare,
for condition and pressure on a weekly basis
and before long journeys.
Do not check tyre pressures immediately after
the vehicle has travelled in excess of 1.6 km
(1.0 mile). Tyre temperatures and pressures
increase when running. Deflating a warm tyre
to the recommended pressure will result in
under-inflation.

Checking the tyre pressures
WARNING
Tyre pressures should be checked
regularly using an accurate pressure
gauge, when the tyres are cold.
Failure to properly maintain your tyre
pressures could increase the risk of tyre failure
resulting in loss of vehicle control and
personal injury.

If tyre pressures are checked while the vehicle
is inside a protected covered area, e.g. a
garage, and subsequently driven in lower
outdoor temperatures, tyre under-inflation
could occur.
A slight pressure loss occurs naturally with
time. If this exceeds 0.14 bar (2 lbf/in², 14 kPa,)
per week, have the cause investigated and
rectified by qualified assistance.
Tyre pressures (including the spare) should be
checked at least once a week with normal
on-road use, but should be checked daily if the
vehicle is used off-road. Always check the tyre
pressures before setting off on a long journey.
If it is necessary to check tyre pressures when
the tyres are warm, you should expect the
pressures to have increased by up to
0.3-0.4 bar (4-6 lbf/in², 30-40 kpa). Do not
reduce the tyre pressures to the cold inflation
pressure under these circumstances. Allow the
tyres to cool fully before adjusting the
pressures.

E95180

218

Wheels and tyres
The following procedure should be used to
check and adjust the tyres pressures.
1. Remove the valve cap.
2. Firmly attach a tyre pressure gauge/inflator
to the valve.
3. Read the tyre pressure from the gauge,
and add air if required.
4. If air is added to the tyre, remove the gauge
and re-attach it before reading the
pressure. Failure to do so may result in an
inaccurate reading.
5. If the tyre pressure is too high, remove the
gauge and allow air out of the tyre by
pressing the centre of the valve. Refit the
gauge to the valve and check the pressure.

E95181

A colder ambient local temperature will reduce
pressure within the tyre. An effect is to
decrease sidewall height and to increase tyre
shoulder wear with the potential for tyre failure.
Vehicle dynamics could also be adversely
affected.

6. Repeat the process adding or removing air
as required until the correct tyre pressure
is reached.
7. Refit the valve cap.

In order to minimise this effect, tyre pressures
can be adjusted to compensate before the start
of the journey. Alternatively, tyre pressures can
be adjusted when the area of lower ambient
temperature is reached.

Note: It is an offence in certain countries to
drive a vehicle with incorrect tyre pressures.
Note: It is the driver's responsibility to ensure
that the tyre pressures are correct.

In this situation, the vehicle must be left in the
ambient local temperature for a least one hour
before tyre pressure is adjusted.

Tyre valves
Keep the valve caps screwed down firmly to
prevent water or dirt entering the valve. Check
the valves for leaks when checking the tyre
pressures.

To compensate for colder ambient
temperatures, tyre pressures should be
increased by 0.14 bar (2lbf/in², 14 kPa) for
each 10°C (20°F) decrease.

Pressure compensation for ambient
temperature changes

Note: Ensure that correct tyre pressures are
maintained when moving to areas of differing
ambient temperature.

If the intended journey will take the vehicle into
an area where the ambient local temperature is
known to be lower than the journey start point,
tyre pressure under-inflation could occur.

The Tyre Pressure Monitoring system (TPM
system) may issue a warning if the
under-inflation becomes significant. When
driving through variable climatic conditions the
TPM system warnings may be intermittent.

219

Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure compensation chart - high
ambient temperatures
Tyre pressure temperature compensation
Ambient
temperature °C (°F)

Pressure
compensation bar (lbf/in², kPa)

20 (68)

use placard label

30 (86)

+ 0.14 (2, 14)

40 (104)

+ 0.28 (4, 28)

50 (122)

+ 0.41 (6, 41)

E80322

In order to minimise flat spotting, the tyre
pressures can be increased. Tyre pressures
should be increased by 0.14 bar/14 kPa (2
lbf/in²) for each 10°C (20°F) temperature
increase above 20°C (68°F)

Tyre pressures during long term vehicle
storage

Long term storage
Flat spotting can be minimised during long
term storage, by increasing the tyre pressures
to the maximum indicated on the tyre sidewall.

To minimise the possibility and effects of flat
spots during storage, the tyres may be inflated
to the maximum pressure indicated on the tyre
wall.

Note: The tyre pressures should be reduced to
the correct pressure before the vehicle is
driven.

Note: Before using the stored vehicle on the
road again, ensure that correct tyre pressures
are restored.

Tyre wear
Good driving practise will improve the mileage
you obtain from your tyres, and avoid
unnecessary damage.
• Always ensure that the tyre pressures are
correctly adjusted.
• Always observe the posted speed limits,
and advisory speeds for bends.
• Avoid pulling away quickly, or hard
acceleration.
• Avoid making fast turns or braking
sharply.
• Wherever possible, avoid potholes, or
obstacles on the road.
• Do not drive up kerbs, or rub the tyres
against them when parking.

Flat spots
If the vehicle is stationary for a long period,
when the ambient temperature is high, the
tyres may form flat spots. When the vehicle is
driven, these flat spots will cause a vibration
which will steadily disappear as the tyres warm
up and regain their original shape.

220

Wheels and tyres
Wear indicators

Age degradation
Tyres degrade over time due to the effects of
ultraviolet light, extreme temperatures, high
loads, and environmental conditions. It is
recommended that tyres are replaced at least
every six years, but they may require
replacement more frequently.

WARNING
Wear indicators show the minimum
tread depth recommended by the
manufacturers. Tyres which have
worn to this point will have reduced grip and
poor water displacement characteristics.

Jaguar recommends that even if unused, the
spare tyre be replaced at the same time as the
four road tyres.

CAUTION
If tread wear is uneven across a tyre, or
the tyre wears excessively, the vehicle
should be checked by your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer as soon as possible.

Punctured tyres
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with a
punctured tyre. Even if the punctured
tyre has not deflated, it is unsafe to
use, as the tyre may deflate suddenly at any
time. See TYRE REPAIR KIT (page 229).

Tyre checks

E91698

Not all punctures result in the tyre deflating
immediately. Therefore, it is important to check
the tyres for damage and foreign objects,
regularly.

When the tread has worn down to
approximately 2 mm, wear indicators start to
appear at the surface of the tread pattern. This
produces a continuous band of rubber across
the tread as a visual indicator.

When driving, if a sudden vibration, or change
to the vehicle's handling is noticed, reduce
speed immediately. Do not brake hard, or make
any sudden manoeuvres or direction changes.
Drive slowly to an area off the main highway
and stop the vehicle.

To maintain performance and grip the tyre
must be replaced as soon as the wear indicator
becomes visible. Sooner, if legislation requires
replacement at a greater tread depth.
Note: Tread depth should be checked
regularly, in some case more frequently than
the service intervals. For advice on checking
tyres contact your Dealer/Authorised repairer
or a tyre dealer.

Note: Driving the vehicle to a safe area may
cause damage to the punctured tyre, but
occupant safety is far more important.
Inspect the tyres for signs of punctures,
damage or under inflation. If any damage or
deformity is detected, the tyre should be
replaced. If a spare tyre is not available, then
the vehicle should be recovered to a tyre repair
centre, or Dealer/Approved repairer.

221

Wheels and tyres
Replacement tyres

Directional tyres
Directional tyres are designed to operate
correctly when rotating forwards (when the
vehicle is travelling forwards).

WARNINGS
Do not fit cross-ply tyres.

Typical direction indicators

Do not fit tubed tyres.
Do not swap tyres around the vehicle.
Tyres bed in to the specific
characteristics of each wheel
position. Swapping them around may affect
the vehicle's handling and traction.
Always fit replacement tyres of the
same type, and wherever possible of
the same make and tread pattern.
Replacement wheels should be
genuine Jaguar parts. This will
maintain the designed driving
characteristics.
If the use of tyres not recommended
by Jaguar is unavoidable, ensure that
you read, and fully comply with, the
tyre manufacturers instructions. Failure to do
so, may lead to tyre failure due to incorrect
fitment or use.

E95182

Ideally, tyres should be replaced in sets of four.
If this is not possible, replace the tyres in pairs
(front and rear). When tyres are replaced, the
wheels should always be re-balanced and
alignment checked.
The correct tyre specification for your vehicle
can be found on the tyre information label.

222

Wheels and tyres
USING WINTER TYRES

USING SNOW CHAINS

Winter tyres are more suitable during extremes
of low temperatures, snow and ice and will
considerably improve the vehicle’s handling
during these conditions.

CAUTION
It is essential that only snow chains of
the recommended type are fitted, other
snow chains may cause damage to the vehicle.

Do not exceed 240 km/h (150 mph) when
using Jaguar approved winter tyres.

Snow chains, of the recommended type, can
only be fitted to rear wheels. They should not
be used on temporary use spare wheels.

Winter tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.

You should contact your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer for details and availability of approved
snow chains.
The maximum speed when using snow chains
is 50 km/h (30 mph).

CAUTION
Tyres with an all season icon or M+S
have a level of winter performance and
need not be replaced.

Remove the snow chains immediately the
roads are clear of snow.
Ensure the fitting instructions supplied with the
snow chains are kept in a safe place, for
example, with this literature pack.

Approved winter tyre sizes
Front:
• Dunlop Wintersport M3 - 235/55R17 99H,
245/45R18 96V, 245/45R18 100V,
245/40R19 98V.
• W240 Pirelli Sotto Zero - 245/45R18 100V,
245/40R19 98V, 255/35R20 97V

Note: When using snow chains, select
JaguarDrive Control Winter mode with DSC
switched on.

Rear:
• Dunlop Wintersport M3 - 235/55R17 99H,
245/45R18 96V, 245/45R18 100V,
245/40R19 98V.
• W240 Pirelli Sotto Zero - 245/45R18 100V,
245/40R19 98V, 285/30R20 99V

Winter tyre pressures
Up to 240 km/h (150 mph)
Front

2.0 bar (30 lbf/in², 207 kPa)

Rear

2.3 bar (33 lbf/in², 230 kPa)

223

Wheels and tyres
RUN FLAT TYRES

Vehicles fitted with run-flat tyres are not fitted
with a spare wheel or jacking equipment.
Therefore, run-flat tyres should be replaced
with the same type of tyre.

WARNING
If a run-flat tyre is deflated, maximum
vehicle speed must not exceed
80 km/h (50 mph).

TOOL KIT
Tool kit contents

E91708

Run-flat tyres can be identified by the lettering
RSC on the sidewall. The tyre construction
utilises a specially reinforced sidewall, which
allows the vehicle to be driven at restricted
speeds, even when the tyre is depressurised.
Run-flat tyres can only be fitted to special rims,
constructed for run-flat tyre use.

4
3

E95183

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

A tyre pressure monitoring system is
mandatory when the vehicle is fitted with
run-flat tyres. See TYRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM (page 234).
If the tyre has deflated, the vehicle should be
driven with caution, as handling characteristics
will be different compared to a fully inflated
tyre.

Jack.
Wheel brace.
Chock.
Locking wheel nut adaptor.
Towing eye.

WARNING
After use, the tool kit should be
returned to the under floor storage
area and correctly stowed. Do not
leave the tool kit or its components loose in the
storage area, as they can prove hazardous
during an impact or sudden manoeuvre.

If the vehicle is fully laden with passengers and
luggage, the maximum distance that can be
completed on a fully deflated tyre, is
approximately 80 kilometres (50 miles).
Stop immediately if the tyre construction
begins to break down or if the tyre dislodges
from the wheel rim. Typically, this will be
accompanied by excessive vibration.

Note: When returning the tool kit to its stowage
position, hook the T-bar of the clamp over the
jack handle, to secure in position.
Note: The jack requires occasional
maintenance. Examine the jack for wear,
damage or corrosion and lubricate the moving
parts.

A tyre driven in a deflated condition must be
replaced as soon as possible.

224

Wheels and tyres
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL

CAUTION
Ultra high performance tyres. This
vehicle is equipped with an Ultra High
Performance (UHP) tyre and wheel
combination designed to give maximum dry
road performance with consideration for
aquaplaning resistance. UHP tyres have
performance enhancing soft rubber tread
compound. If driven aggressively they may
suffer rapid tread wear and a shorter life than
can be expected from other tyre types. This
wheel and tyre combination is more
susceptible to damage from road hazards.

WARNINGS
Always ensure replacement tyres
have the correct rating and
specifications (e.g. load index, size,
speed rating) for your vehicle.
When using tyres other than those
recommended by Jaguar, do not
exceed the speed capacity
recommended by the manufacturer.
Wheels are extremely heavy. Take
care when lifting and particularly
when removing and replacing a wheel
in its storage position in the luggage
compartment.

Do not use this combination for driving on
snow or ice. High performance tyres must be
replaced with winter tyres when weather
conditions dictate.

If a wheel change is required, pull off the road
completely. Park on ground which is as level
and solid as possible. Ensure that the vehicle is
clear of any objects that will obstruct the safe
removal of the wheel. Switch on hazard
warning lamps and, where legally required,
display the warning triangle.

Temporary use spare wheel
Observe the following warnings before using
the wheel:
WARNINGS
Note the temporary use spare wheel
warning label. Adhere to instructions
on the label. Failure to comply can be
dangerous.
When a temporary use spare wheel is
fitted, drive with caution and replace
with the specified wheel and tyre as
soon as possible.
Do not fit more than one temporary
use spare wheel and tyre assembly at
one time.
The temporary use spare wheel must
be inflated to 4.2 bar (60 lbf/in²,
420 kPa) and cannot be repaired.
Temporary use spare wheel,
maximum speed is 80 km/h
(50 mph).

Regular maintenance of tyres contributes not
only to safety, but to the designed function of
the vehicle. Road-holding, steering and braking
are especially vulnerable to incorrectly
pressurised, badly fitted or worn tyres.
Tyres of the correct size and type, but of
different make can have widely varying
characteristics. It is therefore recommended
that Jaguar approved tyres are fitted to all
wheels.

225

Wheels and tyres
Spare wheel location

WARNINGS

The spare wheel and jacking tools are stored
under the luggage compartment floor panel.

If the vehicle is fitted with Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System (TPM
System). See TYRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM (page 234).
DSC must be on when the temporary
use spare wheel is in use.

Locking wheel nuts
Vehicles may be equipped with a locking wheel
nut on each wheel. These are similar to
standard wheel nuts, and can only be removed
using the special adaptor provided with the
jacking equipment.
JAG1304

To remove the spare wheel: Raise the luggage
compartment floor panel, hooking the strap
over the upper boot seal as illustrated.

E91709

1. Insert the adaptor firmly onto the locking
wheel nut.

1
JAG1327

2. Using the wheel brace, unscrew the wheel
nut and adaptor.

Unscrew the Tee bolt, releasing the retaining
clamp and hook.

3. Return the locking wheel nut adaptor to the
correct storage position.

Remove the tool tray from the spare wheel and
remove the spare wheel from the luggage
compartment.

Note: A code number is stamped on the side of
the locking nut. Ensure the number is recorded
on the Security Card supplied with the
literature pack. Quote this number if a
replacement is required. Do not keep the
Security Card in the vehicle.

Remove the jack and wheel nut wrench from
the tray.
Note: When refitting the Tee bolt, ensure that
the retaining hook (1) fits over the jack handle,
as illustrated.

226

Wheels and tyres
Wheel changing safety

WARNINGS
The jack is designed for use when
changing a wheel only. Never work
beneath the vehicle with the jack as
the only means of support - use vehicle
support stands.
Always chock the wheel diagonally
opposite the wheel to be changed,
using the wheel chock supplied in the
tool kit. Chock the front of a front wheel, or the
rear of a rear wheel.
If jacking the vehicle on a slight slope
is unavoidable, place chocks on the
downhill side of the two opposite
wheels. An additional chock will be
needed.
Take care when lifting the spare
wheel, and removing the punctured
wheel. The wheels are heavy, and can
cause injuries if not handled
correctly.
Remove the spare wheel prior to
jacking the vehicle. To avoid
destabilising the vehicle when raised.
Take care when loosening the wheel
nuts. The wheel brace may slip off if
not properly attached, and the wheel
nuts may give way suddenly. Either
unexpected movement may cause an injury.

Before raising the vehicle, or changing a wheel
ensure that you read, and comply with the
following warnings.
WARNINGS
Always find a safe place to stop, off
the highway and away from traffic.
Ensure that the vehicle is on firm level
ground.
Disconnect trailer/caravan from
vehicle.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
Ensure that all passengers, and
animals, are out of the vehicle and in
a safe place away from the highway.
Place a warning triangle at a suitable
distance behind the vehicle, facing
towards oncoming traffic.
Ensure that the front wheels are in the
straight ahead position, and engage
the steering lock.
Apply the parking brake, and engage
Park (P).
Ensure that the jack is on firm level
ground.
Never place anything between the
jack and the ground, or the jack and
the vehicle.
When one rear wheel is lifted off the
ground the selection P (Park) position
will not prevent the vehicle from
moving and possibly slipping off the jack as
the park brake only operates on the rear
wheels.
Do not start or run the engine while
the vehicle is supported only by a
jack.

227

Wheels and tyres
There are four jacking points on the underside
of the floor. Two indented, triangular indicators
are provided on each sill cover. These indicate
the location for the jack.

Wheel changing procedure
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to lift the vehicle
unless the jack head is fully engaged
in the jacking point.
Ensure that the park brake is applied.

The simplest way to correctly locate the jacking
point is to feel along the sill panel to the
triangular indentation and then fit the jack to
the body, not to the sill panel.
Carefully raise the vehicle by turning the jack
handle. Stop jacking the vehicle when the tyre
just clears the ground. Minimum tyre lift gives
maximum vehicle stability.

CAUTION
Ensure before raising the vehicle that
the jack is correctly positioned to avoid
any damage to the vehicle sills or sill panels.

Remove the wheel nuts and the wheel.

1. Ensure that all passengers are in a safe
place, clear of the vehicle.

To remove the centre badge use the plastic
tipped end of the wheel nut wrench handle,
push the centre badge from its housing from
the inside of the wheel.

2. Apply the parking brake and select gear
position P (Park).

Push the centre badge into the replacement
wheel. If the temporary use spare wheel is to be
fitted, keep the centre badge safely and fit it to
the repaired full size wheel when it has been
refitted.

3. Ensure that the jack is placed on firm and
level ground.
Observe the instructions printed on the jack.
Use the jack only for lifting the vehicle during
wheel changing and only use the jack which is
stored in the vehicle.

Fit the spare wheel and loosely secure with the
wheel nuts.

Before raising the vehicle slacken but do not
remove the wheel nuts.

E95185

228

Wheels and tyres
TYRE REPAIR KIT

Tightening the wheel nuts

E91712

WARNINGS
To ensure vehicle safety, it is
essential that you read and
understand the following information.
Failure to follow the instructions given here,
may lead to serious tyre damage and may
result in death or serious injury.
If you are in any doubt regarding your
ability to carry out the instructions,
contact your Dealer/Approved
Repairer before attempting the repair.

5
2

Using the wheel nut wrench, lightly tighten the
wheel nuts alternately using the sequence
shown in the illustration.

Your vehicle may not be equipped with a spare
tyre. If this is the case, in its place in the rear
underfloor storage compartment, you will find
a Jaguar tyre repair kit (except where run-flat
tyres are fitted). The Jaguar tyre repair kit can
be used to repair one tyre and it is essential
that you read the following guide before
attempting to repair a tyre.

Lower the jack and tighten the wheel nuts
alternately. Do not overtighten by using foot
pressure or extension bars on the wheel nut
wrench.
At the earliest opportunity have the wheel nuts
tightened with a torque wrench to 125 Nm
(92 lb.ft).

The Jaguar tyre repair kit seals most punctures
caused by nails, or similar items, with a
maximum diameter of 6 mm (1/4 inch).

This torque must not be exceeded.

Note: The sealant used in the tyre repair kit has
a shelf life and the expiry date is shown on the
tyre sealant bottle. Ensure that the container is
replaced before the expiry date.

229

Wheels and tyres
Jaguar tyre repair kit safety information

WARNINGS
Check the tyre sidewall prior to
inflation. If any cracks, damage or
deformities are apparent, do not
inflate the tyre.
Watch the tyre sidewall during
inflation. If any cracks, bumps or
similar damage, or deformities
appear, switch off the compressor and deflate
the tyre.

WARNINGS
Some tyre damage may only be
partially sealed, or may not seal at all,
depending on the amount and type of
damage. Any loss of tyre pressure can
seriously affect vehicle safety.
Do not use the tyre repair kit if the tyre
has been damaged by driving while
under-inflated.
Only use the tyre repair kit to seal
damage located within the tyre tread
area.
Do not use the tyre repair kit to seal
damage to the tyre sidewall.
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)
when a repaired tyre is fitted to the
vehicle.
The maximum distance that should
be driven when a repaired tyre is
fitted, is 200 km (125 miles).
When a repaired tyre is fitted, drive
with caution and avoid sudden
braking or steering manoeuvres.
Only use the tyre repair kit for the
vehicle with which it was supplied.
Do not use the tyre repair kit for any
other purpose than tyre repair.
Never leave the tyre repair kit
unattended when in use.
Only use the tyre repair kit within the
-30 °C to +70 °C temperature range.
Always keep children and animals at a
safe distance from the tyre repair kit
when in use.
Do not stand directly beside the
compressor when it is operating.

230

Wheels and tyres
Jaguar tyre repair kit

10
9
1
2
8

5
6

3
4

E96498

1. Maximum speed label. 80 km/h (50 mph).

7. Sealant bottle receiver cap (orange).

2. Tyre inflation hose.

8. Sealant bottle receiver.

3. Inflation hose protective cap.

9. Sealant bottle cap.

4. Inflation hose connector.

10. Sealant bottle.

5. Compressor power cable.

11. Tyre pressure gauge.

6. Power cable connector.

12. Compressor on/off switch (I = on. 0 = off.).

231

Wheels and tyres
Using the Jaguar tyre repair kit

Repair procedure

WARNINGS
Avoid skin contact with the sealant
which contains natural rubber latex.

WARNING
Check the tyre sidewall prior to
inflation. If there are any cracks,
bumps or similar damage, do not
attempt to inflate the tyre. Do not stand
directly beside the tyre while the compressor
is pumping. Watch the tyre sidewall. If any
cracks, bumps or similar damage appear, turn
off the compressor and let the air out by
means of the pressure relief valve. Do not
continue to use the tyre.

If the tyre inflation pressure does not
reach 1.8 bar (26 lbf/in², 180 kPa)
within seven minutes, the tyre may
have suffered excessive damage. A temporary
repair will not be possible, and the vehicle
should not be driven until the tyre has been
replaced.
CAUTIONS
Before attempting a tyre repair, ensure
that the vehicle is parked safely, as far
away from passing traffic as possible.
Ensure that the parking brake is applied
and P (Park) is selected.
Do not attempt to remove foreign
objects such as nails, screws, etc. from
the tyre.
Always run the engine when using the
compressor, unless the vehicle is in an
enclosed or poorly ventilated space, as this
may cause asphyxiation.
To prevent overheating, do not operate
the compressor continuously for longer
than ten minutes.

1. Open the tyre repair kit and peel off the
maximum speed label. Attach the label to
the fascia in the driver's field of vision.
Take care not to obstruct any of the
instruments or warning lights.

Note: All vehicle drivers and occupants should
be made aware that a temporary repair has
been made to a tyre fitted to the vehicle. They
should also be made aware of the special
driving conditions imposed when using a
repaired tyre.

5. Remove the valve cap from the damaged
tyre.

2. Uncoil the compressor power cable and
the inflation hose.
3. Unscrew the orange cap from the sealant
bottle receiver and the sealant bottle cap.
4. Screw the sealant bottle into the receiver
(clockwise) until tight.
• Screwing the bottle onto the receiver will
pierce the bottle's seal. Do not unscrew
a full, or partly used bottle from the
receiver. Doing so will result in sealant
leaking from the bottle.

6. Remove the protective cap from the
inflation hose and connect the inflation
hose to the tyre valve. Ensure that the hose
is screwed on firmly.
7. Ensure that the compressor switch is in
the off (0) position.
8. Insert the power cable connector into the
auxiliary power socket. See AUXILIARY
POWER SOCKETS (page 125).

232

Wheels and tyres
9. Unless the vehicle is in an enclosed area,
start the engine.

19. Immediately drive the vehicle for
approximately 3 km (2 miles), to allow the
sealant to coat the inner surface of the tyre
and form a seal at the puncture.

10. Set the compressor switch to the on (I)
position.

Checking the tyre pressure after a repair

11. Inflate the tyre to a minimum of 1.9 bar
(26 lbf/in²) and a maximum of 3.5 bar
(51 lbf/in²).
• When pumping the sealant through the
tyre valve, the pressure may rise up to 6
bar (87 lbf/in²). The pressure will drop
again after approximately 30 seconds.

WARNINGS
When driving the vehicle, if you
experience vibrations, abnormal
steering, or noises, reduce speed
immediately. Drive with extreme caution and
reduced speed, to the first safe place to stop
the vehicle. Visually examine the tyre and
check its pressure. If there are any signs of
damage or deformity to the tyre, or the tyre
pressure is below 1.3 bar (19 lb/in²), do not
continue driving.
Consult a tyre repair centre or your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer, for
advice concerning the replacement of
a tyre after using a tyre repair kit.

12. During the inflation, switch the
compressor off briefly, to check the tyre
pressure using the gauge mounted on the
compressor.
• It should not take longer than seven
minutes to inflate the tyre. If, after seven
minutes, the tyre has not yet reached
minimum pressure, the tyre should not
be used.
13. Once the tyre has been inflated, switch off
the compressor. If desired, the engine may
be turned off after the compressor has
been turned off.

1. Drive the vehicle for 3 km (2 miles) then
stop in a safe place. Carry out a visual
examination of the tyres condition.

14. Remove the power connector from the
auxiliary power socket.

2. Make sure that the sealant container
section is in its original position.

15. Remove the inflation hose from the tyre
valve, by unscrewing it as quickly as
possible (counter-clockwise).

3. Screw the inflation hose connector firmly
onto the tyre valve.

16. Replace the inflation hose protective cap
and the tyre valve cap.

5. If the pressure of the sealant filled tyre is
above 1.3 bar (19 lb/in²) adjust the
pressure to the correct value. See TYRE
CARE (page 217).

4. Read the tyre pressure from the gauge.

17. Do not remove the sealant bottle from the
receiver.

6. Ensure that the compressor switch is in
the off (O) position and insert the power
cable connector into the auxiliary power
socket.

18. Ensure that the tyre repair kit (including
the bottle and receiver caps) are placed
securely in the vehicle. You will need to
use the kit to check the tyre pressure after
approximately 3 km (2 miles), so ensure
they are easily accessible.

If the vehicle is in a well ventilated area,
start the engine.

233

Wheels and tyres
7. Switch the compressor to on (I) and inflate
the tyre to the correct pressure.

Only sealant containers which are
completely empty should be
disposed of with normal household
waste. Sealant containers which contain some
sealant, and the tyre inflation hose, should be
disposed of by a tyre specialist or your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer, in compliance with
local waste disposal regulations.

8. To check the tyre pressure, turn off the
compressor then read the pressure from
the gauge.
9. When the compressor is off, if the tyre
pressure is too high, release the required
amount of pressure using the pressure
relief valve.

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM

10. Once the tyre is inflated to the correct
pressure, switch off the compressor and
remove the power plug from the auxiliary
socket.
• The use of the tyre repair kit sealant may
lead to error prompts and incorrect
readings of the Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System. Therefore, use the
tyre repair kit pressure gauge to check
and adjust the damaged tyre's inflation
pressure.

WARNINGS
The Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM)
system is NOT a substitute for
manually checking tyre pressures.
The TPM system only provides a low pressure
warning and does not re-inflate your tyres.
Tyre pressures should be checked regularly
using an accurate pressure gauge when cold.
Failure to properly maintain your pressures
could increase the risk of tyre failure, with
consequential loss of vehicle control and
personal injury.
The TPM system can NOT register
damage to a tyre. Regularly check the
condition of your tyres, especially if
the vehicle is driven off-road.

11. Unscrew the inflation hose connector from
the tyre valve, replace the tyre valve cap
and the inflation hose connector protective
cap.
12. Ensure that the tyre repair kit is placed
securely in the vehicle.
13. Drive to the nearest tyre repair centre or
Dealer/Authorised Repairer, for a
replacement tyre to be fitted. Ensure that
you make the repair centre aware that the
tyre repair kit has been used before the tyre
is removed.

CAUTION
When inflating tyres, care should be
taken to avoid bending or damaging the
TPM system valves. Always ensure correct
alignment of the inflation head to the valve
stem.

14. Both the tyre inflation hose, and the sealant
container should be replaced once a new
tyre has been fitted.

Note: Non-approved accessories may interfere
with the system. If this occurs, TYRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT is displayed in the
message centre.

234

Wheels and tyres
Note: Different types of tyre may affect the
performance of the TPM system. Always
replace tyres in accordance with
recommendations. See TYRE
SPECIFICATIONS - ARDUOUS TERRAIN
(page 239).
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TPM
System which monitors pressure in each tyre
(temporary use spare wheels are not fitted with
sensors and are consequently not monitored).

Auto
Inst Fu

km
l/100km

E95244

If the telltale light illuminates, you should stop
and check your tyres as soon as possible and
inflate them to the recommended pressure as
stated on the tyre pressure placard. If low
pressure warnings occur frequently, the cause
must be determined and rectified.

When driving through variable climatic
conditions the TPM system warnings may be
intermittent.

Your vehicle will also indicate a TPM System
malfunction by initially flashing and
subsequent continuous illumination of the
warning telltale. A text message will
accompany the system malfunction and will
display TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT. The
TPM system fault sequence will be activated at
every ignition cycle until the fault is rectified.
When a malfunction occurs, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tyre pressure
as intended.

E91713

Wheels fitted with a TPM system can be easily
visually identified by the external metal lock nut
and valve (1). All Jaguar non-TPM system
wheels have a rubber valve fitted (2).

TPM system operation

TPM system malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons which may include other
radio frequency systems that could cause
interference or the installation of incompatible
replacement tyres on the vehicle.

The TPM system monitors pressure of the
tyres via sensors located in each wheel and a
receiver located within the vehicle.
Communication between sensor and receiver
is via Radio Frequency (RF) signals.
The tyre pressure warning
comprises a yellow warning telltale
within the instrument panel, and
the associated messages within the message
centre.

235

Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure warning with speed

Tyre changing

If the vehicle is to be driven at speeds in excess
of 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre pressures
should be increased as stated in this handbook
or on the placard label. Failure to increase the
tyre pressures and driving in excess of
160 km/h (100 mph), will illuminate the yellow
warning telltale and display a text message
TYRE PRESSURES LOW FOR SPEED. In the
event of this warning being displayed, vehicle
speed should be reduced

Always have your tyres serviced or changed by
a qualified engineer.
Care must be taken to avoid contact between
the bead of the tyre and the sensor during
removal and refitting of the tyre, otherwise the
sensor may become damaged and or
inoperable.
CAUTION
Valve stem seal, washer, nut, valve core
and cap should be replaced at every tyre
change. Valve stem seal, washer and nut must
be replaced if valve retention nut is loosened.
Sensor units and nuts must be refitted using
correct torque figures and associated profile.
Damage to the vehicle may result if these
precautions are not taken.

Temporary use spare wheel and tyre
change
If the temporary use spare wheel is fitted the
system will automatically recognise the change
in wheel positions. Then after approximately
ten minutes of driving above 25 km/h
(18 mph), a message TYRE NOT MONITORED
will be displayed accompanied by illumination
of the warning telltale and the corresponding
block in the vehicle graphic.

Sensors can be removed from the wheel by the
unscrewing of the valve retention nut.

Replacement sensor

The warning telltale will initially flash and will
subsequently revert to continuous illumination.
Extended use of the temporary use spare wheel
will produce an additional text message TYRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT.

Should the sensor require replacing, it should
be carried out by a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
A replacement sensor must be fitted to a
running wheel in order to be recognised by the
system. The vehicle needs to be stationary for
15 minutes during the sensor fitment before
the system is ready to detect the new sensor.
The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of
fifteen minutes after the sensor change, and
then remain stationary for fifteen minutes to
activate full TPM system operation.

This TPM system display sequence will be
activated at every ignition cycle until the
temporary use spare wheel is replaced by a
fully operational full size wheel and tyre
assembly.
Always replace the temporary use wheel before
having TPM system faults investigated. The
fault may well be rectified with the fitment of a
fully operational full size running tyre in lieu of
the temporary use spare wheel assembly.

If the TPM system warning for any wheel does
not clear, even after ensuring correct inflation
and driving for more than ten minutes above
25 km/h (18 mph), you should seek qualified
assistance as soon as possible.

236

Wheels and tyres
TPM System information messages
Message

Warning Priority
Indicator Indicator

CHECK TYRE PRESSURE
TPM
(Graphic indication displays System
which tyre is under-inflated.)

Meaning

Amber

You should as soon as possible stop, check
your tyre and inflate them to the
recommended pressure.

CHECK ALL TYRE
PRESSURES

TPM
System

Amber

May be displayed when the vehicle is learning
that a new sensor is fitted to the vehicle and
one or more tyres has low pressure. You
should as soon as possible stop, check your
tyres and inflate them to the recommended
pressure.

TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM
FAULT

TPM
System

Amber

1. The wheels do not have TPM System
sensors fitted.
2. The TPM System sensors have become
defective, an unapproved accessory is
interfering with the system or a general fault
has been detected. Seek qualified assistance
as soon as possible.

TYRE NOT MONITORED
TPM
(Graphic indication displays System
which tyre is not monitored.)

TYRE PRESSURES LOW FOR
SPEED

TPM
System

Red

1. A temporary use spare wheel is fitted.
Vehicle speed should be limited to 80 km/h
(50 mph). 2. A TPM System sensor has
become defective, an unapproved accessory
is interfering with the system or a wheel has
been fitted that does not have a sensor. Seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible.

Amber

The tyre pressures are not suitable for high
speed driving. You should reduce vehicle
speed and inflate the tyres to recommended
pressures for high speed driving.

237

Wheels and tyres
TYRE GLOSSARY

Production options weight
The combined weight of options installed
which weigh in excess of 1.4 kg (3 lb) more
than the standard items that they replaced, and
are not already considered in kerb or accessory
weights. Items such as heavy duty brakes, high
capacity battery, special trim etc.

lbf/in² or psi
Pounds per square inch, an imperial unit of
measure for pressure.

kPa
Kilo Pascal, a metric unit of measure for
pressure.

Vehicle capacity weight
The number of seats multiplied by 68 kg
(150 lb) plus the rated amount of load/luggage.

Cold tyre pressure
The air pressure in a tyre which has been
standing in excess of three hours, or driven for
less than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of kerb weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, plus any production
option weights.

Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum pressure to which the tyre
should be inflated. This pressure is given on
the tyre side wall in lbf/in² (psi) and kPa.

Rim
The metal support for a tyre, or tyre and tube,
upon which the tyre beads are seated.

Note: This pressure is the maximum allowed
by the tyre manufacturer. It is not the pressure
recommended for use.

Bead
The inner edge of a tyre that is shaped to fit to
the rim and form an air tight seal. The bead is
constructed of steel wires which are wrapped,
or reinforced, by the ply cords.

Kerb weight
The weight of a standard vehicle, including a
full tank of fuel, any optional equipment fitted,
and with the correct coolant and oil levels.

Gross vehicle weight
The maximum permissible weight of a vehicle
with driver, passengers, load, luggage,
equipment, and towbar load.

Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those items
replaced) of items available as factory installed
equipment.

238

Wheels and tyres
TYRE SPECIFICATIONS - ARDUOUS TERRAIN
In certain markets, due to the possibility of very uneven or unmetalled roads, it is necessary to fit
tyres suitable for the conditions. These markets and the relevant tyre specification are detailed
below.
The following chart details the tyres recommended for use in the countries listed below:
A.

Australia, Bahrain, Egypt, Israel, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Malaysia, Mexico, Morocco,
Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Syria, Thailand, United Arab Emirates.

Argentina, Belarus, Brazil, Bulgaria, Chile, Dominican Republic, Estonia, Guatemala,
Indonesia, Kaxakhstan, Panama, Philippines, Russia, Sri Lanka, Ukraine, Uzbekistan.

Wheel position

Tyre size

Pattern

Front and rear

235/55R17 99W

Pirelli P7

Front and rear

245/45R18 100Y X/L

Pirelli PZero Asymmetric

Yes

Front and rear

245/45R18 100W X/L

Dunlop Sport 01 Asymmetric

Yes

Front and rear

245/40R19 98Y X/L

Dunlop Sport 01 Asymmetric

Yes

Front

255/35R20 97Y X/L

Pirelli PZero Asymmetric

Yes

Rear

285/30R20 99Y X/L

Pirelli PZero Asymmetric

Yes

Temporary use spare wheel (front and rear):
Alloy 4J x 18

T135/80R18

Pirelli

For all other countries you should refer to your local Dealer/Authorised Repairer for specific tyre
fitment.

239

Wheels and tyres
Accessory wheels and tyres

3
E95187

1. Front tyre pressure.
2. Rear tyre pressure.
3. Wheel and tyre information (size, speed
rating, etc.).
Note: Use the table above to record accessory
wheel and tyre information.
WARNING
Contact your Dealer/Authorised
Repairer before fitting any accessory
wheels and tyres. Your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer will be able to
offer guidance regarding the correct
accessories. Fitting incorrect wheel/tyre
combinations can seriously affect the ride and
handling of your vehicle. In extreme cases,
this may lead to loss of control of the vehicle.

240

Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE

CAUTIONS
Always turn off the ignition system and
the affected electrical circuit, before
replacing a fuse.
Fit Jaguar approved replacement fuses
of the same rating and type, or fuses of
matching specification. Using an incorrect
fuse may result in damage to the vehicle's
electrical system, and can result in a fire.
No attempt should be made to repair a
fuse that has blown.
If the replacement fuse blows after
installation, the system should be
checked by your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

E95262

Two types of fuses are fitted in the fuse boxes:

Note: Jaguar recommend that owners do not
remove or replace relays. It is recommended
that you seek qualified assistance in the event
of a relay failure.

1. Mini-type
2. J-Case

Always switch off the ignition and the affected
electrical circuit, before replacing a fuse.

If a spare fuse is used, renew it (or have it
renewed) with a fuse of the same amperage
rating.

Fuse failure is identified by an inoperative
circuit.

Push the tool onto the suspect fuse and
withdraw it.

A special tool for removing and replacing Mini
fuses is provided in the engine compartment
fuse box, together with spare fuses.

If the wire in the fuse is broken, the fuse has
blown.
Fit a new fuse using the tool.

Checking or renewing a blown fuse
J-Case fuses (2) and relays should only be
replaced by a qualified technician.
Fuses are colour coded according to the
amperage and the rating is also marked on
each fuse.

241

Fuses
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS

Engine compartment fuse box
The fuse box is located underneath a cover on
the right-hand side of the engine compartment.

CAUTION
When a fuse box lid is removed, take
care to protect the box from moisture,
and refit the lid at the earliest opportunity.

1
1

1
3
E95263

There are three separate fuse boxes fitted to the
vehicle, each one containing fuses protecting a
different group of circuits.
They are located in:
1. The engine compartment
2. The passenger compartment.
3. The luggage compartment.
E95264

Remove the engine compartment right-hand
cover by releasing the turnbuckles (1).
Remove the fuse box lid by pressing the
retaining lugs (solid arrows) and lifting.
When refitting, press the fuse box lid in the
area of the retaining lugs until the lid engages.

242

Fuses
Passenger compartment fuse box

Luggage compartment fuse box

E95266

The fuse box is located behind an access hatch
on the right-hand side of the luggage
compartment.

E95265

The passenger compartment fuse box is
located behind an access hatch in the
right-hand footwell.

Push down on the top of the hatch and pull
away from the side of the vehicle, to access the
fuse box.

Press the release catch to access the fuse box.

243

Fuses
Fuse and relay positions
F28
F29
F30
F31
F32
F33
F34
F35
F36

F39
F38
F37

F44
F43
F42
F41
F40

F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27

F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

F45
F17
F18

F6
F5
F4
F3

F2
F1

F24
F23
F22
F21
F20
F19
F18
F17
F16
F15
F14
F13

F36
F35
F34
F33
F32
F31
F30
F29
F28
F27
F26
F25

F12

F11

F10

F3
F8

JAG1533

1. Engine compartment fuse box.
2. Passenger compartment fuse box.
3. Luggage compartment fuse box

244

F24
F23
F22
F21
F20
F19
F18
F17
F16
F15
F14
F13

F36
F35
F34
F33
F32
F31
F30
F29
F28
F27
F26
F25

F12
F11
F10
F9

F8
F7

Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Engine compartment fuse box
Fuse No

Rating
(amps)

Fuse
Colour

Circuit
Not used.

20A

Blue

Emissions system (petrol only).

Not used.

20A

Blue

Emissions system (petrol only).

40A

Green

30A

Pink

Anti-lock brake pump.
Power wash pump.
Not used.

50A

Red

Not used.

F10

Not used.

F11

Not used.

F12

50A

Red

Secondary air injection (petrol only).

F13

30A

Pink

Wipers.

Engine management.

F14

30A

Pink

F15

40A

Green

Screen heater.

Starter solenoid.

F16

40A

Green

Screen heater.

F17

80A

Black

Radiator fan. (V6 petrol only)

F18

60A

Yellow

Glow plugs (diesel only).

F19

Not used.

F20

15A

Blue

Horn.

F21

25A

Clear

Anti-lock brakes.

F22

15A

Blue

F23

Cigar lighter.
Not used.

F24

Tan

Adaptive cruise control.

F25

10A

Red

Anti-lock brakes.

F26

10A

Red

Engine management. JaguarDrive selector. Transmission
control module.

F27

Tan

Diesel - Engine management.

F27

Tan

Petrol - Secondary air injection.

245

Fuses
Fuse No

Rating
(amps)

Fuse
Colour

Circuit

F28

Not used.

F29

Not used.

F30

Not used.

F31

Not used.

F32

Not used.

F33

Not used.

F34

Not used.

F35

Tan

Air conditioning compressor clutch.

F36

15A

Blue

Engine management system (diesel only).

20A

Blue

Engine management system (V8 petrol only).

15A

Blue

Ignition system (petrol only).

F37
F38

Tan

Power steering.

F39

Tan

Headlamp levelling system.

F40

15A

Blue

Water pump (Supercharged vehicles only).

F41

Tan

Diesel - Emissions system.

10A

Red

Petrol - Engine management system.

30A

Green

10A

Red

F42

F43
F44
F45

Diesel - Engine management system. Ignition supply.
Petrol - Engine management system. Ignition supply. Radiator
fan.

Tan

Diesel - Fuel system.

10A

Red

Petrol - Engine management system. Emission control.

Tan

Engine management system (diesel only)

15A

Blue

Fuel injectors (petrol only).

100A

Blue

Radiator fan (diesel and V8 petrol only).

246

Fuses
Passenger compartment fuse box
Fuse No

Rating
(amps)

Fuse
Colour

Not used.

20A

Blue

Driver's seat adjustment.

20A

Blue

Driver's seat adjustment.

Not used.

Not used.
Not used.

20A

Blue

Circuit

Front passenger's seat adjustment.

20A

Blue

Front passenger's seat adjustment.

F10

20A

Blue

Left-hand rear door controls.

F11

20A

Blue

Right-hand rear door controls.

F12

F13

10A

Red

F14

Not used.
Steering column adjust.
Not used.

F15

Not used.

F16

Tan

Sunblind.

F17

Not used.

F18

Not used.

F19

F20

Tan

Remote control receiver.

F21

Tan

Foot brake.

F22

Tan

Electric parking brake.

F23

Tan

Driver's seat. Audio system. Auto headlamps. Upper centre
console switches.

F24

10A

Red

F25

20A

Yellow

F26

15A

Blue

F27

20A

Yellow

Not used.

Front passenger seat. Electric windows. Mirror adjustment.
Driver's heated/climate seat
Trailer power connector. Road pricing system.
Front passenger's heated/climate seat.

F28

15A

Blue

Auxiliary power socket.

F29

20A

Yellow

Keyless entry system.

F30

10A

Red

Air conditioning.

247

Fuses
Fuse No

Rating
(amps)

Fuse
Colour

F31

15A

Blue

Circuit
Sunroof.

F32

Tan

Jaguar Smart Key docking station.

F33

Tan

Diagnostic connector.

F34

Tan

Instrument pack.

F35

15A

Blue

Interior lamps.

F36

10A

Red

Suspension system.

Luggage compartment fuse box
Fuse No

Rating
(amps)

Fuse
Colour

Circuit

30A

Pink

Air blower.

30A

Pink

Electric parking brake.

Not used.

30A

Pink

Heated rear screen.

30A

Pink

Audio system (Premium audio only).

50A

Red

F10

40A

Green

RBD link.

F11

Not used.

F12

Not used.

Rear electronic differential (e-Diff).

F13

Not used.

F14

Tan

Telephone.

F15

10A

Red

F16

Not used.

F17

Not used.

F18

Not used.

F19

Not used.

F20

Not used.

F21

Not used.

F22

Not used.

TV. DVD. DAB radio.

248

Fuses
Fuse No

Rating
(amps)

Fuse
Colour

F23

Circuit
Not used.

F24

Not used.

F25

25A

Clear

Fuel pump.

F26

15A

Blue

Audio system. Portable audio interface.

F27

10A

Red

Navigation. Voice recognition. Touch-screen.

F28

15A

Blue

Trailer power connector. Road pricing system.

F29

15A

Blue

Trailer power connector.

F30

25A

Clear

Driver’s door module.

F31

25A

Clear

Front passenger door module.

F32

F33

Tan

Not used.
Tyre pressure monitoring system.

F34

F35

10A

Red

Supplementary restraint system.

Not used.

F36

10A

Red

Pedestrian protection system.

249

Emergency equipment
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

E94710

If the vehicle is stationary in an unsafe location,
or may cause a hazard to other road users,
switch on the hazard warning flashers. Press
the switch to turn the hazard warning lamps
on.
Note: Hazard warning lamps can be used when
the ignition is on or off.

WARNING TRIANGLE
The warning triangle is located in the luggage
compartment, attached to a luggage anchor
point.

FIRST AID KIT
If the vehicle is equipped with a first aid kit, it is
strapped to the side of the luggage
compartment.

FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Dependent on market, if the vehicle is equipped
with a fire extinguisher, it will either be located
in the luggage compartment, or mounted to the
front passenger seat.

250

Status after a collision
DRIVING AFTER A COLLISION

Resetting the fuel cut-off

Before starting or driving

WARNING
The fuel cut-off should never be reset
if you can smell fuel, or a leak can be
seen. Doing so can lead to a fire
which may cause personal injury or death.

WARNING
If the vehicle is involved in a collision
it should be checked by a Dealer/
Authorised repairer, or suitably
qualified personnel, before starting or driving.

The fuel system cut-off forms part of the Safety
and Restraint System (SRS) fitted to your
vehicle. Following an impact, and depending on
the severity, the fuel pump may be switched
off.

If the vehicle has been involved in an accident
it should be checked thoroughly before
attempting to start the engine or drive the
vehicle.

1. Switch the ignition off, and wait for 10
seconds.

Check for:• Fuel leaks.
• Fluid leaks.
• Battery damage.
• Damage to wiring.
• Damage to lights.
• Damage to steering, suspension, wheels
or tyres.
• Sharp or protruding bodywork.
• Operation of doors and locks.
• Condition and operation of seat belts and
SRS components.
• Activation of the pedestrian protection
system.
• Condition of child seats and their
mounting/attachment points.

2. Without pressing the brake pedal, press
the engine START/STOP button, to switch
the electrical circuits on. Wait for 30
seconds.
3. Check the vehicle thoroughly for fuel leaks.
If a leak is detected switch the ignition off
immediately.
• The vehicle must not be started if a leak
is present. Seek qualified advice, and
have the vehicle recovered.
4. If no leaks are detected, start the engine.

Note: This list is not exhaustive.

251

Status after a collision
INSPECTING SAFETY SYSTEM
COMPONENTS

When driving
When driving a vehicle which has been
involved in a collision use caution and pay extra
attention to the operation of the vehicle. If any
changes in vehicle operation after the collision
are noted when compared to it's operation
before the collision, do not continue to drive
the vehicle. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so, and have the vehicle recovered.

Following a collision the seat belt and
Supplementary Restraint System components
should be inspected for damage and/or
deformity. The inspection and any subsequent
repair work should only be carried out by a
Dealer/Authorised Repairer, or other suitably
qualified personnel.

Pay particular attention to changes in:• Steering.
• Braking.
• Unusual noises.
• Warning lights or messages displayed.
• Problems with electrical systems.

Components which require inspection
include:• Seat belt webbing and mechanisms.
• Seat belt pre-tensioners.
• Airbag covers and modules.
• Seat frames and mounting points.
• Child seats.
• Child seat anchor points.
• Pedestrian protection system.
Note: This list is not exhaustive.
In addition to the physical items checked, the
electronic control system and its associated
wiring should also be checked thoroughly. This
process will include a diagnostic check which
can only be carried out by a Dealer/Authorised
repairer or suitably qualified and equipped
persons.
WARNING
It is not recommended that the
vehicle be driven or used until all of
the occupant protection systems
have been checked.

252

Vehicle recovery
TOWING POINTS
Front and rear towing eyes and lashing points

E95301

The front and rear towing eyes are the only
recommended lashing points on the vehicle.

WARNINGS
The towing eyes at the front and rear
of the vehicle are designed for
on-road recovery only. If they are
used for any purpose other than those
indicated, it may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Never use the towing eyes to tow a
trailer, caravan etc. Doing so may
result in vehicle damage and serious
injury.

Attaching the front towing eye
The front towing eye is included in the tool kit,
located in the under-floor area of the luggage
compartment. See TOOL KIT (page 224).
1. Press the lower edge of the towing eye
cover in the front bumper to open, then
pull from the aperture, allowing the cover
to hang from its retaining strap.
2. Locate the towing eye through the bumper
and screw the towing eye
counter-clockwise into its fixing, until
secure.

CAUTION
Only use the lashing points indicated, or
over-tyre tie-downs, to secure the
vehicle to the transporter or trailer. Use of any
other position (e.g. lower control arms) may
result in damage to the vehicle.

253

Vehicle recovery
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

E95304

The recommended method for
recovery/transportation of the vehicle, is on a
transporter or trailer designed for that purpose.

2
1

Ensure that transportation is carried out by
suitably qualified persons, and that the vehicle
is secured correctly.
If the vehicle is being transported on a trailer or
vehicle flat-bed transporter, the parking brake
must be applied, the wheels are chocked and
the Emergency Park Release (EPR) operated,
to ensure that the transmission remains in N
and does not automatically select P.

Emergency Park Release (EPR)
When recovering your vehicle, it is essential
that the EPR is operated. EPR prevents the
transmission from automatically selecting P,
ensuring that the transmission remains in
neutral (N). EPR is operated by a lever located
behind a trim panel in the cubby box. Before
activating the EPR, select P, apply the parking
brake and turn the ignition off.

E96407

1. Open the twin cup holder lid.
2. Open the cubby box lid.
3. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, lever the
trim panel upwards (at the point indicated)
to release and remove.

254

Vehicle recovery
Cancelling EPR

5
E96409

1. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, release
the latch (arrowed).

E96408

4. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, turn the
locking device 90° counter-clockwise.

2. Return the EPR lever to its horizontal
position.

5. Apply the foot brake.

3. Turn the locking device 90° clockwise to
secure.

6. Use the strap to pull the EPR lever
upwards, until it latches in the vertical
position.

4. Replace the trim panel and close the cubby
box and twin cup holder lids.

When EPR is activated, the JaguarDrive
selector will remain in P, but the selector
indicator and the gear display in the message
centre will both flash N (if ignition is on), to
indicate that EPR is active.
When vehicle transportation has been
completed, EPR should be cancelled, to allow
Park to be re-engaged.

255

Vehicle recovery
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS

CAUTION
Leaving the ignition switched on for
extended periods will cause the battery
to drain.

WARNINGS
Ensure that the remote control
remains docked whilst the vehicle is
being towed. Removing the remote
control will engage the steering lock, which
will prevent the vehicle from steering
correctly.
If the engine cannot be run whilst the
vehicle is being towed, there will be
no power assistance for the steering
or brakes. This will result in greater effort
being required to steer or slow the vehicle, and
greatly increased stopping distances.

4. Apply the foot brake and release the
parking brake.
5. With the foot brake still applied, activate
the Emergency Park Release (EPR).
See TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
(page 254).
6. The vehicle can now be towed a maximum
of 0.8 km (0.5 miles) at a maximum speed
of 48 kmh (30 mph).
7. Upon arrival at the destination, ensure
wherever possible that the vehicle is
parked on firm level ground.

CAUTIONS
The vehicle should only be towed in a
forward direction with all four wheels on
the ground.
The vehicle should only be towed for a
maximum of 0.8 km (0.5 miles), at a
maximum speed of 48 km/h (30 mph). Towing
for a greater distance or at a higher speed, may
result in serious damage to the transmission.

8. Lower the Emergency Park Release (EPR)
lever, to cancel EPR and to re-engage P
(Park).
9. Apply the parking brake.
10. Switch off the ignition and remove the
Jaguar Smart Key.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when detaching
towing equipment. Vehicle movement
is possible which can result in serious
injuries.

Note: The recommended recovery method is
to raise all four wheels.

Towing procedure

11. Remove the towing attachment from the
towing eye.

1. The vehicle should be parked on firm level
ground, with the parking brake on, and the
gear selector in P (Park).
2. Secure the towing attachment from the
recovery vehicle to the front towing eye.
See TOWING POINTS (page 253).
3. Dock the Jaguar Smart Key and switch on
the ignition. See GENERAL INFORMATION
(page 132).

256

Vehicle identification
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE

TRANSMISSION NUMBER
The transmission number is located on a label
attached to the transmission casing.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN)

E95305

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and
recommended maximum vehicle weights, are
shown on a plate adhered to the hinge side of
the left-hand (right-hand in China) front door.
VIN should match the VIN recorded in the
Service Portfolio, and the VIN visible through
the windscreen.

E95306

As a deterrent to thieves, and to assist the
Police, the VIN is stamped on a plate which is
visible through the lowest part of the left side of
the windscreen.

ENGINE NUMBER
Note: To access the number, it may be
necessary to remove the engine covers. For
further assistance, contact your Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.

Note: If you need to communicate with a
Dealer/Authorised repairer, you may be asked
to quote the VIN number.

V6 Petrol engines

VEHICLE BUILD DATE PLATE

The number is located on the lower left-hand
side of the cylinder block, near the bedplate.

V8 Petrol engines

This is the calendar month and year in which
the body and power train assemblies were
conjoined and the vehicle was driven from the
production line.

The number is located on the front of the
right-hand cam cover.

The vehicle built date is shown on the VIN
plate.

Diesel engines
The number is located on a metal label attached
to the top of the left-hand camshaft cover

257

Technical specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Data

V6 Diesel

Number of cylinders

Displacement

2998 cc

Compression ratio

16:1

Data

V6 Petrol

Number of cylinders

Displacement

2967 cc

Compression ratio

10.5:1

Data

V8 Normally Aspirated Petrol

Number of cylinders

Displacement

5000 cc

Compression ratio

11.5:1

Data

V8 Supercharged Petrol

Number of cylinders

Displacement

5000 cc

Compression ratio

9.5:1

258

Technical specifications
WEIGHTS
Variant

Vehicle weight
from

Front axle weight Rear axle weight
from
from

Max. luggage
compartment
load¹

V6 Diesel

1820 kg
4012 lbs

1016 kg
2240 lbs

804 kg
1772 lbs

35 kg
77 lbs

V6 Petrol

1679 kg
3702 lbs

878 kg
1936 lbs

801 kg
1766 lbs

35 kg
77 lbs

V8 Normally
Aspirated Petrol

1780 kg
3924 lbs

961 kg
2119 lbs

819 kg
1806 lbs

35 kg
77 lbs

V8 Supercharged
Petrol

1891 kg
4169 lbs

1022 kg
2253 lbs

869 kg
1916 lbs

35 kg
77 lbs

Note: ¹The maximum permitted luggage compartment load can be exceeded, provided the
requirements regarding the maximum permissible axle weights and tyre pressures are followed.
Variant

Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW)¹

Maximum front
axle load²

Maximum rear
axle load²

Gross Train
Weight³

V6 Diesel

2360 kg
5203 lbs

1200 kg
2646 lbs

1215 kg
2679 lbs

4210 kg
9281 lbs

V6 Petrol

2215 kg
4883 lbs

1090 kg
2403 lbs

1180 kg
2601 lbs

4065 kg
8962 lbs

V8 Normally
Aspirated Petrol

2285 kg
5038 lbs

1130 kg
2491 lbs

1200 kg
2646 lbs

Not
Applicable

V8 Supercharged
Petrol

2345 kg
5170 lbs

1165 kg
2568 lbs

1200 kg
2646 lbs

Not
Applicable

¹ The maximum permissible weight of the vehicle including passengers and load.
² The front and rear axle maximum loads can not be reached simultaneously as this will exceed the
GVW limit.
³ The maximum permissible weight of the vehicle and braked trailer including their respective loads.

259

Technical specifications
DIMENSIONS
1

5
3
2

6
7
E95307

Item

Description

mm/inches

Width

2053/80.5

Width with mirrors folded

1877/74.0

Track - front

1559/61.4

Maximum height

1460/57.5

Track - rear¹

1571-1605/61.9-63.2

Wheelbase

2909/114.5

Length excluding number plate plinth

4961/195.3

Turning circle (kerb to kerb)

11.5 m/37.7 ft.

¹ Narrowest dimension applies to 20 inch wheels only.

260

Technical specifications
Wheel alignment data (China only)
Wheel alignment - front

+0.25°

Wheel alignment - rear

+0.13°

Camber - front

-0.30°

Camber - rear

-0.69°

Castor - front

6.61°

Castor - rear

non-adjustable

Brake pedal travel (China only)
The brake pedal travel is set at the factory and
is non-adjustable.

261

Type approvals
DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY

E97083

262

Type approvals

E97084

263

Type approvals

E97085

264

Type approvals

E97086

265

Type approvals

E97087

266

Type approvals

JAG1291

267

Audio introduction
RADIO RECEPTION

JAG1328

Some interference is to be expected from time
to time during a journey. Occasionally, it may
be necessary to retune the audio unit, to offset
the effects of moving from one transmitter area
to another.
While Radio Data System (RDS) automatic
retuning helps to reduce the effects of signal
changes, some manual retuning may still be
required (especially for local stations) in areas
of weak reception.
FM Signals travel in a straight line, so large
obstacles, such as tall buildings, can shield the
vehicle from the signal, causing distortion or
loss of reception (known as dead spots).
Distortion can also occur if FM signals received
directly from the transmitter, mix with signals
deflected by obstructions such as mountains,
hills and tall buildings. This is known as
multi-path distortion.
Note: Although distortion, interference and
lack of signal clarity are sometimes attributed
to a fault in the radio, this is rarely the case.

268

Audio unit overview
AUDIO UNIT OVERVIEW

WARNING
Sustained exposure to high sound
levels can damage your hearing.

The Jaguar infotainment system contains
AM/FM radio, compact disc player and portable
audio interface. Digital (DAB) radio, six-disc CD
player and TV are optional.

Audio controls
TP

Audio/TV

FM2

PTY

89 0

REG

3CH

BBC R2

AM/FM

Settings

DAB radio

Autostore

Radio 1

BBC R2

Portable audio

BBC R4

BBC LDN BBC W&M

Mercia

Galaxy

BBC R3

106 2

12 : 26 pm

E93935

7
6
5

3
4
5.

The audio unit is controlled by the
touch-screen (1) and console buttons (2–8).
1. Touch-screen: See TOUCH-SCREEN
(page 109).
2. LOAD: Press to load one or more CDs.
See LOADING COMPACT DISCS
(page 292).

Audio system on/off and volume control:
• Press to switch the system on/off.
• Rotate to increase or decrease volume
level. Any volume adjustment made in
any mode will be memorised for that
mode.

6. SOURCE: Press repeatedly to scroll
through all audio sources: FM1, FM2, AM,
DAB1, DAB2, DAB3, CD, Portable audio
and TV.

3. Seek up: Short press to seek next station
frequency up or next CD track.
4. Settings button:
• Short press to display the audio Settings
menu.
• Long press (two seconds) to display the
Vol presets settings menu.

7. Seek down: Short press to seek next
station frequency down or previous CD
track.
8. Eject: Press to eject CD. See EJECTING
COMPACT DISCS (page 294).
9. CD load and eject slot.

269

Audio unit overview
Sound system overview

CAUTIONS
Care must be taken to avoid spilling or
splashing drinks onto the audio unit
controls, speakers or touch-screen. In the
event of such an occurrence, contact your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
The audio unit may be damaged if
unsuitable items, such as coins or credit
cards, are inserted into the CD load slot.

There are three versions of the sound system:
• The standard Jaguar sound system
comprises a 140W system with AM/FM
radio featuring EON, RDS, PTY, TA and
in-dash CD player with automatic volume
control, MP3 compatibility (six-disc
system only) and 8 speakers
• The Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System
system also includes a remote amplifier,
upgraded speakers plus an additional
subwoofer mounted in the rear of the
vehicle.
• The Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround
Sound System has been developed in
conjunction with Bowers & Wilkins™ and
incorporates upgraded kevlar speakers,
additional mid range speakers mounted in
the front doors, an additional centre
speaker mounted in the fascia and
additional surround sound speakers to
support Dolby Prologic II Surround
Sound™.

Steering wheel controls

E94043

1. Rotate up or down to increase or decrease
volume.
2. Rotate up or down and release repeatedly
to scroll through preset radio stations or
CD tracks. Rotate up and hold for two
seconds to select next strong radio station
or next loaded CD (if a six-disc system is
fitted).
3. SOURCE: Press repeatedly to scroll
through all audio sources.
4. Press to mute audio unit. This button is
also used to dial, answer or end calls in
phone mode and to start a Voice session.

270

Audio unit operation
ON/OFF CONTROL
External

Home

The audio system can be used with the vehicle
ignition on or off, but will switch off
automatically when the ignition is switched off.
To operate the audio system when the ignition
has been switched off, press the On/off volume
control.

Audio/TV
Climate

Left

20 .5 C

Phone

Right

DAB radio

17 .5 C

BBC 5Live Xtra

DAB1

BBC National DAB

Navigation

TA FM DAB i Subch.

PL II

Vehicle

The audio system can be switched on in one of
two ways:

12 : 26 pm

Valet

E94046

The touch-screen displays the current audio
settings. The information displayed will depend
on the mode selected, e.g. AM/FM radio.

VOLUME CONTROL

E94044

With the vehicle ignition on or off, press the
on/off control on the console, or;
External

Home

WARNING
Sustained exposure to high sound
levels can damage your hearing.

The volume of the audio output can be adjusted
in one of two ways:

Audio/TV
Climate
Phone

20 .5 C

Right

17 .5 C

AUDIO OFF

Navigation
Vehicle
12 : 26 pm

Valet
E94085

E94045

With the vehicle ignition on and the
touch-screen active, select Audio/TV from the
Home menu.

Rotate the audio on/off and volume control on
the audio console, or;

E94086

Rotate the volume control on the steering
wheel.

271

Audio unit operation
Automatic volume control (AVC)
Home

External

This maintains radio volume at a level sufficient
to overcome road noise, as vehicle speed
increases or decreases.

Audio
Climate

Left

Right
Audio

On the Vol presets menu, select Low, Medium
or High levels for AVC.

Phone
Navigation

TP TA PTY

The default AVC setting is Medium.

Vehicle
Valet

12 : 26 pm

AUDIO CONTROL

E94087

Sound settings

While the volume is being adjusted, the volume
level is displayed on the touch-screen display
using a graduated bar.

Audio/TV

FM2

PTY

89.0

REG

AM/FM

Volume settings

Ve h i c l e

Aut

Radio 1

BBC R2

Portable audio

BBC R4

BBC LDN BBC W&M

Display set

Settings

DAB radio

A number of functions have preset volume
levels. You can adjust these settings on the Vol
presets menu.

3CH

BBC R2

Mercia

Galaxy

BBC R3

106.2

12 : 26 pm
E94055

Parking aid

Preferences

Voice

Button audio

Navigation

Vol. presets

On the main AM/FM screen, select Settings.
Select Sound to display the sound quality
settings menu.

Phone

AVC

Low

Medium

Note: The list of settings available depends on
the sound system fitted to the vehicle.
See AUDIO UNIT OVERVIEW (page 269).

High

12 : 26 pm
E94052

1. From the touch-screen Home menu, select
Vehicle.
2. Select Syst. settings and then select Vol.
presets.
3. Use the + and – icons to adjust the volume
levels for the options available.

272

Audio unit operation
Standard and Premium sound systems
Audio
Audio

Sound
Options
PTY

Settings

Sound

Bass

Bal/Fade

Treble

Options

Balance

Fade

PTY

Sub

12 : 26 pm
E94274

12 : 26 pm
E94056

Select the four directional icons as required to
adjust the balance and fade.

To increase or decrease Bass and Treble levels,
select + or –.

Audio/TV

Balance and Fade levels can be optimised for a
selected seating position, by selecting L (left)
or R (right) adjustment and R (rear) or F (front)
adjustment.

Settings

Sound
Bal/Fade
Options

On vehicles fitted with a Subwoofer, to adjust
the Subwoofer volume level up or down, select
Sub + or –.

PTY

Stereo

3 Ch.

DPLII

Bass
Treble
Sub

12 : 26 pm

Bowers & Wilkins™ surround sound
system

Audio/TV

Bass, Treble and Sub are adjusted as for the
Premium system.

Settings

Sound
Bal/Fade

Select Stereo, 3Ch (3-channel surround
sound) or DPLII (Dolby Prologic II surround
sound™), to choose the sound mode you
require. Your selection will be displayed in the
information panel at the top of the display.

Options

Centre
Surround

PTY

12 : 26 pm

Note: DPLII is not available for AM/FM radio
broadcasts.

E94671

Note: The settings available for adjustment
depend on the sound mode currently selected
(Stereo, 3Ch or DPLII).

Select DPLII and on the Settings menu, you
can scroll down to the Centre and Surround
settings. Select the + or – buttons to adjust
these settings as required.

From the Options menu, select Bal/Fade.

273

Audio unit operation
WAVEBAND BUTTON

FM1

FM2
P

Audio/TV

AUTOSTORE CONTROL

FM2

PTY

89.0

The Autostore function finds and stores up to
nine strong stations on a selected waveband to
presets 1 to 9. This is a useful way to locate and
store stations with a good signal when
travelling in an unfamiliar area.

AM
AF

REG

3CH

BBC R2

AM/FM

Settings

Audio/TV

DAB radio

FM2

PTY

89.0

REG

AM/FM
CD

Radio 1

BBC R2

Portable audio

BBC R4

BBC LDN BBC W&M

Settings

BBC R3

DAB radio

3CH

BBC R2

Autostore

Mercia

Galaxy

Autostore

Radio 1

BBC R

Portable audio

BBC R4

BBC LDN BBC W&M

C R3

106.2

12 : 26 pm

E94049

Mercia

Galaxy

106.2

12 : 26 pm

Select AM/FM to cycle the radio through FM1,
FM2 and AM (both Medium and Long
wavebands).

E94050

If no preset stations are currently stored, select
Autostore to start the process for storing
presets.

Your waveband selection will be shown in the
display panel.

If preset stations are already stored, a short
touch will recall those stations and tune to the
previous station, whereas a long touch of
Autostore will start a new autostore process.

Note: If a CD is being played, select AM/FM to
start radio operation.

The radio will be briefly muted while it searches
the selected waveband (AM or FM) for up to
nine strong stations.
When the process is complete, the radio will
default to preset 1 and audio volume will be
restored.
If stations cannot be located for all the preset
positions, those that are found will be allocated
positions commencing with number 1, leaving
the remainder empty.
Note: The display will show — for empty
presets.
When stations have been stored, select
Autostore to switch between the
automatically-stored stations and the
manually-stored stations.

274

Audio unit operation
STATION PRESET BUTTONS

Long touch (two seconds): In AM or FM mode,
for as long as the seek button is being touched,
the frequencies will be scanned either up or
down. If you then release the button, the
touch-screen displays Manual for a short time
and repeated short touches of the button will
manually change the frequency.

Tuning stations
The seek buttons on the audio console and on
the touch-screen perform the same function.

Seek

Storing stations as presets
TP

Audio/TV

PTY

FM2

REG

89.0

On each waveband, nine stations can be
memorised using the touch-screen keypad.

3CH

Seek

AM/FM

Settings
TP

DAB radio

Autostore

adio 1

Portable audio

BBC R4

Mercia

BBC R2

Audio/TV

106.2

E94063

Short touch: In AM or FM mode, selecting and
releasing the seek buttons will activate radio
tuning through the frequency range, up or
down, to the next available strong station.

Audio/TV

FM2

89.0

REG

Portable audio
TV

BBC R4

dio 1

Mercia

BBC R2

Gala y

106.2

Rotate and release the steering wheel selector
control repeatedly to cycle through all the
preset stations.

BBC LDN BBC W&M
Galaxy

BBC LDN BBC W&M

Briefly touch the preset key to recall the stored
station.

3CH

Autostore

BBC R4

Mercia

BBC R3

After tuning to a station, touch and hold (two
seconds) the selected preset number. An
audible signal indicates that the station is
stored. If RDS information is broadcast, the
station name will replace the preset number.

Settings

DAB radio
CD

Portable audio

C R2

Fox FM

Manual

AM/FM

Autostore
Radio

E94051

Manual
AF

3CH

12 : 26 pm

The touch-screen displays Seek on the upper
display until a station has been found, and will
then display the station name during broadcast
(if available).

PTY

REG

BBC R2
Settings

DAB radio

BBC LDN BBC W&M

12 : 26 pm

PTY

89.0

AM/FM

Galaxy

FM2

106.2

12 : 26 pm
E94064

275

Audio unit operation
TRAFFIC INFORMATION CONTROL

Select Options and then switch the Traffic
option On or Off.

With the Traffic Announcements (TA) option
on, local traffic announcements will interrupt
normal broadcasts or playback.

Note: You can switch the Traffic option on and
off on the Settings menu for each individual
source.

If audio volume is set at a minimum, then the
volume will increase for the announcement,
returning to the previous volume setting
afterwards.

Skipping traffic announcements
Home

When broadcasting an announcement, a traffic
announcement pop-up is displayed.

FM2

PTY

89.0

REG

Navigation

BBC R2

Portable audio

BBC R4

BBC LDN BBC W&M

Mercia

Galaxy

BBC R3

PTY

Off

REG Off

EON Off

Dist.

FM text Off

Valet

Note: TA relies on the broadcast information
from local radio stations and may be better in
some locations than others.

Settings

Traffic

Skip

Selecting anywhere on the pop-up screen will
cancel the pop-up, but the traffic
announcement will continue to be broadcast.

To change this setting, on the AM/FM screen,
select Settings.

Options

FM1

Select Traffic off to switch TA off completely
(the TA indicator will clear from the display).

106.2

12 : 26 pm

Audio/TV

95.6
Traffic off

Note: Selecting Skip will not switch off TA
permanently and it will remain ready for the
next interrupt.

E94055

Sound

Traffic announcements (TA) can be skipped
during broadcast by selecting Skip, which will
cancel the pop-up and the announcement. You
will be returned to your selected station.

Settings

Radio 1

Traffic announcement
BBC

E94059

Vehicle
12 : 26 pm

3CH

AM/FM

Phone

BBC R2

DAB radio

Climate

When enabled, TA will appear at the top of the
touch-screen. The audio unit then checks that
the station has Radio Data System (RDS)
Traffic Programme (TP). If it is not available on
the current station, the display will not show
TP. If TP is not displayed with TA after 45
seconds have elapsed, then the audio unit will
search for a new TP station.
Audio/TV

External

Audio

Local

12 : 26 pm
E94053

276

Audio unit menus
RADIO DATA SYSTEM (RDS)

Regionalisation (REG)
As you drive into different radio reception
areas, RDS automatically retunes the radio to
the strongest signal. The Regional (REG)
option stops the system from tuning to another
local radio station with a stronger signal.

Options menu overview
Your radio is equipped with Radio Data System
(RDS), which enables the audio unit to receive
additional information with normal FM radio
signals.

From the Options menu, you can switch the
REG option On or Off. With REG on, your
selected local radio station will remain tuned
even if reception levels drop.

When tuned to certain stations on the FM
waveband, the radio decodes signals
transmitted to provide the functions listed
below (dependent upon the service available
from the broadcasters).

Alternative frequency (AF)
Some radio stations broadcast on different
frequencies in different parts of the country. If
the selected station signal weakens, the radio
will automatically re-tune to a stronger
alternative frequency (AF), if one is available
(this feature is particularly useful on long
journeys where the vehicle travels through
different transmitter areas serving the same
radio station).

Note: Not all FM radio stations broadcast RDS
information. If you are currently tuned to a
non-RDS station, then RDS features will be
unavailable.
Audio/TV

Sound
Options
PTY

Settings

Traffic
AF

Off

REG Off

EON Off

Dist.

FM text Off

From the Options menu, you can switch AF On
or Off.

Local

Enhanced other networks (EON)

12 : 26 pm

The Enhanced Other Network (EON) option will
tune to any radio station on the same station
network as the one that you are listening to, if
the signal becomes weak.

E94053

Select Settings to display the Settings menu,
then select Options to display the list of RDS
options.

Either local (Local) or distant (Dist.) networks
can be enabled on the Options menu, or the
option can be switched Off.

Traffic
RDS provides local travel information (where
broadcast). See TRAFFIC INFORMATION
CONTROL (page 276).

277

Audio unit menus
FM text

Select Settings to display the Settings menu.
Select PTY to display a list of available PTY
categories.

Text sent by station

Selecting PTY categories
TP

Audio/TV

FM2

89.

REG

3CH

BBC R2

Audio

AM/FM

Text sent by station

Settings

Sound
DAB radio

News

utostore

Radio 1

Portable audio

BBC R4

BBC R2

Options

Current affairs

Clear all

PTY

Information

PTY
search

BBC R3

BBC LDN BBC W&M

Sport

Mercia

Galaxy

106.2

Education

12 : 26 pm
12 : 26 pm
E94057
E94088

FM text displays any text messages sent out by
the current station.

Select the arrow icon to scroll through the list
of available PTY categories.

Select the arrow icon to display a pop-up
screen showing the complete text message.
TP

Audio/TV

FM2

AM/FM

PTY

89.0

REG

Select a PTY category to select it in the list;
touch the category again to clear the selection.
If you want to deselect all PTY categories,
select Clear all.

3CH

BBC R2

FM text

Note: If no PTY categories are selected, then
the text PTY will disappear from the top of the
touch-screen display.

DAB radio
CD

The latest news headlines from BBC Radio 2.

While tuned to a station, touch the required
PTY category (or categories), then touch the
previous screen arrow. The audio unit will now
wait for RDS information to indicate that a
station has changed its programme type.

Portable audio
TV
12 : 26 pm

Valet

E94058

Select Cancel to remove the pop-up screen.

If the current station is already in the selected
PTY category and reception is lost, then the
radio will attempt to find another station with
the correct PTY category.

PRIORITY PROGRAMME TYPE (PTY)
PTY overview

Note: PTY is active in FM radio, CD, TV and
Portable audio modes only.

The Programme Type (PTY) feature has two
functions:
• To set a desired PTY category for the
current station.
• To search for a station in a selected PTY
category and then retune to that station (if
found).

278

Audio unit menus
PTY alarm (where broadcast)
Audio

Sound
Options
PTY

Settings
National music
Oldies music

Clear all

Folk music

PTY
search

Documentary
Alarm

12 : 26 pm
E94062

The Alarm option in the PTY menu will alert
you to a crisis of national or international
importance. Any radio broadcast or other audio
playback will be interrupted. When such a
broadcast is made, the word ALARM will be
displayed on the touch-screen. The default
setting is On.

PTY search
If you touch a PTY category and then select
PTY search, the audio unit will search for and
then retune to an available station belonging
that category. If no station is found in that
category, then NO PTY is displayed and you
will return to the current station.
While PTY is displayed (for ten seconds
following a search), a search of PTY categories
can be performed using the Seek buttons.

279

Digital audio broadcasting
GENERAL INFORMATION
Digital radio reception

E94094

DAB radio is very different from normal AM/FM
radio in both operation and sound quality. The
DAB network is designed to provide near CD
quality from radio broadcasts. In most
locations DAB signals are available without
hiss, crackle, pop or interference, and no
fading or overlap.

Digital radio is transmitted from regional
transmitters. Some local channels are not
available outside the range of their
transmitters. If you want to listen to local
channels as you move around the country, use
the auto-tune function (AUTO) to build new
channel lists. For more information on the
auto-tune function. See CHANNEL
AUTOMATIC TUNING (page 284).

DAB radio can significantly increase the
number of radio channels/stations available.
The DAB signals are transmitted to most major
cities, towns and motorway networks.

Note: If any auxiliary electrical equipment is
connected to the vehicle, then this may reduce
the DAB radio sound quality.

Radio signals travel in a straight line so large
obstacles, such as tall buildings, can shield the
vehicle from the signal, causing temporary loss
of reception (known as dead spots).

280

Digital audio broadcasting
Ensembles

When scrolling through the channels the
sub-channels will appear in order, and can be
selected in the same way as the channels. If
reception is lost when the vehicle is in motion
select AUTO to build a new list of ensembles.

Unlike AM/FM radio, DAB transmits several
channels/stations on a single frequency. A
group of channels is known as an ensemble.
Ensembles may consist of six or more
channels (national or local). Some may have
sub-channels offering several listening
options.
Ensemble

Channel/station

First ensemble

Channel/station 1

The table below provides an example of the
ensembles, channels and sub-channels
available in one location.
Sub-channel 1

Channel/station 2

Sub-channel 2

Sub-channel

Channel/station 3
Channel/station 4
Channel/station 5
Channel/station 6

Sub-channel

Channel/station 7
Channel/station 8
Channel/station 9
Second ensemble

Channel/station 1
Channel/station 2
Channel/station 3
Channel/station 4
Channel/station 5
Channel/station 6

Third ensemble

Channel/station 1
Channel/station 2
Channel/station 3
Channel/station 4

281

Sub-channel

Digital audio broadcasting
AUDIO CONTROLS
TA-FM

Audio/TV

AM/FM

DAB1

DAB-i

L nk

DPL I

BBC Radio2

BBC National DAB

Settings

DAB radio

DAB search

Radio 1

BBC R2

Viking

Portab e audio

Trent

Century

BBC Leic

TV
12 : 26 pm

E94503

6
5
4

2
3

Steering wheel controls

1. Touch-screen. See TOUCH-SCREEN
(page 109).

2. Seek up.
• Short press to find the next channel.
• Long press (two seconds) to find next
available ensemble.
3. Settings:
• Short press to display the audio Settings
menu.
• Long press (two seconds) to display the
Vol presets menu.

E94043

4. On/off and volume control.

1. Rotate up or down to increase or decrease
the audio volume.

5. SOURCE button.
• Press repeatedly to select the next
available audio source FM1, FM2, AM,
DAB1, DAB2, DAB3, iPod, USB,
Auxiliary, TV.

2. Rotate and release to scroll through
channels. Rotate and hold for two seconds
to select next available digital ensemble.
3. Press the SOURCE button repeatedly to
scroll through the available audio sources
FM1, FM2, AM, DAB1, DAB2, DAB3, CD,
iPod, USB, Auxiliary input and TV.

6. Seek down.
• Short press to find previous channel.
• Long press (two seconds) to find
previous available ensemble.

4. Press to mute the audio unit.

282

Digital audio broadcasting
DISPLAY OPTIONS

Note: The display can also show PTY or
Ensemble information if you have selected one
of these options under DAB text on the Settings
menu. See SETTINGS (page 288).

Touch-screen information panel

2
TA-FM

DAB1

7 6 3
DAB-i

Link

DPLII

DAB radio text
Many digital channels transmit additional text
(DLS, Dynamic Label Segment) to accompany
a broadcast. For safety reasons, this text does
not scroll across the screen.

BBC Radio2

BBC National DAB

TA FM

Audio/TV

AM/FM

DAB1

DAB i

L nk

Settings

BBC National DAB

DAB radio
TA FM

Audio/TV

AM/FM

DAB1

DAB i

Link

DAB radio

Settings
DAB search

Radio 1

BBC R2

Viking

Portable audio

Trent

Century

BBC Leic

DAB search

DPLII

BBC Radio2

BBC National DAB

DPLII

BBC Radio2

Radio 1

BBC R2

Vikin

Portable audio

Trent

BBC

ury

DAB radio text

12 : 26 pm
E94180

The first 16 characters of text are displayed
(1). If you want to read the full text, you must
select the additional text button (2).

DAB radio text

12 : 26 pm
E94179

TA FM

1. DAB band indicator.

Audio/TV

2. TA-FM is displayed if the FM traffic option
is enabled. See SETTINGS (page 288).

AM/FM

DAB1

DAB i

Link

DPLII

BBC Radio2

DAB radio text

DAB radio

3. The arrow icon indicates that subchannels
are available under the current channel.
SubCh is displayed if a subchannel is
tuned to.

The latest news headlines from BBC Radio 2.

Portable audio
TV
12 : 26 pm

4. Link is displayed if the Link DAB option is
enabled. See SETTINGS (page 288).

E94181

The DAB radio text pop-up screen displays all
128 characters of text. This text may change
periodically, if the broadcaster chooses to do
so.

5. Dolby Prologic II surround sound
indicator.
6. Channel name.
7. DAB-i indicates that DAB Announcements
are enabled.

To remove the pop-up screen, briefly touch it.

283

Digital audio broadcasting
CHANNEL AUTOMATIC TUNING

To update the list of local channels when you
move to a different region, select Auto-tune
again. You can also add local channels as
presets to minimise the need for auto-tuning as
you move location.

Note: When you first use the DAB radio, you
will be unable to listen to any digital broadcasts
until you have completed the auto-tune
process.
TA FM

Audio/TV

AM/FM

DAB1

DAB i

L nk

Settings

BBC National DAB

DAB radio
CD
Portable audio

CHANNEL OPTIONS

DPL I

BBC Radio2

DAB search
Radio 1

BBC R2

Vik

Trent

Century

BBC Leic
E94185

DAB radio text

To receive digital broadcasts, short press the
SOURCE button repeatedly to toggle between
the available sources, or briefly touch the DAB
Radio button on the touch-screen. See AUDIO
CONTROLS (page 282).

12 : 26 pm

TA FM

Audio/TV

Ensemble list
Channel list
Subchannel list
PTY
Channel data

DAB1

DAB i

L nk

DPL I

BBC Radio2

BBC National DAB

Auto-tune

Choose DAB1, DAB2 or DAB3 to receive digital
radio broadcasts. The three DAB sources
enable you to preset up to 18 different
channels. See PRESET BUTTONS (page 287).

Digital1 Network
EMAP Leeds
MXR
Now Middlesbrough

The channel that was last played on your
chosen digital source will be selected for
playback automatically.

12 : 26 pm
E94182

Note: If this is the first time you have used DAB
radio, you must first build a list of available
channels using the auto-tune function.
See CHANNEL AUTOMATIC TUNING
(page 284).

In DAB mode, select DAB search, then select
Auto-tune to start automatic tuning and build a
list of all the digital ensembles and channels
that are available in your region.
While automatic tuning is running, the
message Auto-tuning will be displayed on the
touch-screen, along with a percentage
complete. When tuning is complete, the first
channel found will start playing.

Digital radio channels are organised into
groups called ensembles. Some channels may
sometimes provide one or more subchannels.

Note: The auto-tune process can take longer
than one minute to complete.

284

Digital audio broadcasting
TA-FM

Link

Note: If the next or previous channel is in a
different ensemble, then there will be a pause
before the channel is located. The message
Searching... is displayed on the screen.

DPLII

DAB1 No reception
TA FM

Audio/TV

DAB1

L nk

DPLII

On the touch-screen, if channels have been
preset, select one of the six preset buttons to
start playing that channel. If no channel has
been preset, the button will display ---.

No reception

AM/FM

Settings

DAB radio

DAB search

Radio 1

BBC R2

Viking

Portable audio

Trent

Century

BBC Leic

Finding a subchannel
TA FM

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

AM/FM

E94186

DAB rad

If the digital radio signal is lost or the system
takes time to tune in to a channel, then the
display screen will show the message No
reception.

TA FM

AM/FM

Link

DAB radio
CD
Portable audio
TV

Trent

BBC R
Century

Settings

DAB search

Radi

Portable audio

Trent

Century

Viking
BBC Leic

If subchannels are available under the current
channel, the subchannel arrow icon (1) is
displayed at the top of the touch-screen and the
Subchannel button is enabled.
To access the subchannels, select the
downward-pointing arrow (2). Select the seek
buttons (3) to find the next/previous
subchannel.

DPLII

To return to the channel tier, select the
upward-pointing arrow.

Settings

Note: When you select and play a subchannel,
the subchannel icon is replaced by SubCh.

DAB search
io 1

DAB

12 : 26 pm

BBC Radio2

BBC National DAB

DPLII

E94188

Finding a channel
DAB1

BBC N

Link

Radio2

The problem may be caused by a temporary
problem, such as buildings or trees blocking
the signal, or it might be a problem with the
broadcast service operator. Try tuning to an
alternative channel and return later to see if the
problem has been resolved. If you are unable to
tune to any other channels, switch off the audio
unit and then try again.

Audio/TV

DAB

DAB1

king

Note: You cannot store a subchannel as a
preset.

BBC Leic

DAB radio text

Note: If you select the preset button for the
channel containing the subchannel you are
currently playing, you will be returned to the
channel.

12 : 26 pm
E94187

Briefly touch one of the channel seek buttons to
select the next available digital channel. The
seek up button selects the next channel, the
seek down button selects the previous channel.

285

Digital audio broadcasting
Finding an ensemble

Subchannel list

Touch and hold (two seconds) the seek
buttons to find the next or previous ensemble.
See AUDIO CONTROLS (page 282).

Select Subchannel list to display a list of any
subchannels available for the currently tuned
channel. If no subchannels are currently
available, then the Subchannel list option is
disabled. If the maximum five subchannels are
available, then use the arrows to scroll through
the list.

After a few seconds pause, the first channel in
the ensemble found will start playing.

DAB search
The DAB search menu enables you to view lists
of available ensembles, channels and
subchannels. You can also perform searches
based on programme type (PTY).

PTY
Channels are categorised by the broadcaster as
belonging to a programme type (PTY)
category. You can display a list of channels
organised according to their PTY category.

Select DAB search to display the DAB search
menu.

Select PTY to display a list of PTY categories
that contain channels. Select a PTY category to
display a list of channels in that category.
Select a channel name to play that channel.

Auto-tune
Select Auto-tune to build a list of available
ensembles and channels for your current
location. See CHANNEL AUTOMATIC TUNING
(page 284).

Briefly touch one of the seek buttons
repeatedly during the first ten seconds of
broadcast, to cycle through all channels
contained in the PTY category that you chose.
Stop touching the seek button when you have
found a channel you want.

Ensemble list
TA FM

Audio/TV

Ensemble list
Channel list
Subchannel list
PTY
Channel data

DAB1

DAB i

Link

DPLII

BBC Radio2

BBC National DAB

Auto-tune

Channel data

Digital1 Network

Select Channel data to display technical data
relating to the currently-tuned channel. The
data listed is as follows: Channel name,
Ensemble name, Bit rate (kbits/s) and Audio
level.

EMAP Leeds
MXR
Now Middlesbrough

12 : 26 pm
E94189

Select Ensemble list to display a list of all
available ensembles. Select an ensemble name
in the list to display a list of channels in that
ensemble. Select a channel name to tune that
channel.

Channel list
Select Channel list to display a complete list of
all channels in all available ensembles. Select a
channel name to tune that channel.

286

Digital audio broadcasting
PRESET BUTTONS

Recalling a preset channel

Storing channels as presets
TA FM

Audio/TV

DAB1

DAB i

Link

TA FM

Audio/TV

AM/FM

DPLII

DAB1

DAB i

L nk

BBC National DAB

DAB search

Settings

BBC National DAB

DAB radio

Radio 1

Portable audio

Trent

BBC R2

Viking

DAB search

Radio 1

Portable audio

Trent

BBC R2
ury

ntury

BBC Leic

Viking

TV
TV

Settings

BBC Radio2

DAB radio
AM/FM

DPLII

BBC Radio1

DAB radio text

BBC Leic

12 : 26 pm
DAB radio text
E94184

12 : 26 pm

Make sure that you have selected the
appropriate digital source (DAB1, DAB2 or
DAB3) and then briefly touch the preset button
you require. The channel you have selected will
start to play automatically.

E94183

Store up to eighteen digital channels (six each
on DAB1, DAB2 and DAB3) using the
numbered preset keys. Follow the procedure
below to store channels as presets.
1. Search for and start playing the channel
you want to preset.

Home
Audio

Audio/TV

2. Touch and hold (two seconds) the preset
button on which you want to store the
current channel. Audio output is muted for
a further two seconds while the channel is
stored and a confirmation message is
displayed.

Climate

Seek
No channel found

Phone

DAB 1
Preset 3

Navigation

TA-FM DAB-i

Vehicle
12 : 26 pm

Valet

E94487

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each channel that
you want to store as a preset.

Note: If you try to recall a channel that has
previously been stored as a preset, but is now
unavailable or invalid, the message No channel
found is displayed. You must choose another
channel.

Note: You cannot store a subchannel as a
preset. If you try to store a subchannel, you will
store the channel to which the subchannel
belongs.

287

Digital audio broadcasting
SETTINGS
Audio/TV
TA FM

Audio/TV

DAB1

AM/FM

DAB i

Link

Sound
Settings

BBC National DAB

DAB radio

Bal/Fade

Radio 1

BBC R2

Viking

Portable audio

Trent

Century

BBC Leic

DAB radio text

Announcements Clear all
FM traffic Off

Options

Link DAB Off

PTY

DAB text Off

Ensemble

Select

PTY

12 : 26 pm
E94192

12 : 26 pm
E94190

To display the full list of announcement types,
touch Select.

In DAB mode, select Settings.
Audio/TV

Audio/TV

Settings

Announcements Clear all

Sound
Bal/Fade

Settings

DPLII

BBC Radio2

FM traffic Off

Options

Link DAB Off

PTY

DAB text Off

Ensemble

Settings
Alarm

Select

Traffic
Select up to
four options

Transport flash

Clear all

Warning services

PTY

News

12 : 26 pm

E94193

E94191

Select Options.

Select an announcement type to enable it,
select it again to disable it. If you want to clear
all enabled types, select Clear all. To scroll
through the list, select the arrow buttons.

Note: If Settings is selected once, but no
action is taken for a further ten seconds, the
system will exit the menu automatically.

Note: If you have already selected four
announcement types, you will be unable to
select further types.

Announcements
You can select up to four types of
announcement from a list of eleven, for
example, News, Area/Weather, Traffic and
Alarm.
When a DAB announcement is broadcast, it will
interrupt normal play for the duration of the
announcement.
Note: The Alarm announcement type,
broadcasts information concerning crises of
national or international importance.

288

Digital audio broadcasting
FM traffic
Audio/TV

The FM traffic option detects the presence of
local traffic announcements on FM stations. As
soon as an announcement is received, radio
reception or CD play will be interrupted. At the
end of the announcement, radio or CD play will
resume.
Audio/TV

Sound
Bal/Fade

Settings

Announcements Clear all
FM traffic Off

Options

Link DAB Off

PTY

DAB te

Ense

Select

12 : 26 pm

Announcements Clear all
FM traffic Off

Options

Link D

PTY

DAB text Off

Ensemble

E94195

Select

If you move from one region to another and
Link DAB is enabled, the DAB radio will attempt
to retune to a channel with the same
identification in a different ensemble.

PTY

If the signal strength for a local channel falls
below an acceptable level, the audio unit will
automatically search other available ensembles
for another channel with the same
identification.

12 : 26 pm
E94194

Select On or Off to enable or disable the FM
traffic option.

Link DAB

If an alternative channel is found in another
ensemble that is also in your current channel
list, then the new channel is tuned
automatically after a few seconds. If a channel
is not found after a few seconds, then No
reception is displayed on the screen.

Regional ensembles containing a list of local
digital channels are broadcast by a variety of
regional providers.

The word Link is displayed at the top of the
touchscreen to indicate that Link DAB is
enabled.

Note: The audio unit switches to an FM
broadcast for the duration of the
announcement, so there may be a temporary
loss of sound quality.

A channel in two different regional ensembles
will share an identification if broadcast by the
same provider. If channels are being broadcast
by different suppliers, then they will not share
the same identification.

289

Digital audio broadcasting
DAB text
Audio/TV

The DAB text option controls the type of
information that is displayed on the screen
when a channel or subchannel is playing.

Sound
Bal/Fade
Options

Audio/TV

Bal/Fade

Announcements Clear all
FM traffic Off

Link DAB Off

Select

Settings

PTY
Sound

Settings

Announcements Clear all
FM traffic Off

Options

Link DAB Off

PTY

DAB text Off

Ensemble

xt Off

Ensemble

PTY

Select

12 : 26 pm

PTY

Audio/TV

Settings

Sound
12 : 26 pm

Bal/Fade

E94196

•

Options

Select Ensemble to display the name of
the ensemble to which the current channel
belongs.
Select PTY to display the name of the
programme type to which the current
channel belongs.
Select Off to display only the channel
name.

DAB Country:
Change
Spain
DAB Format:
Change
Band III

PTY

12 : 26 pm

Audio/TV

Settings
Spain
Sweden

Format list

DAB country

Switzerland
Taiwan

If you move the vehicle to a different country,
you can change DAB Country options to make
sure that you receive the best possible
reception and sound quality.

Turkey

12 : 26 pm
E94197

Note: If you have already selected a DAB
format, then the DAB country option is
disabled.

Select Change to display a list of countries
where DAB services are available. Select the
country name to enable it.
Note: When you change the DAB country, the
audio unit will automatically start auto-tuning.
If you Cancel the auto-tune, the country setting
will remain changed but you may not have
access to all available ensembles for that
country. See CHANNEL AUTOMATIC TUNING
(page 284).
Note: This option is disabled when the vehicle
is moving

290

Digital audio broadcasting
DAB format
Audio/TV

Note: When you change the DAB format, the
audio unit will automatically start auto-tuning.
If you Cancel the auto-tune, the format setting
will stay changed but you may not have access
to all available ensembles for that format.
See CHANNEL AUTOMATIC TUNING
(page 284).

Settings
Spain
Sweden

Format list

Switzerland

Note: This option is disabled when the vehicle
is moving

Taiwan
Turkey

12 : 26 pm

Audio/TV

Settings
Band III
Band L

Country list

Band III and Band L
L Band Canada
L Band Canada and Band III

12 : 26 pm
E94198

Different regions or countries may use different
digital bands to broadcast DAB channels. If you
know the band(s) required, then you can
choose from the Band selection list.
Select Change to display a list of formats. The
available bands are:
• L Band
• Band III
• L Band & Band III
• L Band Canada
• L Band Can & Band III

291

Compact disc player
COMPACT DISC COMPATABILITY

The following CD formats may cause the CD
player to malfunction. It is recommended that
the following types of CD are not used:
• 8 cm (3.1 in.) discs with or without an
adaptor.
• CDs that are not circular.
• CDs with a paper label.
• CDs that are warped, dirty, scratched or
have an abnormal edge.
• Dual format, dual-sided discs (DVD Plus,
CD-DVD format).
• DVDs.

CAUTIONS
Irregular shaped CDs and CDs with a
scratch protection film should not be
used.
CDs with labels (or stickers) attached,
should not be used. Labels may become
warped and prevent the CD from being ejected,
causing damage to the CD player. Such
damage is not covered by the warranty
agreement.
The CD unit will play compact discs that
conform to the international Red Book
standard audio specification. Copy-protected
CDs from some manufacturers do not
conform to this standard and playback cannot
be guaranteed.
Due to technical incompatibility,
recordable (CD-R) discs and re-writable
(CD-RW) discs may not function correctly.
Dual format, dual-sided discs (DVD
Plus, CD-DVD format) are thicker than
normal CDs and consequently playback
cannot be guaranteed in Jaguar audio units,
and jamming could occur. Warranty claims,
where this type of disc is found to be inside an
audio unit returned for repair, will not be
accepted.

It is recommended that only high quality 12 cm
(4.7 in.) circular discs, that show the Compact
Disc Digital Audio logo, are used.

LOADING COMPACT DISCS
CAUTIONS
Do not force the disc into the slot.
Note: Some privately recorded CD-R discs may
not have been acceptably formatted to be able
to be played on this CD player.
An in-dash compact disc (CD) player is
installed in the audio unit. The CD player will
accommodate one or up to six discs (where
fitted).
The unit will play Compact Disc Digital Audio
(CDDA) discs (normal discs), MP3 and WMA
files.

292

Compact disc player
Loading a CD (player empty)
External

Home

Audio/TV
Climate
Phone

Left

CD
Tr 3

Right

20 .5 C

17 .5 C

03:42

Navigation
Vehicle
Valet

12 : 26 pm

E94066

E94065

Gently place a CD into the loading slot. A CD
loading message is displayed on the
touch-screen, while the disc is drawn into the
player and the disc is loaded.

The Home menu indicates whether a CD is
loaded and (if applicable) which CD slot is
loaded and ready for playing. If no CDs have
been loaded, the touch-screen displays
ghosted discs.

Loading one CD (six CD player,
part-loaded)

To access the CD player touch-screen menu:
1. From the touch-screen Home menu, select
Audio/TV.
TP

Audio/TV

FM2

PTY

89.0

REG

DAB radio

Portable

BBC R2

Mercia

12 : 26 pm

BBC LDN BBC W&M
Galaxy

3
Mix

Repeat

BBC R3

E94067

Settings

Portable audio

Autostore

BBC R4

Paused

DAB radio

3CH

Settings

Radio 1

Tr 3

BBC R2

AM/FM

Audio/TV

AM/FM

106.2

Touch one of the empty disc slots (2). You are
prompted to insert the CD into the empty slot.

12 : 26 pm
E94090

1 indicates the currently playing CD and 3
indicates slots that are already loaded.

2. Select CD.
You can also press the SOURCE button
repeatedly to scroll through all audio sources
to find CD.

293

Compact disc player
COMPACT DISC SELECTION

Loading several CDs (six CD player)

3CH

Loading CD 1
TP

Audio/TV

3CH

Loading CD 1

AM/FM

Settings

DAB radio
E94068

Press the LOAD button and insert each CD into
the CD slot as requested by the message on the
touch-screen. A pop-up message will indicate
which slot is being selected in turn until the
unit is fully loaded.

Portable audio

3
Mix

Repeat

TV
12 : 26 pm
E94072

When the CD player has been loaded, you can
operate the CD using the touch-screen
controls.

On a six CD player, when a CD has been
selected on the touch-screen, the upper display
indicates which disc is being loaded and play
will start when loading is complete. Touch
another disc on the screen to load and start
playing that disc.
• TP: The background radio station provides
Traffic Programme (TP) and is able to
support Traffic Anouncements (TA).
• TA: Traffic announcements are available in
the CD mode and will interrupt the playing
of the CD. At the end of the announcement,
the CD will resume playing.

EJECTING COMPACT DISCS

E94071

Press the eject button. A short press will eject
a single CD, while a long press will eject each
loaded CD in sequence.
When a disc is ejected, remove it from the
loading slot. If you fail to remove an ejected
disc, it will be drawn back into the player after
ten seconds.
If you want to stop ejecting multiple discs, on
the touch-screen, select Cancel.

294

Compact disc player
TRACK SELECTION

COMPACT DISC PAUSE

Tr 12
P

Audio/TV

03 47
TA

3CH

Tr 12

Audio/TV

03 47

AM/FM

Portable audio

3CH

03 47

AM/FM

Settings

DAB radio
CD

Tr 12

Settings

DAB radio
2

3
Mix

Portable audio

Repeat

Mix

12 : 26 pm

E94073

E94074

Tr 12 - Track number of the track being played.

Select II to pause the current track. While play
is paused, the pause icon becomes a play icon,
select it again to resume playback.

03:47 - Track elapsed play time from start of
track.

Note: If the volume is turned down to zero, CD
playback is automatically paused. Play
resumes when the volume is increased.

You can move to the next or previous CD track,
using the seek buttons either on the
touch-screen or on the audio console.
See AUDIO UNIT OVERVIEW (page 269).

SHUFFLE/RANDOM

Briefly touch the seek buttons to move to the
previous or next track.

Mix CD

Touch and hold (two seconds) to play rapidly
back through one or more tracks (review) or
rapidly forward through one or more tracks
(cue).

Audio/TV

Mix all

Tr 12

3CH

Mix CD

03 47

AM/FM

Normal playback resumes when the seek
button is released.

Settings

DAB radio
CD
Portable audio

Mix

Repeat

TV
12 : 26 pm
E94076

Briefly touch Mix to activate the Mix CD option,
which shuffles the track order for the current
CD so that tracks are played in a random
sequence. If you are playing an MP3 CD, a brief
touch will mix the tracks in the current folder.

295

Compact disc player
COMPACT DISC DISPLAY OPTIONS

Touch and hold (two seconds) Mix to activate
the Mix all option, which shuffles the order of
play for all tracks across all loaded CDs. If you
are playing an MP3 CD, a long touch will mix
the tracks from all the folders on the current
disc.

Audio/TV

3CH

Tr 12

03 47

AM/FM

Settings

DAB radio
CD

REPEAT COMPACT DISC TRACKS

Portable audio

Repeat

Mix

Rpt Tr

Rpt CD

12 : 26 pm
E94078

Audio/TV

Tr 12

In CD mode, select Settings to display the CD
Settings menu.

3CH

Rpt CD

03 47

AM/FM

Settings

DAB radio
CD
Portable audio

Vehicle
1

3
Mix

Sound

Repeat

Bal/Fade

Settings

Traffic

Off

CD text Off

On
On

Options

12 : 26 pm

PTY

E94077

Briefly touch Repeat to play the current track
repeatedly. Select again to cancel repeat and
resume normal play.

12 : 26 pm
E94079

Traffic: Traffic announcements can be
switched On or Off. See TRAFFIC
INFORMATION CONTROL (page 276).

Touch and hold (two seconds) Repeat to
repeat play the whole CD. Select again to
cancel repeat and resume normal play. This
feature applies only the 6-disc CD unit.

CD text: CD text can be switched On or Off. CD
text displays track-related information that has
been saved on the CD (not all CDs will provide
CD text).

296

Compact disc player
MP3 FILE PLAYBACK

Using MP3 discs

On audio units fitted with a 6-disc CD player,
you can play CDs containing MP3 files.

When an MP3 disc is first played, the first track
in the root folder will play first. If you restart
play after switching to another disc or audio
source, then play will resume from the point
you left it.

MP3 discs have the potential to hold more
music than a conventional CD, because each
track can be compressed to a higher degree
during recording.

Note: The CD player may take a long time (one
minute or more) to load an MP3 disc, owing to
the number of tracks on it. To minimise the
loading on the system, a rigid folder structure
is recommended.

If you record your own music, each session
must be properly closed but the whole disc
does not have to be finalised.
Some pre-recorded and personally-recorded
discs, can contain additional information on
the disc, e.g. CD titles, track titles and the
artist's name (this information is contained in
ID3 Tags).

Audio/TV

3CH

Tr01

00:32

AM/FM

Settings

DAB radio

Folders

Additional touch-screen controls enable you to
select folders and tracks and display various
items of information about the recordings.

Portable audio

6
Repeat

Mix

CAUTION
Copyright laws vary in different
countries; please check the laws in your
country if you want to record from copyright
source material.

12 : 26 pm
E94082

If the MP3 disc has been recorded with the
music files contained within folders, additional
information is available by selecting Folders.

Note: A mixture of CDs and MP3 discs can be
loaded into the 6-disc CD player together.

Audio/TV

AM/FM

Note: The audio system will play MP3, WMA,
WAV and AAC files. The highest compression
rate supported, is 320k bits per second (kbps).
If anything less than 128 kbps is used, Digital
Signal Processing (DSP) functionality may be
lost.

DAB radio
CD
Portable audio
TV

3CH

Tr01

00:32

Beatles-Hits
Help
Please Please Me
Revolver
Sgt. Pep

12 : 26 pm

Note: The CD player is not guaranteed to play
every disc available because of variation in the
quality of discs.

E94083

A list of folders and files is displayed on the
touch-screen. The titles of any folders and
tracks recorded on the CD, will be displayed in
alphabetical order, even when the disc has
been recorded in a different order.

297

Compact disc player
TP

Audio/TV

AM/FM
DAB radio
CD
Portable audio
TV

PTY

Tr01

DPL I

00:34

Revolver
Taxma
Eleanor Rigby
I'm Only Sleeping
Love You To

12 : 26 pm
E94084

Select the folder to access the tracks contained
within the folder. To help you navigate through
multiple folders and files, the display changes
when you select folders, sub-folders and
tracks.
If more than four folders or files are listed,
select the up/down arrow icons to scroll
through the list.
Select a track to start playing that track.
Note: If you have selected a track using the
Folders function, then you will return to the
same folder when you next access the folder
menu.

MP3 folder structure
A CD-R or CD-RW can have MP3 folders and
tracks recorded in many different ways, with
many layers of folders and with tracks
distributed throughout the folder structure.
Note: Any CD containing a mixture of MP3 and
CDDA tracks will be treated as a CD (any MP3
tracks will be ignored).

298

Portable audio
PORTABLE AUDIO

Note: Some MP3 players have their own file
system that is not supported by this system. To
use your MP3 player, you must set it to USB
Removable Device or Mass Storage Device
mode (see manufacturer's information for
further details). Only music that has been
added to the device in this mode can be played
via the vehicle's portable audio system.

Portable audio overview
The portable audio system is located in the
centre console cubby box. You can connect a
variety of audio devices, including iPods, via
this interface to the audio system.
CAUTION
We recommend that you replace the
rubber cover when a portable device is
not plugged in. This will prevent damage to the
system. The cover is not waterproof.
Please disconnect your iPod when
leaving the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in the iPod battery discharging.

Note: The system will support devices with a
storage capacity up to 256 GB (approximately
65 000 tracks).

If you are connecting an iPod or mass storage
device, you can use the touch-screen to
operate and search the device. Many of the
controls are similar to those available for CD
play.
The devices that you can connect to the
portable audio interface include:
• USB mass storage devices, for example
memory stick.
• iPod.
• Auxiliary device (no touch-screen control).
Note: The portable audio interface supports
the following iPods:
• iPod (generations 3-5).
• iPod Mini.
• iPod Nano (generations 1-3).
• iPod Photo.
• iPod Classic.
Note: The audio system will play MP3, WMA,
WAV and AAC files.

299

Portable audio
Connecting an iPod

Connecting a USB device

On the audio Home screen, select Audio/TV,
then Portable audio, then iPod.

On the audio Home screen, select Audio/TV,
then Portable audio, then USB.

Note: You can also press the SOURCE button
repeatedly to select Portable audio device.

A dedicated iPod lead is supplied with the
Portable audio interface. Plug in your iPod with
the usual care necessary to protect the
connector pins from damage.

Insert the USB device into the socket indicated.

E94339

Whenever the device is connected, the first
track in the first available folder is played
automatically.

E94338

Play will start automatically from the point at
which the iPod was last played.

Note: We recommend that only music files are
loaded on the USB device. This will speed up
the automatic indexing of files.

300

Portable audio
Connecting an auxiliary device

Connecting more than one device

On the audio Home screen, select Audio/TV
and then select Portable audio.

Audio/TV

AM/FM

Note: You can also press the SOURCE button
repeatedly to select Portable audio device.

PTY

DPLII

Tr 04

00:36

Sing for absolution

DAB radio
CD
Portable audio

Settings
Folders

USB

iPod

AUX
Repe

TV
12 : 26 pm
E94709

You can connect an iPod and a USB device
simultaneously to the portable audio interface
and switch between them using the
touch-screen. Select iPod, USB or AUX, to
switch between modes.
The device docked first will remain the active
device until you choose to change.
If, after changing to the newly-docked device,
you change back to the first device, play will
resume at the point you left it (USB and iPod
only).
Note: You cannot use a USB hub to connect
more than one USB device to the audio unit.
Note: Devices connected to the iPod and USB
ports will be charged, but devices that are fully
discharged will not play. Please disconnect
your iPod when leaving the vehicle. Failure to
do so may result in the iPod battery
discharging.

E94340

Insert the AUX jack plug into the socket
indicated.
Select AUX.
Play will start when you switch on and start
playing the auxiliary device.

Note: Options such as Repeat and Mix relate
to the device currently playing, they will not
apply to any subsequent device.

Note: You cannot operate or search the
auxiliary audio device using the touch-screen,
so all buttons on the touch-screen are
unavailable.

301

Portable audio
AUXILIARY INPUT DEVICES

Mix

Playing a portable device
Mix all

WARNING
Auxiliary devices cannot be controlled
using the touch-screen. We strongly
advise against controlling playback or
altering settings on the auxiliary device while
driving.

Audio/TV

AM/FM

CD
Portable audio

Paused

01:36
Settings

DAB radio
CD
Portable audio

Folders
USB

AUX

Mix

Repeat

If the Mix option is active, select Mix to cancel
it and return to normal playback.

DPLII

iamond Dogs

iPod

iPod:
• Briefly touch Mix to play tracks in the
current playlist in a random sequence.
• Touch and hold (two seconds) Mix to play
all tracks on the iPod in a random
sequence.

Pause

Tr 02

USB

USB:
• Briefly touch Mix to play tracks in the
current folder in a random sequence.
• Touch and hold (two seconds) Mix to play
all tracks on the device in a random
sequence.

For an iPod, play will always resume from the
current track, whether previously docked or
not.

Audio/TV

Settings
Folders

E94342

Whenever a USB device is docked, play will
start automatically at the first track in the first
available folder.

AM/FM

Diamond Dogs

Autoplay

PTY

DPL I

01:36

12 : 26 pm

If you are using any portable audio device via
the AUX socket, then you must control
playback from the device itself.

PTY

Mix folder

DAB radio

If you are using a USB mass storage device or
iPod, you can control playback using the
touch-screen controls.

Tr 02

Mix folder

iPod

AUX

Mix

Repeat

TV
12 : 26 pm
E94341

Select II to pause playback, select the button
again to resume playback.

302

Portable audio
Repeat

Displaying track information
Rpt Tr

Audio/TV

AM/FM

Tr 02

Many tracks will be saved with additional
information contained in an id3 tag. You can
choose to display some or all of this
information on the screen. The default display
provides track title information only.

Rpt folder

PTY

DPLII

Rpt folder

Diamond Dogs

01:36
Settings

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM
CD

PTY

DPLII

Tr 04

00:36

Folders
USB

iPod

Sing for absolution

Settings

AUX

DAB radio
Portable audio

Mix

lders

Repeat

USB

iPod

AUX

Mix

Repeat

TV
Portable audio
12 : 26 pm

E94343

12 : 26 pm

USB:
• Briefly touch Repeat to repeat play the
current track continuously.
• Touch and hold (two seconds) Repeat to
repeat all tracks in the current folder on a
loop.

E94648

Briefly touch the --> button repeatedly to toggle
through the information, including track title,
artist, album and genre.
TP

Audio/TV

iPod:
• Briefly touch Repeat to repeat play the
current track continuously.
• Touch and hold (two seconds) Repeat to
repeat all tracks on the iPod on a loop.

PTY

DPLII

Tr 04

00:36

Portable audio text

AM/FM
Track:

Sing for absolution

DAB radio
CD
Portable audio

Select Repeat again to cancel it and return to
normal playback.

Artist:

Muse

Album:

Absolution

Genre:

Rock

TV
12 : 26 pm
E94649

Touch and hold (two seconds) the --> button to
display the Portable audio text pop-up screen
providing all the id3 tag information available
for the track.
If no information is available, the screen will
display the text No entry.
Touch the pop-up screen to close it.

303

Portable audio
Searching a portable device

USB folders

Next/previous track

The Folder option enables you to explore the
folder structure on the USB device.

Audio/TV

PTY

DPLII

Tr 04

AM/FM

Note: Only compatible file types will be
displayed on the touch-screen.

00:01

The man who sold t

Settings

DAB radio

Note: We recommend that only compatible
files are loaded onto the device. This will speed
up the automatic indexing of your files.

Folders

Portable audio

iPod

Mix

Repeat

Note: This feature is most useful when the files
and folders on the USB device have been
organised logically.

TV
12 : 26 pm
E94344

Audio/TV

Briefly touch the seek buttons to move to the
previous or next track.

AM/FM

PTY

DPLII

Tr 02

01:36

Diamond Dogs

DAB radio

If the Mix option is switched on, then the next
track will be the next in the randomised playlist.
In Mix mode, selecting previous will only return
playback to the beginning of the currently
playing track.

Folders
USB

Portable audio

iPod

AUX

Mix

Repeat

TV
12 : 26 pm

Fast forward/reverse

E94346

Tr 12

Select Folders to display all folders on the
device.

03 47

Audio/TV
TP

Audio/TV

AM/FM

PTY

Tr 12

01:36

Suffragette City

DAB radio
CD
Portable audio

PTY

DPLII

01:36

Tr 681

DPLII

My USB device
Settings

Beatles

Folders

Elvis Costello
B

iPod

Mix

Repeat

Live stuff
Snow Patrol

12 : 26 pm

E94348

E94345

Select a folder name to display a list of tracks
in that folder. Use the arrow icons (if displayed)
to scroll through the list.

Touch and hold a seek button to fast forward or
reverse through the current track. Release the
seek button to resume normal play.

304

Portable audio
TP

Audio/TV

PTY

DPLII

Audio/TV

01:36

Tr 681

PTY

DPL I

00:36

Tr 01

Foo fighters

My ipod

Favourite live tracks

Playlist

One by One

Artist

Skin and Bones

Album

Monkey wrench

Song

12 : 26 pm

E94349

E94350

Select a track to start playback of that track.
Play will continue as normal through the
remainder of the tracks in that folder.

Select a search method from the list to display
a list of items found.
TP

Audio/TV

Select the open folder icon at the top of a menu
to move back to the level of that folder.

PTY

DPL I

00:36

Tr 01

Artist
All

iPod folders

Air
TP

Audio/TV

AM/FM

PTY

DPLII

Tr 02

01:36

Coldplay

DAB radio
CD
Portable audio

Badly drawn boy

Diamond Dogs
Folders
USB

iPod

AUX

Mix

Repeat

12 : 26 pm
E94351

If you select Artist, a list of artists will be
displayed.

TV
12 : 26 pm

Audio/TV

E94347

PTY

DPLII

00:36

Tr 01

Air

Select Folders to display all search methods
available on the iPod. Search methods include,
Playlist, Artist, Album, Genre, Composer,
Podcast, Audio Book and Song.

All
Everybody Hertz
Moon safari
Premieres symptomes

12 : 26 pm
E94352

If you select an album title, a list of tracks is
displayed. Select a track to start playback.
Select the open folder icon at the top of a menu
to move back to the level of that folder.

305

Portable audio
Portable device settings
Audio/TV

Sound
Bal/Fade
Options

Settings

Traffic

Off

Portable Off
audio text
Page
jump

PTY

12 : 26 pm
E94355

In Portable audio mode, select Settings, then
select Options.

Traffic announcements
With Traffic enabled, traffic announcements
(TA) will interrupt portable audio playback.

Portable audio text
With Portable audio text enabled, any text
information saved on the device associated
with a track, for example artist name, will be
displayed on the touch-screen during playback
of that track.

Page jump
Only five items are displayed on screen from a
list of many items. If you select a single arrow
scroll button, then four items will scroll past.
The Page jump setting helps you to navigate a
very long list of items by setting the number of
items scrolled through when a double-arrow
page scroll button is selected.
For example, if you select 10 under Page jump,
then 10 × 4 (40) items will scroll past each time
you select a page scroll button.

306

Telephone
GENERAL INFORMATION

Note: The vehicle telephone system is
designed to function with a wide variety of
Bluetooth® telephones.

WARNING
Using the telephone near the car: Do
not telephone inside a garage or near
an open car bonnet. The air may
contain fuel vapours and the telephone could
produce sparks and start a fire.
Unusual ambient conditions: Switch
off the telephone in areas where high
explosives are being used. High
frequency remote controls could be interfered
with and cause an explosion. Switch off your
telephone in areas with a high explosion risk.
This includes filling stations, fuel storage
areas or chemical factories, as well as places
where the air contains fuel vapour, chemicals
or metal dust. The telephone might produce
sparks and cause a fire or explosion.
Medical equipment: The functioning
of cardiac pacemakers or hearing aids
may be impaired when the phone is in
use. Check with a doctor or manufacturer
whether any such devices you or your
passengers are using, are sufficiently
protected against high-frequency energy.
Always stow your mobile phone
securely. In an accident, loose items
can cause injury.
Using any hand-held appliance while
driving, can be dangerous and is
illegal in certain countries.

As these telephones have a wide range of audio
and echo characteristics, it may take a few
seconds for the vehicle telephone system to
adapt and deliver optimum audio performance.
It may be necessary to reduce the in-vehicle
volume slightly, to fully optimise audio
performance and reduce echo.
In order to achieve the best possible audio
performance, it may be necessary to select a
lower speed on the heater blower and reduce
the system volume slightly, when using certain
mobile phones.

Telephone networks
The telephone network standard allows you to
use your telephone in many countries.
However, telephone reception may be poor or
unavailable in remote regions. This may be due
to the inadequate power of the transmitter,
which results in a weak signal or incomplete
coverage.

What is Bluetooth®?
Jaguar Bluetooth® Connectivity was
developed to be used with a selected range of
mobile phones, from a number of different
manufacturers. Some mobile phones feature
different operating software versions - the
correct version is needed for successful
integration with the Jaguar Bluetooth®
system.
Bluetooth is an international standard that
allows electronic components to communicate
with each other, using a short-range radio link.
Bluetooth eliminates the need for wires or
cables: Typically, devices can communicate at
a range of up to 10 metres (33 feet).

307

Telephone
The Bluetooth in-car telephone system allows
certain mobile phones to be used hands-free in
your vehicle. There is no need to connect the
mobile phone to a cradle or cable.

Note: The vehicle ignition system must be on
and the touch-screen system must be active, in
order to use the phone.

Call volume

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

The volume of telephone calls can be adjusted
for hands-free operation. To adjust the volume,
operate the audio system’s volume control
during a phone call.

Please refer to the Owner section of the Jaguar
website at www.jaguar.com, for a list of
compatible phones. Alternatively, please refer
to your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

If the audio system is in use when the phone
becomes active, the audio system source is
suppressed for the duration of the call.

Note: The Bluetooth technology phones listed
on Jaguar.com, have been tested for
compatibility with Jaguar vehicles.
Performance will vary, based on phone
software version, coverage and your wireless
carrier. Phones are warranted by their
manufacturer, not Jaguar.

Charging your phone
It is possible to use the in-car 12V/USB socket
to charge your mobile phone. Refer to the
mobile phone operating instructions for
charging information.

If your mobile phone battery charge becomes
low it may switch off its Bluetooth link to the
vehicle. This is normal operation for mobile
phones, to help preserve the remaining battery
charge. In this event, the touch-screen will
display a phone connection message.
The mobile phone must be paired and docked
with the vehicle system before use.
See TELEPHONE PAIRING AND DOCKING
(page 309). Once paired and docked, the
phone can be operated via the steering wheel
switches or the touch-screen. The mobile
phone doesn’t need to be physically connected
to the vehicle, it can be left in a jacket pocket,
for instance. Calls are routed through the
vehicle’s audio speakers, and a dedicated
microphone is fitted within the overhead
console and is directionally biased towards the
driver.
You can use the system to answer or reject
incoming calls, make outgoing calls or alter the
call volume. The system does not support SMS
text messaging.

308

Telephone
TELEPHONE PAIRING AND DOCKING

Safety

Before use, your mobile phone must be paired
and docked with the vehicle’s Bluetooth
system. This is done via your mobile phone or
the touch-screen.

WARNING
Read the following information
thoroughly before using your
telephone.

Pairing and docking using your mobile
phone

Driving
Check local regulations covering the use of
in-car telephones in the areas that you intend to
use your telephone, and always obey them.
Observe the following guidelines if you are
using the phone when driving.
• Give full attention to driving - safe driving
is your prime responsibility.
• Always use hands-free operation when
driving.
• When receiving a call, if driving conditions
demand, pull off the road and park.

Follow the steps below, to pair and dock your
phone with the vehicle using your mobile
phone.
Note: The process of pairing and docking your
phone with the vehicle using the mobile phone,
will vary depending on the type of mobile
phone used.
Comms
Register
Voice mail

Electronic devices

Answer options

Most modern electronic equipment is shielded
from Radio Frequency (RF) signals. However,
certain equipment may not be shielded against
RF signals from your phone.

Docked phone: Nokia 6230i
Undock

Add phone
nametag
Phone options

Change phone

Search new

E96911

Pacemakers

3. Ensure that the ignition is on and the
touch-screen is active.

The Health Industry Manufacturers'
Association recommends that a minimum
separation of 15 centimetres (six inches) is
maintained between a wireless phone antenna
and a pacemaker, to avoid potential
interference with the pacemaker. These
recommendations are consistent with the
independent research by, and
recommendations of, Wireless Technology
Research.

4. Ensure that there is no mobile phone
currently docked with the vehicle's
Bluetooth system. If a mobile phone is
docked with the system, you will not be
able pair and dock another phone until the
current phone has been undocked. To
undock a phone, select Phone or Comms
on the home screen, then Settings and
then Undock.
5. Using the mobile phone, search for
Bluetooth devices. See your phone's
operating instructions for further
information.

309

Telephone
6. When the vehicle's Bluetooth system is
discovered, your mobile phone will list
Jaguar as a discovered Bluetooth device.
Select this device from the list.

External

Home

Audio/TV
Climate

7. You will now be requested to enter a
Bluetooth PIN. When pairing and docking
from your mobile phone, this number is
always 1313.

Comms

Left

Right

DAB radio

17 .5 C

BBC 5Live Xtra

20 .5 C

DAB1

BBC National DAB

Navigation

TA FM DAB i Subch.

PL II

Vehicle
Valet

12 : 26 pm

Once your phone is paired to the vehicle's
Bluetooth system, it can connect automatically.
If the phone does not automatically connect,
you will have to connect manually with the
Jaguar Bluetooth System, via the mobile
phone. Please consult the mobile phone's
handbook for further information.

E96908

3. From the home menu select Comms. If
your car is not fitted with JaguarVoice,
Phone will appear in the position occupied
by Comms.

Note: Some mobile phones require you to
authorise the connection each time you start
the system. To change this, you must set
Jaguar as ‘authorised’ in the mobile phone’s
known device list. This will enable connections
from the vehicle to the mobile phone to take
place automatically without confirmation each
time. Please consult the mobile phone’s
handbook for further information.

Comms
Digit Dial

Settings

Names

Last 10

7
*

Options
6

E96912

Pairing and docking using the
touch-screen

4. Select Settings.

1. Switch on your mobile phone’s Bluetooth
connection, using the phone’s menu. Make
sure that your mobile phone is in Bluetooth
discoverable mode, sometimes referred to
as find me mode (see your phone’s
operating instructions for more
information).
2. Switch the ignition system on, ensure that
the touch-screen is active.
5. Select Search new. The system will search
for all Bluetooth phones that are in range.
If a phone is already docked, it will be
automatically undocked when a Search is
initiated.

310

Telephone
Note: Due to the duration of a Bluetooth
search, it is advised that the timeout to home
screen feature is switched off before
attempting to search for Bluetooth devices.
This setting can be changed within Vehicle,
Syst settings, Display set, Timeout to home
screen.

Comms
Digit Dial

Bluetooth search
Please wait

Names

Searching . . .
Last 10
Cancel

Note: You do not need to manually pair and
dock the phone with the vehicle every time you
switch the ignition on. If an incorrect code is
entered, your mobile phone should prompt you
to enter the correct code.

E96918

6. Select your phone from the displayed list.

The Bluetooth system supports Bluetooth
Hands Free Profile 1.5 (HFP 1.5). If the mobile
phone paired to the system also supports this
profile, additional features will be available
such as battery level indicator, signal strength
indicator and network operator. If the mobile
phone does not support these features, they
will not be available on the touch-screen.
However, you can refer to the mobile phone's
display to determine these items.

Comms
Apple iPhone
Nokia 6300

Not
P i d

Pair & dock

Delete

To pair & dock phone
Enter (5616) on handset

JAG1312

7. Once you have selected your phone, a
pop-up window appears.

Pairing other phones
Up to five mobile phones can be paired with the
vehicle in the same way. However, only one can
be docked for use. For further information,
refer to Changing the docked phone.

8. To pair and dock the phone, enter XXXX on
the handset (XXXX being a random four
digit code displayed on the touch-screen).
Enter this into your phone (see your
phone’s operating instructions for more
information).
9. Your phone is now paired and docked
ready for use. For further information, refer
to the following procedures - Making a
call, Ending a call, Receiving a call.
10. Once a mobile phone has been paired and
docked with the vehicle, the system will
search for the last connected phone, each
time the ignition is switched on.

311

Telephone
Changing the docked phone
Comms

Only one phone can be docked to the vehicle at
any one time. To dock a different paired phone
to the vehicle, follow the steps below:
15

External

Home

Nokia N73

Delete

Docked

Nokia 6300

Paired

Dock

Delete

Apple iPhone

Paired

Dock

Delete

Audio/TV
Climate
Comms

Left

Right

DAB radio

17 .5 C

BBC 5Live Xtra

20 .5 C

DAB1

JAG1314

BBC National DAB

Navigation

TA FM DAB i Subch.

4. Select Dock from the list of available
phones.

PL II

Vehicle
Valet

12 : 26 pm

Deleting a paired phone

E96908

To delete a phone from the system, follow the
steps below:

1. From the home menu, select Comms
(Phone on vehicles without Voice).

External

Home

Comms

Audio/TV

Digit Dial

Settings

Names

Last 10

7
*

Climate

Options

Comms

Right

DAB radio

17 .5 C

BBC 5Live Xtra

20 .5 C

DAB1

BBC National DAB

Left

Navigation
C

TA FM DAB i Subch.

PL II

Vehicle

Valet

12 : 26 pm
E96908

E96912

1. From the home menu, select Comms
(Phone on vehicles without Voice).

2. Select Settings.

Comms
Digit Dial

Settings

Names

Last 10

7
*

E96912

3. Select Change phone.

2. Select Settings.

312

Options
6

8
0

Telephone
VOICE MAIL
You can set up your voice mail to be accessed
via the touch-screen. The voice mail (network
service) option is an answering service, where
callers who are unable to reach you can leave
messages.
Operator Name

Comms
Register

Enter voice mail number

Voice mail

3. Select Change phone.

Answer options
Add phone
nametag

Comms
Nokia N73

Phone options

9
OK

Delete

Docked

Nokia 6300

Paired

Dock

Delete

Apple iPhone

Paired

Dock

Delete

E96913

Select Voice mail, enter the number provided
by your service provider and select OK. This
number is stored in the system and used to
retrieve any voice mail messages.

JAG1314

Retrieving voice mail

4. Select Delete. This permanently removes
the phone from the vehicle's Bluetooth
system list. To use the phone again, you
have to pair and dock the phone to the
vehicle.

Comms
Digit Dial

Settings

Names

Last 10

5. The phone does not need to be present to
be deleted from the list.

Options

Register
From the Settings main menu, selecting
Register gives the options to Undock, Change
phone or Search new. For further information,
refer to the following procedures - Pairing
other phones, Changing the docked phone.

E96922

To listen to your voice mail
messages, select and hold 1.
The voice mail features can be used as if dialled
from the mobile phone.

313

Telephone
ANSWER OPTIONS

Ring tones
Four ring tones are available (for in-vehicle
ringing) or you can use your mobile phone’s
own ring tone:

Comms
Register
Voice mail

Auto answer
Caller announce

Off
Off

Select Ring tones (2). Select Portable’s
inband tone to use your mobile phones ring
tone.

Answer options
Add phone
nameta

Note: Not all phones support inband ringing.

Phone options

Comms
E96933

Portable's inband tone

1. Select Answer options.

Ringtone 1

2. Auto answer: If automatic answer is on,
the call will automatically answer after a
few seconds. Select Off or On.

Ringtone 2
Ringtone 3
Ringtone 4

3. Caller announce: This feature, if available,
allows the callers name to be announced.
Select Off or On.

Comms
Portable's inband tone

PHONE OPTIONS

Ringtone 1
Ringtone 2

Comms
Register

Ring tones

Voice mail

Phonebook

Rington
Ringtone 4

Answer options
E96916
Add phone
nametag

Or, select Ring tone 1, 2, 3 or 4, to use a Jaguar
preset ring tone.

Phone options

Note: The system will store the ring tone
setting associated with each mobile phone.

E96917

1. Select Phone options (1).
2. Ring tones (Ring tone options).
3. Phonebook (Phonebook options).

314

Telephone
PHONEBOOK
Comms

The phonebook option (3), allows you to
download your mobile phone's directory
(either automatically or manually) or erase it
from the vehicle’s memory, assuming that the
phone supports this feature.

Auto download

Off

Start manual download
Erase entire phonebook

The system can store a maximum of 750
entries, although this figure varies, depending
on the type of mobile phone used. Refer to
Phone capacity.

E96914

Select Off or On.

Note: It may take several minutes to copy the
phonebook to the vehicle, depending on the
phone and number of entries stored. The
telephone system may not be operational
during this period.

If On is selected, the vehicle will automatically
download the entire directory, each time the
phone is docked.

Manual download

Automatic download

If your phone does not support AT Phonebook
(automatic phonebook download), you may be
able to manually send your phonebook
(individual entries or in full) to the vehicle's
Bluetooth system using the phone's Object
push facility. Refer to your phone's operating
instructions to determine whether this feature
is available.

Any phone numbers stored in your mobile
phonebook, can be copied to the vehicle’s
phonebook.
If Auto Download is on, the mobile phone
phonebook will be transferred to the vehicle
every time the phone is connected (docked).
This feature will only work on phones that
support AT Phonebook Profile. Refer to your
phone’s operating instructions.

Comms
Auto download

Comms

Off

Start manual download

Ring tones

Voice mail

Phonebook

Erase entire phonebook

Answer options
Add phone
nametag
Phone options

E96957

To initiate a manual download, select Phone
options, then Phonebook and then Start
manual download.

E96917

To change Auto Download: Select Phone
options (1), then select Phonebook (3).

315

Telephone
The Bluetooth system will disconnect the
currently docked phone and will be able to
receive phonebook data sent from that phone.
Please refer to your phone's operating
instructions for details of how to send
phonebook data using Bluetooth.

Note: This feature deletes phonebook entries
stored in the vehicle memory and not those
stored in the mobile phone memory.

Phonebook capacity
Certain mobile phones store the phonebook in
two different areas, the SIM card and the phone
memory. Where possible, the vehicle will
display both SIM card and phone memory
entries up to a maximum of 750. With some
mobile phones, the number of entries from one
or both of these areas may be restricted. It is
not always possible to transfer addresses
stored in one or both of these areas.

Once the phonebook data has been sent, select
Exit to reconnect the last docked phone.
The vehicle's Bluetooth system will now
display the manually downloaded phonebook
data. For more information, refer to your
phone's operating instructions.
Note: This feature only allows you to send
phonebook data from the last docked phone.
You cannot download data from the Bluetooth
system to a mobile phone.

The number of entries displayed is dependent
upon the number of SIM and phone memory
entries supported by the mobile phone.

Once a paired phone is deleted from the paired
phone list, the phonebook data associated with
this phone is deleted.

Note: Certain mobile phones do not allow
phonebook entries stored on the SIM card to
be transferred via Bluetooth. However, it may
be possible to transfer the SIM phonebook to
the mobile phone’s memory, before copying it
to the vehicle phonebook. Refer to your mobile
phone operating instructions for more
information. It is advisable to remove duplicate
and blank entries from the mobile phone,
before the phonebook is downloaded.

Erase entire phonebook
To erase the entire phonebook:
Select Phone options (1), then select
Phonebook (3).
Select Erase entire phonebook.

Auto download

Off

On
Phone

Erase entire phonebook
Cancel

E96923

A pop-up window alerts you that you are about
to Erase entire phonebook. Select OK to
remove all names from the vehicle phonebook.
To delete one or more names, but not all, refer
to Deleting names from the Directory.

316

Telephone
MAKING A CALL

If automatic answer has been programmed, the
call will automatically answer after a few
seconds. Refer to Answer options.

Before you make a call, your mobile phone
must be paired and docked with the vehicle’s
Bluetooth system.
External

Home

To answer a call: The preferred method to
accept an incoming call, if Automatic answer is
not active, is to use the hands-free controls on
the steering wheel (refer to Hand-free
controls). Alternatively, you can accept or
reject the incoming call, from the pop-up
displayed on the touch-screen.

Audio/TV
Climate
Comms

Left

Right

DAB radio

17 .5 C

BBC 5Live Xtra

20 .5 C

DAB1

BBC National DAB

Navigation

TA FM DAB i Subch.

PL II

Ending a call

Vehicle

The preferred method to end a call is to use the
hands-free controls on the steering wheel.
Refer to Hands-free controls.

Valet

12 : 26 pm
E96908

From the Home menu, select Comms.
Comms

02476303080

Comms

Digit Dial

Settings

Digit Dial
Names

Last 10

Options

00:00:05

Settings

Names

Last 10

Options

0
E96925

E96924

Alternatively, select the End call icon
(arrowed).

Key in the phone number, including the area
code, if applicable - the number will be
displayed. Touch the connect icon.

Continuity of calls
Whilst in a call, the call remains connected if
the vehicle is in convenience mode. When the
call ends, another call cannot be made or
received through the vehicle system, unless
the ignition is on and the touch-screen system
active.

Changing a phone number
When entering a number, you can change the
phone number shown on the touch-screen
using the C button.
A momentary touch erases a single digit, a long
touch erases the complete number.

Receiving a call
If the audio system is in use when the phone
becomes active, the audio system source is
suppressed for the duration of the call.

317

Telephone
NAMES
Comms

Directory name search
External

Home

Digit Dial
C

Last 10

Audio/TV
Climate
Comms

Left

20 .5 C

Search letter

Names

Right

DAB radio

DAB1

17 .5 C

BBC 5Live Xtra

Settings

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ
OK

BBC National DAB

Navigation

TA FM DAB i Subch.

PL II

Vehicle

Comms
Valet

12 : 26 pm

Digit Dial

E96908

Names

From the Home menu, select Comms.

Last 10

Comms
Digit Dial

Search letter

Names
Last 10

Settings

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXY
OK

Settings

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

JAG1315

1. Using the keyboard, select the first letter of
the contact name. If the name begins with
the second or third letter on the button,
touch the button two or three times
respectively (i.e. if the name begins with an
F, touch the DEF button three times).

E96926

Select Names.

2. Select OK.
Comms
Mark

Operator Name
0201 9898989

Delete

Mark

0201 7878787

Delete

Mark

07907970970

Delete

Mia
Mike

07044700447
0223 6846846

Delete
Delete

JAG0900

Select the desired name to make a call.
Note: Using the hands-free controls, you can
search the phonebook via the message centre.

318

Telephone
Directory contact types
Comms

If your phone supports contact type data, you
will be able to see a contact type icon in the
vehicle's phonebook directory. These can be
seen on the right-hand side of each contact in
the directory and will indicate one of the
following types:

Digit Dial

Search letter

Names
Last 10

Settings

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ
OK

Work.
E96926

Home.

Select Names.
Comms

Mobile.

Digit Dial
Names

Car.

Last 10

No Icon

Search letter

Voice.

Settings

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ
OK

Deleting names from the directory
External

Home

Comms

Digit Dial

Audio/TV
Climate
Comms

Left

20 .5 C

Right

DAB radio

17 .5 C

BBC 5Live Xtra

Names

DAB1

Last 10

Settings

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXY

BBC National DAB

Navigation

TA FM DAB i Subch.

PL II

Vehicle
12 : 26 pm

Valet

E96908

JAG1315

From the Home menu, select Comms.

1. Using the keyboard, select the first letter or
letters of the contact name to narrow your
search. The selected letter(s) appears in
the upper display.
2. Select OK.
The search fields are opened and matching
contacts are listed.

319

Telephone
3. Select Calls received or
Comms
Mark

Operator Name

4. Select Calls missed.

0201 9898989

Delete

Mark

0201 7878787

Delete

Mark

07907970970

Delete

Mia
Mike

07044700447

Comms

Mark Home
Mark Work

Delete

Melissa

Delete

0223 6846846

Mia Mobile
JAG0901

Mike Home

Select Delete to remove a name(s) from the
phonebook.

E96928

The search fields are opened and a list of the
calls made, received or missed are listed, with
the most recent at the top.

LAST 10 OPTION
The Last 10 option allows you to view the last
10 calls made, received or missed.
External

Home

To make or return a call, select the name from
the list. Your call will be routed automatically.

Note: The vehicle will display the list in the
order that they are sent from the mobile phone.
Some phones may arrange the list in reverse or
other order.

Audio/TV
Climate
Comms

Left

20 .5 C

Right

DAB radio

17 .5 C

BBC 5Live Xtra

DAB1

BBC National DAB

Navigation

TA FM DAB i Subch.

PL II

Vehicle
Valet

12 : 26 pm
E96908

From the home menu, select Comms.
Comms
Digit Dial

Names

Calls made

Last 10

Calls received

Settings

Calls missed

4
E96927

1. Select Last 10.
2. Select Calls made or.

320

Telephone
HANDS-FREE CONTROLS

Phonebook scrolling using message
centre

Four system adjustment controls are situated
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel,
duplicating functions of buttons on the
touch-screen. Using these buttons is the
preferred method of adjustment, as driver
distraction is minimised.

Press and hold the Source button on the
steering wheel, to scroll through and select a
phonebook contact via the message centre.

Phone

Auto
Inst Fuel

miles
mpg

E96934

Phone will be displayed and the Phonebook
can be accessed on the touch-screen.

John Johnson
012398765432

E71452

1. Scroll up/down to increase or decrease
volume.
Auto
Inst Fuel

2. Scroll up/down to next/previous memory
location.
3. Source. Press and hold to access phone
mode on the touch-screen and message
centre.

miles
mpg

E96958

Use the scroll up and down buttons to search
through the Phonebook. Each entry will be
shown in the message centre.

4. Voice button. Briefly press to dial, answer
or end a phone call. This button is also
used for voice control functions.

With the required contact displayed, press the
Voice button on the steering wheel to make the
phone call.

321

Telephone
Making/ending a call
To dial:

Comms

Key in the phone number, including the area
code. The number will be displayed.

3
Options

To connect:
Press this button on the steering
wheel, or
Touch this icon on the
touch-screen.

E96931

Select the Magnify icon again to reduce the
size.

To end a call:

Do not disturb mode

Press this button on the steering
wheel, or

Comms

Touch this icon on the
touch-screen.

Digit Dial

OTHER FEATURES

Do not disturb mode

Names

Last 10

Keyboard magnification

Settings
Options

6
9

This option allows the user to increase the
keyboard size.

E96929

When making a call using the numerical key
pad displayed on the touch-screen, the
Magnify icon becomes selectable.

If you do not wish to be disturbed by incoming
phone calls, select the bell icon (1) on the
touch-screen. A visual representation will be
displayed on the touch-screen, to advise the
driver that the Do not disturb mode is selected
(3) and Do not disturb mode will be visible
when in telephone mode (2). Any incoming
calls will be rejected or diverted to voice mail.

Comms
Digit Dial

Settings

Names

Last 10

Options

E96930

Select the Magnify icon to enlarge the keypad.

322

Telephone
TELEPHONE VOICE CONTROL

Operating the system

WARNING
Do not use voice control when placing
emergency calls. Your voice and tone
could be affected by stressful
situations and, as a result, the process of
establishing a connection could be delayed.
Voice control allows many of the telephone
features to be activated by voice commands.
The system is controlled by the
switch on the left-hand side of the
steering wheel.
Note: The voice control directory is separate
from your phone SIM card address or
phonebook. See VOICE CONTROL (page 69).
The voice control system understands
predefined commands which need to be
spoken word for word. A list of all telephone
voice commands is below.
• PHONE HELP
• PHONE DIAL NUMBER
• PHONE REDIAL
• PHONE STORE NAME
• PHONE DIAL NAME
• PHONE ACCEPT CALLS
• PHONE REJECT CALLS
• PHONE DIAL LAST ANSWERED CALL
• PHONE DIAL LAST MISSED CALL
• PHONE DIAL VOICEMAIL
• PHONE PLAY DIRECTORY
• PHONE DELETE DIRECTORY
• PHONE DIAL HANDSET NAME

E95902

Press and release the voice button on the
steering wheel (arrowed) and after the tone,
speak one of the system commands.
In response to your command, the system will
repeat your instruction and Listening will
appear in the message centre. The system will
either carry out your command or ask for more
information. If the system asks for more
information, wait until the tone has sounded
before replying.
To cancel a voice control session, press and
hold the switch on the steering wheel (until a
double tone sounds).

Most of the above commands are self
explanatory, those which are not, are explained
more fully in the following section.

323

Telephone
To dial a phone number, follow one of the
procedures listed below.

Dialling a phone number
The system will guide you through the process.
After each prompt where the system asks for a
response, always wait for the tone before
responding.

If, during the procedure, the system prompts
you with a response of Continue, you can use
the following commands.
• DELETE - Will delete all digits entered and
prompt for entry of a number;
• CORRECTION - Deletes the digit entered
last, repeats the digits given so far and
prompts Continue;
• CANCEL - Cancels this dialogue;
• DIAL - Terminates the entry of digits and
dials the entered number.

The phone number can be given as a series of
single digits (from zero to nine). Either Zero or
Oh is recognised, but zero is likely to give the
best results.
For example: 01926543791 = zero, one, nine,
two, six, five, four, three, seven, nine, one.
You can also speak the number in groups of
three to six digits. If you adopt this approach,
always wait for the system to respond with
Continue before providing the next group of
numbers.

Telephone numbers up to 20 digits are
acknowledged. If a longer number is given, the
message Number too long will be heard.

It is also possible to give the number as a
whole, with no pause between the digits.

Dialling a number in groups
Step

Voice command

System response

PHONE DIAL NUMBER

PHONE DIAL NUMBER, NUMBER PLEASE

ZERO, ONE, NINE, TWO, SIX

ZERO, ONE, NINE, TWO, SIX. CONTINUE?

FIVE, FOUR, THREE

FIVE, FOUR, THREE. CONTINUE?

SEVEN, NINE, ONE

SEVEN, NINE, ONE. CONTINUE?

DIAL

DIALLING

Dialling a number as a whole
Step

Voice command

System response

PHONE DIAL NUMBER

PHONE DIAL NUMBER, NUMBER PLEASE

ZERO, ONE, NINE, TWO, SIX,
FIVE, FOUR, THREE, SEVEN,
NINE, ONE

ZERO, ONE, NINE, TWO, SIX, FIVE, FOUR, THREE,
SEVEN, NINE, ONE. CONTINUE?

DIAL

DIALLING

324

Telephone
Phone store name
The system will guide you through the process.
After each prompt where the system asks for a
response, always wait for the tone before
responding.
To store a name, follow the procedure below.
If, during the procedure, the system prompts
you with a response of Continue, you can use
the following commands.
• DELETE - Will delete all digits entered and
prompt for entry of a number;
• CORRECTION - Deletes the digit entered
last, repeats the digits given so far and
prompts Continue;
• CANCEL - Cancels this dialogue;
• STORE - Terminates the entry of digits and
stores the entered phone number.
Step

Voice command

System response

PHONE STORE NAME

PHONE STORE NAME, NUMBER PLEASE

ZERO, ONE, NINE, TWO, SIX, FIVE,
FOUR, THREE, SEVEN, NINE, ONE

ZERO, ONE, NINE, TWO, SIX, FIVE, FOUR,
THREE, SEVEN, NINE, ONE. CONTINUE?

STORE

NAME, PLEASE

PLEASE REPEAT NAME

STORED

DIAL

DIALLING

325

Telephone
Storing nametags using the
touch-screen

Dialling voicemail
The number for your voicemail service needs
to be stored in the system, before using this
facility. To store the voicemail number:
• From the Home menu, select Comms.
• From the Comms menu, select Settings.
• The phone Settings menu has a Voice mail
button, to allow your voicemail number to
be entered.

Nametags can also be added to the system by
using the Add Phone nametag feature on the
touch-screen, as described below.
1. From the Home menu, select the Comms
button.
2. From the Comms menu, select the Add
Phone Nametag button.

To dial the voicemail number, press and
release the Voice button on the steering wheel,
wait for the tone to sound, then say Phone dial
voicemail.

3. A numerical touch-screen is displayed.
Enter the phone number.
4. When the number is entered, select the
Add button in the top right-hand corner
and, once the tone has sounded, speak the
name that you wish the number to be
stored under.

Play all stored nametags
To play all the nametags stored in the directory,
press and release the Voice button on the
steering wheel and after the tone, say Phone
play directory. The list can be interrupted at
any time, by pressing and releasing the button
again. Once interrupted, you can then use the
commands, REPLAY, DIAL, DELETE, EDIT or
CANCEL.

Note: The storage of the nametag itself is
subject to the nametag not being too short
(less than 0.4 seconds), too long (longer than
4 seconds), not sounding too much like
another stored nametag and relies on the
repetition of the nametag sounding the same
as the first utterance of it. If any of these criteria
are not met, the system will prompt you to give
a new nametag.

Dialling a nametag stored on the
handset
To dial a number associated with a nametag
stored on the phone handset, press and release
the Voice button on the steering wheel and,
after the tone, say Phone dial handset name.

Note: The Add button will be greyed out if the
phone number is not valid.

Dialling a nametag
To dial a number stored under a nametag in the
directory, press and release the voice button
and say Phone dial name. The system will
repeat the command and will prompt you for a
stored nametag by saying Name please. After
the tone, speak the nametag of the required
number. The system will replay the stored
nametag and ask for confirmation that it is
correct. Answer with Yes or No, as appropriate.

326

Telephone
Message centre messages
A number of responses by the telephone voice
system are reinforced by text messages
appearing in the message centre display.
These messages are in the following list.
• LISTENING
• VOICE NOT READY
• NOT AVAILABLE PHONE IN USE
• COMMAND NOT RECOGNISED
• NO SPEECH DETECTED
• STORING
• COMMAND CANCELLED
• SEARCHING
• HOLD BUTTON TO CANCEL
• DIRECTORY

Phonebook entries
You can also view the phonebook entries on
the message centre. See HANDS-FREE
CONTROLS (page 321).

327

Television
GENERAL INFORMATION

TV inhibit with vehicle moving

Introduction

Audio/TV

TV viewing is possible when the vehicle is
stationary with the transmission in the P (Park)
position. The TV picture can be viewed in
preview mode or full-screen.

DTV

PTY

Analogue
For your safety, the
picture is off while
the vehicle is in
motion

If the vehicle is moving when TV is selected or
if the vehicle is driven off when the TV is
operating, a warning message will display, the
TV picture will cease and only audio reception
is available.

Source

DPLII

BBC1
Digital

Settings
Channel list

BBC1

UK TV
Style ITV1

Ch 4

UK TV
People Sky News

CBBC

Sky
Sports N

12 : 26 pm
E94679

If the vehicle is moved whilst the TV picture is
being displayed, the TV will be inhibited and
returned to the TV Menu screen.

Note: Japan market: The TV will operate
normally up to speeds of 5 km/h (3 mph), after
which the TV picture will cease and only audio
reception is available.

A warning indicator will appear across the
screen for three seconds stating For your
safety, the picture is off while the vehicle is
in motion.

TV sound is provided through the audio system
speakers.

TV reception

With the TV picture inhibited, TV sound and
channel changing continues to be available.

Repositioning the vehicle may improve the
picture whereas in difficult locations (distant
transmitter, hills etc.), reception may not be
possible at all. Sound quality may also be
affected to a lesser degree by loss of signal,
which can give rise to variable quality over
short distances while on the move.
Note: Television systems require consistent
and strong signals for good quality reception.
These signals are affected by transmitter
coverage and surrounding features (hills, high
buildings, trees etc.) which will reduce the
signal, thus reducing picture quality.

328

Television
TELEVISION CONTROLS
TV controls
TP

Audio/TV

DTV

Savage Planet

PTY

DPLII

ITV3

Analogue

Digital

Settings
Channel list

Film4
Touch image for
full screen

Source

ITV2+1
More4

Ftn

ITV2

ITV3

ITV4

TMF

UKTV
History

12 : 26 pm

E94705

6
5
4

2
3

1. Touch-screen: See TOUCH-SCREEN
(page 109).
2.

5. SOURCE: Press to change the source
media through FM1, FM2, AM, DAB1,
DAB2, DAB3, CD, iPod, USB, Auxiliary
input and TV.

Seek up: Short press to seek next channel
frequency; long press for next available
channel.

6. Seek down: Short press to seek previous
preset channel; long press for previous
available channel.

3. Settings:
• Short press to display the audio Settings
menu.
• Long press (two seconds) to display the
Vol presets menu.
4. On/off and volume control:
• Press the control to switch the system
on/off.
• Rotate the control to increase or
decrease volume level. Any volume
setting made whilst in audio, phone,
navigation or voice activation mode, will
be memorised for that system.

329

Television
Steering wheel controls

Audio/TV

DTV

AM/FM

PTY

DPLII

BBC1

Analogue

Digital

DAB radio
CD
Portable audio
TV

Settings
Channel list

BBC1

UK TV
Style ITV1

Ch 4

UK TV
People Sky News

CBBC

Sky
Sports N

12 : 26 pm
E94680

On the touch-screen Home menu, select
Audio/TV, then select TV. The buttons on the
left of the screen will slide away and be
replaced by the TV preview picture. To
redisplay the buttons for five seconds, select
the Source button under the TV preview
picture. See TELEVISION CONTROLS
(page 329).

E94043

1. Rotate up or down to increase or decrease
volume.
2. Rotate up or down and release repeatedly
to scroll through preset TV channel. Rotate
up and hold for two seconds to select next
strong TV channel.
3. Press repeatedly to scroll through all
sources.

Volume control
The volume of the TV output can be adjusted in
one of two ways:

4. This button can be used to mute the TV
sound at any time.

USING THE TELEVISION
On/off control
To operate the TV, the ignition system must be
on (press the engine START/STOP button).

E94085

Rotate the audio on/off and volume control on
the audio console, or;

E94044

Press the audio on/off and volume control on
the audio console.
E94086

Rotate the volume control on the steering
wheel.

330

Television
Analogue/Digital option

Full screen view

The TV offers both analogue and digital TV
reception. You can switch between the two
modes using the touch-screen controls.

The TV main screen displays a preview picture
in a small screen alongside all the touch-screen
controls and preset channels.

Audio/TV

DTV

Savage Planet

PTY

Touch anywhere on the TV picture to display it
in full screen mode. A list of control buttons is
displayed on the full screen picture for five
seconds before disappearing.

DPLII

ITV3

Analogue

Settings

Digital

annel list
Film4

Ftn

ITV2

ITV3

ITV4

ITV3
Touch image for
full screen

ITV2+1

Source

More4

UKTV
History

TMF

12 : 26 pm
4:3
E94681

20:00

Select Digital to display the options available
for digital TV.

16:9

E94687

To redisplay the buttons in full screen mode,
touch the screen again.

Note: If no channels have been preset, no
channel names will be displayed on preset
keys.

FINDING TV CHANNELS

Loss of reception
Audio/TV

Zoom

20 : 26

Select Analogue to display the options
available for analogue TV.

Movies Now

21:00 Brideshead Revisited

Next/previous channel
TA

DTV

PTY

DPLII

BBC1

Analogue

Digital

Audio/TV

Settings

No reception

Savage Planet

DTV

PTY

DPL I

ITV3

Analogue

Digital

Settings

Channel list

Source

BBC1

UK TV
Style ITV1

Ch 4

UK TV
People Sky News

CBBC

Channel list
m4
Touch image for
full screen

Sky
Sports N

Source
12 : 26 pm

ITV2+1
More4

Ftn

ITV3

ITV4

TMF

UKTV
History

12 : 26 pm

E94682

E94696

For a variety of reasons, you might lose
reception on the channel you are currently
viewing. This might happen because you have
moved outside the area for a local channel or
because the signal has become blocked by an
obstruction. In either case, the message No
reception will be displayed.

Select the seek buttons on the touch-screen to
find the next/previous TV channel that is
available.
If you are watching in full screen mode, you
must first touch the picture to display the seek
buttons on screen.

331

Television
Channel list

Recalling channels
TP

Audio/TV

DTV

Savage Planet

PTY

Briefly touch the preset key on the
touch-screen to recall the stored channel.

DPLII

ITV3

Analogue

Settings

Digital

Rotate and release the steering wheel selector
control repeatedly to cycle through all the
preset channels.

Channel list
Ftn

Film4
Touch image for
full screen

ITV2+1

Source

More4

ITV3

ITV
ITV4

TELEVISION SETUP

UKTV
History

TMF

TV screen format

12 : 26 pm

You can change the format of the picture
displayed on the touch-screen. The default
format is 16:9 with the additional options of 4:3
and Zoom.

E94697

On the preview screen, select Channel list to
display the channels available. The channel list
will update automatically. While you are
viewing the channel list, it is updated
automatically.

ITV3

Use the arrow keys to scroll through the
channel list.
4:3

Using presets channels
20:00

On each waveband, nine channels can be
memorised using the touch-screen keypad.

Movies Now

Zoom

21:00 Brideshead Revisited

16:9

20 : 26

Storing channels
TP

Audio/TV
Savage Planet

E94702
TA

DTV

PTY

Touch the TV picture to display full screen
mode with control buttons displayed.

DPLII

ITV3

Analogue

Digital

Settings

Select 4:3, Zoom or 16:9, as required. If no
further change is made within five seconds, the
format you have chosen will remain displayed
and the control buttons will disappear.

Channel list

Touch image for
full screen

Source

Film4

Ftn

ITV2

ITV2+

TV3

ITV4

More4

TMF

UKTV
History

12 : 26 pm
E94701

After tuning to a channel, touch and hold (two
seconds) the selected preset button. An
audible signal indicates that the channel is
stored. If the information is broadcast, the
channel name will be displayed.

332

Television
TV settings

TV country
TP

Audio/TV

AM/FM

DTV

PTY

Analogue

Digital

DAB radio

Settings
Ch

BBC1

UK TV
Style ITV1

Portable audio

Ch 4

UK TV
People Sky News

If you move the vehicle to a different country,
you can change the TV country setting to make
sure that you receive the best possible
reception and sound quality. On the Options
menu, the currently selected TV country is
displayed.

DPLII

BBC1

CBBC

Note: If you have already selected a TV format,
then the TV country option is disabled.

Sky
Sports N

12 : 26 pm

For TV country, select Change to display a list
of all countries where TV services are available.
Select the country name to enable it.

E94703

On the TV main menu, select Settings, then
select Options.
Audio/TV

Sound
Bal/Fade
Options

The TV country setting determines the most
appropriate settings for TV broadcasts in your
current location.

Settings

Traffic

Off

TV format

TV country: Change
United Kingdom
TV format
Change
PAL-C

You can change the TV format setting from the
Options menu. If you change the format, then
the TV country setting will be disabled because
there are fewer formats that can apply to more
than one country.

PTY

12 : 26 pm

On the Options menu, the currently selected TV
format is displayed, for example PAL-C. Select
Change to view a complete list of available
formats. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the list.

E94704

Note: You cannot change any TV settings while
the vehicle is moving.

Traffic
The Traffic option detects the presence of local
radio traffic announcements. As soon as an
announcement is received, TV play will be
interrupted. At the end of the announcement,
play will resume as normal.
Select On or Off to enable or disable the Traffic
option.

333

Navigation system
THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

CAUTION
Do not allow moisture, dirt or foreign
objects to enter the slot.

WARNING
In the interests of road safety, only
operate, adjust or view the system
when it is safe to do so.

The navigation DVD player is located behind an
access panel on the left-hand side of the
luggage compartment. The trim panel will need
to be removed (as shown) to access the DVD
player.
• Turn on the vehicle ignition.
• Move the lock/unlock button to the unlock
position (1).
• Press the unload button (2) to eject a DVD,
if one is installed in the DVD player.
• Load the correct Navigation System DVD
with the printed side upwards.
• Move the lock/unlock button to the locked
position. Replace the access cover.

Loading the navigation DVD
Note: Before use, ensure that the navigation
DVD player is loaded with the correct mapping
DVD for your country.

SATELLITE SIGNALS
The system uses signals from the Global
Positioning System (GPS) satellites, which
allow the approximate position of the vehicle to
be calculated. This is combined with
information from vehicle sensors and data
from the Navigation DVD, to establish the true
vehicle position.
The navigation computer then integrates this
data with the information stored on the DVD,
enabling you to plan and follow a route to your
desired destination.

JAG0840

334

Navigation system
Digitised area

Reception of GPS signals

Ensure that you are using the latest version of
the correct DVD for your country.

GPS signals are highly directional and
reception may occasionally be interrupted.
Some examples of situations likely to cause
problems are shown below:
• Inside buildings
• Forest roads between mountains
• Between tall buildings
• Roads under cliffs.

Note: Your Dealer/Authorised Repairer will
have details of how to order DVD updates.
The navigation DVD provided, contains a
digitised street map. Larger cities and
boroughs are completely covered. The regional
and unclassified roads or access roads and the
town centre for smaller towns and boroughs
are included.

The vehicle’s direction and speed sensors will
minimise any adverse effect on the operation of
the navigation system, if this should occur.
Normal operation will resume once the
obstruction has been passed.

One way streets, pedestrian zones, turn bans
and other traffic regulations are taken into
account as far as possible. There may be
discrepancies between the data on the
navigation DVD and the actual local situation,
due to temporary or permanent changes to
road systems and their traffic regulations.
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected, or
if the vehicle has been transported to a new
location on another vehicle (e.g. by trailer or
train), the navigation system may require
several minutes to identify the new position.

Errors in vehicle position
Under certain driving conditions, it is possible
that the vehicle position shown may be
incorrect. Some examples are shown below:
• Negotiating circular ramps in car parks.
• Elevated roads in proximity to other roads.
• Where two roads run parallel to each other.
• Driving on steep roads.
• When the vehicle is transported by ferry or
train.
• After the tyres have been replaced.
• When using snow chains.
• After the vehicle has been rotated on a
turntable.
• After vehicle battery removal or supply
fuse failure.

335

Navigation system
GETTING STARTED
If the screen is already displaying another
function (radio, phone, etc.), touch either the
back arrow or the Home button below the
touch-screen to access the Home Menu.

Home

External

Audio/TV
Climate
hone

20 .5 C 17 .5 C
Left

Right

Navigation

DAB radio

DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra
BBC National DAB
TA FM DAB i Subch

Vehicle
Valet

12:26 pm

JAG1523

Non-European countries only

Select Navigation.

The introduction screen text for non-European
countries is as shown below and not as seen on
the previous illustration:

Caution

Distraction may cause accidents.
Never enter data whilst driving.
Always concentrate on driving
and obey traffic regulations.
See Owners Handbook.

Language

Most functions are inhibited whilst the vehicle
is in motion. Please read the handbook for
operating instructions. Always obey traffic
regulations

Agree

Note: In some countries the front seat
passenger may enter data whilst the vehicle is
in motion.

12 : 26 pm
JOL4500ENG

Read the caution and touch Agree or select
Language if you need to select a different
navigation language.

336

Navigation system
MENU STRUCTURE
The following menu outlines the touch-screen Navigation system menu structure.
Navigation Setup
User Settings
Quick POI Selection
Calibration
Restore Defaults
RDS-TMC
Language Selection
Stored Locations
Memory
Add
Destination/waypoint
Edit
Previous
Delete
Avoid Points
Home
Destination Entry
Address
House
Street
Town
Intersection
Display Map
Search
Save
POI
POI Name
POI
Phone
Postcode
Map
Coordinates
Route Options
Route Preferences
Destination/Waypoint
Detour
Search Condition
Route Preview
Display Route
Calculate
Cancel Guidance
Route Trace
Auto voice guidance off

337

Navigation system
MAIN MENU

USER SETTINGS
From the main navigation menu select
Navigation Setup.

A number of user settings can be made from
this menu.

Navigation Setup

M 4 0

LUTON

User
Settings

RDS-TMC

Quick POI
Selection

FORD
RD

12 : 26 pm
Calibration
Restore
Defaults

Language
Selection

Destination
Entry

12 : 26 pm

Stored
Locations

User Settings

Route
Options
Navigation
Setup

Low Fuel Warning

LUTON

Default

Display Petrol Station POI

Auto Voice
Guidance Off

Text Size on the MAP

Medium

12 : 26 pm

iy traffic restriction

JOL4506ENG

Auto voice guidance

After selecting navigation, the main menu is
displayed showing available functions. For
detailed information on these items:

12 : 26 pm

User Settings

See DESTINATION ENTRY (page 356).

Guidance screen

See ROUTE PREFERENCES (page 347).

Motorway Information

See USER SETTINGS (page 338).

Border guidance

There are additional sections in this handbook
specifically showing Points of Interest (POIs)
and End User Licence Agreements.

Default

Congestion Charge guidance
OK
12 : 26 pm

Select the menu item required.

JOL4547ENG

Note: To view the map without the buttons
showing, touch anywhere on the map display.
To display the buttons, touch Menu.

Select those which you require then touch OK.
Note: Touch a dark blue band to deselect that
feature or a light band to select it.
The individual details must be firstly set in the
navigation setup menu.

338

Navigation system
TURN-BY-TURN NAVIGATION

Saving user preferences to memory

(Message centre guidance)
Menu

Turn-by-turn navigation guidance (displayed in
the message centre) can be turned on or off as
follows:

Destination
Entry
Stored
Locations
Route
Options
Navigation
Setup

From the main navigation menu, select
Navigation Setup, then select User Settings.

LUTONN

Auto Voice
Guidance Off

Scroll through the user settings list until the
Message centre guidance band is displayed.
Touch the band to select/deselect the feature.

12 : 26 pm

If the band is dark blue, then Message centre
guidance is active. If the band is light blue,
Message centre guidance is turned off.

Navigation Setup
User
Settings

RDS-TMC

Quick POI
Selection
Calibration

LANGUAGE SELECTION

Restore
Defaults
Language
Selection

Caution

12 : 26 pm

Distraction may cause accidents.
Never enter data whilst driving.
Always concentrate on driving
and obey traffic regulations.
See Owners Handbook.

User Settings
Low Fuel Warning

Default

Display Petrol Station
Language
Text Size on the MAP

Auto voice guidance

12 : 26 pm

y traffic restriction

Agree

Medium

OK
Language

English

12 : 26 pm

English

JOL4507ENG

US English

Use the scroll arrows (1) to see the options.
Most of these selections are either on or off,
light blue band is not selected, dark blue band
is selected.

German
French
Italian

Touch the line of your choice then OK (2).

12 : 26 pm
JOL4501ENG

From the initial navigation screen, select
Language and select your language.
If necessary, use the scroll arrows to the left of
the list to search up or down.

339

Navigation system
MEASUREMENT UNITS

KEYBOARD LAYOUT

Distances are shown on the screen and given in
voice guidance, either in metric units
(kilometres and metres) or in Imperial units
(miles and yards) and can only be changed
from the vehicle touch-screen menu, not from
the navigation system menu.

The keyboard layout can be changed from a
QWERTY type to ABCDEF type, from the User
Settings screen, accessible from the
Navigation Setup screen.
Menu
Destination
Entry

To change the measurement units, select
Vehicle on the vehicle touch screen, then select
Unit Change.

Stored
Locations
Route
Options
Navigation
Setup

Vehicle
Display set

km km/h 1/100

Preferences

Mls. MPH MPG

0
0

Auto Voice
Guidance Off

12 : 26 pm

Button audio

Vol. presets

LUTON

Navigation Setup
Display language
English UK

User
Settings

Change

RDS-TMC

Quick POI
Selection
Calibration
Restore
Defaults

JOL4657ENG

Language
Selection

To change the units: The unit choices are
selected by touching either km or Mls.

12 : 26 pm

User Settings
Low Fuel Warning

Default

Display Petrol Station POI
Text Size on the MAP

Medium

Key board layout

ABC
OK

12 : 26 pm
JOL4658ENG

Touch the bar to change the keyboard layout,
then touch OK.

340

Navigation system
MAP SPLIT SCREEN
2

GPS

TMC

GPS
M 4 0

TMC

1.2 mi

M 4 0

18
132 mi

FORD
FO D

12 : 26 pm
JOL4497ENG

St James Lane

1. North is up.

11. Repeat last voice instruction.

2. GPS (Global Positioning System) a signal
is not being received.

12. Split screen.

3. TMC (Traffic Message Channel), a signal is
being received.

13. POI - fuel station shown.
• The POI button will not be active if the
zoom level is above 1 km (½ mile).

4. TMC, a signal is not being received.

14. Current street location.

5. Message box.

15. Normal screen.

6. Small compass display which always
indicates North.

16. Screen mode selection.
17. Menu

7. Next direction display.

18. Distance display.

8. Current vehicle position.

19. Zoom

9. TMC Incident (Red Star).
10. Back one screen arrow.

341

Navigation system
MAP DISPLAY ICONS

Example POI (this one
showing a fuel station).

The icons on the split screens are:

GPS

This is only displayed when
a satellite signal is not being
received.

TMC

This icon is displayed when
TMC is selected and a signal
is received.

TMC

When the bar is across the
TMC, then a signal is not
being received and TMC will
not function.

136
mi

This icon shows information
concerning journey distance
and the estimated time
remaining before arriving at
your destination.

It also indicates your journey from your
current position to the next waypoint or to
your destination. In this example the journey
is to your destination, shown in the top of the
icon as the vehicle position arrow and a
pointer towards a red circle.

Touching this icon toggles it
with the N (North) icon (1).
The compass always points
North or else the vehicle
direction arrow always
points to the top of the map.

17
mi

Distance and direction for
the next turn.
2
1.2 mi

If the compass icon (6) is
showing, the vehicle
direction icon (8) is always
to the top of the map
irrespective of where North
is.

This icon shows distance
from your current position,
distance and direction to
way point 2.
This is your zoom button,
enabling you to alter the map
scale. The current level of
zoom is shown between the
two arrows (e.g. 2 miles).
You may also see a zoom
bar on the map.
This icon is toggled with the
compass (6). When this is
showing, North is always to
the top of the map.
This icon is visible when the
navigation screen has been
scrolled away from the
current vehicle position, so
that the vehicle (compass)
icon is no longer visible.
Touch the icon to re-centre
the screen on the current
vehicle position.

Example RDS-TMC Icon
(this one showing incident).
Go back one screen.

Touch to repeat last voice
instruction.

342

Navigation system
Other icons
N

This displays a larger next
junction guidance arrow on the
right screen.

Info

This facility is only available
when travelling on a motorway
and appears automatically to
display the remaining motorway
exits (up to the required exit for
your route) and the exit
numbers.

LUTON
56 MI

Menu
B4100 Banbury Road

12 : 26 pm

Automatically shows the next
junction on the right of the
screen.

Info

M 4 0

LUTON
56 MI

Menu
12 : 26 pm

B4100 Banbury Road

JOL4528ENG

Other icons can be shown to select different
views of the screen(s). Touch the button,
arrowed above, to show the icons for selection.
Show full screen.

Show the split screen.

Show the compass.

List of forthcoming junctions
and turn directions shown on
the split screen.

343

Navigation system
SETTING A DESTINATION

If at any time you make a mistake, use the back
arrow key on the lower right side of the screen
to either go back one letter or number at a time
or repeatedly touch it until the previous screen
is shown.

After touching Agree, the initial map screen is
displayed, now select Menu

The Destination Entry menu provides a choice
of methods for entering a destination. For this
example, the destination address, 81 Austin
Place, Abingdon, Oxfordshire will be used.

M 4 0

LUTONN
m

Destination
FORD
RD

Address

Memory

12 : 26 pm

POI

vious

Postcode

Motorway

Menu
Map

Destination
Entry

Coordinates

Stored
Locations

Navigation
Setup

12 : 26 pm

Route
Options
LUTONN

Search
Area

Home
2

GBR

Address
House
Number

Auto Voice
Guidance Off

Street

12 : 26 pm

Town

JOL4502ENG

Intersection
Display Map

Menu
Destination
Entry

Search
Area

GBR

12 : 26 pm

Stored
Locations

Town Name

Route
Options
KETTERING(KETTERING),N

Navigation
Setup

Clear

LEAMINGTON SPA,WARWIC

Auto Voice
Guidance Off

Nearest 5

NUNEATON(NUNEATON),WA

Last 5

Not Registered

12 : 26 pm
JOL4503ENG

Not Registered

From the Navigation Menu, select Destination
Entry.

Search
Area
GBR

12 : 26 pm
JOL4536ENG

Note: If you wish to view the map without the
buttons showing, touch anywhere on the map
display. To display the buttons, touch Menu.

From the Destination screen select Address
and input the Town name.

344

Navigation system
Input the destination town name by touching
the letters on the display. Only letters which are
highlighted can be used. Delete incorrect
letters by touching the back arrow.

Address
House
Number
Street
Town

Address
Town
Q

W
A

E
S

R
D

X
More

Input Town Name

0-9

T
F

Y
G

H
B

Intersection

****

J
N

K
M

Delete
)

Address
List

Street
Q

Town

E
S

Z
More

0-9

W
A

Address

ABIN
R

D
X

J
N

K
M

)

0-9

A
R

D
X

132
T

F
C

G
V

(

P
L

Delete
)

List

12 : 26 pm

L
Delete

(

GBR

12 : 26 pm

Search
Area

Display Map

P
L

(

ABINGDON,OXFORDSHIRE

Address
List

Street

12 : 26 pm

AUDLETT DRIVE
AUSTIN PLACE

Address
Town

ABINGD

GBR

ABINGDON,OXFORDSHIRE
ABINGDON(ABING

12 : 26 pm

FORDSHIRE

JOL4538ENG

Now enter the street name.

GBR

Once again, only letters which are available will
be highlighted. When the system recognises
enough letters, the street or a list of streets will
be displayed.

12 : 26 pm
JOL4537ENG

Once sufficient letters have been inputted the
system will display all the possible towns.

Select the street you require.

If necessary, use the scroll arrows to the left of
the list to search up or down.
Select (touch) the town you require.

345

Navigation system
N

Address
House
Number

1/8

Street

AUSTIN PLACE

Town

ABINGDON,OXFORDSHIRE

TMC

81 AUSTIN PLAC

Info
Route
Prefs.

A 3 4

Intersection
Search
Area

Display Map

GBR

12 : 26 pm

Destination

Waypoint

JOL4540ENG

Address
House
Number

The map screen showing the route settings and
destination details is displayed.

(1-139):
1

Delete

Touch Route Prefs. (1) to change the route
settings or Destination to start the route
calculation. If a destination is already set, touch
Waypoint to add a waypoint in the journey.

1
OK

0
12 : 26 pm

Address
House
Number

(1-139):81
1

Delete

12 : 26 pm
JOL4539ENG

Enter the house number of the address (if
known) then touch OK to confirm.
If the house number is not known, press OK (1)
- the mid-point of the street is then used as the
destination.
Note: If a list of house number ranges is
displayed, select the applicable range and then
enter the number.

346

Navigation system
ROUTE PREFERENCES

START GUIDANCE
N

Route Preferences

81 AUSTIN PLACE

Major Roads
1/8

Toll Road
A 3 4

Ferry

Searching route....

Restricted Roa
Car Train

Destination has been set as
81 AUSTIN PLACE.

OK
12 : 26 pm

12 : 26 pm

JOL4542ENG

Route Preferences

After touching Destination, the system will
calculate the route.

Major Roads
Toll Road

Ferry
Restricted Road
Car Train

Route 1

TMC

12 : 26 pm

20
M 4 0

LUTON

10
m

JOL4541ENG

Total
12 ml

OXFORD

If Route Prefs. is selected, the route
preferences screen will be displayed. select the
desired option(s) and select OK to confirm.

Change
Route

3 Route

12 : 26 pm

Start

JOL4659ENG

Note: Touch a dark blue band to select that
feature or a light blue band to deselect it.

There is now a choice to select 3 Route,
Change Route or to Start navigation guidance.
N

Route 1

TMC

20
M 4 0

LUTON
O

10
m

Total
12 ml

OXFORD
RD

12 : 26 pm

3 Route

Change
Route

Start

JOL4669ENG

If 3 Route is touched, a choice of three different
routes is displayed on the map.

347

Navigation system
N

BIRM
NGHAM
B
N

Route 1

TMC

2 h 26
128 mi

Quick

min

Route 2
LUTON

2 h 42
383 mi

min

OXFORD
XF

Route 3
LONDON
O

3 h 15
356 mi

43 mi

Info

12 : 26 pm

B4100 Banbury Road

12 : 26 pm

JOL4672ENG

JOL4543ENG

The roads on the map are drawn in three
different colours to highlight each route.

The route will be highlighted on the map, with
an arrow icon showing your current position
and a circle within a red circle showing your
destination. The road name/number is also
listed in the text area below the map.

Select route 1, 2 or 3 by touching the
respective box displayed on the right side of
the map.
N

Drive away, following the voice guidance given
by the system.

Route 1

TMC

miles

DUNMORE ROAD

OXFORD
mi

20
M 4 0

ATON

LUTONN

10
m

Total
12 ml

OXFORD

3 Route

12 : 26 pm

Change
Route

A 3 4

Start

1 5 mi

12 : 26 pm

If Change Route is touched you will be given a
menu to select from. Each menu item is
described in detail this handbook.
N

300

yard

A4183 / OXFORD ROAD

JOL4544ENG

As you approach a junction, in addition to the
voice guidance, an inset on the map will display
an enlarged view of the junction.

Route 1

TMC

CULHAM

1/2

JOL4670ENG

When your destination is reached, voice and
visual confirmation is given.

20
M 4 0

LUTON

10
m

Total
12 ml

OXFORD

12 : 26 pm

3 Route

Change
Route

Start

JOL4671ENG

When you have made your selection, if any,
touch Start.

348

Navigation system
VOICE GUIDANCE
miles

If the panel is deep blue, Auto Voice Guidance
is on, if the panel is light blue then it is muted.
To change the voice guidance setting, touch
the bar, then touch OK (1).

DUNMORE ROAD

OXFORD
mi

Note: The repeat voice guidance key (the
speaker icon) is always available for use.

ATON

A 3 4

1 5 mi

CULHAM

1/2
12 : 26 pm

300

yard

A4183 / OXFORD ROAD

JOL4545ENG

The last voice guidance message can be
repeated by touching the speaker icon in the
lower right of the screen.
To turn voice guidance on or off but maintain
route guidance proceed as follows:
Menu
Destination
Entry
Stored
Locations
Route
Options
Navigation
Setup

LUTON
T

Auto Voice
Guidance Off

12 : 26 pm

User Settings
Low Fuel Warning

Default

Display Petrol Station POI
Text Size on the MAP

Medium

Notifiy traffic restriction
Auto voice guidance

12 : 26 pm
JOL4504ENG

Go to the Navigation Menu, then select Auto
Voice Guidance Off. This takes you to the User
Settings menu.

349

Navigation system
CANCEL GUIDANCE

QUICK POI SELECTION
N

Menu
Destination
Entry

4 mi

Stored
Locations
Route
Options
M 4 0

Navigation
Setup

LUTON
T

Auto Voice
Guidance Off

FORD

12 : 26 pm

Route Options
Route
Preferences

Set
Destination

POI

Quick POI Selection
Display

Petrol

Hotel

Destination /
Waypoint

Calculate

Park

Shop

Detour

Cancel Guidance

All

Golf

Search
Condition

Route Trace

Route

Default

12 : 26 pm

Q-POI Selection
Display
Route

Car
Community

Cancel guidance?

Hotel

Detour
Search
Condition
Route
Preview

12 : 26 pm

Route Options
Route
Preferance
Destination
Waypoint

Cancel

Leisure

Yes

Others

Route Trace

12 : 26 pm

JOL4546ENG

JOL4508ENG

To cancel guidance, touch the Menu button on
the touch-screen, select Route Options and
then Cancel Guidance.

Touch the Map screen to display the POI
button. Touch the POI button. The screen
shows six suggested categories that can be
selected as quick points of interest.
Note: The POI button will not be active if the
zoom level is above 1 km (½ mile).
Select a Quick POI category, or select More to
see further POIs.
The map screen with the POI icon(s) is
displayed. Select the five POIs you wish to see
when the Quick POIs are displayed.

350

Navigation system
CALIBRATION

Position
Calibration

Navigation Setup
1/8

User
Settings

RDS-TMC
A 3 4

Quick POI
Selection
Calibration
Restore
Defaults

Language
Selection

12 : 26 pm

Direction
Calibration

N
Calibration

1/8

A 3 4

Adjust the
Current Position

Select after
tyre change

Position/Direction

Distance
12 : 26 pm
JOL4509ENG

12 : 26 pm
JOL4548ENG

The map showing the heading adjustment
arrows is displayed. Adjust the heading by
touching and using the arrows until the
navigation symbol shows the correct
alignment. Touch OK to confirm the new
heading.

If the vehicle has been moved, for example, by
rail or trailer, the vehicle position/direction may
need to be calibrated.

351

Navigation system
RESTORE SYSTEM DEFAULTS
System Defaults
System defaults will be restored. Please see
handbook for more information on system defauls

Navigation Setup
User
Settings

RDS-TMC

Your average speed is now
a default setting

Quick POI
Selection
Calibration
Restore
Defaults

Average Speed

Language
Selection

Default

12 : 26 pm
JOL4550ENG

12 : 26 pm

If you have made any changes to the system
default settings, speed settings etc. then using
this menu will restore the original settings.

System Defaults
System defaults will be restored. Please see
handbook for more information on system defauls

Average Speed

Default

12 : 26 pm
JOL4656ENG

System Defaults
System defaults will be restored. Please see
handb k f
i f
ti
t
d f

Do you want to reset the average
speed to default value?
Cancel
Average Speed

Yes

Default

12 : 26 pm
JOL4549ENG

352

Navigation system
LANGUAGE SELECTION

MEMORY
From the navigation menu, select Stored
Locations. This enables you to manage
destinations such as, place of work, home,
favourite restaurant or areas to avoid.

Menu
Destination
Entry
Stored
Locations

From the Stored Locations menu you can save
up to 106 memory points, add your home
address and save up to 10 areas to avoid.

Route
Options
Navigation
Setup

LUTON
T N

Auto Voice
Guidance Off

For this example we will store the exit at the
M69 motorway and on to the A5 major road to
Nuneaton.

12 : 26 pm

Navigation Setup
User
Settings

RDS-TMC

Stored Location

Quick POI
Selection

Memory
Points
Destination &
Waypoint

Calibration
Restore
Defaults

Display memory
point icon

Previous
Destination

Language
Selection

Avoid Points

12 : 26 pm

Calculate

Home

Language

14 : 26 pm

English

English
US English

Memory Points
Stored Memory
Points

German

1/106

French
Add

Italian

Edit

12 : 26 pm
JOL4510ENG

Delete

Language change can be made from the map
screen, or as shown above using the
Navigation Setup menu.

14 : 26 pm
JOL4551ENG

Select Memory Points to add a memory point
(stored location).
Touching any of the Stored Locations
submenus, shown in the top illustration above,
allows you to Add, Edit or Delete.
Note: The screen above appears in many of the
navigation submenu selections.
Select Add to store a memory point.

353

Navigation system
To store a memory point
Motorway

For this example we will choose a motorway
exit.

Exit

M69

Please select

Input

A5
Motorway

Input Motorway Name

Entry/Exit

Dist

B4109
Q

P
B4109

L
12 : 26 pm

Z
More

0-9

Delete

(

)

JOL4555ENG

List

Select an exit, for this example choose the A5.

12 : 26 pm

JOL4552ENG

M69,A5

Info

1/8 ml

Motorway

M69

Entry/Exit

M69

1/2

A-Z

OK
Delete

12 : 26 pm
JOL4556ENG

List

The map shows the M69 and the A5. Touch OK.

12 : 26 pm
JOL4553ENG

Motorway

M69

We will choose a motorway exit on the M69.
Touch the motorway letter M, then touch the
numeric key (0 - 9) to change the keypad.

NUNEATON

Enter 69.

M. KEYNES

Exit

Please select

Input

Motorway Entry/Exit
B4109
Motorway

M69

12 : 26 pm

Entrance

JOL4557ENG

Please Select an

Select Nuneaton.

Entrance
Exit
12 : 26 pm
JOL4554ENG

Choose Exit.

354

Name

Navigation system
N

M69,HINCKLEY ROAD

Change area size

TMC

M69

100

M69,HINCKLEY ROAD

A 3 4

400m

Destination has been set as
M69,HINCKLEY ROAD

12 : 26 pm

Reduce

12 : 26 pm

Enlarge

JOL4558ENG
JOL4660ENG

Information on Destination/Waypoint entry is
given elsewhere in this handbook.
See DESTINATION ENTRY (page 356).

Use the Reduce/Enlarge buttons to find the
exact area you wish to avoid. Touch OK.
Edit area to avoid

AVOID POINTS
N

Name
Add area to avoid
Location

1/8 mi

Area

REIGATE
Area to avoid registered at
REIGATE
Searching route...
EPSOM, EPSOM, SURREY
Effect

A 3 4

12 : 26 pm
JOL4560ENG

The area to avoid is stored.

12 : 26 pm
JOL4559ENG

HOME

After a route has been selected you can set a
single or a series of Avoid Points. Touch Avoid
Points and the map is displayed. Using your
finger, touch the map and drag it until the circle
is over the area you wish to avoid.

From the Stored Locations menu select HOME.

Use the zoom bar if required to firstly enlarge
the search area and, after moving the circle to
the general area, zoom to precisely the area to
avoid.

355

Navigation system
DESTINATION ENTRY

Start guidance

Setting a destination

When the system has calculated the route, the
map is displayed.

From the Navigation Menu, select Destination
Entry.

The route will be highlighted on the map, with
an icon showing your current position. The
road name/number is also listed in the text
area.

The Destination Entry menu provides a choice
of methods for entering a destination.

If no destination is set, the Destination key is
highlighted and Waypoint is greyed out (not
selectable).

Destination
Memory

Address
POI

vious

If a destination is set and no waypoint is set
both Destination and Waypoint are
highlighted.

Motorway
Entry/Exit

Postcode
Map
Coordinates
12 : 26 pm

Search
Area

Home
1

Drive away, following the voice guidance given
by the system. As you approach a junction, in
addition to the voice guidance, an inset on the
map will display an enlarged view of the
junction.

GBR

JOL4561ENG

Choosing your route
N

1/8

81 AUSTIN PLACE

When your destination is reached, voice and
visual confirmation is given.

Info
Route
Prefs.

Points of interest
A 3 4

To set a POI as destination or a waypoint.
See POINTS OF INTEREST (page 362).
OK
12 : 26 pm
JOL4562ENG

Once the destination has been calculated
options for your journey can be made by
touching Route Prefs. or by selecting 3 Route
or Change Route.
Information about altering your route
preferences is given earlier in this handbook.
See ROUTE PREFERENCES (page 347).

356

Navigation system
POSTCODE

COORDINATES

Not all countries have this facility. Enter the
postcode of your waypoint or destination from
the keypad. Ensure that any spaces and
punctuation is as used in reality otherwise the
system may not find it.

If you know the coordinates of your destination
they can be entered from this screen. The full
latitude must be entered first before the
longitude coordinates can be entered.
Coordinates

Postcode formats

The following is a list of countries where the
navigation system provides full postcode entry:
• Austria
• Belgium
• Denmark
• France
• Germany
• Italy
• Luxembourg
• Spain
• Switzerland
• United Kingdom

LAT

LONG

Input Latitude

Delete

"
12 : 26 pm
JOL4564ENG

Coordinates
1

The following is a list of countries where the
navigation system provides reduced postcode
entry:
• Netherlands - The four numeric digits only,
e.g. 4817
• Sweden - Only the first three digits of the
postcode can be entered,
e.g. 162 00 must be entered as 162.

LAT

LONG

Delete

Delete
OK

"
12 : 26 pm
JOL4565ENG

Coordinates
1

When the postcode has been entered touch OK.

MAP

LONG

After selecting map, the local area map is
displayed. If the destination or waypoint is not
shown on the map, use the zoom button to
increase the area. By using your finger on the
touch-screen move the circle to the area for
your destination or waypoint, zooming in if
required.

LAT

Delete

Input Longitude

Delete
OK

12 : 26 pm
JOL4566ENG

When the coordinates have been entered,
touch OK.
If the coordinates entered are not contained
within the area covered by the DVD, a message
will be shown. This can also occur if the
incorrect coordinates have been entered.

This location can be stored as a destination or
waypoint.

357

Navigation system
MEMORY
Select Search Point

Points of interest (POI)

Input city centre
Current Position

POI

Map

POI Name
POI near
Phone
Number

12 : 26 pm

Search
Area

GBR
City Centre

12 : 26 pm

City Centre

JOL4567ENG

Select POI Name, POI Near (1) or a Search
Area (2) from the Destination menu screen.

W
A

S
Z

Name

Input POI Name

Input city centre name
E

R
D

T
F

Y
G

U
H

****
I

J
N

K
M

P
L

Delete

****
More

0-9

(

)

List

Category

Town

12 : 26 pm

P
JOL4569ENG

S
Z

D
X

0-9

F
C

G
V

H
B

J
N

K
M
(

Select the POI name, or select a search area
such as a city centre to find the selected POI.

Delete
)

List

12 : 26 pm
JOL4568ENG

After selecting Previous from the menu, the
screen shows a list of stored previous
destinations. Select your destination, by
touching the bar, and the details are displayed
for confirmation.

POI Catergory
Car
Community

Delete

Note: Whilst driving, list scrolling is not active.
You can only choose from the items shown at
the top of the list.

Hotel
Leisure
Others

12 : 26 pm
JOL4570ENG

Input the POI name using the keypad or select
List to see the complete list of POIs.

358

Navigation system
MOTORWAY
Motorway

This enables you to select a motorway exit or
entrance as a destination or as part of a route
itinerary.

Exit

Please select

Input

From Destination Entry select Motorway
Entry/Exit.
Motorway

M69

Dist

B4109
B4109

Input Motorway Name

12 : 26 pm

Entry/Exit

JOL4555ENG

W
A

E
S

Z
More

0-9

T
F

Y
G

U
H

J
N

K
M

The screen gives all of the entrance or exit
junctions on the M69. Choose the A5.

L
Delete

(

)

List

12 : 26 pm

1/8 ml

M69,A5

Info

M69

JOL4552ENG

Enter the motorway name or number. In this
example the M69 is selected with a destination
of Nuneaton, exiting the M69 on to the A5.
Motorway

A5
M69

12 : 26 pm
JOL4556ENG

~
%

A-Z

Entry/Exit
1

1/2

The map showing the selected motorway and
the selected exit junction is displayed.
Delete
List

12 : 26 pm
JOL4553ENG

Motorway Entry/Exit
Motorway

M69

Entrance
Please Select an
Entrance
Exit
12 : 26 pm
JOL4554ENG

Now select an entrance or exit.

359

Navigation system
COMPASS
Motorway
Exit

M69

Please select
12

M. KEYNES

NUNEATON

Info

Input
4

M 4 0

B4109

LUTON

Name
56 mi

12 : 26 pm
JOL4557ENG

B4100 Banbury Road

12 : 26 pm

Now Nuneaton is selected by touching the bar.
N

Destination

M69,HINCKLEY ROAD

Lat N52' 29' 58'
Long W1'
:
26' 48'

M69

M69,HINCKLEY ROAD

E
Current
Lat N52' 29' 58'

56 mi

Destination has been set as
M69,HINCKLEY ROAD

Menu
12 : 26 pm

12 : 26 pm

Long W1' 26' 48'

S
B4100 Banbury Road

B4100 Banbury Road

JOL4558ENG

JOL4571ENG

The destination has now been set and the route
is calculated.

Select the compass icon and the compass will
be displayed.

360

Navigation system
Destination

Destination

Lat N52' 29' 58'

Lat N52' 29' 58'
Long W1' 26' 48'

Long W1'
:
26' 48'

N
E

Current

56 mi

Menu
12 : 26 pm

Current
Lat N52' 29' 58'

Lat N52' 29' 58'
Long W1' 26' 48'

56 mi

B4100 Banbury Road

12 : 26 pm

B4100 Banbury Road

Long W1'
:
26' 48'
B4100 Banbury Road

B4100 Banbury Road

JOL4572ENG

JOL4573ENG

The illustration above shows the map display
always facing North. The car (1) position faces
its compass direction of travel and item (2) is
the destination or next waypoint.

In this illustration the car (1) position faces
upwards to the top of the map and item (2) is
the destination or next waypoint.

361

Navigation system
POINTS OF INTEREST
POI Category

The Navigation System DVD contains
information about a large number of points of
interest (POI). There are many categories of
POI, including fuel stations, restaurants,
railway stations and hospitals.

Category

All
Airport
Bowling centre
Bus station

This chapter explains how to select a specific
POI. A selected POI can be set as a destination.

Car Rental
12 : 26 pm
JOL4586ENG

POI

Use the scroll arrows to change pages.

POI Name

Some POIs are sub-categorised, e.g. selecting
Community will be further divided into:
• Community Centre.
• Exhibition Centre.
• Hospital.
• Park & Recreation.
• Town Hall

POI near
Phone
Number

Search
Area

GBR

12 : 26 pm
JOL4584ENG

From the Destination Entry menu, select POI.
Name

Input POI Name

Category

Town
Q

W
A

E
S

Z
More

0-9

R
D

T
F

C
,

When the appropriate POI has been selected,
the system begins to search for a route to that
POI.

****

Y
G

U
H

J
N

K
M
(

Note: POI icons can only be displayed up to the
1 km (½ mile) zoom level.

P
L

For this example, choose Petrol Station and 3D
Petrol.

Delete
)

List
Name

12 : 26 pm
JOL4585ENG

Category

Town

Input the POI name, for example Petrol to
display fuel stations on the map, or touch List
for a list of POIs.

3D PETROL
A D PETROL
ACTUAL PETROL

Note: If entering a POI name results in too
many matches being listed, try entering the
town name first. If you do not know the name
of the POI you want, try selecting a POI
category.

AMBER PETROL
12 : 26 pm
JOL4587ENG

Alternatively, choose Category to see all
categories of POI and make your selection.

362

Navigation system
N

POI ICON DISPLAY
3D PETROL

Info

After selecting a category, the map display
shows the location of each POI in the selected
category, indicated by the appropriate POI
icon.

Route
Prefs.

1/8 mi

For information about a particular POI, touch
the desired POI icon.

List of icons

12 : 26 pm
JOL4588ENG

Shopping
N

3D PETROL

Shopping Centre
Travel

Destination has been set as
3D PETROL.
12 : 26 pm
JOL4589ENG

Once the POI has been selected the route is
determined. Touch Route Prefs. to change the
route settings, or touch OK to start the route
calculation.

Park & Ride

Railway Station

The map screen showing the destination
details and route settings is displayed.

Tourist
Information
Airport

Bus Station

Ferry Port

Motorway Service
Station

363

Navigation system
Hotel

Leisure

Car
Bowling Centre

Casino
Car Rental
Cinema
Jaguar Dealer
Golf Course
Parking
Ice Skating Rink
Petrol Station
Music Club

Community

Ski Resort
Community Centre
Sports Centre
Exhibition Centre
Tourist Attraction
Hospital
Vineyard
Others

Park & Recreation

Town Hall
Historical
Monument

364

Navigation system
CANCELLING POI ICON DISPLAY

Others continued

If the display of POI icons is no longer required,
they can be turned off as follows:
• Touch the map screen to display the
additional buttons.
• Touch POI Off to cancel the display of POI
icons on the map.

Museum

Theatre

JAGUAR DEALERSHIP LOCATIONS
Details of Jaguar Dealerships are held on the
Navigation System DVD as a points of interest
(POI) category. Certain Dealers may be located
in areas that are not fully mapped on the DVD.
If a route is set to one of these Dealers,
guidance may only be possible to the nearest
town centre; a warning message will be
displayed.

Town Centre

University/College
Restaurant

If Jaguar Dealerships (or certain other
categories, such as airports) are selected, they
will be displayed across all search areas.
All Restaurants

ENTRY BY TOWN
If a town name is entered first, the points of
interest listed will be restricted to that town.
• From the Input POI Name screen, touch
Town.
• Enter the town name required.
• Touch List to display the list of possible
towns.
• Select the town required.

Chinese

Fast Food

French

The Input POI screen is displayed again.
• Enter the POI name required.

Italian

ENTRY BY CATEGORY

Japanese

If a POI category is selected first, the points of
interest listed will be restricted to that category.

Other Restaurants

365

Navigation system
OTHER SELECTION METHODS

All button

Town centres

The All button returns to searching all
categories after selecting one category.

The POI database holds town centre locations.
To select a town centre, proceed as follows:
• From the Input POI Name screen, enter the
town name required in the Name text area
(do not select the Town button).
• Touch List to display the list of matches.
• For the town centre, select the entry
showing the town name only.

POI ENTRY MESSAGES
While searching for points of interest, you may
encounter one of the following messages:
1. There are no POIs in this Category.
2. No POIs Found in this Town.

QUICK POI SELECTION

Note: In some cases, more than one town
centre location may be listed.

CATEGORIES AND SUB-CATEGORIES

4 mi

The POI database is divided into a number of
categories. Each main category is further
divided into a number of sub-categories.

M 4 0

LUTON
T

The first entry in the list of Restaurant
sub-categories, is ALL. This selects all of the
Restaurant sub-categories.

FORD

12 : 26 pm

Set
Destination

POI

Quick POI Selection

To narrow the search, touch the Town button.
This will display the alpha keyboard, to allow
the desired town name to be entered.

Petrol

Search area
When searching the database, only points of
interest in the current search area are included,
except for the sub-categories marked All
search areas in the POI category list.

Default

Hotel

Park

Shop

All

Golf

12 : 26 pm

Q-POI Selection

List button

Car

The List button becomes active, when the
characters entered reduce the possible entries
to a small enough number (the list is displayed
automatically when the number of entries
reduces to four or less).

Community
Hotel
Leisure
Others

You can also select List (when active) without
entering a POI name. All the relevant points of
interest will be displayed, e.g. in a selected
town or category.

12 : 26 pm
JOL4508ENG

A total of five POIs can be stored.

366

Navigation system
Changing the Quick POI Categories

MEMORY POINTS

The five default Quick POI categories can be
changed as required.
• At the Map screen, touch anywhere on the
map.
• Touch the POI button.
• Select the Quick POI category that you
wish to replace.

The procedure for using memory points is
functionally the same as for using the Quick
Points of Interest.
The map display shows the location of all
stored memory points in view.
• For information about a particular memory
point, touch the desired memory point
icon.

The screen shows the full list of POI categories.
• Select the new category required from the
list.

After touching the memory point icon, the
name of the selected memory point is
displayed at the top of the screen.

The screen shows the new selection of
category icons.
• Repeat for another category icon if
required.
• Touch OK to apply the new settings.

Note: Unlike POIs, memory points are
displayed at all zoom levels.

Memory point details
•

SELECTING A QUICK POI CATEGORY
•

Touch Info. to display the details of the
selected memory point.

The details include Icon, Name, Position and
Tel.

Touch the Initial Map screen, then touch
the POI button. The screen shows six
suggested categories that can be selected
as quick points of interest.

The telephone number can be called by
touching the telephone button, if a Jaguar
telephone is fitted.

Note: The POI button will not be active if the
zoom level is below 1 km (½ mile).
• Select a Quick POI category.

The memory point details can be edited.

The map screen is displayed with POI icons.

Other categories
You can also select from the complete list of
POI categories.
• Touch List Categories and select a
category from the list displayed.

Local POI search
This selects the points of interest in all
categories within 32 kilometres (20 miles) of
the vehicle.
• Touch the All Local POIs button.

367

Navigation system
RDS-TMC OVERVIEW

The driver is informed of a traffic event as

Radio Data System-Traffic Message Channel
(RDS-TMC) is a feature that announces traffic
hold-ups on your route, as broadcast by radio
stations that transmit TMC information.

follows:
• A TMC Event icon shown on the map at the
location of the event.
• Text can be displayed showing the details
of each occurrence which can be selected
either by touching the screen icon or from
the traffic information list.
• Voice guidance will describe the event on
the route. This information will be repeated
when the repeat switch is selected.
• Dynamic route guidance, which calculates
an alternative route when the system
receives the traffic event warning affecting
the route currently set in the navigation
system.
• Traffic event list shows all events sorted by
road name/ distance on your selected
route in a straight line or along your actual
route.

Touch the RDS-TMC button on the Navigation
Menu to access the TMC menu.
Touch the Change button - the system begins
a search of all radio stations being received in
your locality.
The tuner will scan the FM frequency once and
this may take a few minutes. Searching will be
displayed while scanning is in progress.
When a station is found which is offering TMC
information, the RDS name is shown on the list
and the search for more stations will continue.
Note: In the United Kingdom the station giving
TMC information is Classic FM.
You can stop the search at any time and select
any stations presented on the list, by touching
the Change button or the button next to the
desired station in the list.

The information regarding the hold-up is
maintained and updated even if the vehicle
crosses into another country.

RDS-TMC display

RDS-TMC icons

When a TMC signal is received the icon in the
top left of the screen will appear gray. If a TMC
signal is not being received, the icon will be
shown with a bar through it.

Any traffic event (broadcast on TMC) in your
area, will be displayed as a warning icon on the
map and an alert may be displayed as a
message giving the road number(s) and
between which junctions the hold-up or event
occurs. Voice guidance will also inform you of
the hold-up when an event icon exists on the
current route.

The system will inform the driver of any
roadworks, narrow road, contraflow,
accidents, slippery road, diversion,
information, parking information, congestion
or other hazard.

This data is stored in the system for up to of 30
minutes.
The colour of the TMC icon changes in order to
show the type and priority of a TMC event. The
background colour of the icon returns to
normal when there is no longer an event or
hold-up, or if any re-route instructions are
calculated.

368

Navigation system
The TMC Event icons appear on the navigation
map display to indicate the location and nature
of a TMC event.

Level 2 TMC event icons
Other Hazard (Yellow)

TMC Event icons will appear on the map, even
if the event does not occur on your route.
Roadworks (Pink)

Level 1 TMC event icons
Incident (Red star)

Narrow Road (Pink)

Moving Tailback Ahead (Red
arrow)

Contraflow (Pink)

Moving Tailback Both
Carriageways (Red double arrow)

Accidents (Pink)

Slow Traffic Ahead (Yellow arrow)

Slippery Road (Yellow)

Slow Traffic Both Carriageways
(Yellow double arrow)

Diversion (Yellow)

Information (Yellow circle)

Parking Information (Grey)

Incident (Yellow star)

Information (Gray)

Stationary Traffic Ahead
(Red arrow pointing on line)

Congestion (Red)

Stationary Traffic Both
Carriageways (Red double arrow
pointing on line)
Note: Single arrow icons indicate that the
traffic event affects traffic travelling in the
direction of the arrow. Double arrows indicate
that both directions are affected.

369

Navigation system
USING TMC

Traffic on route

Dynamic route guidance

RDS-TMC

Dynamic route guidance will calculate an
alternative route to avoid a traffic event when
the system receives an event warning.
The system calculates a new route for all
sections. However, if any way points are set,
the system calculates for the next way point.
If the event on route is serious (closed road) or
if the new route is shorter than the current one
and the current one was not recalculated within
the last 5 minutes, then a message to confirm
the new route will be displayed. This pop-up
message will be displayed for 10 minutes and
if the new route is not rejected, then the vehicle
will follow the new route.

Show TMC
Information
Voice
Guidance
Country

Surveillance
Setting
Auto avoid
traffic

Auto

Manual

Station

Change

Traffic on
Route

ll Traffic
Events

United Kingdom

12 : 26 pm

Traffic on route
Slippery Road
B214

Map
57 km

Detail

21 km

Detail

Accident
A420

Map

Road Works

Voice guidance

M69

While voice guidance is on, the system will give
audio guidance for traffic events on route.

19 km

Detail

12 : 26 pm

If the on route icon is touched, with audio
guidance switched on, the audio message will
be repeated. If the icon is grey, the audio
guidance function has been switched off and
touching the icon will not repeat any message.

JOL4655ENG

While the vehicle is on the guidance route, the
system will generate a traffic event list for that
route when you touch the Traffic on Route
screen button.

After the vehicle passes the event, you will be
notified of the next nearest event on route.

If a route is calculated but the vehicle is not on
the highlighted route, a pop-up is displayed
with an error message.

Audio messages are not given if you are in that
event.

370

Navigation system
The basic information screen shows:
• Road number.
• Brief information of the event.
• Direction and distance to the start point of
the event (in a straight line).

On route event icon
The on route event icon will show a traffic event
as a line of stationary vehicles with the distance
to the start point of the event. Touch the icon to
repeat audio guidance (when audio guidance is
switched on).

Up to 20 events can be shown in distance order
from the current vehicle position. If the event
list is longer than three the remaining can be
seen by scrolling the screen.

The icon will be displayed on the map with the
following conditions:
• The map scale is between 50 metres and
4 km (1/32 mile and 2 miles).
• RDS-TMC setting is on and there are some
events on the route.

When the Map button is touched, the map
screen will display the place of the event start
point. The scale is always 500 metres (1/4
mile). If the event has finished, the map screen
will still be displayed when the Map button is
touched but no event icon will be shown on the
map.

The on route event icon will show the nearest
event on the route and the distance to the
event.

All traffic events

When the Detail button is touched, the system
shows the detail of that event.

When the All Traffic Events button on the
RDS-TMC setting screen is touched, all traffic
events are listed by road name. If an event
occurs on more than one road of your route,
the system will list it with the first road name.
Each event is seen as text information from the
menu.
While the list is being displayed the information
is not updated.
When you select a road the system shows
traffic events, if there are any, with the basic
information.
Note: The maximum text length displayed is 24
characters.

371

Navigation system
SURVEILLANCE SETTING
Stored Locations

If you frequently travel through an area that is
subject to slow or stationary traffic, it is
possible to set a surveillance area which can be
viewed at any time.

Surveillance Point 1

Delete

Surveillance Point 2

Delete

Surveillance Point 3

Add

Up to three areas can be set for this
surveillance.
RDS-TMC radio data for the selected
surveillance area must be available and TMC
must be enabled in order to show TMC events
in this area

12 : 26 pm
JOL4663ENG

Select Add.
Add Surveillance Point?

Navigation Setup
User
Settings

Memory

Address

RDS-TMC

Quick POI
Selection

POI

Calibration

Postcode

Motorway
Entry/Exit

Restore
Defaults

Map

Language
Selection

Coordinates

Search
Area

Home

GBR

12 : 26 pm

JOL4661ENG

JOL4664ENG

From the Navigation Setup menu select
RDS-TMC.

Choose any of the methods above to select a
surveillance area.
N

RDS-TMC
Show TMC
Information

Surveillance
Setting

Voice
Guidance

Auto avoid
traffic

Country

Auto

Manual

Station

Change

Traffic on
Route

All Traffic
Events

TMC

B4100 Banbury Rd

Info

1/8 ml
A 3 4

United Kingdom

12 : 26 pm

JOL4662ENG

JOL4665ENG

If you select Map you can position the area
accurately by zooming in using the binoculars
icon (arrowed).

Select Surveillance Setting.

372

Navigation system
N

TMC

M69,A5

Info
Surveillance

1/8 ml

Surveillance Point1
Surveillance Point2
Surveillance Point3
mi

Cancel
12 : 26 pm
JOL4666ENG

Choose to save as any one of the three choices.
N

TMC

Surveillance Point 1

1/4 ml
A 3 4

12 : 26 pm

B4100 Banbury Road

E95902

JOL4667ENG

To cancel a voice control session, press and
hold the switch on the steering wheel.

The map will display the saved area.

JaguarVoice allows many of the navigation
features to be activated by voice commands.

The voice control system understands
pre-defined commands, which need to be
spoken word for word. A list of all navigation
voice commands is given in the following table.

The system is controlled by the switch on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.

Nametags

USING VOICE CONTROL

Briefly press the switch on the steering wheel
(arrowed) and after the tone, speak one of the
system commands.

Information on nametags is given earlier in this
handbook. See VOICE CONTROL (page 69).

In response to your command, the system will
repeat your instruction and Listening will
appear in the message centre. The system will
either carry out your command or ask for more
information. If the system asks for more
information, wait until the tone has sounded
before replying.

A number of responses by the navigation voice
system are reinforced by text messages
appearing in the message centre display.

Message centre messages

373

Navigation system
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS
Voice command
NAVIGATION HELP
NAVIGATION VOICE GUIDANCE
ON
NAVIGATION VOICE GUIDANCE
OFF
NAVIGATION SHOW MAP
NAVIGATION SHOW TURN LIST
GUIDANCE
NAVIGATION SHOW CURRENT
POSITION
NAVIGATION SHOW
DESTINATION
NAVIGATION SHOW ENTIRE
ROUTE MAP
NAVIGATION SHOW ARROW
GUIDANCE
NAVIGATION SHOW
CROSSROADS GUIDANCE

NAVIGATION SHOW
MOTORWAY GUIDANCE
NAVIGATION DUAL MAP MODE
NAVIGATION SINGLE MAP
MODE
NAVIGATION SHOW NORTH UP
NAVIGATION SHOW HEADING
UP
NAVIGATION SHOW RIGHT MAP
NORTH UP
NAVIGATION SHOW RIGHT MAP
HEADING UP
NAVIGATION ZOOM IN
MAXIMUM

System response
Gives spoken information about the navigation commands.
Switches on voice guidance for a set route.
Switches off voice guidance for a set route.
Displays the navigation map on the touch-screen
Lists forthcoming junctions and turn directions on the split
screen.
Shows current position of vehicle on the map.
Shows a route preview and allows you to fast forward to the
end.
Shows complete route.
Changes right-hand side of split screen to show arrow
guidance directions. See COMPASS (page 360).
If there is a crossroads within 500 metres (1640 feet), the
right-hand side of split screen changes to show crossroad
guidance directions. If there are no crossroads, a voice
message There are no nearby crossroads on the set route
will be given.
When travelling on a motorway, changes right-hand side of
split screen to show the remaining motorway exits, and
their numbers, up to the required exit for the route.
Displays split screen view.
Shows full screen map.
Changes orientation of the map so that North is at the top of
the screen.
Changes orientation of the map so that the vehicle is always
heading up the screen. A compass in the top left-hand
corner will point to North.
Changes orientation of the right-hand map so that North is
at the top of the screen.
Changes orientation of the right-hand map so that the
vehicle is always heading up the screen.
Displays the map (left-hand map in split screen mode) at
the maximum magnification.

374

Navigation system
Voice command
NAVIGATION ZOOM OUT
MAXIMUM
NAVIGATION RIGHT MAP ZOOM
IN MAXIMUM
NAVIGATION RIGHT MAP ZOOM
OUT MAXIMUM
NAVIGATION ZOOM LEVEL
(NUMBER)

NAVIGATION ZOOM IN
(NUMBER)

NAVIGATION ZOOM OUT
(NUMBER)

NAVIGATION RIGHT MAP ZOOM
IN (NUMBER)

NAVIGATION RIGHT MAP ZOOM
OUT (NUMBER)

NAVIGATION GO HOME

NAVIGATION GO TO NAME

NAVIGATION GO TO PREVIOUS
DESTINATION

System response
Displays the map (left-hand map in split screen mode) at
the minimum magnification.
In split screen mode, displays the right-hand map at the
maximum magnification.
In split screen mode, displays the right-hand map at the
minimum magnification.
Allows you to specify the level of magnification of the map
(left-hand map in split screen mode). A selection of
between 1 and 13 can be made, e.g. voice command
Navigation zoom level eleven, will set the magnification
level accordingly.
Allows you to zoom in on the map (left-hand map in split
screen mode) according to the user specified increment (a
selection of between 1 and 12 can be made). If the current
zoom level is five, the voice command Navigation zoom in
two, will cause the system to zoom in to level three.
Allows you to zoom out on the map (left-hand map in split
screen mode) according to the user specified increment (a
selection of between 1 and 12 can be made). If the current
zoom level is five, the voice command Navigation zoom out
two, will cause the system to zoom out to level seven.
Allows you to zoom in on the right-hand map. A selection of
between 1 and 12 can be made, e.g. If the current zoom
level is five, the voice command Navigation zoom in two,
will cause the system to zoom in to level three.
Allows you to zoom in on the right-hand map. A selection of
between 1 and 12 can be made, e.g. If the current zoom
level is five, the voice command Navigation zoom out two,
will cause the system to zoom out to level seven.
Sets the destination to your currently set Home. Home
location can be stored using the Stored locations option,
available from the Navigation menu on the touch-screen.
The system will respond with Name please and you can
specify a previously stored nametag either as a destination
or a waypoint.
Allows you to specify a previously stored destination either
as a new destination or a waypoint. If you are following
route guidance, and this is the last destination set, this will
be your current destination.

375

Navigation system
Voice command
NAVIGATION GO TO PREVIOUS
STARTING POINT

System response
Allows you to specify the start point of a previous route
either as a destination or a waypoint. If you are following
route guidance, and this is the last start point set, this will
be your current start point.
Displays the waypoint asked for, provided it has been set.

NAVIGATION SHOW (NEXT, 1ST,
2ND, 3RD, 4TH, 5TH) WAYPOINT
NAVIGATION DELETE NEXT
Deletes the next waypoint from the route and recalculates
WAYPOINT
the route if appropriate.
NAVIGATION DETOUR
This command prompts the navigation system to propose a
detour in the route being followed. This takes effect from
your current position and the length of the detour can be
specified in Route Preferences. See ROUTE PREFERENCES
(page 347).
NAVIGATION DETOUR ENTIRE This command prompts the navigation to offer one of the
ROUTE
alternative routes calculated for the current destination.
NAVIGATION CANCEL GUIDANCE Cancels route guidance.
NAVIGATION AVOID MAJOR
Ensures that routes are calculated avoiding major roads.
ROADS
NAVIGATION PREFER MAJOR
Ensures that major roads are included when routes are
ROADS
calculated.
NAVIGATION AVOID TOLL
Ensures that routes are calculated avoiding toll roads.
ROADS
NAVIGATION PREFER TOLL
Ensures that toll roads are included when routes are
ROADS
calculated.
NAVIGATION AVOID FERRIES
Ensures that routes are calculated avoiding ferries.
NAVIGATION PREFER FERRIES Ensures that ferries are included when routes are
calculated.
NAVIGATION PLAY DIRECTORY Prompts a voice message giving all the navigation
nametags. This can be interrupted by pressing the voice
control button and, after the tone, saying REPLAY, GO TO,
DELETE or CANCEL.
NAVIGATION DELETE
Delete the entire directory of navigation nametags.
DIRECTORY
NAVIGATION MARK CURRENT Marks the vehicle’s current position as a memory point.
POSITION
NAVIGATION DYNAMIC
Switches on dynamic route guidance.
GUIDANCE ON
NAVIGATION DYNAMIC
Switches off dynamic route guidance.
GUIDANCE OFF

376

Navigation system
Voice command
NAVIGATION SHOW TRAFFIC
INFORMATION
NAVIGATION HIDE TRAFFIC
INFORMATION
NAVIGATION STORE NAME

NAVIGATION (POI)

NAVIGATION POI OFF

System response
Displays Traffic information.
Hides Traffic information.
Allows you to store nametags for waypoints or
destinations. Each nametag must meet the following
criteria:
• Be spoken in more than 0.4 seconds, but less than four
seconds.
• Not similar to any other nametag.
• Once stored, you must always speak the name in the
same manner as during storage.
If the criteria is not met, the system will supply one of the
following feedback:
• Name too short, new name please.
• Name too long, new name please.
• (nametag) sounds too much like (another nametag).
• The names entered are different, new name please.
Provided that the map magnification is at 1 km (0.6 mile) or
less, this voice command allows you to select up to five
Points Of Interest (POI) from the list below.
• Petrol
• Parking
• Town centre
• Hotel
• Hospital
• Golf course
• Shopping
• Restaurant
• I’m hungry
• Tourist information
• Jaguar (Dealer) - not Australia
• Motorway services
If more then five POIs are selected, a feedback message of
Navigation POI off will be heard. Clear your current
selection to allow further POIs to be displayed.
Hides all the POI icons.

377

Navigation system
ORDNANCE SURVEY DATA

Limitation of liability

Please read this agreement carefully before
using the Navigation System.

Ordnance Survey does not warrant or
represent that any of the Code-Point data is
accurate, error-free or suitable for your
purposes. In no event shall OS or the supplier
of the Navigation System using the OS
Code-Point data be liable for any
consequential, special, incidental or indirect
damages for any direct or indirect loss of
revenue, profits, business, data, or use,
incurred by you or any third party arising out of
your use of the OS Code-Point data, whether in
an action in contract or tort (including
negligence and breach of statutory duty) or
otherwise, even if OS or the supplier of the
Navigation System has been advised of the
possibility of such damages. In any event, OS’s
liability for direct damages is limited to the
price of the copy of the OS Code-Point data.
Nothing in these licence terms shall operate to
exclude or limit any liability which cannot be
excluded or limited by law.

This is a licence agreement to use the
Ordnance Survey (OS) Code-Point data
incorporated in the Navigation System. By
using this Code-Point data you accept and
agree to all the terms and conditions below.

Licence grant
OS grants you a non-exclusive licence to use
your copy of the OS Code-Point data for your
personal use solely as part of the Navigation
System. You may transfer the licence to a
subsequent purchaser of the vehicle with
which the Navigation System is supplied,
provided that the purchaser agrees to abide by
each of the terms of this licence.

THE DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY AND
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY, SET FORTH IN
THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT AFFECT OR
PREJUDICE YOUR STATUTORY RIGHTS
WHERE YOU HAVE ACQUIRED THE
DATABASE OTHERWISE THAN IN THE
COURSE OF A BUSINESS.

Licence Terms
These licence terms are governed by English
Law and are subject to the exclusive
jurisdiction of the English courts.

Limitations of use
The OS Code-Point data is restricted for use in
the specific system for which it was created.
Except to the extent explicitly permitted by
mandatory applicable laws, you may not
extract or re-utilise any part of the contents of
the OS Code-Point data, not reproduce, copy,
modify, adapt, translate, disassemble,
decompile, or reverse engineer any portion of
the OS Code-Point data.

378

Navigation system
NAVTEQ CORPORATION

Disclaimer of warranty

Please read this agreement carefully before
using the Navigation System.

NAVTEQ Corporation does not warrant or make
any representations regarding, either express
or implied, regarding the use or results of the
use of the DATABASE in terms of its
correctness, accuracy, reliability, or otherwise
and expressly disclaims any implied warranties
of quality, performance, merchantability,
fitness for a particular purpose or
non-infringement.

This is a licence agreement for your copy of the
Navigable Map Database, (the ‘DATABASE’)
originally made by NAVTEQ Corporation), used
in the Navigation System. By using this
DATABASE you accept and agree to all the
terms and conditions below.

Ownership
The DATABASE and the copyrights and
intellectual property or neighbouring rights
therein are owned by NAVTEQ Corporation or
its licensors.

NAVTEQ Corporation does not warrant that the
DATABASE is or will be error-free. No oral or
written information or advice provided by
NAVTEQ Corporation, your supplier or any
other person shall create a warranty.

Licence grant

Limitation of liability

NAVTEQ Corporation grants you a
non-exclusive licence to use your copy of the
DATABASE for your personal use or for use in
your business’ internal operations. This license
does not include the right to grant
sub-licenses.

The price of the DATABASE does not include
any consideration for assumption of risk of
consequential, indirect or unlimited direct
damages which may arise in connection with
your use of the DATABASE.
Accordingly, in no event shall NAVTEQ
Corporation or supplier of the navigation
system using the DATABASE (‘Supplier’) be
liable for any consequential, special, incidental
or indirect damages, including without
limitation, loss of revenue, data, or use,
incurred by you or any third party arising out of
your use of the DATABASE, whether in an
action in contract or tort or based on a
warranty, even if NAVTEQ Corporation or the
Supplier has been advised of the possibility of
such damages. In any event, NAVTEQ
Corporation’s liability for direct damages is
limited to the price of your copy of the
DATABASE.

Limitations of use
The DATABASE is restricted for use in the
specific system for which it was created.
Except to the extent explicitly permitted by
mandatory applicable laws, you may not
extract or re-utilise substantial parts of the
contents of the DATABASE, not reproduce,
copy, modify, adapt, translate, disassemble,
decompile, or reverse engineer any portion of
the DATABASE.

Transfer
You may not transfer the DATABASE to third
parties, except together with system for which
it was created, provided that you do not retain
any copy of the DATABASE, and provided that
the transferee agrees to all terms and
conditions of this agreement.

379

Navigation system
THE DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY AND
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY, SET FORTH IN
THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT AFFECT OR
PREJUDICE YOUR STATUTORY RIGHTS
WHERE YOU HAVE ACQUIRED THE
DATABASE OTHERWISE THAN IN THE
COURSE OF A BUSINESS. Some states and
laws do not allow the exclusion of implied
warranties, so the above disclaimer may not
apply to you.

Utilization of the DATABASE is subject to the
restrictions specified in the ‘Rights in Technical
Data and Computer Database’ clause at DFARS
252.227–7013, or the equivalent clause for
non-defence agencies. Manufacturer of the
DATABASE of North America is NAVTEQ
Corporation, 10400 W. Higgins Road, Suite
400, Rosemont, Illinois 60018, USA.

EUROPEAN DECLARATION OF
CONFORMITY

WARNING
The DATABASE reflects reality as
existing before you received the
DATABASE and it comprises data and
information from government and other
sources, which may contain errors and
omissions. Accordingly, the DATABASE may
contain inaccurate or incomplete information
due to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, and due to the nature of the
sources used. The DATABASE does not
include or reflect information on - inter alia neighbourhood safety; law enforcement;
emergency assistance; construction work;
road or lane closures; vehicle or speed
restrictions; road slope or grade; bridge
height, weight or other limits; road or traffic
conditions; special events; traffic congestion;
or travel time.

Hereby, DENSO CORPORATION
declares that this DN-NS-019 is in
compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Government end users
If the DATABASE is for a region of North
America and is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United States
government, the DATABASE is licensed with
‘limited rights’.

380

Index
A

Automatic speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic speed limiter (ASL)
principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JaguarDrive selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
limp-home mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
message centre display . . . . . . . . . . . .
sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autostore control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . .
connecting an auxiliary device . . . . . . .
connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connecting more than one device . . . .
portable audio overview . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary input devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
displaying track information. . . . . . . . .
playing a portable device . . . . . . . . . . .
portable device settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
searching a portable device . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ABS driving hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Adaptive dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Adjusting the headlamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 67
entry and exit mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Advanced emergency brake assist . . . . . 165
AFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
rear vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Airbag labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Airbag service information . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Airbag warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Alarm
trigger information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Alarm sensor override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Approach lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Arming the alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
alarm indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
battery-backed sounder . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
full alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
perimeter alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
ASL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Audible warnings and indicators . . . . . . . 104
Audio
portable interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Audio control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 272
sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Audio controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
steering wheel controls. . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Audio unit overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
audio controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
sound system overview . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Autolamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
exit delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
windscreen wiper detection . . . . . . . . . 76
Automatic climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
touch-screen operation. . . . . . . . . . . . 119

167
167
137
139
137
143
141
143
140
139
274
299
300
301
300
301
299
302
303
302
306
304
125

B
Battery
charging faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Battery care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Battery Monitoring System (BMS) . . . . 213
Battery charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Battery warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Blind spot monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
sensor blockage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
system fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Block heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Bonnet lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Booster cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Booster cushions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Brake fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
checking the fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
topping up the fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Brakes
brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
pad wear warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
381

Index
Bulb changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
direction indicator bulb (front) . . . . . . .
headlamp unit bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
high level brake lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
number plate lamp bulb . . . . . . . . . . . .
rear lamp bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
side lamp bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
side repeater lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

83
84
83
86
86
85
85
85
87

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
child restraint check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Cleaning the alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Cleaning the exterior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
bird droppings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
cleaning the rear screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
glass surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
removing grease and tar. . . . . . . . . . . . 189
underbonnet cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
using an automatic wash . . . . . . . . . . . 188
washing the vehicle paintwork . . . . . . . 187
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
airbag module covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
carpet and mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
cloth and fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
instrument pack, clock, and audio
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
removing stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Climate seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
backrest ventilation only. . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
cooled ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
heated ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
setting the clock as the screensaver. . . 124
Compact disc display options . . . . . . . . . . 296
Compact disc pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Compact disc player
CD compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
loading CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Compact disc selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Compass view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Condensation - lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Controls overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Coolant check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Cornering lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 156
principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
twin cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

C
Cancel guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
general information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Changing a fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
checking or renewing a blown fuse. . . 241
Changing a road wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
locking wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
spare wheel location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
temporary use spare wheel . . . . . . . . . 225
tightening the wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . 229
wheel changing procedure . . . . . . . . . 228
wheel changing safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Changing the remote control battery . . . . . 24
Changing the vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . 215
battery disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . 92
service position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Channel automatic tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Channel options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
DAB search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
finding a channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
finding a subchannel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
finding an ensemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Charging the vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . 215
Checking the wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Child seat anchor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
installing an ISOFIX child seat. . . . . . . . 63
ISOFIX anchor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
tether anchorage points . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Child seat positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

382

Index
D

Destination entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
choosing your route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
coordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
motorway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
points of interest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
postcode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
setting a destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
start guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Diesel particulate filter (DPF). . . . . . . . . . 135
regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
regeneration procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . 136
warning indicators and messages. . . . 135
Digital audio broadcasting
general information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
brake pedal travel (China only) . . . . . . 261
wheel alignment data (China only) . . . 261
Dipstick - electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 202
Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Disability modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Disarming the alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
deactivating the alarm when triggered . 38
disarming when the unlock button fails to
work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
DAB radio text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
touch-screen information panel . . . . . 283
Docking the Jaguar Smart Key . . . . . . . . . 20
DPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Drive control
general information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Driving after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
before starting or driving . . . . . . . . . . 251
resetting the fuel cut-off . . . . . . . . . . . 251
when driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Dynamic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
driving tips for economy . . . . . . . . . . . 155
maintenance and fuel economy . . . . . . 155
E-Diff (differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Ejecting compact discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Electric parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Electric seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
driving position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Electric sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
anti-trap mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
sunroof blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
one-shot operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
overriding anti-trap protection . . . . . . . . 93
window isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
window reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Emergency brake assist (advanced) . . . . . 165
Emergency key blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 28
Engine
block heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . 196
brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
coolant reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
engine oil dipsticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
engine oil filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
power steering fluid reservoir . . . . . . . 197
washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Engine coolant check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . 204
topping up the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Engine oil check
engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . 199, 201
engine oil specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
V6 diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
V6 petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
V8 petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
EPB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Errors in vehicle position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
383

Index
Essential towing checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Event data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
adjusting and folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
mirror dip when reversing. . . . . . . . . . . 96

General information on radio frequencies. . 16
Global opening and closing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
cancelling global opening/closing . . . . . 36
window global closing (not Japan). . . . . 36
window global opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Fascia - controls overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
releasing the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Ferry
disarming the tilt alarm sensor . . . . . . . 22
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
First aid kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Forward alert function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Fuel
octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
petrol fuel guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Fuel cut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
resetting the fuel cut-off . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Fuel filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Fuel guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Fuel quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
alternative fuels for petrol engines . . . 175
diesel engined vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
petrol engined vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
unleaded fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fuse box locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
engine compartment fuse box. . . . . . . 242
fuse and relay positions . . . . . . . . . . . 244
luggage compartment fuse box. . . . . . 243
passenger compartment fuse box. . . . 243
Fuse specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Hazard warning flashers . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 250
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
head restraint removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
manual head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
tilt adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
whiplash protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Headlamp adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Headlamp levelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
halogen headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
xenon headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Headlamp removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Headlamp washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Heated steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Hints on driving with ABS. . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
ABS braking techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
ABS warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
brake vacuum assist (V6 petrol models
only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Electronic Brakeforce Distribution (EBD) . .
145
Emergency Brake Assist (EBA). . . . . . . 146
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

I
Information displays
general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Information messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Inspecting safety system components . . . 252
Instrument lighting dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
rear interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Interior mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
auto dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
manual dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Isofix child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

G
Garage door transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
before programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
entry gate programming . . . . . . . . . . . 130
information and assistance . . . . . . . . . 130
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
reprogramming a single garage door opener
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
rolling code device equipment
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
to erase all programming . . . . . . . . . . 129

384

Index
J

Locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
locking and unlocking from inside the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
locking and unlocking from outside the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
mislock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
using the emergency key blade . . . . . . . 28
valet mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Luggage anchor points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Jaguar Smart Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
system transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

K
Keyboard layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Keyless entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
convenience mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Jaguar Smart Key check . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
keyless locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Keyless starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
if the engine fails to start . . . . . . . . . . 134
starting a diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
starting a petrol engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Keys
emergency key blade . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 28
Keys and remote controls
principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

M
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Maintenance
general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Map display icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Measurement units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Mirrors
heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
MP3 file playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
MP3 folder structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
using MP3 discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

L
Lamps
cornering lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
static bending lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Language selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Levelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Lighting
condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Lighting control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
daylight running lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
side lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Load carrying
general information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Loading compact discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
loading a CD (player empty) . . . . . . . . 293
loading one CD (six CD player, part-loaded)
293
loading several CDs (six CD player) . . 294
Loading the map DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

N
Navigation
digitised area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
map display icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
map screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
route preference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
saving preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
setting a destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
start guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
turn guidance off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
turn voice guidance on or off . . . . . . . . 349
Navigation overview
loading the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Navigation setup
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
language selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
quick POI selection . . . . . . . . . . . 350, 366
restore system defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
user settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

385

Index
O

Points of interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
cancelling the icon display . . . . . . . . . . 365
categories and sub-categories . . . . . . . 366
entry by category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
entry by town . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
entry messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
icon display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Jaguar Dealerships. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
list of icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
memory points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
other selection methods. . . . . . . . . . . . 366
selecting a quick POI category . . . . . . . 367
Pollution sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Portable audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Portable audio interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Power steering fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
checking the fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
topping up the fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
recalling a preset channel. . . . . . . . . . . 287
storing channels as presets . . . . . . . . . 287
Principle of operation
airbag deployment effects . . . . . . . . . . . 56
airbag operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
deployment and deflation . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
seat belt checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
seat belt safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
wet conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Priority programme type (PTY). . . . . . . . . 278
PTY overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
PTY search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
selecting PTY categories . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Programming the remote control . . . . . . . . 21
selecting alarm sensor override . . . . . . . 22
selecting automatic relock and arm . . . . 24
selecting drive-away locking . . . . . . . . . 23
selecting passive arming . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
selecting single (2 stage unlock) or multipoint entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
selecting window global opening or closing
23

Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Oil check
V6 diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
V6 petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
V8 petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Oil level check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 202
On/off control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Opening and closing the bonnet . . . . . . . 195
closing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

P
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Pedestrian protection
principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Pedestrian protection system
after deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Personalised settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
automatic climate control . . . . . . . . . . 112
general Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
home menu display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
languages and distance units . . . . . . . 113
navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
phone/comms/voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
pop-up messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
timeout to home menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
touch-screen systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
vehicle system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Petrol fuel guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

386

Index
R

Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . .
final drive unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio data system (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
alternative frequency (AF). . . . . . . . . . 277
extended other networks (EON) . . . . . 277
FM text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
options menu overview. . . . . . . . . . . . 277
regionalisation (REG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
RDS-TMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
all traffic events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
dynamic navigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
on route events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
surveillance setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
traffic on route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
using TMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
voice guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Rear fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Rear lamp removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
folding the rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
raising the rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Rear under floor storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Rear view camera
principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Recommended towing weights . . . . . . . . 185
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
fuel filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Remote control battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Remote control programming. . . . . . . . . . 21
Removing a headlamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Removing a rear lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Repairing minor paint damage . . . . . . . . 191
Repeat compact disc tracks . . . . . . . . . . 296
Run flat tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

154
154
154
154
154

S
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Satellite signal reception. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Satellite signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Seat belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Seat belt reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Seat belts
principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Seats
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Service data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting avoid points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
DAB country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
DAB format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
DAB text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
FM traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
link DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Shuffle/random. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Sitting in the correct position . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Smog sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Snow chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
adaptive dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) . . . . . 170
JaguarDrive Control scenarios . . . . . . . 173
stability control indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 172
switching between DSC and Trac DSC. 171
switching between DSC OFF and ON . . 171
tracDSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Starting the engine
general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Static bending lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

387

Index
Station preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
storing stations as presets . . . . . . . . . 275
tuning stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Stored locations
home. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
setting avoid points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
store a memory point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Sun blinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Supplementary restraints system
principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
diesel engines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Towing a trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
trailer electrical connection . . . . . . . . . 184
Towing points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
front and rear towing eyes and lashing
points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Towing the vehicle on four wheels . . . . . . 256
towing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Track selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Traffic information control . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
skipping traffic announcements . . . . . . 276
Transmission number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Transporting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Emergency Park Release (EPR) . . . . . . 254
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
average fuel consumption (A, B and Auto) .
108
average speed (A, B and Auto) . . . . . . . 107
changing the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
display language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
ML-km (also Miles-litre). . . . . . . . . . . . 108
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
service interval indicator (Diesel vehicles) .
108
trip distance (A, B and Auto) . . . . . . . . 107
Turn-by-turn navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Type approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
declarations of conformity . . . . . . . . . . 262

T
Technical specifications
accessory wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . 240
capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
lubricants and fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
general information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Television
general information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Television controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
TV controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Television setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
TV screen format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
TV settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Tilt alarm sensor override . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Tilt sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
tool kit contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
system facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
touch-screen care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
touch-screen display icons . . . . . . . . . 110
touch-screen use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
tow bar dimensions and mounting points. .
186

388

Index
Tyre care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
age degradation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
directional tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
flat spots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
pressure compensation for ambient
temperature changes . . . . . . . . . . . 219
punctured tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
replacement tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
tyre checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
tyre pressures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
tyre pressures during long term vehicle
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
tyre wear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Tyre glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . 234
replacement sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
temporary use spare wheel. . . . . . . . . 236
TPM System information messages . . 237
TPM system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
tyre changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
checking the tyre pressure after a repair. . .
233
Jaguar tyre repair kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Jaguar tyre repair kit safety information . . .
230
using the Jaguar tyre repair kit . . . . . . 232

Using cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
automatic switch off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
changing the speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
message centre information displays. . 158
resuming the speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
setting vehicle speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Using seat belts during pregnancy . . . . . . . 51
Using snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Using the ASL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
ASL unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
exceeding the set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . 168
resuming ASL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
setting a speed limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
suspending ASL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Using the parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
cleaning the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
front and rear parking aid. . . . . . . . . . . 150
rear fitted accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
system fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
approach lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
care of the Jaguar Smart Key. . . . . . . . . 18
docking the Jaguar Smart Key . . . . . . . . 20
emergency key blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
irregular operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Jaguar Smart Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Jaguar Smart Key system transmitters . 32
locking and arming the vehicle. . . . . . . . 19
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
panic button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
undocking the Jaguar Smart Key . . . . . . 21
unlocking and disarming the vehicle . . . 18

U
Undocking the Jaguar Smart Key . . . . . . . 21
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Using ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ACC malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
automatic low speed switch off . . . . . 162
automatic switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
changing the follow mode set gap . . . 161
changing the speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
detection beam issues . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
entering the follow mode set gap . . . . 160
hints on driving with ACC . . . . . . . . . . 162
overriding the speed and follow mode 161
resuming the speed and follow mode . 162
setting the speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Using booster cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
disconnecting the cables . . . . . . . . . . 214

389

Index
Using the telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
answer options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
changing a phone number . . . . . . . . .
changing the docked phone . . . . . . . .
continuity of calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
deleting a paired phone. . . . . . . . . . . .
deleting names from the Directory . . .
directory contact types . . . . . . . . . . . .
ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
erase entire phonebook. . . . . . . . . . . .
hands-free controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
keyboard magnification. . . . . . . . . . . .
last 10 option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
making a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
making-ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
message centre messages . . . . . . . . .
names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
operating the system . . . . . . . . . . . . .
other features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pairing other phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
phone options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
phonebook capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
retrieving voice mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
telephone pairing and docking . . . . . .
telephone voice control. . . . . . . . . . . .
voice mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
analogue/digital option . . . . . . . . . . . .
finding TV channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
full screen view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
on/off control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
using preset channels . . . . . . . . . . . . .
volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Approved Winter tyre sizes . . . . . . . . .
Winter tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . .

309
314
317
312
317
312
319
319
317
316
321
322
320
317
322
327
318
323
322
311
314
315
316
317
313
313
309
323
313
330
331
331
331
330
332
330
223
223
223

VIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Voice control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 373
activating the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
command help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
language and accent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
nametags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
notepad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
voice system tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
voice volume adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
volume settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

W
Warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Warning lamps and indicators . . . . . . . . . 100
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
adaptive front lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . . . . 102
automatic speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
beltminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
direction indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
dynamic stability control (DSC) . . . . . . 102
engine malfunction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
forward alert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
hazard warning indicators . . . . . . . . . . 103
high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
indicator check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
rear fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
side lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . 102
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Washer fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
topping up the fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Waveband button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Wheels and tyres
general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Whiplash protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

V
Valet mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Vehicle build date plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Vehicle identification number (VIN). . . . . 257
Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
390

Index
Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
blocked jets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
drip wipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
low screen wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
timed jet function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
rain sensor variable delay . . . . . . . . . . . 88
single wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
speed-dependent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
wiper operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Winter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Winter tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

391

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 391

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

XF Owners Handbook 10MY Tcm144 47656

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation